JP2018042836A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To perform a presentation of an extension of AT games in a mode full of amusement with a simpler configuration.SOLUTION: A game machine of the present invention comprises: first residual game counting means for counting a first residual game period in a notification game state that is actually left in the notification game state; second residual game counting means for counting a second residual game period that is notified by notification means in the notification game state and that is in the notification game state becoming shorter than the first residual game period; presentation mode determination means for determining a prescribed presentation mode from among a plurality of kinds of presentation modes capable of being set in the notification game state according to a difference of a game period between the first residual game period and the second residual game period; and additional game period determination means capable of determining an additional game period in the notification game state to be notified by the notification means according to the difference of a game period and the kind of presentation mode determined by the presentation mode determination means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 128

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a game called pachi-slot, comprising a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols provided on the surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided for each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “start operation”) after a game medium such as a medal or coin has been inserted into the gaming machine, and the rotation of all reels is detected. Outputs a signal requesting start. The stop switch detects that a stop button provided for each reel has been pressed by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “stop operation”), and outputs a signal requesting the rotation of the corresponding reel to stop. To do. The stepping motor transmits the driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and stop operation of each reel.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, lottery processing using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as “internal lottery processing”) is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”). And the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and a symbol combination (display combination) related to the winning of the winning is displayed, a privilege corresponding to the symbol combination is given to the player. As an example of a privilege given to a player, a replay game (hereinafter also referred to as “replay”) in which an internal lottery process is performed again without paying out game media (medals, etc.) or consuming the game media. An operation of a bonus game in which a game medium payout opportunity increases can be cited. In the following, a role related to paying out game media (medals, etc.) (internal winning combination, display combination) is referred to as a “small role”, a role related to replay is referred to as a “replay role”, and the bonus game is activated. The combination is called “bonus combination”.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine having the above-described configuration, a gaming machine having a function of navigating the establishment of a specific small role with a lamp or the like, that is, a function of assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”), or a specific design 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine having a function of operating a gaming state in which a winning probability of replay is higher than normal when a combination is displayed, that is, a function of replay time (hereinafter referred to as “RT”) has been developed. Further, a gaming machine having an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as “ART”) function in which the AT function and the RT function are simultaneously operated has been developed.

  By the way, conventionally, a gaming machine that determines the extension of an AT game during an AT game is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In such a gaming machine, the period of the AT game becomes indefinite, so that a sense of expectation for the AT game can be improved.

JP 2010-167199 A

  However, if an attempt is made to determine the extension of an AT game in an interesting manner, there arises a problem that the setting of the conditions for extension and the probability of determining the extension becomes complicated.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of producing an AT game extension in an interesting manner with a simpler configuration. It is to be.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a first gaming machine having the following configuration.

An informing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) for informing information relating to the game;
A first remaining time for counting a first remaining game period of the notification game state that actually remains in a notification game state (for example, an ART state described later) in which information that is advantageous to the player can be notified by the notification means. Game counting means (for example, an internal ART counter described later),
In the notification game state, second remaining game counting means (for example, a display described later) that counts the second remaining game period in the notification game state that is notified by the notification means and that is equal to or less than the first remaining game period. ART counter)
Among a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, ART stages A to C described later) that can be set in the notification game state according to a difference game period between the first remaining game period and the second remaining game period. Production mode determining means for determining a predetermined production mode (for example, a stage shift lottery process during ART described later);
An extra game period determining means capable of determining an extra game period of the informed game state, which is informed by the informing means, according to the difference game period and the type of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means. (For example, a lottery process for the number of notification games in ART described later).

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a second gaming machine having the following configuration.

An informing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) for informing information relating to the game;
Short update means for shortening and updating a game period in a notification game state (for example, an ART state described later) in which information that is advantageous to the player can be notified by the notification means based on a first condition (for example, every game digestion). When,
Based on a second condition (for example, extra bonus), an extension update means for extending and updating the game period of the notification gaming state;
Regardless of the state of the game including the state (for example, high probability, low probability, etc.) indicating the ease of determining the extension update by the extension update means in the notification game state, In the notification gaming state, according to a difference gaming period between the first remaining gaming period and the second remaining gaming period of the notification gaming state that is notified by the notification means and is equal to or less than the first remaining gaming period. An effect mode determining means (for example, an ART stage stage lottery process described later) capable of determining a predetermined effect mode from a plurality of set effect modes (for example, ART stages A to C described later);
Extended game period determining means capable of determining the extended game period of the notification gaming state, which is notified by the notification means, according to the difference game period and the type of effect mode determined by the effect mode determination means. (For example, a lottery process for the number of notification games in ART described later).

  Further, in the second gaming machine of the present invention, the total period of the extended game period in the notification game state notified by the notification means after the predetermined effect mode (for example, ART stage C described later) is determined. The predetermined effect mode may be maintained until the value reaches or exceeds a predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention configured as described above, it is possible to produce an extension of a game in an advantageous gaming state (AT game) in an interesting manner with a simpler configuration.

It is a figure for demonstrating the function flow of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the external appearance structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the whole circuit structure with which the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention is provided. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the main control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ratio display in one Embodiment of this invention, the example of attachment, and the display content of information. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the main game state (RT state) in the pachislot of one Embodiment of this invention. In the pachislot machine of one Embodiment of this invention, it is a figure which shows the transition flow of the appearance state (game property) managed on the main side. In one embodiment of the present invention, it is a diagram for explaining the type of attack card that can be acquired in a game in a normal state. In one Embodiment of this invention, it is a figure for demonstrating the classification of the defense type | system | group card | curd which can be acquired by the game of a normal state. In one Embodiment of this invention, it is a figure for demonstrating the classification of the reward type | system | group card | curd which can be acquired by the game of a normal state. It is a figure which shows the initial value of the life value of a hero character and enemy character in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement | positioning table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table at the time of the bonus action | operation in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of RT transition table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table determination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (the 1) for RT0 states in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (the 2) for RT0 states in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (the 1) for RT1 states in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (the 2) for RT1 states in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (the 1) for RT2 states in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT2 states (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT3 states (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT3 states (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for BB internal intermediate states (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for BB internal intermediate states (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for BB in the embodiment of the present invention (the 1). It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (the 2) for BB in the state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for MB (RT0) states (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for MB (RT0) states (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (the 1) for MB (RT1) states in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (the 2) for MB (RT1) states in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (the 1) for MB (RT2) states in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (the 2) for MB (RT2) states in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (the 1) for MB (RT3) states in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (the 2) for MB (RT3) states in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination determination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination determination table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination determination table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination determination table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination determination table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination determination table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the corresponding | compatible table | surface (Part 1: In general, BB) of the internal winning combination, batting order (push order), and symbol combination in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the corresponding | compatible table | surface (Part 2: In general, BB) of the internal winning combination, batting order (push order), and symbol combination in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table | surface (Part 3: BB inside) of the internal winning combination, batting order (push order), and symbol combination in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table | surface (No. 4: BB inside) of the internal winning combination, batting order (push order), and symbol combination in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table | surface (the part 5: CB) of the internal winning combination, batting order (push order), and symbol combination in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the conversion table of the instruction | indication monitor number and navigation type in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the corresponding | compatible table (the 1) with the internal winning combination and instruction | indication monitor number (navigation type) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the corresponding table (the 2) with the internal winning combination and instruction | indication monitor number (navigation type) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table | surface (at the time of 1: MB non-operation) of the internal winning combination and main lottery flag in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the corresponding | compatible table | surface (at the time of MB non-operation) of the internal winning combination and main lottery flag in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table | surface (at the time of MB operation | movement) of the internal winning combination and main lottery flag in one Embodiment of this invention. In one Embodiment of this invention, it is a figure which shows an example of the common lottery table referred on the main side. In one Embodiment of this invention, it is a figure which shows an example of the common lottery table referred on the main side. In one Embodiment of this invention, it is a figure which shows an example of the common lottery table referred on the main side. It is a figure which shows an example of the card promotion lottery table (the 1 and 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the card promotion lottery table (the 3 and 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the card promotion lottery table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the card promotion attribute lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the card promotion frequency lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the card promotion frequency lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery state transfer lottery table (the 1 and 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery state transfer lottery table (the 3 and 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the initial period game number lottery table at the time of a setting change in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the card rank lottery table at the time of a setting change in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the CZ regulation game number shortening lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the CZ regulation game number shortening lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the CZ regulation game number shortening lottery table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the CZ regulation game number shortening lottery table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the CZ regulation game number shortening lottery table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st battle attack defense lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st battle attack and defense lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd battle attack and defense lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the 3rd battle offense and defense lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the point lottery table in MB during CZ in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number of ART games in the special BB addition lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number of ART games in special BB in one embodiment of this invention, and a lottery table (the 2). It is a figure which shows an example of the number of specialized ART games addition lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number of specialized ART games addition lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART game number lottery table at the time of NBB winning in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stage lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the enemy character lottery table (the 1-3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the enemy character lottery table (the 4-6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the enemy character promotion lottery table at the time of NBB win in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special game number addition lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special game number addition lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special game number addition lottery table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special game number addition lottery table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special game number addition lottery table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special game number addition lottery table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the display combination storage area (Internal winning combination storage area, carryover combination storage area) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the game state flag storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the appearance state flag storage area | region in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the operation | movement stop button storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the pressing order storage area | region in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the symbol code storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the instruction flag storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows a response | compatibility with the main management flag (out-of-game state) and the sub management flag (sub game state) in the pachi slot of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows a response | compatibility with the main lottery flag and sub lottery flag in the pachi slot of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the normal production lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structural example (the 1) of the normal production data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structural example (the 2) of the normal production data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the content of the various effect parameter items prescribed | regulated by the effect data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a response | compatibility with effect parameter item "GrID" prescribed | regulated with the effect data table in one Embodiment of this invention, and "GrNo." It is a figure which shows an example of the normal during NBB production lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the normal during NBB production lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the art lottery table during ART (during ART normal) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect lottery table (the 1) during BB in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the art lottery table (the 2) during ART during BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the production lottery table (the 1) during specialization in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the production lottery table (the 2) during specialization in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the extra game number notification effect lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition game number notification effect lottery table (the 2) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition game number notification effect lottery table (the 3) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition game number notification effect lottery table (the 4) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition game number notification effect lottery table (the 5) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special card acquisition notification effect lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special card acquisition notification effect lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stage background transfer lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stage transfer lottery table (the 1-3) during ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stage transfer lottery table (the 4-6) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stage transfer lottery table (the 7-9) during ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the cut-in lottery table (the 1 and 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the cut-in lottery table (the 3 and 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the LED parameter lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the character-son flag lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the normal stage display effect lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect lottery table at the time of card promotion in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special card acquisition lottery table (the 1-4) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special card acquisition lottery table (the 5-8) during ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specialized classification lottery table (the 1-3) in ART when the special counter is "0"-"1" in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specialized classification lottery table (the 4-6) in ART when the special counter is "0"-"1" in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specialized classification lottery table (the 7-9) in ART when a special counter is "0"-"1" in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specialized classification lottery table (the 1-3) in ART when the special counter is "2" in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specialized classification lottery table in ART (the 4-6) when the special counter is "2" in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specialized classification lottery table in ART (the 7-9) when a special counter is "2" in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specialized classification lottery table (the 1-3) in ART when the special game number counter is "6"-"9" in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specialized classification lottery table in ART when the special game number counter is "6"-"9" in one Embodiment of this invention (the 4-6). It is a figure which shows an example of the specialized classification lottery table in ART (the 7-9) when the special game number counter is "6"-"9" in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specialized classification lottery table (the 1-3) in ART when the special game number counter is "10" or more in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specialized classification lottery table (the 4-6) in ART when the special game number counter is "10" or more in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specialized classification lottery table (the 7-9) in ART when the special game number counter is "10" or more in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specialized classification lottery table in ART in the ART stage C (1-3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specialized classification lottery table in ART in the ART stage C (the 4-6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specialized classification lottery table (the 7-9) in ART in ART stage C in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specialized classification lottery table (the 1-3) in ART at the time of the characterson flag in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specialized classification lottery table in ART at the time of a character-son flag ON in the embodiment of the present invention (the 4-6). It is a figure which shows an example of the specialized classification lottery table (the 7-9) during ART at the time of the character-son flag in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special counter lottery table (the 1-4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specialization counter lottery table (the 5-9) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the NBB completion | finish screen lottery table during ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the notification game number lottery table (the 1-3) during ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the notification game number lottery table (the 4-6) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the notification game number lottery table (the 7-9) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the notification game number lottery table (the 10-12) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the notification game number lottery table (the 13-15) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the notification game number lottery table (the 16-18) during ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the notification game number lottery table (the 19-21) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the notification game number lottery table (the 22-24) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the notification game number lottery table (the 25-27) during ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the notification game number lottery table (the 1-4) immediately before ART end in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the notification game number lottery table (the 5-8) just before ART end in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the notification game number lottery table (the 9-12) just before the end in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the notification game number lottery table (the 13th-16th) just before ART end in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the notification game number lottery table (the 17-17) just before the end in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the NBB winning time notification game number lottery table (the 1-3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the NBB winning announcement game number lottery table (the 4-6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the NBB winning time announcement game number lottery table (the 7-9) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the NBB winning time notification game number lottery table (the 10-12) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the NBB winning announcement game number lottery table (the 13-15) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the NBB winning time notification game number lottery table (the 16-18) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the NBB winning announcement game number lottery table (the 19-21) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the NBB winning time notification game number lottery table (the 22-24) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the NBB winning time announcement game number lottery table (the 25-27) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game number lottery table (the 1 and 2) at the time of NBB completion | finish in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game number lottery table (the 3 and 4) at the end of NBB during ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game number lottery table (the 5 and 6) at the time of NBB completion | finish in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the NBB end time notification game number lottery table (the 7 and 8) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the notification game number lottery table (the 1-3) in special zone AC in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the notification game number lottery table (the 4-6) in the special zone AC in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the notification game number lottery table (the 7-9) in the special zone AC in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the notification game number lottery table (the 10-12) in the special zone AC in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the notification game number lottery table (the 13-15) in the special zone AC in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the notification game number lottery table (the 16-18) in the special zone AC in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the 3 game notice game number lottery table in the special zone G in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game number precursor scenario lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the game number precursor scenario map in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART end precursor scenario lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the ART completion | finish precursor scenario map in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specialized precursor scenario lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specialized precursor scenario lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the specialized precursor scenario map in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the navigation lottery table (the 1-5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the navigation lottery table (the 6-9) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a main flowchart which shows the example of the power-on process performed by the main control circuit of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the initialization process at the time of power activation in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the electric power interruption reset process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of a setting change in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal acceptance / start check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the internal lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery process at the time of lever on in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process during normal in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery process at the time of normal NBB winning in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery process during normal NBB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery process in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the general medium lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of CZ introduction in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery process at the time of CZ introduction in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process in CZ in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery process in CZ in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the battle offense and defense lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery process in MB during CZ in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process in ART preparation in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery process at the time of NBB winning in ART preparation in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery process in ART preparation in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process in addition specialization in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery process at the time of NBB winning in specialization in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery process at the time of SBB winning in specialization in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the extra special lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the NBB winning lottery process during ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery process at the time of SBB winning in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery process in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the ART fall waiting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery process at the time of NBB winning NART waiting in ART fall in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery process during ART fall waiting in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the instruction | indication monitor set process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop initial setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the drawing priority order | rank storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the drawing priority order table selection process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the symbol code storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop control process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the priority drawing-in control process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery process after the 3rd stop in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery process after the 3rd stop in CZ in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery process after the 3rd stop during ART fall waiting in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of RT state control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the appearance state control process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the appearance state control process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the appearance state control process at the time of the CZ completion | finish in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus completion | finish check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus operation | movement check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BB start time lock process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the interruption process by control of main CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the main board | substrate communication task performed by sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the production registration task performed by sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the production content determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the production content determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of initialization command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of medal insertion command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the start command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of a normal game start in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of a normal game start in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the game start time process at the time of a setting change in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the game start in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the game start in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the game start time process during special production in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the production set process in the special zone G in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the game start in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the game start time process at the time of BB winning in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the game start time process at the time of BB winning in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the ART normal game start in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the ART normal game start in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the ART normal game start in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the special effect production type win process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the display command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of completion | finish of a normal game in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the game end in CZ in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the game end in ART preparation in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the game end in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of completion | finish of the game during special production in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the game end in BB in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the game end in BB in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the game end time process at the time of BB winning in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the end of BB internal game in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the end of the ART normal game in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the payout completion command reception in one Embodiment of this invention.

  Hereinafter, a pachislot machine will be exemplified as a gaming machine showing an embodiment of the present invention, and the configuration and operation thereof will be described with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, a pachislot machine having an ART function will be described.

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot machine of this embodiment, medals are used as game media for playing games. In addition to medals, for example, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, or the like can be applied as game media.

  When a player inserts a medal into the pachislot and operates the start lever, one value (hereinafter referred to as a random value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

  The internal lottery means performs lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. This internal lottery means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a main control circuit described later. By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols that permits display along an after-mentioned effective line (winning determination line) is determined. Note that the types of symbol combinations include those related to “winning” in which benefits such as paying out medals, replay operation, bonus operation, etc. are given to the player, and other types related to so-called “out”. Provided.

  Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. Thereafter, when the player presses the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel, the reel stop control means performs control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Do. This reel stop control means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a main control circuit described later.

  In the pachislot, basically, a control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel is performed within a specified time (190 msec or 77 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is referred to as “the number of sliding pieces”. In this embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set to 4 symbols, and when the specified period is 75 msec, the maximum sliding piece Set the number to one symbol.

  The reel stop control means, when the internal winning combination permitting the symbol combination display related to the winning is determined, normally, the symbol combination is placed on the active line within a specified time of 190 msec (four symbols). The rotation of the reel is stopped so as to display as much as possible. In addition, the reel stop control means, for example, during the operation of “MB” (middle bonus) described later, for one or more reels, a combination of symbols is awarded within a specified time of 75 msec (one symbol). The rotation of the reel is stopped so as to display as much as possible along the judgment line. Furthermore, the reel stop control means uses various specified times corresponding to the gaming state to stop the rotation of the reels so that combinations of symbols that are not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination are not displayed along the active line. Let

  As described above, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the active line is related to winning. This winning determination means is also one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in the main control circuit described later. Then, when it is determined by the winning determination means that the displayed symbol combination is related to winning a prize, a reward such as a medal payout is given to the player. In the pachislot, a series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game).

  Also, in the pachislot, in the above-described series of gaming operations, various images are displayed using video display by a display device, light output by various lamps, sound output by a speaker, or a combination thereof. Production is performed.

  Specifically, when the start lever is operated, a random number value for presentation is extracted separately from the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the effect random number is extracted, the effect content determination means determines the effect to be executed this time from lots of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination by lottery. This effect content determination means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a sub-control circuit described later.

  Next, when the content of the effect is determined by the effect content determination means, the effect execution means responds in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the rotation of the reel starts, when the rotation of each reel stops, or when the presence or absence of a prize is determined. Execute. In this way, in the pachislot, for example, by executing the production contents associated with the internal winning combination, there is an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) It is provided to the player and the player's interest can be improved.

<Pachislot structure>
Next, the structure of the pachislot machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi-slot 1.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the pachislot 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 includes a cabinet 2a that houses a main reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b that is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be opened and closed.

  Inside the cabinet 2a, three main reels 3L, 3C, 3R are arranged in a horizontal row. Hereinafter, the three main reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are also referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each of the main reels 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material attached to the peripheral surface of the reel body. A plurality of (for example, 20) symbols are drawn on the surface of the sheet material at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction. The three main reels 3L, 3C, 3R are a specific example of the variable display means according to the present invention.

  An upper panel unit 10 and a liquid crystal display device 11 are provided above the center of the front door 2b. The upper panel unit 10 is provided in the upper end region of the front door 2b, and the liquid crystal display device 11 is disposed below the upper panel unit 10. The upper panel unit 10 has a light source, and performs an effect by light emitted from the light source. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 11 performs an effect by displaying an image. The liquid crystal display device 11 is a specific example of a notification unit, an image display unit, and an effect execution unit according to the present invention.

  A pedestal 12 is provided in the center of the front door 2b. The pedestal portion 12 is provided with a frame member 13 and various devices to be operated by the player.

  The frame member 13 includes a symbol display area 4, an information display window 14, and a stop button attachment portion 15. As shown in FIG. 2, the symbol display area 4 and the information display window 14 are provided in the opening portion of the frame member 13, and the stop button attachment portion 15 is provided in the lower portion of the opening portion of the frame member 13.

  The symbol display area 4 is an area that overlaps the three main reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front (player side), and is arranged on the front side (player side) from the three main reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The The symbol display area 4 functions as a display window, and has a configuration in which three main reels 3L, 3C, 3R arranged behind (cabinet 2a side) can be seen through. Therefore, in the following, the symbol display area 4 is referred to as a reel display window 4.

  The reel display window 4 is continuously arranged among a plurality of symbols provided on the peripheral surface of each main reel when the rotation of the three main reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the reel display window 4 is stopped. Three symbols are displayed in the frame. That is, when the rotation of the three main reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped, one symbol (total) is provided for each main reel in the upper, middle, and lower regions within the frame of the reel display window 4. (3 symbols) are displayed (in the frame of the reel display window 4, symbols are displayed in the form of 3 rows × 3 columns). In the present embodiment, a pseudo line (cross-up line) connecting the lower area of the left reel 3L, the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the upper area of the right reel 3R within the frame of the reel display window 4 is formed. , Is defined as an effective line for determining whether or not a prize is won.

  The information display window 14 is provided continuously below the reel display window 4 and is arranged so that the surface direction of the information display surface faces upward. The information display window 14 and the reel display window 4 are covered with a transparent window cover 16. The window cover 16 is disposed on the inner surface side of the frame member 13, and has a configuration that cannot be removed from the front surface side of the front door 2b.

  Further, the frame member 13 has a sheet placement portion 17 that faces the information display surface of the information display window 14 with the window cover 16 interposed therebetween. And between the sheet | seat mounting part 17 and the window cover 16, the sheet | seat member (information sheet) in which the information regarding a game was described is arrange | positioned. Therefore, the information sheet is covered with the window cover 16 having a smooth surface without irregularities or gaps, and the window cover 16 serves as an attachment portion of the information sheet.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the window cover 16 cannot be removed from the front side of the front door 2b, and has a smooth surface free from irregularities and gaps. It is possible to prevent an illegal act of accessing the inside of the pachislot 1 via the. The exchange of information sheets will be described later with reference to FIG. 4 described later.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the example in which the information display window 14 is formed continuously with the reel display window 4 in the opening of the frame member 13 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The information display window 14 may not be formed continuously with the reel display window 4. That is, the opening of the reel display window 4 and the opening of the information display window 14 may be arranged side by side in the vertical direction.

  The stop button mounting portion 15 is configured by a flat plate member having a substantially trapezoidal surface shape. And the stop button attaching part 15 is provided below the information display window 14, and is provided so that a substantially trapezoidal surface may face the front (player side). The substantially trapezoidal surface of the stop button mounting portion 15 is provided with three through holes through which the three stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R pass side by side.

  Three stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are provided corresponding to each of the three main reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding main reel. These stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are one of various devices that are operated by the player. Hereinafter, the three stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are also referred to as a left stop button 19L, a middle stop button 19C, and a right stop button 19R, respectively.

  In addition to the stop button, the pedestal unit 12 is provided with a medal slot 20, a MAX bet button 21, a 1-bet button 22, and a start lever 23 as various devices to be operated by the player.

  The medal slot 20 is provided for receiving a medal dropped from the outside on the pachislot 1 by the player. The medals accepted from the medal slot 20 are used in one game with a preset number (for example, three) as the upper limit, and the amount exceeding the preset number is deposited in the pachislot 1. Can do. That is, the pachi-slot 1 has a so-called credit function.

  The MAX bet button 21 and the 1 bet button 22 are provided in order to determine the number used for one game from medals deposited inside the pachislot 1. The start lever 23 is provided to start rotation of all main reels (3L, 3C, 3R).

  Further, as viewed from the front, an information display 24 composed of a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode) is provided on the left side of the reel display window 4 of the front door 2b. Although the details of the configuration of the information display 24 are not shown, the information display 24 shows the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as the number of payouts), and medals deposited inside the pachislot 1. A 7-segment display for digitally displaying information such as the number of credits (hereinafter referred to as the number of credits) is provided.

  Further, the information display 24 displays information on the type of instruction flag stored in an instruction flag storage area, which will be described later, that is, information on the type of reel stop order to be notified at the time of AT operation, and notification of a bonus (BB, which will be described later). An instruction display unit (instruction monitor) is provided for displaying information regarding the information. The instruction display unit shows a specific example of the notification means according to the present invention.

  The instruction display unit can be constituted by a display device including, for example, a plurality of lamps and LEDs. In the present embodiment, the instruction display unit is configured by a 7-segment LED, and the 7-segment LED has an instruction monitor corresponding to the information (navigation type) as information regarding the pressing order or information regarding a bonus (BB described later). Display the number.

  In addition, the display mode of the information regarding the pressing order by the instruction display unit or the information regarding the notification of the bonus (BB described later) is not limited to this example, and may be configured in any mode as long as the navigation type can be identified. Can do. For example, the instruction display unit may be composed of a plurality of lamps, and the lighting / extinguishing patterns of the plurality of lamps may be associated with the navigation type to notify the information regarding the pressing order or the information regarding the bonus (BB described later). Good. For example, information indicating the stop order of the reels directly (for example, the stop order number) may be displayed by the instruction display unit.

  The display operation of the instruction display unit is controlled by the main control circuit 91. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, information indicating the order of pressing the stop buttons is also notified (navigated) on the liquid crystal display device 11 when the AT (ART) is operated. The information regarding the type of the reel stop order is one-to-one corresponding to the information indicating the stop button pressing order notified by the liquid crystal display device 11.

  In this embodiment, the installation surface of the instruction display unit (information display 24) in the pedestal unit 12 is formed on the same surface as the reel display window 4 for visually recognizing the reel. The surface may not be formed on the same surface as the reel display window 4. In this case, the player can play the game without being aware (viewing) the instruction display unit.

  Further, a selection button 25 (chance button) is provided on the right side of the reel display window 4 of the front door 2b. The selection button 25 is a button that is pressed by the player when a selection operation such as game play is required. The selection button 25 is connected to a sub-control board 72 described later, and the sub-control board 72 performs detection of pressing of the selection button 25 and control of a selection operation based thereon.

  Side panel units 26L and 26R are provided on both sides of the base 12 of the front door 2b. Each side panel unit has a light source and performs an effect by light emitted from the light source. A settlement button 27 is provided below the left side panel unit 26L. The checkout button 27 is provided to draw out (discharge) medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside.

  A waist panel unit 31 is provided below the pedestal 12 of the front door 2b. The waist panel unit 31 includes a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn, and a light source that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side.

  Below the waist panel unit 31, a medal payout port 32, speaker holes 33L and 33R, and a medal tray unit 34 are provided. The medal payout port 32 guides medals discharged by driving a hopper device 51 (medal payout device) described later to the outside. The medal tray unit 34 stores medals discharged from the medal payout opening 32. The speaker holes 33L and 33R are provided to output sound such as sound effects and music corresponding to the contents of the performance.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4 are diagrams showing the internal structure of the pachi-slot 1. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the front door 2b is opened and the middle door 41 provided on the back side of the front door 2b is closed with respect to the front door 2b. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a state in which the front door 2b is opened and the middle door 41 is opened with respect to the front door 2b.

  The cabinet 2a is a box-shaped member, and has a top plate, a bottom plate, left and right side plates, and a back plate. On the upper side inside the cabinet 2a, for example, a cabinet-side speaker 42 for outputting sound effects is provided.

  A cabinet-side relay board 44 is disposed on one side of the cabinet-side speaker 42 (left side in FIGS. 3 and 4). The cabinet side relay board 44 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 5 described later) attached to the middle door 41 (see FIGS. 3 and 4), a hopper device 51, and a medal auxiliary storage switch 75 (described later). 5) and a medal payout count switch (not shown).

  An amplifier board 45 that controls the output of sound from the cabinet-side speaker 42 is disposed in the center of the cabinet 2a. Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, when the interior of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front (player side), the other side of the amplifier board 45 (right side in FIGS. A concentrated terminal board 47 (see FIG. 5 described later) is disposed. The external concentration terminal board 47 is provided for outputting signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1.

  A hopper device 51 (medal paying device), a medal auxiliary storage 52, and a power supply device 53 are disposed in the lower part inside the cabinet 2a.

  The hopper device 51 is attached to a substantially central portion of the bottom plate of the cabinet 2a. The hopper device 51 can accommodate a large amount of medals and has a structure capable of discharging them one by one. The hopper device 51 pays out medals when the number of stored medals exceeds 50, for example, or when the settlement button 27 is pressed and the medals are settled. The medals paid out by the hopper device 51 are discharged from the medal payout port 32 (see FIG. 2).

  The medal auxiliary storage 52 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 51. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is arranged on the right side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front.

  The power supply device 53 includes a power switch 53a and a power supply board 53b (see FIG. 5 described later). The power supply device 53 is disposed on the left side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The power supply device 53 converts the power of the AC voltage 100V into the power of the DC voltage necessary for each part, and supplies the converted power to each part.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the middle door 41 is disposed at a substantially central portion on the back surface of the front door 2b, and is attached to the front door 2b so that the reel display window 4 (see FIG. 4) can be opened and closed from the back side. It has been.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the middle door 41 includes a main control board case 55 in which a main control board 71 described later (see FIG. 5 described later) is accommodated, and three main reels 3L, 3C, 3R. It is attached. Although not shown, a stepping motor (variation display means) is connected to each of the three main reels 3L, 3C, 3R via gears having a predetermined reduction ratio.

  In this embodiment, when the middle door 41 is opened with respect to the front door 2b, as shown in FIG. 4, the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placing portion 17 are exposed on the back surface of the front door 2b. As described above, between the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placement portion 17, an information sheet on which information related to the game is described is arranged. The information sheet is inserted into a gap formed between the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placement portion 17 in a state where the middle door 41 is opened and the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placement portion 17 are exposed. The When exchanging information sheets, the information sheet is exchanged after the middle door 41 is opened.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the main control board case 55 is provided with a setting key switch 56 (see FIG. 5 described later). The setting key type switch 56 is used when changing the setting of the pachislot 1 or confirming the setting of the pachislot 1. In the present embodiment, the main control board unit is configured by the main control board case 55 and the main control board 71 accommodated in the main control board case 55.

  The main control board 71 accommodated in the main control board case 55 has a main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 6 described later) described later. The main control circuit 91 is a circuit that controls the main flow of the game in the pachislot 1 such as determination of an internal winning combination, rotation and stop of the main reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and determination of the presence or absence of winning. A specific configuration of the main control circuit 91 will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

  On the upper part of the middle door 41 of the front door 2b, a sub-control board case 57 in which a sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 5 described later) to be described later is accommodated is disposed. The sub control board 72 housed in the sub control board case 57 has a sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 7 described later). The sub-control circuit 101 is a circuit that controls the execution of effects by displaying images. A specific configuration of the sub control circuit 101 will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a later-described sub-relay board 61 (see FIG. 5 described later) is disposed on the right side of the sub-control board case 57 when the front door 2 b is viewed from the back side. The sub relay board 61 is a board that relays connection wiring between the sub control board 72 and the main control board 71. The sub relay board 61 is a relay board that electrically connects the sub control board 72 and a board provided around the sub control board 72. In addition, as a board | substrate arrange | positioned around the sub control board 72, the below-mentioned LED board 62A, 62B etc. are mentioned.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the LED boards 62 </ b> A and 62 </ b> B are provided above the sub control board case 57 when viewed from the back side of the front door 2 b. The LED boards 62A and 62B cause a later-described LED (Light Emitting Diode) group 85 (see FIG. 5 to be described later) to emit light in accordance with an effect executed by the control of the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 7 to be described later). Display the blinking pattern. Note that the pachi-slot 1 of this embodiment includes a plurality of LED substrates in addition to the LED substrates 62A and 62B.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 described later is disposed below the sub-relay board 61 (see FIG. 5 described later). The 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 stores opening / closing history information of the middle door 41. The 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 outputs a signal for displaying an error by the liquid crystal display device 11 to the sub control board 72 (sub control circuit 101) when the middle door 41 is opened.

  Below the middle door 41, lower speakers 65L and 65R are disposed as shown in FIGS. The lower speakers 65L and 65R are arranged at positions facing the speaker holes 33L and 33R (see FIG. 2) on the back surface of the front door 2b, respectively.

  In addition, a selector 66 and a door opening / closing monitoring switch 67 described later (see FIG. 5 described later) are disposed above the lower speaker 65L of the front door 2b. The selector 66 is a device for selecting whether or not the medal material and shape are appropriate, and guides an appropriate medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 20 to the hopper device 51. Although not shown, a medal sensor that detects that an appropriate medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 66. The medal sensor is a specific example of the insertion operation detecting means according to the present invention.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the door open / close monitoring switch 67 is disposed on the left side of the selector 66 when the front door 2 b is viewed from the back side. The door opening / closing monitoring switch 67 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening / closing of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachi-slot 1.

  In addition, a door relay terminal plate 68 is provided in a region below the reel display window 4 and opened and closed by the middle door 41 as shown in FIG. The door relay terminal board 68 is a board that relays connection wiring between the main control board 71 in the main control board case 55 and various buttons and switches, the sub control board 72, the selector 66, and the game operation display board 81. Yes (see FIG. 5 below). Examples of the various buttons and switches include a MAX bet button 21, a 1 bet button 22, a settlement button 27, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a selection switch 76, a BET switch 77, a start switch 79, and the like which will be described later. it can.

<Control system for pachislot>
Next, a control system provided in the pachislo 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a circuit block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachi-slot 1.

  The pachi-slot 1 includes a main control board 71 provided on the middle door 41 and a sub-control board 72 provided on the front door 2b. The pachi-slot 1 includes a reel relay terminal board 74, a setting key switch 56, a ratio indicator 58, a cabinet-side relay board 44, and a power supply device 53 connected to the main control board 71. Further, the pachi-slot 1 includes an external concentrated terminal plate 47 connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet-side relay board 44, a hopper device 51, and a medal auxiliary storage switch 75. In addition, since the structure of the external concentration terminal board 47 and the hopper apparatus 51 was mentioned above, those description is abbreviate | omitted here. The configuration of the ratio display 58 will be described in detail later.

  The reel relay terminal plate 74 is disposed inside the reel body of each main reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal board 74 is electrically connected to stepping motors (not shown) of the main reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays signals output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motors.

  The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 is provided in the medal auxiliary storage 52 and detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals.

  The power supply device 53 includes a power supply board 53b connected to the main control board 71 and a power switch 53a connected to the power supply board 53b. The power switch 53a is pressed when supplying the necessary power to the pachi-slot 1.

  The pachislot machine 1 includes a door relay terminal plate 68, a selector 66, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a selection switch 76 (chance switch) connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 68, It has a BET switch 77, a settlement switch 78, a start switch 79, a stop switch board 80, a game operation display board 81, and a sub-relay board 61. Since the selector 66, the door opening / closing monitoring switch 67, and the sub relay board 61 have been described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

  The selection switch 76 detects that the selection button 25 has been pressed by the player. The BET switch 77 detects that the MAX bet button 21 or the 1 bet button 22 has been pressed by the player. The settlement switch 78 detects that the settlement button 27 has been pressed by the player. The start switch 79 detects that the start lever 23 has been operated by the player (start operation). The start switch 79 is a specific example of the start operation detecting means according to the present invention.

  The stop switch substrate 80 includes a circuit for stopping the rotating main reel, and a circuit for displaying the stopable main reel by an LED or the like. The stop switch board 80 is provided with a stop switch. The stop switch detects that each stop button 19L, 19C, 19R has been pressed by the player (stop operation). The stop switch substrate 80 is a specific example of the stop operation detecting means according to the present invention.

  The game operation display board 81 is connected to the information display 24, and is inserted when the insertion of medals is accepted, when the three main reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotatable, and when replaying is performed. This is a board for displaying the number of medals on a 7-segment display. The game operation display board 81 is a board for displaying the information on an instruction display unit (instruction monitor) provided in the information display 24 when, for example, informing information on the type of the reel stop order. It is. Further, an LED 82 is connected to the game operation display board 81, and the LED 82 lights, for example, a mark for displaying a game start or a mark for performing a re-game based on a signal input from the game operation display board 81. .

  The sub control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the sub relay board 61. The pachislot machine 1 also includes a sound I / O board 84, LED boards 62A and 62B, and a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 connected to the sub control board 72 via the sub relay board 61. Since the LED boards 62A and 62B and the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 have been described above, description thereof will be omitted here.

  The sound I / O board 84 outputs sound to a speaker group including lower speakers 65L and 65R and various speakers (not shown). The speaker group is a specific example of audio output means according to the present invention.

  The pachi-slot 1 also includes a ROM cartridge substrate 86 and a liquid crystal relay substrate 87 connected to the sub control substrate 72. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 and the liquid crystal relay substrate 87 are housed in the sub control board case 57 together with the sub control board 72.

  The ROM cartridge substrate 86 is a substrate for managing production image (video), sound, light (LED group 85) and communication data. The liquid crystal relay substrate 87 is a substrate that relays connection wiring between the sub control substrate 72 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the main control circuit 91 mounted on the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachi-slot 1.

  The main control circuit 91 is mainly composed of a microcomputer 92 mounted on the main control board 71. The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU (Central Processing Unit) 93, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 94, and a main RAM (Random Access Memory) 95.

  The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by execution of the control program.

  The main CPU 93 is connected to a clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98 and a sampling circuit 99. The clock pulse generation circuit 96 and the frequency divider 97 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 93 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 99 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

  The main CPU 93 counts the number of times pulses are output to the stepping motor of each reel after detecting the reel index. Thus, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angle of each main reel (mainly, how many symbols the main reel has rotated). The reel index is information indicating that the main reel has made one revolution. This reel index is, for example, an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part, and a detection piece provided at a predetermined position of each main reel and interposed between the light emitting part and the light receiving part by the rotation of each main reel. It is detected by a provided reel position detector (not shown).

  Here, the management of the rotation angle of each main reel will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses necessary for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is incremented by one. The symbol counter is provided for each main reel. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when a reel index is detected by a reel position detector (not shown).

  In other words, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is managed how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each main reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

<Sub control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the sub control circuit 101 mounted on the sub control board 72 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the sub control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot 1.

  The sub control circuit 101 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91 and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The sub-control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a rendering processor 104, a drawing RAM 105, and a driver 106.

  The sub CPU 102 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area.

  A control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area. For example, in the control program, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91 and a random number for production are extracted, and production registration for determining and registering production contents (production data). Various programs for executing tasks are included. In addition, the control program includes a drawing control task for controlling the display of video by the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the determined contents of the effect, a lamp control task for controlling the output of light by a light source such as the LED group 85, the lower speaker 65L, Various programs for executing a voice control task for controlling sound output by 65R are also included.

  The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to creation of video. Further, the data storage area includes a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to a light on / off pattern, and the like.

  The sub-RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined contents and effects data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91.

  The sub CPU 102, the rendering processor 104, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create a video according to the animation data designated by the content of the presentation, and display the created video on the liquid crystal display device 11.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 causes a speaker group such as the lower speakers 65L and 65R to output a sound such as BGM in accordance with the sound data specified by the production content. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls lighting and extinguishing of the LED group 85 in accordance with the lamp data designated by the contents of the effect.

<Ratio display>
Next, the configuration of the ratio display 58 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8A and 8B. As described above, the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment includes the ratio display 58 that displays various ratios. FIG. 8A shows an example of attachment of the ratio indicator 58, and FIG. 8B shows the contents of information displayed on the ratio indicator 58.

[Composition of percentage display]
As shown in FIG. 8A, the ratio indicator 58 is composed of a 4-digit 7-segment LED, the upper two digits indicate the type of display content (ratio), and the lower two digits indicate the ratio value of the display content. (%). The ratio display 58 is provided inside the pachislot machine 1 because it is used when an administrator (a shop clerk or the like) checks whether the pachislot machine 1 has been tampered with. At this time, the ratio indicator 58 is preferably provided inside the main control board case 55 covering the main control board 71 in order to prevent fraud with respect to the ratio indicator 58 itself.

  As a specific example of attachment, for example, as shown in FIG. 8 (A-1), the ratio indicator 58 may be mounted on the main control board 71, or as shown in FIG. 8 (A-2). As described above, it may be mounted on another substrate (ratio display substrate) connected to the main control substrate 71. Further, as shown in FIG. 8A-3, the ratio indicator 58 may be attached by connecting a 7-segment LED unit as the ratio indicator 58 to the main control board 71. In any case, as shown in FIG. 8A, it is preferable to provide the ratio indicator 58 inside the main control board case 55 together with the main control board 71.

  By the way, recording paper or a seal sticker is usually attached to the main control board case 55. However, when the ratio indicator 58 is provided in the main control board case 55, the ratio indicator 58 is visually recognized by a seal sticker or the like. It is preferable to stick a sealing sticker or the like so that the property is not impaired. The seal seal is for leaving a trace of opening the main control board case 55, and is a seal that has been specially processed to leave a trace when peeled off. Further, the recording paper is a paper for recording that when the main control board case 55 is attached / detached or opened by a normal procedure. On this recording paper, the identification number of the main control board 71 is printed, and an entry field is provided for entering the date and time of attachment / detachment or opening and the person in charge at that time. As used herein, “regular procedure” includes the manufacture of gaming machines (when fixed) and on-site inspection after installation at the amusement store.

[Contents of the percentage display]
Next, a display example of the ratio display 58 will be described. As shown in FIG. 8B, the ratio display 58 displays a cumulative specific section ratio, a continuous character ratio and a bonus character ratio between the latest 6000 games, and a cumulative continuous character ratio and a bonus character ratio. Is done. When displaying the cumulative specific section ratio on the ratio display 58, “AU” is displayed in the upper two digits of the four-digit 7-segment LED, and the continuous feature ratio between the latest 6000 games is displayed. In the upper 2 digits, “= r” is displayed, and when the proportion of the last 6000 games is displayed, “= b” is displayed in the upper 2 digits, and the cumulative consecutive proportion is displayed. In this case, “Ar” is displayed in the upper two digits, and “Ab” is displayed in the upper two digits when displaying the cumulative proportion of features. In the lower two digits of the four-digit 7-segment LED, the corresponding ratio is displayed as a percentage.

  Here, the “specific section ratio” refers to the ratio of the number of games in a gaming state advantageous to the player to the number of games in all gaming states (that is, the total number of games). In this case, the gaming state advantageous to the player is not only a notification state for notifying information advantageous to the player (so-called AT (ART gaming state of the present embodiment)), but also expected to shift to this notification state. CZ having a high degree may also be included. Further, a bonus state starting during the notification state may be included in an advantageous gaming state in this case.

The main control board 71 counts the total number of games indicating the number of games in all game states and the specific number of games indicating the number of games in a game state advantageous to the player in a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 95. The specific section ratio is calculated by the following formula.
Specific section ratio = specific number of games / total number of games x 100

  In addition, “Consecutive character ratio” means that the total number of medals paid out in all gaming states (that is, the total number of payouts) It means the ratio of the total number of medals paid out in the gaming state in which such an accessory continuous operation device is operating.

The main control board 71 uses a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 95 to display a total payout number indicating the total number of medals paid out in all gaming states, and a first-class special bonus or a first-class special bonus. The number of payouts in the first specific game indicating the total number of medals paid out during the operation of the accessory continuous action device related to the object is counted, and the continuous character ratio is calculated by the following formula.
Consecutive character ratio = number of payouts in the first specified game / total number of payouts × 100

  In addition, the “role ratio” is the total number of medals paid out during the operation of any of the bonuses relative to the total number of medals paid out in all gaming states (that is, the total number of payouts). This is the ratio of occupancy. In addition, “one of the special features” means the first type special special feature, the special feature continuous action device related to the first special special feature, the second type special special feature, the second type special special feature It refers to a continuous operating device or a normal service. In addition, since the ART state and the CZ state are advantageous for the player, these states may be included in the state in which “one of the actors” is operating.

The main control board 71 uses a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 95 to display a total payout number indicating the total number of medals paid out in all gaming states, and medals paid out during operation of any of the objects. The number of payouts in the second specific game indicating the total number is counted in advance, and the bonus rate is calculated by the following formula.
Continuous character ratio = number of payouts in the second specified game / total number of payouts × 100

  “Total” refers to the entire period from the installation of the pachislot 1 to the present, and “between the latest 6000 games” refers to the period from the game before 6000 games to the present. When calculating the ratio of “cumulative”, the main control board 71 may calculate the ratio using the counting results counted over the entire period, and when calculating the ratio of “last 6000 games” The main control board 71 may calculate the ratio using the counting result counted in the period from the game before 6000 games to the present.

  The predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 95 is provided in an area that is not cleared (initialized) even when the power is turned ON / OFF or the setting is changed. That is, the data related to the ratio indicator 58 stored in the main RAM 95 is configured not to disappear (not cleared) even when the power is turned ON / OFF or the setting is changed. In addition, a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 95 counts data related to the ratio indicator 58 with 400 games as one set. For example, when calculating the ratio between 6000 games, the ratio is calculated using 15 sets of cumulative counting results.

[Display contents of ratio display (switching display)]
In the ratio display 58, various ratios calculated by the main control board 71 are switched and displayed. The method for switching the content displayed on the ratio display 58 is arbitrary. For example, the display of various ratios may be switched automatically at predetermined intervals, or manually according to the operation of a dedicated switch. The ratio display may be switched, or the display of various ratios may be switched by combining automatic switching and manual switching.

[Modification of percentage display]
By the way, since the existing pachislot does not have the ratio display 58, in the example of attachment of the ratio display 58 shown to FIG. 8A, it is necessary to perform a big change with respect to the existing pachislot. Therefore, when the configuration of the ratio display 58 is incorporated into an existing pachislot, the display provided in the existing pachislot may be used as the ratio display 58 for displaying various ratios. For example, the existing pachislot is provided with a display (information display 24) that displays the number of stored medals (number of credits) and the number of medals paid out in this game (the number of payouts). Therefore, this indicator may be used as the ratio indicator 58.

  In this case, for example, when a special operation is performed on the pachi-slot, the type of display content (ratio) is displayed on the credit amount display unit (credit lamp: not shown), and the payout number display unit ( The display of the display unit may be switchable so that the value of the ratio of the display content is displayed on the payout number lamp (not shown). The special operation performed at this time is arbitrary, but an operation using a switch provided inside the pachislot is preferable. Thereby, it can prevent that a player will perform special operation accidentally.

<Various main game states managed by the main control circuit>
Next, with regard to the gaming state related to the winning probability of replay (replay) and the gaming state related to the presence / absence of the bonus operation (hereinafter collectively referred to as “main gaming state”) managed by the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93). explain.

[Type of main game state]
In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, as a gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “RT state”) related to the winning probability of replay (replay), a combination of the winning probability of replay (replay) and the type of replay role to be won is Four types of RT states called “RT0 state” to “RT3 state” which are different from each other are provided. In the present embodiment, the number of medals for each unit game in each main game state is three.

  In the present embodiment, as bonus game types, big bonuses (hereinafter referred to as “BB”), regular bonuses (hereinafter referred to as “RB”), and middle bonuses (hereinafter referred to as “MB”). And a challenge bonus (hereinafter referred to as “CB”). BB is an accessory continuous operation device related to RB called a first type special accessory, and operates RB continuously. On the other hand, MB is an accessory continuous operation apparatus related to CB called a second type special accessory, and operates CB continuously.

  In the present embodiment, three types of BB (combination names “C_BB1 (BB1A, 1B)” to “C_BB3” described later) are provided, and two types of MB (combination names “C_MB1” and “C_MB2” described later) are provided. Is provided). In the present embodiment, the operation of the BB that is started when the symbol combination related to the BB is displayed is terminated when the number of medals exceeding the prescribed number “305” is paid out regardless of the type of the BB. . On the other hand, the operation of the MB that is started with the display of the symbol combination relating to the MB ends when the number of medals exceeding the specified number “45” is paid out regardless of the type of the MB.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming state during the BB operation (hereinafter referred to as “BB state”) is also managed by the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93). In the present embodiment, the state where the BB type is BB1 or BB2 (hereinafter referred to as “BB1, BB2 state” or “NBB state”) and the state where the BB type is BB3 (hereinafter referred to as “BB3 state” or “ Are separately managed (refer to FIG. 100 described later). Note that the RT0 state to the RT3 state, which are main game states when the BB is not operating, are collectively referred to as “general medium state”.

  In the present embodiment, a state from winning the BB combination until winning a prize, that is, a state called a BB carryover state or a state between BB flags (hereinafter referred to as “BB internal state”) is also the main control circuit 91 ( It is managed by the main CPU 93). At this time, according to the present embodiment, the carried over BB type is BB1 or BB2 (hereinafter referred to as “BB1, BB2 internal state”) and the carried over BB type is BB3 (hereinafter referred to as “BB3”). Hereinafter, “BB3 internal state” is managed separately (see FIG. 100 described later).

  Further, in the present embodiment, in each of the RT0 state to the RT3 state, the state in which the MB is operated (hereinafter referred to as “RT0 time MB state” to “RT3 time MB state”) is also the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93). ) (See FIG. 100 described later).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in various internal lottery tables for RT0 state to RT3 state described later (see FIGS. 23 to 30 to be described later), the winning probability (high probability) of replay in the RT3 state is the RT0 state. , Higher than that of RT1 state and RT2 state (low probability). The winning probability of the replay in the RT1 state and the RT2 state is the same, but the types of replay combinations to be won are different from each other. The winning probability of replaying in the RT0 state is slightly lower than that in the RT1 state and the RT2 state. In addition, the types of replay combinations that are won in the RT0 state are different from those in the RT1 state and the RT2 state.

[Transition mode between main game states]
Here, with reference to FIG. 9, the transition mode of the above-mentioned various main game states managed by the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) will be described. In addition, FIG. 9 is a figure which shows the transition flow between various main game states.

  In the initial state and at the end of the BB, as shown in FIG. 9, the main gaming state shifts to the RT0 state (low RT state). In the RT0 state, when the “bell spill” is displayed, the RT state shifts from the RT0 state to the RT1 state. When “Bell spilled eyes” is displayed, the symbol combination of the small role related to “Bell” in the symbol combination table shown in FIG. 16 to FIG. 19 to be described later cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line. It's time.

  In the RT1 state, when the “RT2 transition lip” is won, the main game state shifts from the RT1 state to the RT2 state. The “RT2 transition lip” winning time is when the replay role related to the combination name “C_RT2 lip” in the symbol combination table shown in FIG. 16 described later wins.

  In the RT2 state, when the “RT3 transition lip” is won, the main game state shifts from the RT2 state to the RT3 state. The “RT3 transition lip” winning time is when the replay role related to the combination name “C_RT3 lip_1” or “C_RT3 lip_2” in the symbol combination table shown in FIG. Further, in the RT2 state, when “Bell spilling eyes” is displayed or “RT1 transition lip” is won, the main game state shifts from the RT2 state to the RT1 state. The “RT1 transition lip” winning time is when the replay role related to the combination name “C_RT1 lip” in the symbol combination table shown in FIG.

  In the RT3 state, when "Bell spilling" is displayed or "RT1 transition lip" is won, the main game state transitions from the RT3 state to the RT1 state. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the transition state in which the main gaming state shifts from the RT3 state to the RT2 state, and the transition that directly shifts from the RT0 state and the RT1 state to the RT3 state (art state described later). No embodiment is provided.

  Further, when the internal winning combination (BB combination) related to BB is won in the general middle state (any of the RT0 state to the RT3 state), the main gaming state shifts from the general middle state to the BB internal middle state. . When the BB combination wins in the BB internal state (when the symbol combination related to the BB combination is stopped and displayed on the active line), BB (RB) is activated, and the main game state is changed from the BB internal state. Transition to the BB state. The BB combination is a specific example of a special internal winning combination according to the present invention, and the BB state is a specific example of a special gaming state according to the present invention.

  In the BB state, when the number of medals exceeding the specified number (305 in this embodiment) is paid out, the BB ends and the main game state shifts from the BB state to the RT0 state.

  When the MB combination wins in each of the RT0 state to the RT3 state, the MB (CB) is activated and the main game state is changed from the RT0 state to the RT3 state to the RT0 time MB state to the RT3 time MB state, respectively. Transition. In each MB state, when the number of medals exceeding the specified number (45 in the present embodiment) is paid out, the MB ends and the main game state changes from the MB state to the corresponding RT state. Transition.

<Various appearances managed by the main control circuit>
The pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine having an ART function in which an RT function and an AT function operate simultaneously. In the present embodiment, whether or not the ART (AT) function is activated is determined by the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93). That is, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) manages the operation / non-operation of the ART (AT) function that directly affects the payout performance (privilege grant performance). Therefore, the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) also manages a state (hereinafter, referred to as “out-of-game state”) related to the out-of-game (medal payout) performance as the gaming state.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 10, the type of the ball appearance state managed by the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) of the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, and the transition mode (game flow) between the various ball appearance states. explain. In addition, FIG. 10 is a figure which shows the game flow (transition flow between various appearance states) in the pachi-slot 1 of this embodiment.

  In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, the payout state mainly managed by the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) is “normal state”, “CZ (chance zone) introduction state”, “ There are seven types of play states called “CZ state”, “ART preparation state”, “ART state”, “addition specific state” and “ART fall waiting state”. Although not shown in FIG. 10, when the setting is changed, lottery processing different from the appearance state is performed. Therefore, the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) manages the state at the time of setting change as the appearance state. . The ART state is a specific example of a notification game state and an advantageous game state according to the present invention.

  In the normal state, the CZ introduction state, and the CZ in-progress state, the RT state is basically an output state corresponding to any of the RT0 state to the RT2 state, and the AT function is not activated. It is a ball state. The ART state, the additional specialization state, and the ART fall-waiting state are basically a ball-out state where the RT state is a ball-out state corresponding to the RT3 state and the AT function is activated. Further, the ART ready state is a ball-out state in which the RT state mainly corresponds to any one of the RT0 state to the RT2 state, and is a ball-out state in which the AT function is activated.

  In the normal state, 40 games are played in one cycle. In the normal state, a game for determining parameters that affect the result of the ART lottery performed in the game in the CZ state and the game content after the ART transition (privilege obtained by ART) is performed. Specifically, increase the rank of multiple types of cards (attack system card, defense system card and reward system card to be described later) related to the result of ART lottery and the game contents of ART (acquire high-rank cards) Various games are performed. The contents of a plurality of types of cards that can be acquired in the normal state will be described in detail later.

  Note that the number of games in one cycle in the normal state (number of cyclic games) is not limited to 40 games, and can be appropriately changed according to, for example, the model. In the present embodiment, an example in which the number of periodic games in the normal state is a fixed value has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of periodic games in the normal state is variable depending on the gaming situation. It may be. In this case, for example, a configuration in which a predetermined number of periodic games can be selected from a plurality of types of periodic games may be provided, or a configuration in which a shortened lottery for reducing the number of remaining periodic games during the cycle is provided. Also good.

  The state at the time of introduction of CZ is a payout state that shifts after the normal game period (40 games) ends. The game period in the CZ introduction state is one game, and in the game in the CZ introduction state, for example, a game period determination process in the CZ in-progress state, a battle win rewriting lottery process, and the like are performed.

  The CZ in-progress state is a payout state that shifts after the game period (one game) in the CZ introduction state has ended. In the game period in the CZ gaming state, a lottery game for determining ART winning / non-winning is mainly performed. The contents of the ART lottery performed on the main side in the CZ state will be described in detail later. In the production in the CZ state, a battle effect between a hero character (hereinafter abbreviated as “hero character”) and a predetermined enemy character (hereinafter abbreviated as “enemy character”) is performed. The content of the content that the character wins the enemy character is performed, and the content that the hero character is defeated by the enemy character is performed when the ART non-winning is determined.

  The ART ready state is a game-out state that shifts when an ART win (winning of the main character) is determined in a game in the CZ state. In the ART preparation state, a game for shifting the RT state to the RT3 state is mainly performed, and push order navigation for shifting the RT state to the RT3 state is generated. In addition, in the game in the CZ state, when ART non-winning (defeat of the main character) is determined, the appearance state is shifted from the CZ state to the normal state, and from the next game to the normal state of the next cycle. A game is started.

  In the ART state, when a small combination having a correct answer in the order in which the stop button is pressed (such as a batting order bell described later) is internally won, the AT function notifies the information regarding the correct push order corresponding to the type of the small combination. . At this time, on the main control circuit 91 side (hereinafter referred to as “main side”), an instruction display unit (not shown) included in the information display 24 displays information on the pressing order of the instruction monitor number corresponding to the small role type. Is notified. On the other hand, on the sub-control circuit 101 side (hereinafter referred to as “sub-side”), an effect of displaying the pressing order information (pressing order number) of the three stop buttons on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 11 is performed. Note that the initial number of ART games is determined by an extra special game that is performed immediately after the appearance state shifts to the ART state.

  The additional special state is a ball-out state during the ART state, and is a ball-out state in which the lottery for the number of ART games is mainly performed. That is, the added special state is a special zone in the ART state. In this embodiment, at the start of the ART game period, and in a game in the ART state, when the player wins a special game number to be described later and the lottery is won, the appearance state shifts to the specialization state.

  Note that the initial value of the game period (the number of specialized games described later) and the continuation rate (the specialized final game loop ratio described later) in the added special state is a specific card (reward-related card described later) acquired in the normal state. And is set when the transition to the ART state is determined. After that, if a lottery for the number of specialized games performed when a predetermined condition is established, the number of specialized games and the continuation rate are basically updated (added) each time.

  In addition, when the transition to the added special state is determined in the ART state, the game in the added special state is started as an interrupt process from the next game. Note that the number of ART games is not counted during the extra special game period (the number of remaining ART games is not reduced). Then, when the extra special game period ends, the appearance state returns to the ART state, and the ART state game is resumed from the number of remaining ART games when the extra special state is entered.

  The ART fall waiting state is a ball-out state that shifts when the ART period game period ends. In the ART fall waiting state, a game is played until the RT state shifts (falls) from the RT3 state to the RT1 state. In the ART fall waiting state, when the RT state shifts from the RT3 state to the RT1 state, the appearance state shifts from the ART fall waiting state to the normal state, and the normal state of the first cycle (first cycle) from the next game. A game is started.

  If the BB wins in the normal state and the ART state described above, the game from the time of BB winning until the end of the BB is performed as an interrupt process, and during that period, the number of remaining periodic games in the normal state and the ART state The remaining ART game number subtraction (count) processing is not performed.

  In addition, when the BB is won in the CZ introduction state or the CZ state, the ART shift is determined. In this case, after the winning game in the BB state is digested, the appearance state shifts to the ART state.

  Although not shown in FIG. 10, in each of the normal state and the ART state, two types of modes, “low accuracy mode” and “high accuracy mode”, are provided as the lottery state. The winning probability in the lottery process is higher than in the former mode.

  Although not shown in FIG. 10, a plurality of types of stage modes are provided in the normal state. Specifically, a normal stage (stage A to stage C described later) associated with the card type (attribute) and a special stage not associated with the card type are provided. In the normal stage, there is a characteristic that cards with corresponding attributes are easily ranked up. On the other hand, in the special stage, all cards are ranked up with a similar probability. The normal stage and the special stage are specific examples of modes according to the present invention.

[Various lottery processes performed on the main side in each game state]
In the present embodiment, on the main side, the game state is managed by a combination of the above-described play state and the main game state (RT state, bonus (BB, MB) state, BB internal state), and in each game state, A predetermined lottery process is performed as appropriate. Here, the types of lottery processing executed in each combination of the payout state and the main game state will be described together. It should be noted that a game state other than the combination of the game state and the main game state shown below, for example, when the game state is the normal state and the main game state is the BB internal state or the SBB winning game, the game state Is in the CZ state and the main game state is the BB internal state or the BB winning game, the ball-out state is the ART state and the main game state is the BB internal state. If the main game state is in the BB internal state, the lottery is not performed.

(1) When the play state is a normal state, and the main game state is a BB internal medium state, an MB winning game or an MB state In this case, in the unit game, when the lever is turned on, a card promotion lottery, a card promotion attribute lottery, The card promotion number lottery and the lottery state transition lottery are performed in this order. The state in which the main game state is “no BB internal state” refers to a state in which the main game state is none of the BB winning game, the BB internal state, the BB state, the MB winning game, and the MB state. Say. Further, “when the lever is on” means when the player's game start operation on the start lever 23 is detected.

  The card promotion lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to rank up a card, and the card promotion attribute lottery is a lottery for selecting the type of card to be ranked up (any of an attack system, a defense system, and a reward system). The card promotion number lottery is a lottery for determining the number of cards to be upgraded. The lottery state transition lottery is a lottery for determining the lottery state (high accuracy or low accuracy).

(2) When the ball-out state is the normal state and the main game state is the NBB winning game In the unit game in this case, when the lever is turned on, the card promotion lottery, the card promotion attribute lottery, the card promotion number lottery, the NBB winning enemy Character promotion lottery and lottery state transition lottery are performed in this order.

  In this embodiment, seven types of enemy characters A to G are prepared as enemy characters to fight against the hero character in the CZ state, as will be described later, and the hero character has a higher probability of winning. To enemy characters G to A. The NBB winning enemy character promotion lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to change the currently set enemy character (enemy characters A to E) to the enemy character F (enemy character that is likely to win ART). If the currently set enemy character is enemy character F and the NBB winning enemy character promotion lottery is won, the enemy character type is changed to enemy character G (the enemy character determined to be the ART winner). .

(3) When the ball-out state is the normal state and the main game state is the NBB state In this unit game, when the lever is on, the card promotion lottery, the card promotion attribute lottery, the card promotion number lottery, the NBB winning enemy character Promotion lottery and lottery state transition lottery are performed in this order.

(4) In the case where the payout state is the state when the CZ is introduced and the main game state is the BB internal state, the NBB winning game or the MB winning game, in the unit game in this case, when the lever is turned on, the CZ victory rewriting lottery and the CZ The prescribed game number shortening lottery is performed in this order.

  The CZ victory rewriting lottery is performed when the rank of all cards is “0” at the end of the game in the normal state other than the initial cycle (when the game is transferred to the CZ introduction state). This is a lottery for determining whether or not to change (rewrite) the result of winning determination (defeat of the main character) to the result of ART winning determination (winning of the main character). The lottery result is referred to when the ART non-winning is confirmed (the main character is defeated) in the game in the CZ state. If the lottery is won, the ART non-winning is performed at this timing. Confirmation (defeat of the hero character) is rewritten to ART winning (defeat of the hero character). The CZ prescribed game number shortened lottery is a shortened lottery of the number of games in the CZ state (CZ prescribed game number) started from the next game.

(5) When the payout state is the state when the CZ is introduced and the main game state is the BB state In the unit game in this case, the number of ART games is added and lottery is performed when the lever is turned on. When the lottery is won, the lottery result (the number of additional games of ART) is added to the number of remaining ART games in the ART state that is shifted to after completion of the CZ state.

(6) In the case where the payout state is the CZ state and the main game state is the BB internal state or the MB win game, the unit game in this case, the first to third battle attack lottery and card skills when the lever is on The trigger lottery is performed in this order. In the present embodiment, ART winning / non-winning is determined by these two lotteries.

  The first to third battle offensive / defense lottery determines whether the life value of the main character or the life value of the enemy character, which will be described later, is subtracted, the increase / decrease value of the life value of the main character, or the subtraction value of the life value of the enemy character. It is a lottery for. The card skill activation lottery is a lottery for deciding whether or not to further reflect the skill effect described later of each card on the lottery result based on the lottery result determined in the first to third battle attack lottery. is there. If the life value of the enemy character is equal to or less than “0” as a result of the 1st to 3rd battle attack and defense lottery and the card skill activation lottery (increase or decrease of the life value of one of the main character and enemy character), the ART win ( (Battle Victory) is confirmed. On the other hand, if the life value of the hero character is “0” or less as a result of the card skill trigger lottery, the ART non-winning (battle defeat) is determined. The contents of the ART winning / non-winning determination process by the first to third battle attack / lottery lottery and the card skill trigger lottery will be described in detail later.

  In the unit game in this case, the stage lottery and the enemy character lottery are performed in this order when the reels are stopped for the third time.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, a separate stage mode is provided for each type of card in the normal state. In the stage lottery, the stage mode in the game state in the normal state of the next cycle is determined. Further, in the enemy character lottery, an enemy character to be played against the hero character is determined in the game in the CZ state that is performed after the end of the game period in the normal state of the next cycle.

(7) When the payout state is the CZ state and the main game state is the BB state In the unit game in this case, the number of ART games is added and lottery is performed when the lever is turned on. When the lottery is won, the lottery result (the number of additional games of ART) is added to the number of remaining ART games in the ART state that is shifted to after completion of the CZ state.

(8) When the payout state is the CZ state and the main game state is the MB state In the unit game in this case, MB lottery is performed when the lever is turned on. In the MB lottery, the damage (life value subtraction value) to be added to the enemy character in the CZ state is determined. When the lottery is won, the life value corresponding to the lottery result is subtracted from the current life value of the enemy character.

(9) When the ball is in the ART preparation state and the main game state is the BB internal state, SBB winning game, MB winning game or MB state, in this case, when the lever is turned on, the ART starts An additional lottery is performed on the number of games in the added special state (number of specialized games).

(10) In the case where the ball-out state is the ART ready state and the main game state is the NBB winning game. In this case, in the unit game, when the lever is turned on, the number of ART games is added and lottery is specialized at the start of ART. The lottery with the number of games in the state (the number of specialized games) is performed in this order.

(11) When the ball-out state is the ART preparation state and the main game state is the BB state In the unit game in this case, the number of ART games is added and lottery is performed when the lever is turned on.

(12) In the case where the play-out state is an additional special state, and the main game state is a BB internal state, an MB winning game or an MB state. In this case, in the unit game, when the lever is turned on, an additional number of ART games is determined. And the continued lottery of the specialization state added is performed in this order. In the continued special lottery in the added special state, in the final game in the added special state, it is determined whether or not to continue the game in the added special state in the next game. The winning probability of the lottery is a continuation rate (specialized final game loop rate which will be described later) set in the current set additional special state.

(13) When the ball-out state is an additional special state and the main game state is an NBB winning game In the unit game in this case, when the lever is turned on, an extra lottery based on the NBB winning and an additional special state The number of ART games based on is added and lottery is performed.

(14) In the case where the ball-out state is an additional special state and the main game state is an SBB winning game In this unit game, an extra lottery is performed when the lever is turned on.

(15) When the ball-out state is an additional special state and the main game state is the BB state In this unit game, when the lever is turned on, an extra lottery is performed for the number of ART games.

(16) When the ball-out state is the ART state and the main game state is the BB internal state, the MB winning game or the MB state In this case, in the unit game, when the lever is turned on, the number of games in the added special state (specialized) The number of games) and lottery state transition lottery are performed in this order.

(17) When the ball-out state is the ART state and the main game state is the NBB winning game In the unit game in this case, when the lever is turned on, the number of ART games is increased, the number of games in the additional specialized state (specialized game) Number) lottery and lottery state transition lottery are performed in this order.

(18) In the case where the payout state is the ART state and the main game state is the SBB winning game In the unit game in this case, the number of ART games is added and lottery is performed when the lever is turned on.

(19) When the ball-out state is the ART state and the main game state is the BB state In the unit game in this case, the number of ART games is added and lottery is performed when the lever is turned on.

(20) When the ball-out state is an ART fall waiting state, and the main game state is the BB internal state, in this case, in the unit game, when the lever is turned on, the number of games in the added special state (number of special games) The extra lottery and the lottery state transition lottery are performed in this order.

  In this case, the stage lottery and the enemy character lottery are performed in this order when the reel of the unit game in which the RT state shifts to the RT3 state is stopped for the third time.

  In the stage lottery, the stage mode in the game period of each normal state in the first cycle and the second cycle is determined. Further, in the enemy character lottery, an enemy character that is to compete with the hero character is determined in the game in the CZ state that is performed after the end of the normal period game period in the first and second cycles.

(21) When the ball-out state is an ART fall waiting state, and the main game state is an NBB winning game. In this case, when the lever is turned on, the number of ART games is increased and lottery, and the number of games in the additional special state (special Lottery lottery) and lottery state transition lottery are performed in this order.

(22) When the ball-out state is an ART fall waiting state and the main game state is an SBB winning game In this unit game, when the lever is turned on, the number of ART games is added and lottery is performed.

(23) When the payout state is the ART fall waiting state and the main game state is the BB state In this unit game, the number of ART games is added and lottery is performed when the lever is turned on.

(24) When the ball-out state is the ART fall waiting state, and the main game state is the MB winning game or the MB state. In this case, in the unit game, when the lever is turned on, the number of games in the added special state (number of special games) The lottery lottery and the lottery state transition lottery are performed in this order.

(25) When the ball-out state is the setting change state, and the main game state is the BB internal medium state In the unit game in this case, when the lever is turned on, the initial cycle game number determination lottery, card rank determination lottery, stage lottery And the enemy character lottery is performed in this order.

  The initial cycle game number determination lottery is a lottery for determining the number of cyclic games in the first normal state that is executed after the setting is changed. In the card rank determination lottery, lottery is performed for each type of card, and the initial rank of each card at the time of setting change is determined. In the stage lottery, the stage mode in the game period of each normal state in the first cycle and the second cycle is determined. Further, in the enemy character lottery, an enemy character that is to compete with the hero character is determined in the game in the CZ state that is performed after the end of the normal period game period in the first and second cycles.

<Type of card to be acquired in the normal state>
In the normal game period (one cycle = 40 games), a game is performed in which three types of cards, an attack system, a defense system, and a reward system, are acquired (the card rank is increased). Attack-type cards and defense-type cards are cards that affect the outcome of ART (AT) winning / non-winning (hereinafter referred to as “skill effect”), and reward cards are awarded when winning an ART lottery. This is a card that affects (skill effect) the game content of the ART to be played (the operation content of the AT function), that is, the content of the privilege given to the player. The attack-type card and the defense-type card indicate a specific example of the first parameter and the parameter according to the present invention, and the reward-type card indicates a specific example of the second parameter according to the present invention. Is.

  By providing these three types of cards, not only the winning / non-winning of the ART (AT) but also the contents of the gaming state that is advantageous to the player who is awarded when winning the ART (AT) is pre-ART winning. Therefore, the player's expectation for the game in the normal state can be increased. If the reward card does not win the ART (AT), it does not affect the subsequent game, so that the winning probability of the reward card rank-up lottery can be increased accordingly. . In this case, the interest of the player's game with respect to the game in the normal state can be further improved.

  Note that the attacking card, the defense card, and the reward card are all in the RT state when the ART (AT) non-winning (battle defeat) is confirmed in the CZ state, or in the ART fall waiting state. When it shifts to (falls), it is reset to the initial value (“0”). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the non-winning (battle defeat) of ART (AT) is confirmed, only the reward card is reset to the initial value (“0”). Good. Further, when each card is reset, a predetermined rank may be set as an initial value by lottery or the like from a plurality of types of ranks. The contents of each card (correspondence between rank and skill effect) will be described below.

[Attack (attack attribute) card]
FIG. 11 shows a table summarizing ranks (levels) and skill effects of various attackable cards that can be acquired. In the present embodiment, 11 types of attack cards with card ranks “0” to “10” are provided as attack cards. Further, when these attacking cards are classified according to rarity (rareness), as shown in FIG. 11, they are divided into three types of rarity described as “R”, “SR”, and “MR”. Specifically, attack cards with card ranks “0” to “4” are cards with rarity “R”, and attack cards with card ranks “5” to “8” are cards with rarity “SR”. The attack cards with card ranks “9” and “10” are cards with rarity “MR”. Note that the order of rarity is “MR”, “SR”, and “R” in descending order.

  The skill effect of the attack-type card is mainly based on the lottery result (see the battle attack / lottery lottery table of FIGS. 79 to 82 described later) of the first to third battle attack / lottery lotteries (refer to FIG. 219 described later) described below. It is to reduce the life value of enemy characters. The attack effect of the attack card is activated when a card skill activation lottery described later (see FIG. 218 described later) is won. Note that the winning probability of the card skill activation lottery varies depending on the card rank of the attacking card, and an attacking card having a winning probability of 100% is also provided.

  Specifically, “no skill effect” is set for the attack card (initial card) with the card rank “0”. Therefore, if the card rank of the attacking card acquired at the time of introduction of CZ is “0”, the lottery result of the first to third battle offensive lottery described later (no offense and defense, the life value of the hero character is The subtraction or subtraction of the enemy character's life value) is directly reflected in the hero character's life value or the enemy character's life value (a process of increasing or decreasing the life value is performed). The life value of the enemy character is a specific example of the first determination point according to the present invention, and the life value of the hero character is a specific example of the second determination point according to the present invention.

  The skill effect of the attack card with card rank “1” is selected as a result of the main character taking damage (result of subtracting the life value of the main character) as a result of lottery by the 1st to 3rd battle offense and defense lottery described later. In this case, “100” is added to the attack value (subtraction value of the enemy character's life value) with a probability of 25% (“counterattack probability 25% UP”). Therefore, the card rank of the attack-type card acquired at the time of introduction of CZ is “1”, and the result of subtracting the life value of the main character as the lottery result is selected by the first-first battle offensive lottery described later. In addition, when a card skill activation lottery (a lottery with a winning probability of 25%), which will be described later, is won, “100” is subtracted from the life value of the enemy character. That is, in this case, the life value of the main character and the life value of the enemy character are both subtracted. If the card skill activation lottery (the lottery with a winning probability of 25%) is non-winning, only the life value of the main character is subtracted.

  As for the skill effect of the attack-type card with the card rank “2”, the result of the main character attacking as a lottery result (the result of subtracting the life value of the enemy character) was selected by the first to third battle offense and defense lottery described later. In this case, “100” is added to the attack value of the hero character (subtraction value of the life value of the enemy character) with a probability of 50% (“chance probability 50% UP”). Therefore, the card rank of the attack card acquired at the time of introduction of CZ is “2”, and the result of subtracting the life value of the enemy character as the lottery result is selected by the first to third battle offense and defense lottery described later. In addition, when a card skill trigger lottery (a lottery with a 50% winning probability) described later is won, a value obtained by adding “100” to the subtracted value of the life value of the enemy character selected by the battle offensive lottery Is subtracted from the life value of enemy characters. If the card skill activation lottery (the lottery with 50% winning probability) is non-winning, only the life value subtraction value of the enemy character selected by battle battle lottery is subtracted from the enemy character life value. The

  The skill effect of an attack card with card rank “3” is selected as a result of the main character taking damage (result of subtracting the life value of the main character) from the first to third battle offensive lottery described later. In this case, “100” is added to the attack value (subtraction value of the enemy character's life value) with a probability of 50% (“counterattack probability 50% UP”). Therefore, the card rank of the attack card acquired at the time of CZ introduction is “3”, and the result of subtracting the life value of the main character as the lottery result is selected by the first to third battle offense and defense lottery described later. In addition, when a card skill activation lottery described later (a lottery with a winning probability of 50%) is won, the life value of the enemy character is subtracted by “100”. That is, in this case, the life value of the main character and the life value of the enemy character are both subtracted. If the card skill activation lottery (the lottery with a winning probability of 50%) is non-winning, only the life value of the main character is subtracted.

  As for the skill effect of the attack card of card rank “4”, the result of the main character attacking as a lottery result (the result of subtracting the life value of the enemy character) was selected by the first to third battle attack lottery described later In this case, “100” is added to the attack value (subtraction value of the enemy character's life value) with a probability of 75% (“follow-up probability is 75% UP”). Therefore, the card rank of the attack type card acquired at the time of CZ introduction is “4”, and the result of subtracting the enemy character's life value as the lottery result is selected by the first to third battle offensive lottery described later. In addition, when a card skill activation lottery (a lottery with a winning probability of 75%) described later is won, a value obtained by adding “100” to the subtraction value of the life value of the enemy character selected by the battle offense and defense lottery Is subtracted from the life value of enemy characters. If the card skill activation lottery (lottery with a winning probability of 75%) is non-winning, only the subtracted value of the enemy character's life value selected by battle battle lottery is subtracted from the enemy character's life value. The

  As for the skill effect of the attack card of card rank “5”, the result of the main character attacking as a lottery result (the result of subtracting the life value of the enemy character) is selected by the first to third battle offense and defense lottery described later. In this case, it is always (with a probability of 100%) that “100” is added to the attack value of the hero character (the subtraction value of the enemy character's life value) (“attack power + 100”). Therefore, the card rank of the attack type card acquired at the time of introduction of CZ is “5”, and the result of subtracting the life value of the enemy character as the lottery result by the first to third battle offense and defense lottery described later When is selected, a value obtained by adding “100” to the subtraction value of the life value of the enemy character selected by the battle attack / lottery lottery is always subtracted from the life value of the enemy character.

  As for the skill effect of the attack-type card with the card rank “6”, the result of the main character attacking as a lottery result (the result of subtracting the life value of the enemy character) was selected by the first to third battle offense and defense lottery described later. In this case, it is always (with a probability of 100%) that “200” is added to the attack value of the hero character (the subtraction value of the life value of the enemy character) (“attack power + 200”). Therefore, the card rank of the attack card acquired at the time of introduction of CZ is “6”, and the result of subtracting the life value of the enemy character as the lottery result by the first to third battle battle lotteries described later Is selected, a value obtained by adding “200” to the subtraction value of the life value of the enemy character selected by the battle attack / lottery lottery is always subtracted from the life value of the enemy character.

  As for the skill effect of the attack type card with the card rank “7”, the result of the main character attacking as a lottery result (the result of subtracting the life value of the enemy character) was selected by the first to third battle offense and defense lottery described later. In this case, it is always (with a probability of 100%) that “300” is added to the attack value of the hero character (the subtraction value of the life value of the enemy character) (“attack power + 300”). Therefore, the card rank of the attack type card acquired at the time of introduction of CZ is “7”, and the result of subtracting the life value of the enemy character as the lottery result by the first to third battle offense and defense lotteries described later Is selected, a value obtained by adding “300” to the life value subtraction value of the enemy character selected by the battle attack / lottery lottery is subtracted from the life value of the enemy character.

  As for the skill effect of the attack-type card with the card rank “8”, the result of the main character attacking as a lottery result (the result of subtracting the life value of the enemy character) was selected by the first to third battle offense and defense lottery described later. In this case, the attack value of the hero character (subtracted from the life value of the enemy character) must be quadrupled (“attack power four times”). Therefore, the card rank of the attack card acquired at the time of introduction of CZ is “8”, and the result of subtracting the life value of the enemy character as the lottery result by the first to third battle offense and defense lotteries described later Is always selected, a value obtained by multiplying the enemy character's life value by 4 is subtracted from the enemy character's life value.

  The skill effect of an attack-type card with a card rank of “9” will be described later when a chance combination (an internal winning combination related to a main lottery flag other than the main lottery flag “excluding”, “replay”, and “bell” described later) is won. Regardless of the lottery result of the first to third battle offensive / defense lottery, the lottery result is rewritten to victory confirmation (ART winning) (“actual death technique when chance chance is established”). Therefore, when the card rank of the attacking card acquired at the time of introduction of CZ is “9” and a chance combination is won as an internal winning combination, the ART winning is always determined.

  The skill effect of the attack card with card rank “10” is selected as a result of the main character attacking as a lottery result (result of subtracting the enemy character's life value) from the first to third battle offensive lottery described later. If it is, the lottery result is rewritten as winning confirmation (ART winning) ("one-shot kill"). Therefore, the card rank of the attack type card acquired at the time of introduction of CZ is “10”, and the result of subtracting the life value of the enemy character as the lottery result by the first to third battle offense and defense lottery described later is If it is selected, the ART winning will be confirmed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the card rank (rareity) of the attacking card increases, it becomes easier to win the battle (it is easier to win the ART).

  In the present embodiment, in the first to third battle offense and defense lotteries described later, when the result of the main character receiving damage (result of subtracting the life value of the main character) is selected as the lottery result, This is a case where “off” is determined as the internal winning combination (see the battle attack / lottery lottery tables in FIGS. 79 to 82 described later). Therefore, the skill effect activation process for the attack cards having the card ranks “1” and “3” is substantially limited to the “out of” time limit process.

  In addition, the skill effect activation process for the attack-type cards with the card ranks “9” and “10” is performed in the game in the CZ state when the MB combination (the internal winning combination relating to the abbreviation “F_MB1” or “F_MB2” described later) is performed. It is also executed when winning.

  Further, in the process of activating the skill effect of the attack cards having the card ranks “9” and “10”, in the present embodiment, as described later, as a method of rewriting the lottery result of the battle attack / defense lottery to victory confirmation (ART winning), as described later. Although a method of setting a flag indicating victory confirmation (ART winning) to the ON state is used, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in this embodiment, since the maximum value of the initial life value of the enemy character (the initial life value of the enemy character A) is “2000” (see FIG. 14 described later), the card ranks “9” and “10” In the attack processing of the skill effect of the attack card, a method of adding “2000” to the attack value of the hero character (subtraction value of the enemy character's life value) may be employed. In this case, due to the attack processing of the skill effect of the attack card, the life value of the enemy character is always “0” or less regardless of the type of the enemy character, and the battle victory is confirmed (ART winning).

[Defense system (defense attribute) card]
FIG. 12 shows a table summarizing ranks (levels) and skill effects of various defense cards that can be acquired. In this embodiment, eleven types of defense cards with card ranks “0” to “10” are provided as defense cards. Further, when these defense cards are classified by rarity (rareness), as shown in FIG. 12, they are divided into three types of rarities labeled “R”, “SR”, and “MR”. Specifically, defense cards with card ranks “0” to “4” are cards with rarity “R”, and defense cards with card ranks “5” to “8” are cards with rarity “SR”. The defense cards with the card ranks “9” and “10” are the cards with the rarity “MR”.

  The skill effect of the defense system card is mainly based on the lottery result (see the battle attack and defense lottery table of FIGS. 79 to 82 described later) of the first to third battle attack and defense lotteries (refer to FIG. 219 described later) described below. It is mainly to increase the life value of the main character. The activation of the skill effect of the defense card is performed when a card skill activation lottery described later (see FIG. 218 described later) is won. In addition, the winning probability of a card skill activation lottery described later varies depending on the card rank of the defense system card, and a defense system card having a winning probability of 100% is also provided.

  Specifically, “no skill effect” is set for a defense card (initial card) with a card rank “0”. Therefore, when the card rank of the defense system card acquired at the time of CZ introduction is “0”, the lottery result of the first to third battle offensive lottery described later (no offense and defense, the life value of the hero character is The subtraction or subtraction of the enemy character's life value) is directly reflected in the hero character's life value or the enemy character's life value (a process of increasing or decreasing the life value is performed).

  The skill effect of a defense card with a card rank of “1” is a life value of the protagonist character with a probability of 50% when “non-attack and defense” is selected as a lottery result in the first to third battles Is to add “100” (damage recovery value) to “recovery activation twice”. Therefore, the card rank of the defense system card acquired at the time of introduction of the CZ is “1”, “no attack” is selected as the lottery result by the first to third battle offensive lottery described later, and will be described later. If the card skill activation lottery (the lottery with a 50% winning probability) is won, “100” is added to the life value of the main character. If the card skill activation lottery (the lottery with a winning probability of 50%) is not won, the life value of the hero character is not added.

  The skill effect of the defense card of card rank “2” is selected as a result of the main character taking damage (result of subtracting the life value of the main character) as a result of lottery by the 1st to 3rd battle offense and defense described later. The lottery result is rewritten to “no offense and defense” with a probability of 25% (“avoidance rate 25% UP”). Therefore, the card rank of the defense system card acquired at the time of CZ introduction is “2”, and the result of subtracting the life value of the hero character as the lottery result is selected by the first to third battle offense and defense lottery described later. In addition, if a card skill activation lottery (a lottery with a winning probability of 25%), which will be described later, is won, the lottery result of the battle offense and defense lottery is rewritten to “no offense and defense”, and the life value of the main character does not decrease. If the card skill activation lottery (the lottery with a winning probability of 25%) is non-winning, the life value of the main character is subtracted.

  The skill effect of the defense card of card rank “3” is to add “500” to the initial life value of the main character (“initial life +500”) at the start of the battle (at the start of the game period in the CZ state). ). Therefore, if the card rank of the defense card acquired at the time of CZ introduction is “3”, the initial life value of the main character is always “500” at the start of the battle (with a probability of 100%). Is added.

  The skill effect of the defense card with card rank “4” is selected as a result of the main character taking damage (result of subtracting the life value of the main character) as a result of lottery by the 1st to 3rd battle offense and defense described later. The lottery result is rewritten to “no offense and defense” with a probability of 33% (“evasion rate 33% UP”). Therefore, the card rank of the defense system card acquired at the time of introduction of CZ is “4”, and the result of subtracting the life value of the hero character as the lottery result is selected by the first to third battle offensive lottery described later. In addition, when a card skill activation lottery (a lottery with a winning probability of 33%), which will be described later, is won, the lottery result of the battle offense and defense lottery is rewritten to “no offense and defense”, and the life value of the main character does not decrease. If the card skill activation lottery (the lottery with a winning probability of 33%) is non-winning, the life value of the main character is subtracted.

  The skill effect of the defense card with the card rank “5” is always (with a probability of 100%) when the “no attack” is selected as the lottery result by the first to third battle offensive lottery described below (with a probability of 100%). “100” (damage recovery value) is added to the character's life value (“recovery activation 4 times”). Therefore, when the card rank of the defense system card acquired at the time of CZ introduction is “5”, and “no attack” is selected as the lottery result by the first to third battle offensive lottery described later “100” is added to the life value of the main character.

  The skill effect of the defense card of card rank “6” is to add “1000” to the initial life value of the main character at the start of the battle (at the start of the game period in the CZ state) (“initial life +1000”). ). Therefore, if the card rank of the defense card acquired at the time of CZ introduction is “6”, the initial life value of the hero character is always “1000” at the start of the battle (with a probability of 100%). Is added.

  The skill effect of the defense card with card rank “7” is selected as a result of the main character taking damage (result of subtracting the life value of the main character) as a lottery result by the first to third battle offense and defense lotteries described later. The lottery result is rewritten to “no offense and defense” with a probability of 50% (“avoidance rate 50% UP”). Therefore, the card rank of the defense system card acquired at the time of introduction of CZ is “7”, and the result of subtracting the life value of the main character as the lottery result is selected by the first to third battle offensive lottery described later. In addition, if a card skill activation lottery (a lottery with a 50% winning probability), which will be described later, is won, the lottery result of the battle offense and defense lottery is rewritten to “no offense and defense”, and the life value of the main character does not decrease. If the card skill activation lottery (the lottery with 50% winning probability) is non-winning, the life value of the main character is subtracted.

  The skill effect of the defense card of card rank “8” is to add “1500” to the initial life value of the main character at the start of the battle (at the start of the game period in the CZ state) (“initial life + 1500”). ). Therefore, if the card rank of the defense card acquired at the time of CZ introduction is “8”, the initial life value of the main character is always “1500” at the start of the battle (with a probability of 100%). Is added.

  As for the skill effect of the defense card of card rank “9”, the result of subtracting the life value of the main character from the main character will be selected as the result of the first to third battle offensive lottery described later. The lottery result is rewritten to “no offense and defense” with a probability of 66% (“evasion rate 66% UP”). Therefore, the card rank of the defense system card acquired at the time of introduction of CZ is “9”, and the result of subtracting the life value of the main character as the lottery result is selected by the first to third battle offense and defense lottery described later. In addition, if a card skill activation lottery (a lottery with a winning probability of 66%), which will be described later, is won, the lottery result of the battle offense and defense lottery is rewritten as “no offense and defense”, and the life value of the main character does not decrease. If the card skill activation lottery (lottery with a winning probability of 66%) is not won, the life value of the main character is subtracted.

  The skill effect of the defense card with the card rank “10” is selected as a result of the main character taking damage (result of subtracting the life value of the main character) as a lottery result by the first to third battle offense and defense lotteries described later. The lottery result is rewritten to “no offense and defense” with a probability of 90% (“transcendence avoidance”). Therefore, the card rank of the defense system card acquired at the time of CZ introduction is “10”, and the result of subtracting the life value of the hero character as the lottery result is selected by the first to third battle offense and defense lottery described later. In addition, when a card skill activation lottery (a lottery with a winning probability of 90%), which will be described later, is won, the lottery result of the battle offense and defense lottery is rewritten to “no offense and defense”, and the life value of the main character does not decrease. If the card skill activation lottery (the lottery with a winning probability of 90%) is non-winning, the life value of the main character is subtracted.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the card rank (rareity) of the defense system card is high, it is easy to win the battle (it is easy to win the ART).

  In the present embodiment, in a battle attack / lottery to be described later, when the result of the main character receiving damage (result of subtracting the life value of the main character) is selected as the lottery result, This is a case where “displacement” is determined (see the battle attack / lottery lottery table in FIGS. 79 to 82 described later). Therefore, the skill effect activation process for the defense cards having the card ranks “2”, “4”, “7”, “9”, and “10” is substantially limited to the “out of” time limit process.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the life value of the main character is “2999”. Therefore, when the life value of the main character after the addition becomes “3000” or more due to the activation of the skill effects of the defense cards of the card ranks “1” and “5”, the life value of the main character is set to “2999”. Set to "".

[Reward system (reward attribute) card]
FIG. 13 shows a table summarizing ranks (levels) and skill effects of various remuneration cards that can be acquired. In the present embodiment, eleven types of reward cards with card ranks “0” to “10” are provided as the reward cards. Further, when these reward cards are classified by rarity (rareness), as shown in FIG. 13, they are divided into three types of rarities labeled “R”, “SR”, and “MR”. Specifically, reward cards with card ranks “0” to “4” are cards with rarity “R”, and reward cards with card ranks “5” to “8” are cards with rarity “SR”. The reward cards with card ranks “9” and “10” are cards with rarity “MR”.

  The skill effect of the reward card is based on the number of games in the specialization state game that is executed during the ART state when the transition to the ART state is confirmed (when the battle win is confirmed) And the initial value of the specialization continuation rate (specialized final game loop rate). The skill effect of the reward card changes according to the card rank of the reward card. That is, the game content of the ART changes according to the card rank of the reward card.

  The reward effect card (initial card) with the card rank “0” has a skill effect called “no skill effect”. In “no skill effect”, “5” is set in the special counter for counting the number of games in the added special state, and 1% is set in the special final game loop rate. The specialized final game loop rate is a winning probability of a loop lottery performed in the final game in the added special state (a game with a special counter value of “1”).

  That is, when the card rank of the reward system card acquired at the time of introduction of CZ is “0” and the transition to the ART state is confirmed (battle victory is confirmed), an extra to be executed at the start of ART A minimum of 5 games is guaranteed as the number of specialized games. In the present embodiment, even in the ART preparation state, lottery is performed on the number of specialized games, and when the lottery is won, the lottery result (number of specialized additional games) is ranked in the rank of the reward system card. It is added to the initial value of the number of specialized games determined based on it.

  In the game in the specialization state of addition, the number of additional ART games of 10 games or more is acquired for each game (see the specialized ART game addition lottery table in FIGS. 86 and 87 described later). Therefore, in the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, when the card rank of the reward system card acquired at the time of CZ introduction is “0” and the transition to the ART state is confirmed, the initial game of ART As a number, at least 50 games are guaranteed.

  A skill effect referred to as “normal drive 6G” is set for the reward card of the card rank “1”. With the skill effect of “normal drive 6G”, “6” is set in the special counter, and 1% is set in the special final game loop rate. Therefore, if the card rank of the reward card acquired at the time of CZ introduction is “1” and the transition to the ART state is confirmed (battle victory is confirmed), it is executed at the start of ART. Six games are guaranteed as the number of games in the specialization state. In this case, at least 60 games are guaranteed as the initial number of ART games.

  The reward effect card with the card rank “2” has a skill effect called “normal drive 7G”. With the skill effect of “normal drive 7G”, “7” is set in the special counter, and 1% is set in the special final game loop rate. Therefore, if the card rank of the reward card acquired at the time of CZ introduction is “2” and the transition to the ART state is confirmed (battle victory is confirmed), it is executed at the start of ART. Seven games are guaranteed as the number of games in the added special state. In this case, at least 70 games are guaranteed as the initial number of ART games.

  A skill effect called “ordinary drive 7G drive loop rate 50%” is set for the reward card of card rank “3”. With the skill effect of “normal drive 7G drive loop rate 50%”, “7” is set in the specialized counter, and 50% is set in the specialized final game loop rate. Therefore, if the card rank of the reward card acquired at the time of CZ introduction is “3” and the transition to the ART state is confirmed (battle victory is confirmed), it is executed at the start of ART. Seven games are guaranteed as the number of games in the added special state. In this case, at least 70 games are guaranteed as the initial number of ART games.

  A skill effect called “normal drive 7G drive loop rate 75%” is set for the reward card of the card rank “4”. With the skill effect of “normal drive 7G drive loop rate 75%”, “7” is set in the specialized counter, and 75% is set in the specialized final game loop rate. Therefore, if the card rank of the reward card acquired at the time of CZ introduction is “4” and the transition to the ART state is confirmed (battle victory is confirmed), it is executed at the start of ART. Seven games are guaranteed as the number of games in the added special state. In this case, at least 70 games are guaranteed as the initial number of ART games.

  A skill effect called “normal drive 8G drive loop rate 75%” is set for the reward card of card rank “5”. With the skill effect of “normal drive 8G drive loop rate 75%”, “8” is set in the specialized counter, and 75% is set in the specialized final game loop rate. Therefore, when the card rank of the reward card acquired at the time of CZ introduction is “5” and the transition to the ART state is confirmed (battle victory is confirmed), it is executed at the start of ART. Eight games are guaranteed as the number of games in the specialization state. In this case, at least 80 games are guaranteed as the initial number of ART games.

  A skill effect called “ordinary drive 9G drive loop rate 75%” is set for the reward card of the card rank “6”. With the skill effect of “normal drive 9G drive loop rate 75%”, “9” is set in the specialized counter, and 75% is set in the specialized final game loop rate. Therefore, if the card rank of the reward card acquired at the time of CZ introduction is “6” and the transition to the ART state is confirmed (battle victory is confirmed), it is executed at the start of ART. Nine games are guaranteed as the number of additional specialized games. In this case, at least 90 games are guaranteed as the initial number of ART games.

  A skill effect called “ordinary drive 5G drive loop rate 90%” is set for the reward card of the card rank “7”. With the skill effect of “normal drive 5G drive loop rate 90%”, “5” is set in the specialized counter, and 90% is set in the specialized final game loop rate. Therefore, when the card rank of the reward card acquired at the time of CZ introduction is “5” and the transition to the ART state is confirmed (battle victory is confirmed), it is executed at the start of ART. Five games are guaranteed as the number of games in the added special state. In this case, at least 50 games are guaranteed as the initial number of ART games.

  Note that the number of ART initial games guaranteed with a reward-type card with a card rank “7” is smaller than, for example, the number of initial games guaranteed with a reward-type card with a card rank “6” (90 games). However, in the reward card of card rank “7”, 90% is set in the specialized final game loop rate, so the game in the specialization state is continued with a very high probability, and the number of games in the specialization state of the addition is increased. There is a high possibility that it will continue for a long time, and the initial number of ART games will be 90 games or more, for example.

  A skill effect referred to as “special drive 5G” is set for the reward card of the card rank “8”. With the skill effect of “Special Drive 5G”, “5” is set in the special counter, and 1% is set in the special final game loop rate. Therefore, if the card rank of the reward card acquired at the time of CZ introduction is “8” and the transition to the ART state is confirmed (battle victory is confirmed), it is executed at the start of ART. Five games are guaranteed as the number of games in the added special state. In this case, at least 50 games are guaranteed as the initial number of ART games.

  Further, in the skill effect of “special drive 5G”, the special drive flag is set to the on state. When the special drive flag is in the on state, even if the number of specialized games to be executed after that is won, the specialized final G loop rate obtained is discarded (not overwritten).

  A skill effect called “special drive 5G drive loop rate 50%” is set for a reward card of card rank “9”. With the skill effect of “Special drive 5G drive loop rate 50%”, “5” is set in the special counter, 50% is set in the special final game loop rate, and the special drive flag is set to the on state. . Therefore, if the card rank of the reward card acquired at the time of CZ introduction is “9” and the transition to the ART state is confirmed (battle victory is confirmed), it is executed at the start of ART. Five games are guaranteed as the number of games in the added special state. In this case, at least 50 games are guaranteed as the initial number of ART games.

  Further, a skill effect called “special drive 5G drive loop rate 80%” is set for the reward card of the card rank “10”. With the skill effect of “Special Drive 5G Drive Loop Rate 80%”, the special counter is set to “5”, the Special Final Game Loop Rate is set to 80%, and the Special Drive Flag is set to ON. . Therefore, if the card rank of the reward card acquired at the time of CZ introduction is “10” and the transition to the ART state is confirmed (battle victory is confirmed), it is executed at the start of ART. Five games are guaranteed as the number of games in the added special state. In this case, at least 50 games are guaranteed as the initial number of ART games.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the battle / defense lottery determination is performed in which the skill effects of the attack-type cards and the defense-type cards acquired (ranked up) before the introduction of CZ are performed during the game period in the CZ state. Reflected on the result (lottery result). In addition, as described above, the defense card does not affect the determination result of the battle offense and defense lottery as well as the defense system card of the rank that affects the determination result of the battle offense and defense lottery. Some cards have a rank reflected in their life value (see FIG. 12). In addition, the attack-type cards and the defense-type cards also include cards with ranks that affect the determination result of the battle offense and defense lottery only when a specific internal winning combination such as “out” is determined (FIG. 11). And the rank of “limited at the time of outage” in FIG. 12).

  It should be noted that the attack system card, the defense system card, and the reward system card are basically always displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 11 during the normal state, the time of CZ introduction, and the game period of the CZ state. At this time, each card is displayed with a card pattern corresponding to (suggesting) its rank. Therefore, in the normal game period (excluding the first cycle after setting change), the card pattern changes each time the rank of each card rises. The display of the card pattern corresponding to the rank of each card acquired (ranked up) by the time of introduction is maintained. Further, as the display form of each card, the rank or rarity of each card may be directly displayed. However, details of the skill effects of each card are not displayed.

  The above-mentioned attack-type card, defense-type card and reward-type card are provided, and these cards are displayed in the above-described manner in the normal state, when the CZ is introduced, and during the CZ-in-game state. The following effects can be obtained by always displaying on the screen.

  When an attack-type card and a defense-type card with various skill effects as described above are provided, the contents of the card acquired (ranked up) in the normal state game until the start of the game in the CZ state is CZ Since it is reflected in the game in the middle state (ART lottery), the expectation can be enhanced every time the card is acquired in the normal state.

  In this embodiment, when a card (attack system and defense system card) that is unconditionally reflected in a game in the CZ state and a specific determination result (ART winning) in the CZ state are obtained. Since a card (reward card) that only reflects is provided, a different sense of expectation can be given to the player depending on the type of card to be acquired (ranked up).

<Outline of ART lottery performed in CZ state>
Next, the contents of the ART lottery using the attack-type card and the defense-type card, which are executed in the game in the CZ state, will be described. In a game in the CZ state, a lottery process (hereinafter referred to as “battle attack and defense”) for determining whether or not the life value of the hero character is increased or decreased, or whether or not the enemy character's life value is subtracted or subtracted. And lottery processing (hereinafter referred to as “card skill trigger lottery”) for determining whether or not to activate the skill effect of the attack-type card and the defense-type card acquired in the game in the normal state. The winning / non-winning of the ART is determined based on the lottery result.

  Specifically, for each unit game, first, the presence / absence increase / decrease value of the hero character's life value, or the presence / absence value of the enemy character's life value is determined by battle battle prevention lottery. In battle attack and defense lottery, the life values of the main character and enemy character are not subtracted (no offense and defense), the main character's life value is subtracted (damaged), and the main character's life value is added. Either (Damage recovery) or a result (attack) in which the life value of the enemy character is subtracted is obtained as a lottery result.

  Next, based on the result of the battle attack and defense lottery, a card skill activation lottery is performed, and whether or not the skill effect of the attack system card and the defense system card is activated is determined. Next, when the card skill activation lottery is won (there is a possibility of winning with a probability of 100%), the skill effect of the attack type card and the defense type card is reflected in the result of the battle offense and defense lottery.

  Specifically, depending on the rank of each card, for example, in addition to the main character's life value increase / decrease process and / or the enemy character's life value subtraction process based on the results of battle battle lottery, Based on the activation, the life value of the hero character is added and / or the life value of the enemy character is subtracted. Further, for example, a rewrite process of the result of the battle attack and defense lottery is performed according to the rank of each card. For example, when the rank of the defense card is “3”, “6” or “8”, the skill effect is not the result of the battle offensive lottery, but the initial life value ( It is reflected in the life value at the start of the battle.

  If the life value of the enemy character becomes “0” or less (battle victory) as a result of reflecting the lottery result of the card skill activation lottery, the ART win is determined and the life value of the hero character is “0” or less (battle) If it is defeated, ART non-winning is determined.

  Note that the game period in the CZ state (the number of CZ prescribed games: the upper limit value (ceiling value) is 70 games) is determined by the game in the state when the CZ is introduced, but the digest game in the CZ state is the number of games in this game period. If either of the hero character's life value and the enemy character's life value does not fall below "0" (when the battle win or loss is not determined) even if the value is reached, it is determined that the ART is won.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the life value of the main character and the life value of the enemy character are simultaneously “0” or less, the ART winning (battle victory) is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in this case, ART non-winning (battle defeat) may be used. Further, in this case, a predetermined determination (lottery or the like) may be performed to determine ART winning / non-winning (battle victory / defeat).

  In the CZ state, if the ART winning is determined, the ART winning determination flag (hereinafter also referred to as “winning determination flag”) is set to the on state, and if the ART non-winning is determined, the ART is determined. A non-winning determination flag (hereinafter also referred to as “defeat determination flag”) is set to an on state. Note that these flags are used for the transition control of the payout state. When the ART winning determination flag (win determination flag) is set to the on state, the output state is changed from the CZ state to the ART preparation. When the process for shifting to the middle state is performed and the ART non-winning determination flag (defeat determination flag) is set to the on state, the process for shifting the ball-out state from the CZ state to the normal state is performed.

  Note that the initial value (initial life value) of the hero character's life value and the enemy character's life value is set in the game when CZ is introduced. Here, FIG. 14 shows a table summarizing the initial life value of the main character and the initial life value of the enemy character. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, the initial life value of the main character is set to “1000”. In this embodiment, six types of enemy characters A to F are provided as enemy characters, the initial life value of enemy character A is set to “2000”, and the initial life value of enemy character B is “1800” is set, and the initial life value of the enemy character C is set to “1600”. The initial life value of the enemy character D is set to “1500”, the initial life value of the enemy character E is set to “1400”, and the initial life value of the enemy character C is set to “1000”.

  That is, when the enemy character A is the strongest enemy character and the enemy character A is set as the enemy character, it is most difficult for the hero character to win the battle and the most difficult to win ART. On the other hand, when the enemy character F is the weakest enemy character and the enemy character F is set as the enemy character, the hero character will most easily win the battle, and will be most likely to win the ART. In the present embodiment, an enemy character G that is determined to win the ART is also provided. When the enemy character G wins an enemy character promotion lottery described below in a situation where the enemy character F is set, Set as a character.

  In the ART lottery of this embodiment, when the life value of the main character and / or the enemy character's life value is subtracted by the battle attack / lottery lottery and the card skill trigger lottery, and one of the life values becomes “0” or less. The example of determining ART winning / non-winning (battle victory / defeat) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the life value of the protagonist character and / or the enemy character's life value is added by battle attack and defense lottery and card skill activation lottery, and one of the life values exceeds a specified value (the life value reaches a predetermined threshold) Alternatively, it may be configured to determine ART winning / non-winning (battle victory / defeat).

<Configuration of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 94 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, characteristic functions and features related to the data table will be appropriately described when describing the data table.

[Design arrangement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table is data (hereinafter referred to as symbol code (in FIG. 15) that identifies the position of each symbol in the rotation direction of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R and the type of symbol arranged at each position. )))).

  In the symbol arrangement table, the position of the symbol arranged in the middle area of each main reel within the frame of the reel display window 4 when the reel index is detected is defined as “0”. Then, in each main reel, the symbol counter “0” corresponding to the symbol counter in the order of progress in the reel rotation direction (the direction from symbol position “19” in FIG. 15 toward symbol position “0”) with reference to symbol position “0”. ”To“ 19 ”are assigned to the symbols as symbol positions. Note that the change display order of the symbols is the order in which the symbols move from the symbol position “0” to the symbol position “19”.

  That is, by referring to the symbol counter values ("0" to "19") and the symbol arrangement table, the symbols are displayed in the upper, middle and lower regions of each main reel within the frame of the reel display window 4. It is possible to specify the type of design. For example, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 3L is “8”, the upper, middle, and lower regions of the left reel 3L within the frame of the reel display window 4 have the symbol position “9” respectively. Symbols corresponding to “bell 1”, “replay” at symbol position “8”, and “blue 7” at symbol position “7” are displayed.

[Design combination table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19, the symbol combination table (No. 1 to No. 4) will be described. Here, in order to clarify the configuration of the symbol combination table (to make it easier to see), the symbol combination table is divided into four tables shown in FIGS. The 19 four tables are configured as one table.

  The symbol combination table is a symbol combination (combination and combination name) determined in advance according to the type of bonus (bonus, small role, replay), the content (storage area, data) and payout of the corresponding display symbol code. Define the correspondence with the number of sheets.

  In the present embodiment, when the symbol combination displayed by the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R along the effective line (cross-up line) matches the symbol combination specified in the symbol combination table, a prize is won. It is determined. When it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given a privilege such as medal payout, replay (replay) operation, and bonus operation. In addition, when the symbol combination displayed along the effective line does not coincide with any of the symbol combinations defined in the symbol combination table, it is a so-called “displacement”. That is, in this embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to “out” is not defined in the symbol combination table, so that the symbol combination “out” is defined. The present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol combination table may be provided with an item “missing” to directly define the symbol combination “missing”.

  Various data described in the display combination code column in the symbol combination table is data for identifying symbol combinations displayed along the active line. “Data” in the display combination code column is represented by 1-byte data, and a unique symbol combination (content of display combination) is assigned to each bit in the data. In the present embodiment, one type of symbol combination (display combination) is not necessarily assigned to each bit. For example, 12 kinds of symbol combinations (combination name “C_MB1” is common) are assigned to bit 7 of storage area 1 of the display combination code (display combination storage area described later), and “1” is assigned to bit 7. Is stored, it means that one of the 12 types of symbol combinations has been stopped and displayed on the active line (MB has won a prize). Further, for example, four types of symbol combinations (the combination name “C_RT2 Lip” is common) are assigned to bit 5 of the storage area 2 of the display combination code (display combination storage area described later). When “1” is stored, it means that one of the four types of symbol combinations is stopped and displayed on the active line (replay wins).

  Further, the “storage area” data in the display combination code column is data for designating a later-described symbol code storage area (see FIG. 104 described later) in which the corresponding symbol combination data is stored. In the present embodiment, nine symbol code storage areas are provided. In the present embodiment, display combinations having the same bit pattern (1-byte data pattern) and having different contents are managed as different display combinations depending on the “storage area”.

  The numerical value described in the payout number column in the symbol combination table represents the number of medals to be paid out to the player. In the present embodiment, the number of medals inserted per unit game (multiplied number) is three. In a symbol combination to which a value of 1 or more is assigned as the “payout number” data, medals of the same number as that number are paid out. For example, in this embodiment, when the display combination related to the combination name “C_Bell 1” is determined for the number of inserted three medals (the symbol combination related to “C_Bell 1” is stopped on the active line) When displayed, nine medals are paid out.

  In the present embodiment, for example, when the display combination related to the combination name “C_Replay 1” is determined (when the symbol combination related to “C_Replay 1” is stopped and displayed on the active line), the replay is performed. Operates. Furthermore, in this embodiment, for example, when the display combination related to the combination name “C_BB1A” (when the symbol combination related to “C_BB1A” is stopped and displayed on the active line) is determined, the bonus game (BB1) is activated. To do.

  In the present embodiment, the display combination (the combination names “C_weak cherry” and “C_strong cherry”) relating to the cherry that is a rare combination in the normal state is a small combination in which the number of medals to be paid out is one ( (See FIG. 19). Further, in the present embodiment, in order to display the display combination related to the cherry on the effective line even in the BB state where the payout number of small medals is all nine, it relates to the cherry that can be stopped and displayed during the BB state. A display combination (9 small combinations) is provided separately. Specifically, the display combination related to the combination “slightly C_9 cherries” and “strong C_9 cherries” in FIGS. 18 and 19 is the display combination related to cherries in the BB state (9 small combinations). .

  Note that the stop form of the combination name “C_strong cherry” in the normal state stops and displays the symbol combination (“cherry”-“cherry”-“cherry”) called triple cherry on the effective line (cross-up line) It becomes a stop form to do. On the other hand, the stop form of the combination name “C_9 strong cherry” in the BB state is on the bottom line (virtual line connecting the lower area of the left reel 3L, the lower area of the middle reel 3C, and the lower area of the right reel 3R). It becomes a stop form that stops and displays triple cherries. Note that the symbol “cherry” is a specific example of the specific symbol according to the present invention, and hereinafter, the role related to cherry is referred to as “cherry small role”.

  As described above, even in the BB state, in order to display the symbol combination related to the cherry small combination on the effective line, the cherry small combination dedicated to the BB state is provided as a small combination with 9 medal payouts. In the same manner as in the normal state, it is possible to make all nine medals to be paid out when the small combination is established in the BB state while making it appear that the rare combination is being lottery. In this case, it is possible to prevent the game in the BB from becoming monotonous by increasing the types of small roles in the BB while suppressing variations in profits obtained in the BB.

  In the present embodiment, in the unit game in the bonus, the example in which the configuration in which the payout number of medals at the time of winning a small role is constant is applied to a gaming machine having one effective line has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and this configuration can also be applied to a gaming machine provided with a plurality of effective lines. In this case, the total number of medals to be paid out when a plurality of small combinations wins simultaneously on a plurality of active lines is, for example, the number of medals to be paid out when a small combination wins on one effective line. Configured to be the same. For example, in a unit game with a bonus, in a gaming machine in which the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning a small role is nine, when a small role is won only on one active line, the medals of the winning small role are paid out. When the number of bonuses is 9 and a small role is simultaneously won on two active lines during the bonus, the number of medals paid out for one small role is 5 and the number of medals paid out for the other small role is The type and display mode (outcome) of the small role are set as appropriate so that there are four.

  In the present embodiment, in the symbol combination table, for example, 12 types of symbol combinations included in the combination name “C_MB1” are stored for bit 7 of the storage region 1 of the display combination code (display combination storage region described later). Although the example which allocates collectively, ie, the example which allocates one bit data with respect to multiple types of symbol combination, was demonstrated, this invention is not limited to this. In the symbol combination table, one bit data may be assigned to one symbol combination. For example, the combination names of “C_MB1_01” to “C_MB1_12” may be assigned to 12 types of symbol combinations included in the combination name “C_MB1”, and 1-bit data may be assigned to each symbol combination. When one bit data is assigned to one symbol combination in this way, the configuration of a display combination storage area, an internal winning combination storage area, a carryover combination storage area, and a symbol code storage area described later is also one. One symbol combination is associated with one bit data.

[Bonus operating table]
Next, the bonus operation time table will be described with reference to FIG. The bonus operation time table is stored in a game state flag storage area (see FIG. 100 described later) provided in the main RAM 95, a bonus end number counter, a game possible number counter, and a winning number counter when a bonus operation is performed. Specify the data to be used.

  The game state flag is data for identifying the type of bonus game to be operated. In the present embodiment, three types of BBs (combination names “C_BB1 (BB1A, 1B)” to “C_BB3”) are provided. In the present embodiment, among these three types of BBs, BB (BB1) related to the combination name “C_BB1 (BB1A, 1B)” and BB (BB2) related to the combination name “C_BB1 (BB2A, 2B)” Are managed with the same gaming state flag (see FIG. 100 described later), but the present invention is not limited to this, and an individual gaming state flag may be assigned for each type of BB. In the present embodiment, two types of MBs (MBs associated with the combination names “C_MB1” and “C_MB2”) are provided. In the present embodiment, these two types of MBs are managed with the same gaming state flag (see FIG. 100 described later), but the present invention is not limited to this, and an individual gaming state flag is set for each MB type. It may be given.

  The bonus end number counter is data for managing whether or not the number of medals paid out exceeds a specified number (payout number) that triggers the end of the bonus game. In this embodiment, the specified number (payout number) that triggers the end of BB is “305” regardless of the type of BB, and the specified number (payout number) that triggers the end of MB is the MB. Regardless of the type, it is “45”.

  The game possible number counter is data for managing the number of remaining games that can be performed in the operation of RB and CB, that is, the so-called game possible number. The operation of RB ends when two games are played, and the operation of CB ends when one game is played. The winning possible number counter is data for managing the number of remaining games that can display a combination of symbols related to winning in the operation of the RB, so-called winning possible number. In the present embodiment, the number of possible RB winnings is two.

[RT transition table]
Next, the RT transition table will be described with reference to FIG. The RT transition table is a table that defines the transition conditions of the transition flow between RT states described in FIG. 9, and specifically defines the activation conditions and end conditions of each RT state. Then, the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) refers to the RT transition table and controls the transition operation between the RT0 state and the RT3 state (see RT control processing in FIG. 245 described later).

[Internal lottery table determination table]
Next, the internal lottery table determination table will be described with reference to FIG. The internal lottery table determination table defines the correspondence between the main game state, the number of inserted medals, the internal lottery table to be referenced, and the number of lotteries.

  Specifically, when the main gaming state is a general medium state (RT0 to RT3 state), any one of an RT0 state internal lottery table to be described later to an RT3 state internal lottery table is used based on the RT state type. Then, “78” is set as the number of lotteries. When the main game state is the BB internal state, an internal lottery table for BB internal state described later is used, and “78” is set as the number of lotteries. When the main game state is the BB state, an internal lottery table for a BB state described later is used, and “78” is set as the number of lotteries. Further, when the main game state is the MB operating state (MB state), any of the internal lottery tables for MB (RT0) to MB (RT3) state described later according to the RT state at the time of MB winning. Is used, and “78” is set as the number of lotteries.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, various internal lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 23 and FIG. 24 are diagrams showing the configuration of the internal lottery table for the RT0 state that is referred to when the main gaming state (RT state) is the RT0 state. 25 and 26 are diagrams showing a configuration of an RT1 state internal lottery table which is referred to when the main game state (RT state) is the RT1 state. 27 and 28 are diagrams showing the configuration of the internal lottery table for the RT2 state that is referred to when the main gaming state (RT state) is the RT2 state. FIG. 29 and FIG. 30 are diagrams showing the configuration of the internal lottery table for the RT34 state that is referred to when the main gaming state (RT state) is the RT3 state. FIG. 31 and FIG. 32 are diagrams showing the structure of the internal lottery table for the BB internal medium state that is referred to when the main game state is the BB internal medium state. FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 are diagrams showing a configuration of the internal lottery table for the BB state that is referred to when the main game state is the BB state. FIG. 35 and FIG. 36 are diagrams showing the structure of an internal lottery table for MB (RT0) state that is referred to when the main game state is the MB state at RT0. FIG. 37 and FIG. 38 are diagrams showing the structure of the MB (RT1) state internal lottery table which is referred to when the main game state is the RT1 time MB state. FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 are diagrams showing the configuration of the MB (RT2) state internal lottery table that is referred to when the main game state is the RT2 time MB state. 41 and 42 are diagrams showing the structure of the MB (RT3) state internal lottery table that is referred to when the main gaming state is the RT3 time MB state. Here, in order to clarify the configuration of each internal lottery table (to make it easier to see), each internal lottery table is divided into two tables, but in reality, the two tables are assumed to be one table. Composed.

  Each internal lottery table has a winning number “0” to “78”, a small role / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer associated with each winning number, and each winning number in the corresponding main game state. It defines the correspondence with lottery values when determined. In the present embodiment, lottery values are separately defined according to the settings 1 to 6, respectively. These settings 1 to 6 are provided in order to adjust the expected value of internal winnings such as bonuses and small roles on the game store side. For example, a reset switch (not shown) and a key switch 56 for setting are used. Be changed.

  The small role / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are data obtained as a result of lottery performed with reference to the internal lottery table, and are described later with reference to a symbol combination determination table (see FIGS. 43 to 48 described later). This is data for designating a specified symbol combination (display combination).

  In the internal lottery process using the internal lottery table in the present embodiment, random numbers extracted from a predetermined numerical range “0 to 65535” are sequentially subtracted by lottery values defined according to each winning number. To do. Further, in each of the subtraction processes, an internal lottery is performed by determining whether the result of the subtraction is negative (whether a so-called “digit” has occurred). Then, the winning number when the result of the subtraction becomes negative (“digit” occurs) is won, and the data point assigned to the winning number is acquired.

  Therefore, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the data (that is, the data pointer) to which it is assigned is determined. The winning probability of each winning number can be represented by “the lottery value associated with each winning number / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random denominator: 65536)”.

(1) RT0 state internal lottery table In the RT0 state internal lottery table, a lottery value greater than 0 is defined for the internal winning combination (winning number) relating to the small combination, replay combination and bonus combination. For example, in the internal lottery table for the RT0 state, as shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the winning numbers “1” (abbreviation “F_normal lip 1”), “2” (abbreviation “F_normal lip 2”), “21 ”(Abbreviation“ F_chance lip 1 ”) and“ 22 ”(abbreviation“ F_chance lip 2 ”), a lottery value greater than 0 is defined, but other replay roles The lottery value of the winning numbers (“3” to “20” and “23”) according to is 0. That is, in the RT0 state, the replay roles related to the winning numbers “1”, “2”, “21” and “22” can be won, but the other replay roles are not won (the winning numbers “3” to “3”). Data pointers corresponding to “20” and “23” are not acquired).

  In the internal lottery with reference to the RT0 state internal lottery table, for example, the probability that the winning number “1” (abbreviated as “F_normal lip 1”) at the time of setting 1 is 7066/65536 as shown in FIG. . When the winning number “1” is won, “1” is acquired as the small role / replay data pointer, and “0” is acquired as the bonus data pointer. Note that “1” in the small role / replay data pointer corresponds to the symbol combination (display combination) related to the combination names “C_Replay 1” and “C_Replay 2” (see FIG. 43 described later).

  In the internal lottery with reference to the RT0 state internal lottery table, for example, the probability that the winning number “21” (abbreviation “F_chance lip 1”) at the time of setting 1 is 345/65536 as shown in FIG. become. When the winning number “21” is won, “21” is acquired as the small role / replay data pointer, and “0” is acquired as the bonus data pointer. Note that “21” in the small role / replay data pointer corresponds to the symbol combination (display combination) associated with the combination name “C_Chance Lip 1” (see FIG. 45 described later).

  In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the internal winning combination relating to the abbreviations “F_chance lip 1” and “F_chance lip 2” is an internal winning combination called “chance eye”. As shown in FIGS. 23 to 30, in this embodiment, the probability that the abbreviation “F_chance lip 1” is won is constant (345/65536) regardless of the RT state and the setting. On the other hand, the probability that the abbreviation “F_chance lip 2” is won changes depending on the setting (108/65536 to 113/65536), but when the setting is the same, it is constant regardless of the RT state.

  The “rare role” in the present embodiment is abbreviated as “F_chance lip 1”, “F_chance lip 2”, “F_cherry lip”, “F_common bell 1”, “F_common bell 2”, “ F_Watermelon ”,“ F_Weak Cherry ”,“ F_Strong Cherry ”and“ F_Medium Che ”.

(2) RT1 state internal lottery table In the RT1 state internal lottery table, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the internal winning combination (winning number) relating to the small combination, the replay combination and the bonus combination is a value greater than zero. The lottery value is defined. For example, in the RT1 state internal lottery table, the winning numbers “3” (abbreviation “F_RT2 transition lip 1”) to “8” (abbreviation “F_RT2 transition lip 6”), “21” (abbreviation “F_chance lip 1”). For the replay combination of “22” (abbreviated as “F_chance lip 2”), a lottery value greater than 0 is defined, but the winning numbers (“1”, “ The lottery value of “2”, “9” to “20” and “23”) is 0. That is, in the RT1 state, the replay roles related to the winning numbers “3” to “8”, “21”, and “22” can be won, but the other replay roles are not won (the winning numbers “1”, “ Data pointers corresponding to “2”, “9” to “20” and “23” are not acquired).

  In the internal lottery referring to the RT1 state internal lottery table, for example, any one of winning numbers “3” (abbreviation “F_RT2 transition lip 1”) to “8” (abbreviation “F_RT2 transition lip 6”) is won at the time of setting 1. The probability of doing is 1414/65536 as shown in FIG. For example, when the winning number “3” is won, “3” is acquired as the small role / replay data pointer, and “0” is acquired as the bonus data pointer. The small combination / replay data pointer “3” corresponds to the symbol combination (display combination) associated with the combination names “C_Replay 1”, “C_RT1 Lip”, “C_RT2 Lip”, and “C_Replay 2” ( (See FIG. 43 described later).

(3) RT2 state internal lottery table In the RT2 state internal lottery table, lottery values greater than 0 are defined for the internal winning combination (winning number) relating to the small combination, replay combination and bonus combination. For example, in the RT2 state internal lottery table, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the winning numbers “10” (abbreviation “F_RT3 transition lip 1_B”), “12” (abbreviation “F_RT3 transition lip 2_B”), “14”. ”(Abbreviation“ F_RT3 transition lip 3_B ”),“ 16 ”(abbreviation“ F_RT3 transition lip 4_B ”),“ 18 ”(abbreviation“ F_RT3 transition lip 5_B ”),“ 20 ”(abbreviation“ F_RT3 transition lip 6_B ”), For the replay combination of “21” (abbreviation “F_chance lip 1”) and “22” (abbreviation “F_chance lip 2”), a lottery value greater than 0 is defined. The lottery value of the winning numbers (“1” to “9”, “11”, “13”, “15”, “17”, “19”, and “23”) related to the replay combination is 0. That is, in the RT2 state, the replay roles related to the winning numbers “10”, “12”, “14”, “16”, “18”, and “20” to “22” can be won, but other replays are possible. The winning combination is not won (data pointers corresponding to the winning numbers “1” to “9”, “11”, “13”, “15”, “17”, “19”, and “23” are not acquired).

  In the internal lottery referring to the RT2 state internal lottery table, for example, at the time of setting 1, the winning number “10” (abbreviation “F_RT3 transition lip 1_B”), “12” (abbreviation “F_RT3 transition lip 2_B”), “14” ( Any one of “abbreviation“ F_RT3 transition lip 3_B ”),“ 16 ”(abbreviation“ F_RT3 transition lip 4_B ”),“ 18 ”(abbreviation“ F_RT3 transition lip 5_B ”) and“ 20 ”(abbreviation“ F_RT3 transition lip 6_B ”). The probability of winning is 1414/65536 as shown in FIG. For example, when the winning number “10” is won, “10” is acquired as the small role / replay data pointer, and “0” is acquired as the bonus data pointer. The small character / replay data pointer “10” corresponds to the symbol combination (display combination) related to the combination names “C_RT1 Lip”, “C_RT3 Lip 1”, “C_RT3 Lip 2”, and “C_Cherry Lip”. (See FIG. 43 described later).

(4) RT3 state internal lottery table In the RT3 state internal lottery table, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the internal winning combination (winning number) related to the small combination, replay combination and bonus combination is a value greater than zero. The lottery value is defined. For example, in the RT3 state internal lottery table, the winning numbers “1” (abbreviation “F_normal lip 1”) and “9” (abbreviation “F_RT3 transition lip 1_A”) to “22” (abbreviation “F_chance lip 2”). A lottery value greater than 0 is defined for the replay combination of No., but the lottery values of the winning numbers (“2” to “8” and “23”) relating to the other replay combinations are 0. is there. That is, in the RT3 state, the replay roles related to the winning numbers “1” and “9” to “22” can be won, but the other replay roles are not won (the winning numbers “2” to “8” and “ The data pointer corresponding to “23” is not acquired).

  In the internal lottery referring to the RT3 state internal lottery table, for example, at the time of setting 1, the winning number “9” (abbreviation “F_RT3 transition lip 1_A”), “11” (abbreviation “F_RT3 transition lip 2_A”), “13” ( As shown in FIG. 29, the probability that any one of “abbreviation“ F_RT3 transition lip 3_A ”),“ 15 ”(abbreviation“ F_RT3 transition lip 4_A ”) and“ 19 ”(abbreviation“ F_RT3 transition lip 5_A ”) wins. 6116/65536. For example, when the winning number “9” is won, “9” is acquired as the small role / replay data pointer, and “0” is acquired as the bonus data pointer. The small character / replay data pointer “9” corresponds to the symbol combination (display combination) associated with the combination names “C_RT1 Lip”, “C_RT3 Lip 1”, and “C_RT3 Lip 2” (see FIG. 43 described later). ).

(5) Internal lottery table for BB internal medium state In the internal lottery table for BB internal medium state, as shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the small lottery and the internal lottery table for RT0 state to RT3 state described above are used. A lottery value greater than 0 is defined for the internal winning combination (winning number) related to the replay combination.

  However, in the internal lottery table for the BB internal / intermediate state, as shown in FIG. 32, the winning numbers “58” (abbreviation “F_MB1”), “59” (abbreviation “F_MB2”), “77” for which the bonus combination is won independently. ”(Abbreviation“ F_BB1 ”) and“ 78 ”(abbreviation“ F_BB2 ”) are 0. In other words, in the BB internal state, the bonus combination is not won by itself. In the present embodiment, since the internal winning combination relating to BB3 is not independently won, in the internal lottery table for the BB internal intermediate state, the lottery number “76” (abbreviation “F_BB3 + F_Cherry Lip”) is selected. The value is also set to zero.

(6) Internal lottery table for BB state In the internal lottery table for BB state, as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the winning numbers “21” (abbreviation “F_Chance Lip 1”), “51” (abbreviation “ F_ common bell 1 ”),“ 56 ”(abbreviation“ F_BB medium weak cherry ”) and“ 57 ”(abbreviation“ F_BB medium strong cherry ”) only have lottery values greater than 0. The lottery value of other winning numbers is 0. That is, in the BB state, only the winning numbers “21”, “51”, “56”, and “57” are won, and the data pointer and bonus for the small role / replay corresponding to the other winning numbers are used. The data pointer is not obtained.

  In the internal lottery with reference to the internal lottery table for the BB state, for example, the probability of winning the winning number “51” (abbreviation “F_Common Bell 1”) at the time of setting 1 is 58996/65536 as shown in FIG. Become. That is, in the BB state at the time of setting 1, there is an approximately 90% probability of an internal winning combination relating to the abbreviation “F_common bell 1”, that is, a bell small combination (a small combination in which nine medals are paid out). ) Is determined. For example, when the winning number “51” is won, “51” is acquired as the small role / replay data pointer, and “0” is acquired as the bonus data pointer. Note that “51” in the small combination / replay data pointer corresponds to a symbol combination (display combination) related to all small combinations (see FIGS. 47 and 48 described later).

  In the internal lottery with reference to the internal lottery table for the BB state, for example, the probability of winning the winning number “56” (abbreviation “F_BB medium weak cherry”) at the time of setting 1 is 3700 / 65536. For example, when the winning number “56” is won, “56” is acquired as the small role / replay data pointer, and “0” is acquired as the bonus data pointer. The small character / replay data pointer “56” corresponds to the symbol combination (display combination) related to the combination names “C_Bell 1” to “C_Bell 3” and “C_9 little cherries” (described later). 47 and FIG. 48).

  That is, in the BB state, when the internal winning combination related to the abbreviation “F_BB medium weak cherry” (winning number “56”) is won, the combination names “C_Bell 1” to “C_Bell 3” and “C_9 little less” The symbol combination related to “Cherry” is stopped and displayed on the active line. Then, when the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, nine medals are paid out as a privilege (see FIGS. 17 and 18).

  In the internal lottery with reference to the internal lottery table for the BB state, for example, the probability of winning the winning number “57” (abbreviation “F_BB medium strong cherry”) at the time of setting 1 is 1280/65536. For example, when the winning number “57” is won, “57” is acquired as the small role / replay data pointer, and “0” is acquired as the bonus data pointer. The small character / replay data pointer “57” corresponds to the symbol combination (display combination) related to the combination names “C_Bell 1” to “C_Bell 3” and “C_9 strong cherry” (described later). 17 to 19).

  That is, in the BB state, when an internal winning combination related to the abbreviation “F_BB medium strong cherry” (winning number “56”) wins, the combination names “C_Bell 1” to “C_Bell 3” and “C_9 slightly more” The symbol combination related to “Cherry” is stopped and displayed on the active line. Then, when the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, nine medals are paid out as a privilege (see FIGS. 17 to 19).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, in the game in the BB state, not only a small role where nine medals are paid out but also a replay role (abbreviated as “F_chance lip 1”) Although the winning configuration has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a game in the BB state, only a plurality of types of small roles to which a predetermined fixed number (for example, 9) of medals are paid out may be internally won. In this case, the number of games (games) that can be consumed with the bonus can be set to a fixed value.

(7) Internal lottery table for MB (RT0) state to MB (RT3) state In this embodiment, even in the MB state, lottery processing is performed with reference to the internal lottery table in the same manner as when the bonus is not activated.

  However, in the MB state, as shown in FIG. 35 to FIG. 42, the combination that is the object of lottery in the lottery process using the internal lottery table is mainly the replay combination (partially, duplication of the BB combination and the replay combination). ) Are subject to lottery, and small and bonus singles are not subject to lottery. However, in the present embodiment, in the game during the MB operation, all the small combinations are automatically won internally regardless of the internal lottery. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the lottery process with reference to the MB state internal lottery table, when a replay combination is won, the replay combination and all the small combinations are substantially overlapped. Thus, when the lottery result is “out of place”, only all the small roles are won.

  The type of replay combination to be a lottery object in the internal lottery process using the MB (RT0) state internal lottery table is the internal lottery process using the RT0 state internal lottery table as shown in FIGS. It will be similar to that. As shown in FIG. 37 and FIG. 38, the type of replay combination to be lottery in the internal lottery process using the MB (RT1) state internal lottery table is the same as that of the internal lottery process using the RT1 state internal lottery table. It will be the same. As shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the type of replay combination to be a lottery in the internal lottery process using the MB (RT2) state internal lottery table is the same as that of the internal lottery process using the RT2 state internal lottery table. It will be the same. Then, as shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the type of the replay combination to be a lottery object in the internal lottery process using the MB (RT3) state internal lottery table is the internal lottery process using the RT3 state internal lottery table. It will be similar to that.

[Design combination determination table]
Next, the symbol combination (display combination) determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, in order to clarify the configuration of the symbol combination (display combination) determination table (for easier viewing), the symbol combination (display combination) determination table is divided into six tables, but in practice, The six tables are configured as one table.

  The symbol combination determination table defines a correspondence relationship between a data pointer associated with each internal winning combination and a symbol combination (combination) that can be displayed on an effective line (cross-up line). That is, when the small combination / replay data pointer and bonus data pointer (internal winning combination) are determined, the types of symbol combinations that can be displayed on the active line, that is, the types of display combinations that can be won are uniquely determined. It is determined.

  Various data described in the symbol combination (display combination) column in each symbol combination determination table are symbol combinations that allow display along an effective line set across the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. It is data for identification. The “data” in the symbol combination (display combination) column is represented by 1-byte data, like the “data” in the display combination code column in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. A unique symbol combination is assigned to each bit. In addition, a circle in the data pointer column in the symbol combination determination table indicates a symbol combination (combination) that can be displayed on the active line in the acquired data pointer (internal winning symbol), that is, a display symbol that can be won. Indicates.

  In the symbol combination determination table shown in FIGS. 43 to 48, the symbol combination (display combination) related to the operation of the bonus is defined for each of the bonus data pointers “1” to “5”, and the small combination / replay is used. For each of the data pointers “1” to “57”, a symbol combination (display combination) relating to a small combination and a replay combination is defined. That is, the symbol combination determination table includes the correspondence between the bonus data pointer and the display combination related to the bonus operation, and the display combination related to the small combination / replay data pointer and the medal payout or the display combination related to the replay operation. Stipulates the correspondence with

  For example, when “3” (the internal winning combination of the name “BB1”) is acquired as the bonus data pointer, only the symbol combinations related to the combination names “C_BB1A” and “C_BB1B” are obtained as shown in FIG. Stop display is possible. Further, for example, when “1” (internal winning combination of the name “F_normal replay 1”) is acquired as the small role / replay data pointer, as shown in FIG. 43, the combination name “C_replay 1”. And the symbol combination related to “C_Replay 2” can be stopped and displayed. Further, for example, when “24” (the internal winning combination of the name “F_Left Bell 1”) is acquired as the small role / replay data pointer, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the combination name “C_ The symbol combinations relating to “Bell 2”, “C_Option Bell 01”, “C_Option Bell 05” and “C_Option Bell 09” can be stopped and displayed.

  In the symbol combination determination table, the case where the “internal winning combination” is “out of” is not defined, but this is the case for all symbols defined by the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. Indicates that combination display is not allowed.

[Pattern winning action flag data table]
Next, the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol corresponding winning action flag data table defines the correspondence between the reel type and the internal winning combination data that can be displayed according to the symbol of each reel displayed on the active line. That is, by referring to the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table, the internal winning combination that can be displayed at that time can be determined. The symbol corresponding winning action flag data table is provided corresponding to the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 16 to 19).

  For example, when the symbol “red 7” is stopped and displayed on the winning determination line of the left reel 3L, in the storage areas 1 to 8 corresponding to the symbol code “00000001” (red 7) in the reel type “left”, “1” is stored in a bit corresponding to a displayable internal winning combination. The data defined in the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table is logically AND stored with data stored in a symbol code storage area (to be described later, see FIG. 104).

<Correspondence table of internal winning combination, stop button pressing order and symbol combination>
Next, referring to FIGS. 50 to 54, the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the symbol combination (display combination), and the pressing order of the stop button (hereinafter referred to as “batting order”) in each main game state described above. explain. 50 and 51 are correspondence tables of the internal winning combination, symbol combination (display combination), and batting order when the main game state is the general medium state or the BB state. 52 and 53 are correspondence tables of the internal winning combination, the symbol combination (display combination), and the batting order when the main game state is the BB internal state. FIG. 54 is a correspondence table of the internal winning combination, symbol combination (display combination), and batting order when the main game state is the MB (CB) state.

  In addition, “batting order 1” described in each correspondence table corresponds to the order of pressing the stop button “left → middle → right”, and “batting order 2” corresponds to the order of pressing the stop button “left → right → middle”. In order. “Strike order 3” corresponds to the order in which the stop button is pressed “middle → left → right”, and “Strike order 4” corresponds to the order in which the stop button is pressed “middle → right → left”. “Strike order 5” corresponds to the stop button pressing order “right → left → middle”, and “Strike order 6” corresponds to the stop button press order “right → middle → left”.

(1) General medium state or BB state In this embodiment, when the main game state is the general medium state or BB state, the correct answer is given to the internal winning combination “F_RT2 transition lip 1” to “F_RT2 transition lip 6”. As the batting order, batting order 1 to batting order 6 are associated with each other. Therefore, for example, when the main game state is the general medium state or the BB state and the internal winning combination is a combination related to “F_RT2 transition lip 1” to “F_RT2 transition lip 6”, as shown in FIG. If the batting order is batting order 1 to batting order 6, the symbol combination related to the combination name “C_RT2 transition lip” is always stopped and displayed on the active line. However, for example, when the reels are stopped in a batting order (incorrect batting order) not associated with the internal winning combination “F_RT2 transition lip 1” to “F_RT2 transition lip 6”, “middle lip” or “lower lip” The symbol combination to be called is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  In the reel display window 4, the “middle lip” is a symbol “replay” on a pseudo line (center line) connecting the middle region of the left reel 3L, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the middle region of the right reel 3R. "Is a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed together. On the other hand, the “lower lip” is a symbol “replay” on a pseudo line (bottom line) connecting the lower area of the left reel 3L, the lower area of the middle reel 3C, and the lower area of the right reel 3R in the reel display window 4. "Is a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed together.

  In the present embodiment, when the main game state is the general middle state or the BB state, the correct answer is given to the internal winning combination (“F_left bell 1” to “F_left bell 9”) related to “left bell”. As the batting order, batting order 1 and batting order 2 (batting order in which the left reel 3L is first stopped) are associated with each other. Therefore, for example, when the main game state is the general middle state or the BB state and the internal winning combination is a combination related to “left bell”, the batting order is batting order 1 or batting order 2 as shown in FIG. If there is, the symbol combination of the “left bell” (hereinafter referred to as “bell small role”), in which the number of medals to be paid out is 9, is always stopped and displayed on the active line. However, for example, if the reels are stopped in a batting order (incorrect batting order) that is not associated with the internal winning combination related to “left bell”, the symbol combination related to the bell small combination is an effective line with a probability of 1/9. Stopped on the top.

  In the present embodiment, when the main game state is the general medium state or the BB state, for the internal winning combination (“F_Common Bell 1” and “F_Common Bell 2”) related to “Common Bell”, The batting order is unquestioned. Therefore, for example, when the main game state is the general medium state or the BB state and the internal winning combination is a combination related to the “common bell”, as shown in FIG. The symbol combination related to the bell small part with the number of nine is always stopped and displayed on the active line.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the internal winning combination “F_BB medium weak cherry” and “F_BB medium strong cherry” that are won only when the main gaming state is the BB state (cherry small role with 9 medal payouts). However, the batting order is unquestioned. Therefore, for example, when the main game state is the BB state and the internal winning combination is a “Cherry” combination, as shown in FIG. The symbol combination related to the cherry small role is always stopped and displayed on the active line.

(2) BB internal medium state In this embodiment, when the main game state is the BB internal medium state, the internal winning combination is a combination related to “bell” (“F_left bell 1” (winning number 24) to “F_common”). The order of batting is unquestioned for “Bell 2” (winning number 52). Therefore, for example, when the main game state is the BB internal state and the internal winning combination is a “bell” combination, as shown in FIG. 53, the number of medals to be paid out is 9 regardless of the order of batting. The combination of symbols of the bell small part that is the sheet is always stopped and displayed on the active line. In other words, in a game in the BB internal state, a small combination with a correct answer in the pressing order (batting order) in the non-BB internal state (pressing order) is changed to a small combination with no pressing order.

(3) MB (CB) State As described above, in the lottery using the internal lottery table for the MB (CB) state, the internal winning combination to be a lottery is a replay combination (winning numbers 0 to 23). Apart from the lottery, all the small combinations are automatically won internally.

  In this embodiment, the main game state is the MB (CB) state, and the internal winning combination is abbreviated as “F_normal lip 2”, “F_RT2 transition lip 6”, “F_RT3 transition lip 6_B”, “F_chance”. In the case of a combination relating to “Lip 1” and “F_Chance Lip 2” to “F_RT2 Transition Lip 6”, when the batting order is batting order 1 or batting order 2, as shown in FIG. 54, the combination name “C_9 strong cherry” ”Symbol combination (“ Slightly more than 9 ”in FIG. 54) is displayed on the active line, and when the batting order is any one of batting order 3 to batting order 6, it is associated with the combination name“ C_ slightly less than 9 cherries ”. The symbol combination (“slightly less than 9” in FIG. 54) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  Further, when the main game state is the MB (CB) state and the internal winning combination is a replay combination other than the above-described combination, the combination name “C_9” is set according to the type of the replay combination regardless of the batting order. The symbol combination related to the “slightly weak cherry” or the symbol combination related to the combination name “C_special role” (“special role” in FIG. 54) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  Note that the number of medals to be paid out is 9 even if any combination of the combination names “C_9 cherries”, “C_9 cherries” and “C_special role” is stopped on the active line (see FIG. 16 to 19). In other words, in the present embodiment, when the main game state is the MB (CB) state, the number of medals to be paid out is 9 regardless of the type of game, internal winning combination (including “out”), and batting order. The small role will always win.

<Correspondence between internal winning combination and instruction monitor number (navigation type)>
In the conventional pachislot, information (navigation) of reel stop operation information (push order, etc.) is performed under the control of the sub (sub control board 72) side during ART. However, since the presence / absence of the notification affects the player's profit (out of play), in recent years, it is required to perform notification on the main (main control board 71) side that manages the player's profit. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, the information display 24 controlled on the main side is provided with an instruction display unit (not shown) for informing the stop operation information and the like, thereby controlling the main side. Thus, a function (AT function) for notifying information on the reel stop operation according to the internal winning combination is provided.

  In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, when an internal winning combination (small role and replaying role) with a correct answer is won during the operation of the AT (ART) function, it is associated with the correct answer order of the winning internal winning combination. The indicated monitor number is displayed on the indication display section. The “instruction monitor number” is a numerical value displayed (notified) on the instruction display unit when a navigation occurs, and uniquely corresponds to the notification content (navigation type).

  Here, the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the instruction monitor number (navigation type) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the instruction monitor number and the navigation type. FIGS. 56 and 57 are diagrams showing a correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination relating to the small combination and the replay combination and the instruction monitor number (navigation type). As shown in FIG. 55, in this embodiment, the navigation type displayed on the instruction display unit includes not only batting order navigation but also bonus (BB) notification.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, the instruction monitor numbers “1” to “6” are associated with the notification of the batting order (batting order navigation), and the instruction monitor numbers “7” to “9” are associated with the BB notification. . Specifically, the instruction monitor number “1” is associated with the notification of the stroke order “left → middle → right” (“left middle right navigation”), and the instruction monitor number “2” is associated with the stroke order “left → right”. → Corresponding to “Medium” (“Left / Right Middle Navigation”). The instruction monitor number “3” is associated with the notification of the hitting order “middle → left → right” (“middle left / right navigation”), and the instruction monitor number “4” is notified of the hitting order “middle → right → left” ( "Middle right left navigation"). The instruction monitor number “5” is associated with the notification of the hit order “right → left → middle” (“right / left middle navigation”), and the instruction monitor number “6” is notified of the hit order “right → middle → left” ( "Right middle left navigation"). Also, the instruction monitor number “7” is associated with the notification of BB1 (“Red 7 Navi”), the instruction monitor number “8” is associated with the notification of BB2 (“Blue 7 Navi”), and BB3 The notification (“BAR navigation”) is associated.

  Then, when the correspondence relationship between the instruction monitor number and the navigation type and the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination shown in FIGS. 50 and 51 and the correct hitting order is shown in one correspondence table, the correspondence shown in FIGS. A table is obtained. Hereinafter, the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination relating to the small combination and the replay combination and the instruction monitor number (navigation type) set in the present embodiment will be specifically described.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the abbreviations “F_RT2 transition lip 1” (winning number “3”), “F_RT3 transition lip 1_A” (winning number “9”), “F_RT3 transition lip 1_B”. (Winning number “10”) and “F_left bell 1” (winning number “24”) to “F_left bell 4” (winning number “27”) are assigned to the designated monitor number “1” (left Middle right navigation). Therefore, in the ART state, internal winning combinations related to the abbreviations “F_RT2 transition lip 1”, “F_RT3 transition lip 1_A”, “F_RT3 transition lip 1_B” and “F_left bell 1” to “F_left bell 4” were won. In this case, “left middle right navigation” occurs, and the instruction monitor number “1” is displayed on the instruction monitor.

  Abbreviations “F_RT2 transition lip 2” (winning number “4”), “F_RT3 transition lip 2_A” (winning number “11”), “F_RT3 transition lip 2_B” (winning number “12”) and “F_left bell 5” ( The internal winning combinations relating to the winning numbers “28”) to “F_left bell 9” (winning number “32”) are associated with the instruction monitor number “2” (the left / right middle navigation). Therefore, in the ART state, internal winning combinations related to the abbreviations “F_RT2 transition lip 2”, “F_RT3 transition lip 2_A”, “F_RT3 transition lip 2_B” and “F_left bell 5” to “F_left bell 9” were won. In this case, the “left / right middle navigation” occurs, and the instruction monitor number “2” is displayed on the instruction monitor.

  Abbreviations “F_RT2 Transition Lip 3” (winning number “5”), “F_RT3 Transition Lip 3_A” (winning number “13”), “F_RT3 Transition Lip 3_B” (winning number “14”) and “F_Medium Bell 1” ( The internal winning combination relating to the winning number “33”) to “F_middle bell 4” (winning number “36”) is associated with the instruction monitor number “3” (middle left / right navigation). Therefore, in the ART state, internal winning combinations related to the abbreviations “F_RT2 transition lip 3”, “F_RT3 transition lip 3_A”, “F_RT3 transition lip 3_B” and “F_medium bell 1” to “F_medium bell 4” were won. In this case, “middle left and right navigation” occurs, and the instruction monitor number “3” is displayed on the instruction monitor.

  Abbreviations “F_RT2 transition lip 4” (winning number “6”), “F_RT3 transition lip 4_A” (winning number “15”), “F_RT3 transition lip 4_B” (winning number “16”) and “F_medium bell 5” ( The internal winning combinations relating to the winning numbers “37”) to “F_middle bell 9” (winning number “41”) are associated with the instruction monitor number “4” (middle right / left navigation). Therefore, in the ART state, internal winning roles related to the abbreviations “F_RT2 transition lip 4”, “F_RT3 transition lip 4_A”, “F_RT3 transition lip 4_B” and “F_medium bell 5” to “F_medium bell 9” were won. In this case, “middle right / left navigation” occurs, and the instruction monitor number “4” is displayed on the instruction monitor.

  Abbreviations “F_RT2 Transition Lip 5” (winning number “7”), “F_RT3 Transition Lip 5_A” (winning number “17”), “F_RT3 Transition Lip 5_B” (winning number “18”) and “F_Right Bell 1” ( The internal winning combinations relating to the winning numbers “42”) to “F_right bell 4” (winning number “45”) are associated with the instruction monitor number “5” (right middle left navigation). Therefore, in the ART state, internal winning combinations related to the abbreviations “F_RT2 transition lip 5”, “F_RT3 transition lip 5_A”, “F_RT3 transition lip 5_B” and “F_right bell 1” to “F_right bell 4” were won. In such a case, “middle right / left navigation” occurs, and the instruction monitor number “5” is displayed on the instruction monitor.

  Also, the abbreviations “F_RT2 transition lip 6” (winning number “8”), “F_RT3 transition lip 6_A” (winning number “19”), “F_RT3 transition lip 6_B” (winning number “20”) and “F_right bell 5” ”(Winning number“ 46 ”) to“ F_right bell 9 ”(winning number“ 50 ”) is associated with the instruction monitor number“ 6 ”(right middle left navigation). Therefore, in the ART state, internal winning combinations related to the abbreviations “F_RT2 transition lip 6”, “F_RT3 transition lip 6_A”, “F_RT3 transition lip 6_B” and “F_right bell 5” to “F_right bell 9” were won. In this case, “right middle left navigation” occurs, and the instruction monitor number “6” is displayed on the instruction monitor.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal state and the ART state, when the BB combination is won internally, after the BB is won on the main side, BB notification (instruction) is performed by the instruction display unit at a predetermined timing. And the notification timing of BB by the instruction | indication display part changes according to a ball appearance state.

  Specifically, in the normal state, after winning the BB, after the 2 games are digested, the instruction display unit notifies the BB role, and in the ART state and the specialization state, the instruction is given after the 3 games are digested after the BB is won. The notification of the BB combination by the display unit is performed, and in the other played states, the BB combination is notified by the instruction display unit after one game is completed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the BB combination is won, the combination having the correct answer in the pushing order (batting order) in the non-BB internal state (pushing order) is changed to an unquestioned pushing order. Therefore, when the BB combination is won in the ART state game, the batting order navigation is not required in the BB internal state game. However, even in this case, in the present embodiment, when the pushing order is won, the batting order navigation (unnecessary navigation) corresponding to the pushing order is generated, so that no navigation situation does not occur in the ART state. .

  In the pachislot machine 1 having such a notification specification, by providing the above-described instruction (navigation) mode when winning the BB, even if a navigation unnecessary situation occurs during the ART state, the situation is in the BB internal state ( It is possible to prevent the player from easily recognizing that navigation is unnecessary.

<Correspondence table between internal winning combination and main lottery flag>
In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 performs various lottery processes relating to the control of the payout state (control of the AT function (ART), etc.). In the various lottery tables used for the lottery process, A lottery value is defined for each flag called a “main lottery flag” set in association with the type of the internal winning combination, not for each winning combination. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when performing lottery processing with reference to these lottery tables, first, the internal winning combination is converted to the main lottery flag, and then based on the main lottery flag generated by conversion. A lottery process is performed. In the present embodiment, the information related to the internal winning combination (information included in the start command) transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 is a main lottery flag.

  Here, FIGS. 58 to 60 show correspondence tables between internal winning combinations and main lottery flags. 58 and 59 are correspondence tables between the internal winning combination and the main lottery flag when the main game state is a state when the MB is not operated, and FIG. 60 is a state where the main game state is a state when the MB is operated. Is a correspondence table between the internal winning combination and the main lottery flag. In each correspondence table, “out” (winning number “0”) is also included as an internal winning combination, and the abbreviation of the main lottery flag is also described.

  In the conversion process of the internal winning combination to the main lottery flag in the present embodiment, a plurality of internal winning combinations belonging to the same type are combined into one main lottery flag. When the MB is not in operation (normal time), the flag conversion causes 60 types of internal winning combinations (winning numbers “0” to “59” regarding the small combination, replay combination and MB combination as shown in FIGS. 58 and 59. ”) Is converted into 15 types of main lottery flags (flag numbers“ 0 ”to“ 14 ”: flag data).

  For example, the internal winning combination relating to the abbreviations “F_normal lip 1” (winning number “1”) and “F_normal lip 2” (winning number “2”) are both the main lottery flag “F_normal lip” (flag number). “1”). All of the internal winning combinations relating to the abbreviations “F_RT2 transition lip 1” (winning number “2”) to “F_RT2 transition lip 6” (winning number “8”) are the main lottery flags “F_RT2 transition lip” (flag number “2”). )). Also, any of the internal winning combinations relating to the abbreviations “F_RT3 transition lip 1_A” (winning number “9”) to “F_RT3 transition lip 6_B” (winning number “20”) are all main lottery flags “F_RT3 transition lip” (flag number). “3”). Further, all of the internal winning combinations relating to the abbreviations “F_left bell 1” (winning number “24”) to “F_right bell 9” (winning number “50”) are the main lottery flags “F_batting order bell” (flag number). “7”).

  Further, for example, the internal winning combination relating to the abbreviation “F_weak cherry” (winning number “54”) and “F_BB medium weak cherry” (winning number 56 ”) is the main lottery flag“ F_weak cherry ”(flag number). “11”). All of the internal winning combinations relating to the abbreviations “F_strong cherry” (winning number “55”) to “F_BB medium strong cherry” (winning number “57”) are the main lottery flags “F_strong cherry” (flag number “12”). ). In other words, in the present embodiment, the main lottery flag is shared between the same type of cherry small combination dedicated to BB operation and the cherry small combination during BB non-operation (normal time). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a separate main lottery flag may be provided for each cherry small combination.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, during the MB operation, 21 types of internal winning combinations (winning numbers “0” to “20”) related to the replay combination include three types of sub-flags (flag number “15”). To “17”: flag data). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the MB is activated, all the small roles are automatically won, so that the winning numbers “1” to “20” (replay roles) are acquired when the MB is activated. In this case, the replay combination and the small combination are overlapped.

  In the flag conversion during MB operation, the abbreviations “out” (winning number “0”), “F_RT3 transition lip 1_A” (winning number “9”), “F_RT3 transition lip 2_A” (winning number “11”), “F_RT3 The internal winning combination relating to “Transition Lip 3_A” (winning number “13”), “F_RT3 Transition Lip 4_A” (winning number “15”) and “F_RT5 Transition Lip 5_A” (winning number “17”) is the main lottery. It is converted into a flag “F_MB combination” (flag number “15”). Abbreviations “F_Normal Lip 1” (winning number “1”), “F_RT2 Transition Lip 1” (winning number “3”) to “F_RT2 Transition Lip 5” (winning number “7”), “F_RT3 Transition Lip 1_B” ( (Winning number “10”), “F_RT3 transition lip 2_B” (winning number “12”), “F_RT3 transition lip 3_B” (winning number “14”), “F_RT3 transition lip 4_B” (winning number “16”) and “ Any internal winning combination related to F_RT3 transition lip 5_B (winning number “18”) is converted into a main lottery flag “F_MB_weak check” (flag number “16”). In addition, the internal winning combination relating to the abbreviation “F_Normal Lip 2” (winning number “2”), “F_RT2 Transition Lip 6” (winning number “8”) and “F_RT3 Transition Lip 6_B” (winning number “20”) is Both are converted into the main lottery flag “F_MB_strong check” (flag number “17”).

<Lottery table used in various lottery processes performed in each payout state>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 98, various lottery tables used in various lottery processes executed by the main control circuit 91 relating to the control of each paying state (control of the AT function (ART), etc.) will be described. To do. Note that the random number denominator of the lottery table described below is all “128” (the random value to be acquired is any one of 0 to 127).

  In the various lottery tables described below, lottery values are defined for each setting, but these lottery values are examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, among lottery tables described below, a lottery table having a constant lottery value regardless of the set value (settings 1 to 6) may be configured to change the lottery value according to the setting. That is, a lottery having no setting difference may be a lottery having a setting difference.

[Common lottery table]
In the present embodiment, a common lottery table is provided in a plurality of types of lottery processes for simply determining winning / non-winning. At this time, a common lottery table is provided for each winning probability.

  An example of a common lottery table is shown in FIGS. In the present embodiment, the common table (the lottery table whose lottery value is “0” for the lottery result “win”) and the winning probability 100% (the lottery value for the lottery result “win” is “128”). A lottery table) is also provided, but the illustration thereof is omitted here.

  61A is a diagram showing a configuration of a common lottery table with a winning probability of 1/128 (about 1%), and FIG. 61B is a diagram showing a configuration of a common lottery table with a winning probability of 5%. FIG. 61C is a diagram showing a configuration of a common lottery table with a winning probability of 10%. FIG. 61D is a diagram showing a configuration of a common lottery table with a winning probability of 15%, FIG. 61E is a diagram showing a configuration of a common lottery table with a winning probability of 20%, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the common lottery table whose winning probability is 25%.

  62A is a diagram showing a configuration of a common lottery table with a winning probability of 30%, FIG. 62B is a diagram showing a configuration of a common lottery table with a winning probability of 33%, and FIG. 62C is a winning probability. It is a figure which shows the structure of the common lottery table which becomes 40%. FIG. 62D is a diagram showing a configuration of a common lottery table with a winning probability of 50%, FIG. 62E is a diagram showing a configuration of a common lottery table with a winning probability of 55%, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the common lottery table whose winning probability is 60%.

  63A is a diagram showing the configuration of a common lottery table with a winning probability of 66%, FIG. 63B is a diagram showing the configuration of a common lottery table with a winning probability of 70%, and FIG. 63C is a winning probability. It is a figure which shows the structure of the common lottery table which becomes 75%. FIG. 63D is a diagram showing a configuration of a common lottery table with a winning probability of 80%, FIG. 63E is a diagram showing a configuration of a common lottery table with a winning probability of 90%, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the common lottery table in which the winning probability is 95%.

  In each common lottery table, winning / non-winning lottery values are set so that corresponding winning probabilities are obtained. In the present embodiment, in each common lottery table, the lottery value associated with each lottery result is constant regardless of the setting.

  The common lottery table in which the winning probability shown in FIG. 61A is 1/128 (about 1%) is, for example, when the specialized final game loop rate in the added special state is 1% (for example, the rank of the reward system card is (In the case of “0” to “2” or “8”), it is used in the continuous lottery performed in the final game in the specialization state (see FIG. 13).

  The common lottery table having a winning probability of 25% shown in FIG. 61F activates the skill effect of an attack card with a card rank “1” and a defense card with a card rank “2” in, for example, a game in the CZ state. It is used in a lottery (card skill activation lottery) (see FIG. 11 and FIG. 12).

  The common lottery table having a winning probability of 33% shown in FIG. 62B is, for example, a lottery (card skill activation lottery) for determining whether or not to activate the skill effect of the defense card of the card rank “4” in the game in the CZ state. ) (See FIG. 12).

  The common lottery table with a 50% winning probability shown in FIG. 62D is, for example, an attack card with a card rank “2” or “3” or a defense with a card rank “1” or “7” in a game in the CZ state. It is used in a lottery (card skill activation lottery) for determining whether or not to activate the skill effect of a system card (see FIGS. 11 and 12). The common lottery table with a 50% winning probability is, for example, when the specialization final game loop rate of the specialization state is 50% (for example, the rank of the reward system card is “3” or “9”). In some cases, it is used in a continuous lottery performed in the final game in the specialization state (see FIG. 13).

  In the common lottery table with a winning probability of 55% shown in FIG. 62E, for example, when the payout state is the state when the CZ is introduced, and the main game state is the BB internal state, NBB winning game or MB winning game Used in CZ victory rewriting lottery performed when lever is turned on. That is, in this embodiment, when the appearance state is the state when the CZ is introduced and the main game state is the BB internal state, the NBB winning game or the MB winning game, the ART non-winning is an ART winning with a probability of 55%. Changed to

  The common lottery table having a winning probability of 66% shown in FIG. 63A is, for example, a lottery (card skill activation lottery) indicating whether or not to activate the skill effect of the defense card of the card rank “9” in the game in the CZ state. ) (See FIG. 12).

  The common lottery table with a winning probability of 75% shown in FIG. 63C is, for example, a lottery (card skill activation lottery) for determining whether or not to activate the skill effect of the attack card of the card rank “4” in the game in the CZ state. ) (See FIG. 11). Further, the common lottery table having a winning probability of 75% shown in FIG. 63C is, for example, when the specialization final game loop rate in the added special state is 75% (for example, the rank of the reward card is “4” to “4”). (In the case of “6”), it is used in a continuous lottery performed in the final game in the specialization state (see FIG. 13).

  The common lottery table with the winning probability of 80% shown in FIG. 63D is, for example, when the specialization final game loop rate in the specialization state is 80% (for example, when the rank of the reward card is “10”) ) Is used in a continuous lottery performed in the final game in the specialization state (see FIG. 13).

  The common lottery table having a winning probability of 90% shown in FIG. 63E is, for example, a lottery (card skill activation lottery) for determining whether or not to activate the skill effect of the defense card of the card rank “10” in the game in the CZ state. ) (See FIG. 12). Further, the common lottery table having a winning probability of 90% shown in FIG. 63E is, for example, when the specialization final game loop rate in the added special state is 90% (for example, the rank of the reward card is “7”). In some cases, it is used in a continuous lottery performed in the final game in the specialization state (see FIG. 13).

[Card promotion lottery table]
Next, the card promotion lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 64A shows the configuration of the card promotion lottery table (part 1) referred to when the stage in the normal state is the normal stage (any one of stages A to C) and the lottery state is inaccurate. FIG. 64B shows a card promotion lottery table (part 2) referred to when the stage in the normal state is the normal stage (any one of stages A to C) and the lottery state is highly accurate. FIG. FIG. 65A is a diagram showing a configuration of a card promotion lottery table (part 3) referred to when the stage in the normal state is a special stage and the lottery state is low in probability, and FIG. 65B is a normal state. It is a figure which shows the structure of the card promotion lottery table (the 4) referred when the stage in is a special stage and a lottery state is highly accurate. FIG. 66 shows a card promotion lottery table (No. 5) that is referred to when the appearance state is the normal state and the main game state is the NBB (BB1, BB2) state (the state where the NBB is operating). FIG.

  The card promotion lottery table is a lottery table that is used in a card promotion lottery performed in a game in a normal state and determines whether or not a card rank is promoted (up). The card promotion lottery table includes, for each main lottery flag (internal winning combination), whether or not the card rank is promoted (up) (lottery result: winning / non-winning) and the lottery value set for each lottery result. Define the correspondence. In the card promotion lottery table of the present embodiment, the lottery value associated with each lottery result is constant regardless of the set value.

  When the stage in the normal state is the normal stage (any of stages A to C) and the main game state is other than the NBB state, the card promotion lottery table (No. 1) to FIG. 64 and FIG. Any of the card promotion lottery tables (part 4) is used in the card promotion lottery. In this case, if the main lottery flag (internal winning combination) is other than “out of”, any main lottery flag may win a card promotion lottery regardless of the type of stage and the type of lottery state. . In particular, when a rare role (main lottery flag “weak chance”, “strong chance”, “watermelon”, “weak cherry” or “strong cherry”) is won, the winning probability of the card promotion lottery becomes very high, and the stage Except for the case where is a normal stage and the lottery state is inaccurate, it is configured to always win a card promotion lottery (see FIGS. 64B, 65A and 65B).

[Card promotion attribute lottery table]
Next, the card promotion attribute lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 67A is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a card promotion attribute lottery table (part 1) referred to when the stage in the normal state is stage A, and FIG. 67B is a stage B in the normal state. It is a figure which shows the structure of the card promotion attribute lottery table (the 2) referred in the case. FIG. 67C is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a card promotion attribute lottery table (part 3) referred to when the stage in the normal state is stage C, and FIG. 67D is a case where the stage in the normal state is a special stage. It is a figure which shows the structure of the card promotion attribute lottery table (the 4) referred. FIG. 67E shows a card promotion attribute lottery table (No. 5) that is referred to when the appearance state is the normal state and the main game state is the NBB (BB1, BB2) state (the state where the NBB is operating). FIG.

  The card promotion attribute lottery table is a lottery table that is used in a card promotion attribute lottery performed in a game in a normal state, and for determining the type (attribute) of a card that is to be upgraded. The card promotion attribute lottery table defines the correspondence between the type of the card to be upgraded (lottery result: attack system / defense system / reward system) and the lottery value set for each lottery result. In the card promotion attribute lottery table of the present embodiment, the lottery value associated with each lottery result is constant regardless of the set value.

  In the present embodiment, the attack card and stage A are set to the same attribute, the defense card and stage B are set to the same attribute, and the reward card and stage C are set to the same attribute. Therefore, in the card promotion attribute lottery table (part 1) referred to when the stage is stage A, the lottery value is set so that an attack card can be easily selected as the type of card to be ranked up. (See FIG. 67A). In the card promotion attribute lottery table (part 2) referred to when the stage is stage B, a lottery value is set so that a defense system card can be easily selected as the type of card to be upgraded (FIG. 67B). reference). Further, in the card promotion attribute lottery table (part 3) referred to when the stage is stage C, lottery values are set so that a reward-type card can be easily selected as a type of card to be ranked up ( (See FIG. 67C).

  In the present embodiment, the special stage is a stage in which all of the attacking card, the defense card, and the reward card are ranked with a similar probability, and is referred to when the stage is a special stage. In the card promotion attribute lottery table (part 4), lottery values are set so that all of the attack-type card, the defense-type card, and the reward-type card are selected with substantially the same probability (see FIG. 67D).

[Card promotion number lottery table]
Next, the card promotion number lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a configuration of a card promotion number lottery table (part 1) referred to during normal promotion, and FIG. 69 shows a configuration of a card promotion number lottery table (part 2) referred to during non-stay promotion. FIG. The term “normally promoted” here means that the type (attribute) of the stage being stayed and the type (attribute) of the card to be upgraded are the same attribute. Is when the stage type (attribute) of the staying stage is different from the type (attribute) of the card to be ranked up.

  The card promotion number lottery table is a lottery table that is used in the card promotion number lottery performed in the game in the normal state, and determines the number of cards to be upgraded. In the card promotion number lottery table, for each main lottery flag (internal winning combination), the number of ranks up (lottery result: 1, 2, 3, 5 or 9) and the lottery value set for each lottery result Define the correspondence. In the card promotion number lottery table of the present embodiment, the lottery value associated with each lottery result is constant regardless of the set value.

  In the card promotion number lottery using the card promotion number lottery table, when the main lottery flag (internal winning combination) is other than a rare combination (including “outside”), as shown in FIG. 68 and FIG. The number of rank-ups is “2” or less, and in most cases, the number of rank-ups is “1”. On the other hand, when the main lottery flag (internal winning combination) is a rare combination, there is a possibility that the number of ranks up to “3” or more is obtained.

[Lottery state transition lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71, the lottery state transition lottery table will be described. FIG. 70A is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery state transition lottery table (part 1) referred to when the lottery state is low in the normal state, and FIG. 70B is a diagram showing that the lottery state is high in the normal state. It is a figure which shows the structure of the lottery state transfer lottery table (the 2) referred when it is. FIG. 71A is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery state transition lottery table (part 3) referred to when the lottery state is low in the ART state and the ART fall waiting state, and FIG. 71B shows the ART state and the ART fall It is a figure which shows the structure of the lottery state transfer lottery table (the 4) referred when the lottery state is highly accurate in the waiting state.

  The lottery state transition lottery table is a lottery table used for lottery state transition lottery executed in a game in a normal state, an ART state, or an ART fall-waiting state, and for determining a lottery state transition destination (presence / absence of transition). . For each main lottery flag (internal winning combination), the lottery state transition lottery table includes a lottery state type (lottery result: low / high accuracy) of the transfer destination and lottery values set for each lottery result. Define the correspondence. In the lottery state transition lottery table of the present embodiment, the lottery value associated with each lottery result is constant regardless of the set value.

[First cycle game number lottery table when setting is changed]
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the initial period game number lottery table at the time of setting change will be described. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the configuration of the initial period game number random determination table at the time of setting change.

  The initial period game number lottery table at the time of setting change is used in the initial period game number determination lottery performed when the setting is changed or when the power is restored after 2 hours of power interruption, and determines the number of game games in the initial period of the normal state This is a lottery table. The lottery state transition lottery table defines the correspondence between the number of selectable games (lottery result: 33, 25, 17, 9 or 1) and the lottery value set for each lottery result. In the lottery state transition lottery table of the present embodiment, the lottery value associated with each lottery result is constant regardless of the set value.

  In the present embodiment, the number of games determined in the lottery state transition lottery table is added with any of the random numbers 0 to 7, and the number of games added is the number of games in the initial cycle in the normal state after the setting change. And

  In this embodiment, an example is described in which the main side monitors whether or not a power interruption has occurred for two hours or more (see FIG. 204 described later), but the present invention is not limited to this, The sub side may monitor whether or not the occurrence has occurred for two hours or more.

[Card rank lottery table when changing settings]
Next, the setting change time card rank lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 73A to 73C. FIG. 73A is a diagram showing the configuration of a setting change card rank lottery table for attack cards (part 1), and FIG. 73B shows a setting change card rank lottery table for defense cards (part 2). FIG. 73C is a diagram showing a configuration of a card rank lottery table (No. 3) at the time of setting change for a reward system card.

  The card rank lottery table at the time of setting change is used in the card rank determination lottery performed for each card when the setting is changed or when power is restored after 2 hours of power interruption, and when the setting is changed or power is restored after 2 hours of power interruption. Sometimes a lottery table for determining the initial rank of each card. The card rank lottery table at the time of setting change defines the correspondence between the type of initial card rank that can be determined (lottery result: 0, 1 or 3) and the lottery value set for each lottery result. In the setting change card rank lottery table of the present embodiment, the lottery value associated with each lottery result is constant regardless of the set value.

[CZ regulation game number reduction lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 to 78, the CZ prescribed game number shortening lottery table will be described. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing the configuration of the CZ prescribed game number shortened lottery table (part 1) referred to when the rank of the reward system card is any one of “0” to “2”. These are figures which show the structure of the CZ regulation game number shortening lottery table (the 2) referred when the rank of a reward type | system | group card is "3" or "4". FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a configuration of the CZ prescribed game number shortened lottery table (part 3) referred to when the rank of the reward card is “5” or “6”, and FIG. 77 is a reward card. It is a figure which shows the structure of the CZ regulation game number shortening lottery table (the 4) referred when the rank of is "7" or "8". FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a configuration of the CZ prescribed game number shortened lottery table (No. 5) referred to when the rank of the reward system card is “9” or “10”.

  The CZ prescribed game number shortened lottery table is a lottery table used for the CZ prescribed game number shortened lottery executed in the game at the time of introduction of CZ and for determining the number of shortened games of the CZ prescribed game number. The “CZ prescribed game number” here is the number of games (maximum (ceiling) value is 70 games) indicating the game period in the CZ state.

  In the CZ prescribed game number shortening lottery table, for each main lottery flag (internal winning combination), the number of shortened games (lottery result: 0 (non-winning), 5, 10, 20, 30 or 50) and each lottery result To define the correspondence with the lottery value set. In the CZ prescribed game number reduction lottery table of the present embodiment, the lottery value associated with each lottery result is constant regardless of the set value. In the present embodiment, in the game at the time of introduction of CZ, the lottery result (the number of shortened games) obtained by the lottery for CZ prescribed games is subtracted from the maximum (ceiling) value (70 games) of the number of CZ prescribed games. Then, the subtracted game number is determined as the CZ prescribed game number of the cycle.

  In the present embodiment, when the digest game in the CZ state reaches the CZ prescribed game number, the ART is determined. Therefore, as the number of shortened games selected in the CZ prescribed game number shortened lottery increases, the ART is won. It becomes easy.

[First Battle Offense and Defense lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 79 and FIG. 80, the first battle attack / lottery lottery table will be described. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a configuration of the first battle attack / defense lottery table (part 1) referred to when the main lottery flag is any of “out of”, “replay”, “bell”, and “weak chance”. Yes, FIG. 80 shows the configuration of the first battle attack / lottery lottery table (part 2) referred to when the main lottery flag is one of “strong chance”, “watermelon”, “weak cherry”, and “strong cherry”. FIG. Here, in order to clarify the configuration of the first battle attack / lottery lottery table (to make it easier to see), the first battle attack / lottery lottery table is divided into two tables shown in FIGS. 79 and 80. 79 and 80 are configured as one table.

  The first battle offensive / lottery table is used in the first battle offensive / lottery lottery performed when the main lottery flag is other than “out” and “replay” in the unit game in the CZ state. It is a lottery table for determining a subtraction value. In the first battle attack / lottery lottery table shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the lottery value is defined even when the main lottery flag is “out” and “replay”, but in the actual processing, “out” The lottery value in the “Replay” column is not used.

  In the first battle offensive / defense lottery table, for each main lottery flag (internal winning combination), the life value of the enemy character is subtracted (lottery result: “no offense and defense” (non-winning), “enemy character_life-100”, “ Enemy character_life-200 "," enemy character_life-300 "," enemy character_life-500 "," enemy character_life-700 "," enemy character_life-1000 " The relationship between lottery values set for each lottery result is defined. In the first battle attack / lottery lottery table of the present embodiment, the lottery value associated with each lottery result is constant regardless of the set value.

  For example, if the lottery result “no attack and defense” is determined, the life character subtraction value of the enemy character is “0”. In this case, the enemy character life value is not subtracted. For example, if the lottery result “enemy character_life-300” is determined, the subtraction value of the enemy character's life value is “300”, and the current enemy character's life value is the determined subtraction value “300”. "Is subtracted. For example, when the lottery result “confirm victory” is determined, the ART winning is determined without performing the subtraction process of the life value of the enemy character, and the game in the ART preparation state is started from the next game.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, when the main lottery flag (internal winning combination) is a rare combination, the subtraction value of the life value of enemy characters of “200” or more is obtained as the lottery result. Selected. Among them, when the main lottery flag (internal winning combination) is “strong chance”, “confirm victory” is selected with a probability of 12/128. For a combination other than a rare combination, when the main lottery flag (internal winning combination) is “bell”, a subtraction value of the life value of the enemy character of “100” or more is selected as the lottery result.

[2nd Battle Offense and Defense lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 81A to 81F, the second battle attack and defense lottery table will be described. FIG. 81A is a diagram showing a configuration of the second battle attack / defense lottery table (part 1) referred to when the set enemy character is enemy character A, and FIG. 81B shows the set enemy character. It is a figure which shows the structure of the 2nd battle offense and defense lottery table (the 2) referred when it is enemy character B. FIG. FIG. 81C is a diagram showing the configuration of the second battle attack / lottery lottery table (part 3) referred to when the set enemy character is the enemy character C, and FIG. 81D shows the set enemy character. It is a figure which shows the structure of the 2nd battle offense and defense lottery table (the 4) referred when it is enemy character D. FIG. FIG. 81E is a diagram showing the configuration of the second battle attack / lottery lottery table (No. 5) referred to when the set enemy character is the enemy character E. FIG. 81F shows the set enemy character. It is a figure which shows the structure of the 2nd battle attack and defense lottery table (the 6) referred when a character is the enemy character F. FIG.

  The second battle / offense lottery table is used in the second battle offense / defense lottery executed when the main lottery flag is “out” in the unit game in the CZ state, and determines the subtraction value of the life value of the main character. It is a lottery table for. In the second battle offensive / defense lottery table, the hero character's life value subtraction value (lottery result: “no offense / defense” or “hero character_life-100”) and the lottery set for each lottery result. Specifies the correspondence with values. In the second battle attack / lottery lottery table of the present embodiment, the lottery value associated with each lottery result is constant regardless of the set value.

  For example, if the lottery result “no attack” is determined, the life value subtraction value of the hero character is “0”, and the hero character life value is not subtracted.

  For example, if the lottery result “hero character_life-100” is determined, the subtracted value of the main character character value is “100”, and the life value of the current main character is the determined subtracted value “100”. It is subtracted with. However, even if such a lottery result is obtained, the acquired defense card has a predetermined rank (“2”, “4”, “7”, “9” or “10”). If there is a card skill activation lottery, the lottery result is rewritten as “no attack”, and the life value of the main character is not subtracted.

  In the second battle attack and defense lottery table shown in FIGS. 81A to 81F, only one type of “100” is defined as the subtraction value of the life value of the main character, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a value other than “100” may be defined as the subtraction value for the life value of the hero character, or in addition to the lottery result in which the subtraction value of the hero character's life value is “100”, A lottery result having a value other than “100” may be provided separately.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 81A to 81F, the probability that “non-attack and defense” is selected as the lottery result is in the order of enemy character F to enemy character A in descending order. That is, when the enemy character A is set as the enemy character, the situation that is most difficult to win the ART is most difficult, and when the enemy character F is set as the enemy character, the situation is most likely to win the ART.

[Third Battle Offense and Defense lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the third battle attack / lottery lottery table will be described. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing the configuration of the third battle attack / lottery lottery table.

  The third battle attack / lottery lottery table is used in the third battle attack / lottery lottery executed when the main lottery flag is “replay” in the unit game in the CZ state, and determines the added value of the life value of the main character. It is a lottery table for. In the third battle offensive / defense lottery table, the added value of the hero character's life value (lottery result: “no offense” (non-winning) or “hero character_life + 100”) and the lottery value set for each lottery result Stipulates the correspondence with In the third battle attack / lottery lottery table of the present embodiment, the lottery value associated with each lottery result is constant regardless of the set value.

  For example, if the lottery result “no attack” is determined, the addition value of the hero character life value is “0”, and the hero character life value is not added. For example, if the lottery result “hero character_life + 100” is determined, the added value of the hero character's life value is “100”, and the determined added value “100” is added to the current hero character's life value. Is added.

  In the third battle attack / lottery lottery table shown in FIG. 82, only one type of “100” is defined as the addition value of the life value of the main character, but the present invention is not limited to this. A value other than “100” may be defined as the added value of the hero character's life value, or the added value is “100” in addition to the lottery result where the added value of the hero character's life value is “100”. A lottery result having a value other than “” may be provided separately.

[CZ MB MB point lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the CZ medium MB point lottery table will be described. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a configuration of a CZ MB MB point lottery table.

  The CZ MB point lottery table is used in the MB point lottery that is executed when the appearance state is the CZ state and the main game state is the MB state, and is added to the enemy character in the battle performance. It is a lottery table for determining (subtraction value of the life value of enemy characters). In the MB lottery table in CZ, for each main lottery flag (internal winning combination), points (lottery result: 0, 1, 2, 3 or 5) for calculating damage to the enemy character and each lottery result The correspondence relationship with the lottery value set for is defined. In the CZ MB point lottery table of the present embodiment, the lottery value associated with each lottery result is constant regardless of the set value.

  In the present embodiment, damage that is obtained by adding “100” to the points (0 to 5) determined in the MB point lottery using the CZ MB point lottery table is added to the enemy character (the enemy character's life Subtraction value). Therefore, for example, if the point determined in the MB point lottery is “3”, the damage added to the enemy character (subtraction value of the enemy character's life value) is “300”, and the current enemy “300” is subtracted from the life value of the character.

  In the MB mid-point lottery using the mid-CZ mid-point lottery table shown in FIG. 83, only when the main lottery flag (internal winning combination) is “bell”, “weak cherry”, or “strong cherry”, “1 The above points are determined. With the main lottery flags other than these main lottery flags (internal winning combination), the “0” point is always determined, and the enemy character is not damaged.

[Number of special BB ART games added lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84 and FIG. 85, the lottery table for adding the number of ART games in the special BB will be described. FIG. 84 shows the structure of the lottery table (No. 1) added to the number of special BB ART games to be referred to when the main lottery flag is any of “out”, “replay”, “bell”, and “weak chance”. FIG. 85 shows a special lottery table with the number of ART games in the special BB referred to when the main lottery flag is one of “strong chance”, “watermelon”, “weak cherry”, and “strong cherry”. It is a figure which shows the structure of (the 2). Here, in order to make the configuration of the special BB ART game number extra lottery table clearer (to make it easier to see), the special BB ART game extra lottery table is divided into two tables shown in FIGS. In practice, the two tables in FIGS. 84 and 85 are configured as one table.

  The special BB ART game number extra lottery table is a lottery table used for the extra lottery of the ART game number executed in the unit game in the BB state, and for determining the ART extra game number. In the special BB ART game number addition lottery table, for each main lottery flag (internal winning combination), the number of ART additional games that can be acquired (lottery result: 0G (non-winning), + 10G, + 20G, + 30G, + 50G, + 100G, + 200G) Or + 300G) and a lottery value set for each lottery result is defined.

  In the special BB ART game addition lottery table according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the lottery value associated with each lottery result is determined depending on whether the set value is an odd number or an even number. Change. In addition, between the settings 1, 3 and 5 where the set value is an odd number, the lottery value associated with each lottery result is constant regardless of the set value. Also, between the settings 2, 4 and 6 where the set value is an odd number, the lottery value associated with each lottery result is constant regardless of the set value.

  As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, in the extra lottery for the number of ART games using the extra lottery table in the special BB in this embodiment, the main lottery flag (internal winning combination) is a part of the rare combination (“ Only in the case of “weak chance”, “weak cherry”, or “strong cherry”), there is a possibility that the number of ART addition games of 10 games or more is determined. In particular, when the main lottery flag (internal winning combination) is “weak chance”, any one of 10 games, 20 games, and 30 games is definitely determined as the number of ART addition games. Further, when the main lottery flag (internal winning combination) is “strong cherry”, any one of 20 games, 30 games, 50 games, 100 games, and 200 games is always determined as the ART addition game number, and the three digits It is possible to acquire the number of games on the ART.

[A lottery table with the number of specialized ART games]
Next, with reference to FIG. 86 and FIG. 87, the lottery table for adding the number of specialized ART games will be described. FIG. 86 shows the structure of the lottery table (part 1) for adding the number of specialized ART games to be referred to when the main lottery flag is one of “out of”, “replay”, “bell”, and “weak chance”. FIG. 87 shows the number of specialized ART games that are referred to when the main lottery flag is one of “strong chance”, “watermelon”, “weak cherry”, and “strong cherry”. It is a figure which shows the structure of (the 2). Note that here, in order to clarify the configuration of the specialized ART game number addition lottery table (to make it easier to see), the specialized ART game number addition lottery table is divided into two tables of FIG. 86 and FIG. In practice, the two tables in FIGS. 86 and 87 are configured as one table.

  The specialized ART game number extra lottery table is a lottery table used in the extra lottery of the ART game number executed in the unit game in the extra specialized state, and for determining the ART extra game number. In the special lottery table for the number of specialized ART games, for each main lottery flag (internal winning combination), the number of additional ART games that can be acquired (lottery results: 0G (non-winning), + 10G, + 20G, + 30G, + 50G, + 100G, + 200G) Or + 300G) and a lottery value set for each lottery result is defined.

  In the specialized ART game extra lottery table of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the lottery value associated with each lottery result is different depending on whether the set value is an odd number or an even number. Change. In addition, between the settings 1, 3 and 5 where the set value is an odd number, the lottery value associated with each lottery result is constant regardless of the set value. Also, between the settings 2, 4 and 6 where the set value is an odd number, the lottery value associated with each lottery result is constant regardless of the set value.

  In the extra lottery for the number of ART games using the special ART game number extra lottery table shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, 10 games regardless of the type of the main lottery flag (internal winning combination) (including “out”) The above-mentioned ART addition game number is always determined. That is, in the game period in the specialization state of addition, it is guaranteed that the number of ART addition games for at least 10 games is acquired for each game. Therefore, in the present embodiment, if the ball-out state shifts to the specialization state, the game period (special number of games) in the specialization state set at the time of transition at least × the number of ART games of 10 games (art addition) The number of games) is guaranteed. Furthermore, if the winning (continuous) lottery of the final game in the specialization state is won, the number of additional ART games of 10 games or more is added each time.

  In the present embodiment, an example in which the number of games added to each game and ART is acquired during the game period in the specialization state of addition is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game is not necessarily limited to each game and ART addition game. The number may not be obtained. For example, during the game period in the added special state, the number of ART added games may be acquired with high probability.

[ART game lottery table when winning NBB]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 88A and 88B, the NBB winning ART game number lottery table will be described. FIG. 88A shows the configuration of the NBB winning ART game number lottery table (No. 1) referred to when NBB (BB1 or BB2) is won in a game in an ART state, an ART preparation state, or an ART fall-awaiting state. FIG. FIG. 88B is a diagram showing a configuration of an NBB winning-time ART game number random determination table (part 2) referred to when an NBB (BB1 or BB2) is won in a game in an added special state.

  The NBB winning ART game number extra lottery table is used in the extra lottery for the number of ART games executed in the NBB winning game in the ART state, ART ready state, ART fall waiting state or extra special state. It is a lottery table for determining. In the NBB winning ART game number lottery table, the number of additional ART games that can be acquired (lottery results: 0G (non-winning), + 10G, + 20G, + 30G, + 50G, + 100G, + 200G, or + 300G) and the lottery results Define the correspondence with the set lottery value.

  In the NBB winning ART game number adding lottery table of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 88A and 88B, the lottery value associated with each lottery result changes depending on whether the set value is an odd number or an even number. Let In addition, between the settings 1, 3 and 5 where the set value is an odd number, the lottery value associated with each lottery result is constant regardless of the set value. Also, between the settings 2, 4 and 6 where the set value is an odd number, the lottery value associated with each lottery result is constant regardless of the set value.

  In the extra lottery for the number of ART games using the lottery table, the number of ART extra games for 10 or more games is always determined. In particular, in the NBB winning game in the specialization state of addition, it is also possible to acquire the number of ART addition games of 200 games or 300 games by this additional lottery, and the NBB winning game in the ART state, the ART preparation state, or the ART fall waiting state Compared to the case, a larger number of ART addition games can be obtained.

[Stage lottery table]
Next, the stage lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 89A to 89F. FIG. 89A is a diagram showing a configuration of a stage lottery table (part 1) referred to in a situation other than the gaming situation described later (“others” in FIG. 89A) in which the stage lottery tables in FIGS. 89B to 89F are referred to. . FIG. 89B is a diagram showing a configuration of a stage lottery table (part 2) referred to when the stage in the normal state of the previous cycle is a special stage. FIG. 89C is a diagram showing a configuration of a stage lottery table (part 3) referred to when the stages in the normal state in the previous cycle and the previous cycle are the same. FIG. 89D is a diagram showing a configuration of a stage lottery table (part 4) referred to when the number of cycles is a multiple of 5. FIG. 89E is a diagram showing a configuration of a stage lottery table (No. 5) referred to after the end of ART. FIG. 89F is a diagram showing a configuration of a stage lottery table (No. 6) referred to at the time of setting change.

  The stage lottery table is used in the stage lottery performed when the appearance state shifts to the normal state. After the setting is changed or after the ART ends, the stage in the normal state of the first cycle and the second cycle is determined. Otherwise, it is a lottery table for determining the stage in the normal state in the next cycle. In the stage lottery table, a correspondence relationship between settable stage types (lottery results: stage A, stage B, stage C, or special stage) and lottery values set for each lottery result is defined.

  As shown in FIGS. 89E and 89F, in the stage lottery table that is referred to after the end of ART and the setting change, the lottery value associated with each lottery result is constant regardless of the set value. However, in the stage lottery table that is referred to in cases other than those after the end of ART and after the setting change, as shown in FIGS. 89A to 89D, lottery values are set for the settings 1 to 3 and for the settings 4 to 6. To change. In addition, between the settings 1 to 3, the lottery value associated with each lottery result is constant regardless of the setting value, and even between the settings 4 to 6, the lottery value associated with each lottery result is set. It is constant regardless of the value.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 89C and 89D, in the stage lottery table that is referred to when the stage in the normal state of the previous period and the previous period is the same, and when the number of periods is a multiple of 5, A, stage B, stage C or special stage is determined with approximately the same probability. As shown in FIG. 89E, a special stage is always determined in the stage lottery table that is referred to after the end of ART.

[Enemy character lottery table]
Next, the enemy character lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91. FIG. 90A is a diagram showing a configuration of an enemy character lottery table (part 1) referred to when determining an enemy character to play against the main character in a game in the CZ state performed after the end of the normal state of the first cycle. It is. FIG. 90B is a diagram showing a configuration of an enemy character lottery table (part 2) referred to when determining an enemy character to play against the main character in a game in the CZ state performed after the end of the normal state of the second cycle. It is. FIG. 90C is a diagram showing a configuration of an enemy character lottery table (part 3) referred to when determining an enemy character to play against the main character in a game in the CZ state performed after the end of the normal state in the third cycle. It is. FIG. 91A is a diagram showing a configuration of an enemy character lottery table (part 4) referred to when determining an enemy character to play against the main character in a game in the CZ state performed after the end of the normal state of the fourth cycle. It is. FIG. 91B is a diagram showing a configuration of an enemy character lottery table (No. 5) referred to when determining an enemy character to play against the main character in a game in the CZ state performed after the end of the normal state of the fifth cycle. It is. Also, FIG. 91C shows an enemy character that is referred to when determining an enemy character to fight against the hero character in a game in the CZ state performed after the normal state of the first cycle and the second cycle after the setting change. It is a figure which shows the structure of a lottery table.

  The enemy character lottery table is used in the enemy character lottery that is performed when the appearance state shifts to the normal state. After the setting is changed, each enemy character in the first and second cycles is determined. Is a lottery table for determining the enemy character in the next cycle. In the enemy character lottery table, a settable enemy character type (lottery result: enemy character A, enemy character B, enemy character C, enemy character D, enemy character E or enemy character F) is set for each lottery result. Specify the correspondence with lottery values. In this embodiment, the enemy character lottery table for the fifth cycle from the enemy character lottery table for the first cycle is used repeatedly in this order at intervals of five cycles.

  As shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, within the period of five cycles, the number of normal game cycles increases and the probability that the enemy character D to enemy character F are determined increases. That is, if the number of consecutive normal game cycles increases within a period of 5 cycles (when the number of consecutive ART non-winning increases), the probability that an enemy character with a low initial life value will win increases. The enemy character lottery table is set so as to increase the ART winning probability. However, if ART non-winning is confirmed even in the 5th cycle, the enemy character is set using the enemy character lottery table in the 1st cycle in the next cycle, so the probability that an enemy character with a low initial life value will win is set. Lower. That is, in this embodiment, the probability that an enemy character with a low initial life value wins (ART winning probability) periodically changes at intervals of five cycles.

[NBB winning enemy character promotion lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 92, an NBB winning enemy character promotion lottery table will be described. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the structure of the NBB winning enemy character promotion lottery table.

  The NBB winning enemy character promotion lottery table is used in the NBB winning enemy character promotion lottery performed when winning the NBB in a normal unit game, and the enemy character type is set to the enemy character F (Easy to win an ART. This is a lottery table for determining whether or not to change to an enemy character. The NBB winning enemy character promotion lottery table defines the correspondence between the presence / absence of enemy character promotion (lottery result: winning / non-winning) and the lottery value set for each lottery result.

  In the NBB winning enemy character promotion lottery table of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92, the lottery value associated with each lottery result is changed depending on whether the set value is an odd number or an even number. In addition, between the settings 1, 3 and 5 where the set value is an odd number, the lottery value associated with each lottery result is constant regardless of the set value. Also, between the settings 2, 4 and 6 where the set value is an odd number, the lottery value associated with each lottery result is constant regardless of the set value.

  When the currently set enemy character is one of the enemy characters A to E, when the NBB winning enemy character promotion lottery is won, the currently set enemy character type is changed to the enemy character F. However, when the currently set enemy character is the enemy character F and the NBB winning enemy character promotion lottery is won, the enemy character type is changed to the enemy character G (the enemy character determined to be the ART winner).

[Lottery table with additional number of specialized games]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93 to FIG. 98, the lottery table with the number of specialized games added will be described.

  FIG. 93 shows the lottery table with the number of specialized games to be referred to when the main lottery flag is one of “out of”, “replay”, and “bell” and the lottery state is inaccurate (part 1). FIG. 94 shows a special reference that is referred to when the main lottery flag is one of “weak chance”, “strong chance”, and “watermelon”, and the lottery state is low probability. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing the configuration of the lottery table (No. 2) added to the number of activated games. FIG. 95 shows that the main lottery flag is either “weak cherry” or “strong cherry”, and the lottery state is low. It is a figure which shows the structure of the special game number addition lottery table (the 3) referred in the case. Here, in order to clarify the configuration of the lottery table added with the number of specialized games (for easier viewing), the lottery table added with the number of specialized games is divided into three tables shown in FIGS. Actually, the three tables in FIGS. 93 to 95 are configured as one table.

  FIG. 96 shows the lottery table with the number of specialized games to be referred to when the main lottery flag is one of “out”, “replay”, and “bell” and the lottery state is highly accurate (part 4). FIG. 97 is a special reference that is referred to when the main lottery flag is one of “weak chance”, “strong chance”, and “watermelon”, and the lottery state is highly accurate. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing the structure of the lottery table (No. 5) added to the number of activated games. FIG. 98 shows that the main lottery flag is either “weak cherry” or “strong cherry” and the lottery state is highly accurate. It is a figure which shows the structure of the special game number addition lottery table (the 6) referred in the case. Here, in order to clarify the configuration of the lottery table added with the number of specialized games (for easier viewing), the lottery table added with the number of specialized games is divided into three tables shown in FIGS. 96 to 98. Actually, the three tables in FIGS. 96 to 98 are configured as one table.

  The special game number extra lottery table is used in the extra lottery executed in the unit game of the ART preparation state, the ART lottery or the ART fall waiting state, and the special game number (special game number). It is a lottery table for determining the number of specialized extra games and the specialized final game loop rate.

In the special game number additional lottery table, for each main lottery flag (internal winning combination), the combination type (lottery result) of the number of special additional games that can be acquired and the special final game loop rate to be re-determined, The correspondence relationship with the lottery value set for the lottery result is defined. In the present embodiment, there are the following 15 types of combinations of the number of specialized additional games that can be obtained as a lottery result and the specialized final game loop rate to be redetermined (see FIGS. 93 to 98).
(1) Non-winning (2) Counter “1”, specialized final game loop rate “1/128 (1%)”
(3) Counter “1”, specialized final game loop rate “50%”
(4) Counter “1”, specialized final game loop rate “80%”
(5) Counter “6”, specialized final game loop rate “66%”
(6) Counter “1”, specialized final game loop rate “90%”
(7) Counter “8”, specialized final game loop rate “66%”
(8) Counter “6”, specialized final game loop rate “80%”
(9) Counter “10”, specialized final game loop rate “66%”
(10) Counter “8”, specialized final game loop rate “80%”
(11) Counter “11”, specialized final game loop rate “66%”
(12) Counter “10”, specialized final game loop rate “80%”
(13) Counter “13”, specialized final game loop rate “66%”
(14) Counter “11”, specialized final game loop rate “80%”
(15) Counter “13”, specialized final game loop rate “80%”

  The value of the “counter” defined in the lottery results (1) to (15) indicates the number of special added games, and the value of the “specialized final game loop rate” is the specialized final game to be re-determined. It is a loop rate. Therefore, for example, when the lottery result (12) is determined, 10 games are added to the number of specialized games, and the specialized final game loop rate is changed to 80%. In addition, when the special final game loop rate currently set is equal to or higher than the special final game loop rate determined by the lottery result, or when the ART is being prepared and the special drive flag is on. Does not change the specialized final game loop rate. In this embodiment, as a general rule, rewriting (demotion) to the “specialized final game loop rate” (continuation rate) that is disadvantageous for the player is not performed, but the “specialized final game loop” that is advantageous for the player is not performed. Only rewrite (promotion) to "rate".

  Further, in the lottery table with the number of specialized games added according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 to 98, the lottery value associated with each lottery result is determined depending on whether the set value is an odd number or an even number. Change. In addition, between the settings 1, 3 and 5 where the set value is an odd number, the lottery value associated with each lottery result is constant regardless of the set value. Also, between the settings 2, 4 and 6 where the set value is an odd number, the lottery value associated with each lottery result is constant regardless of the set value.

  As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, in the special game number addition lottery using the special game number addition lottery table when the lottery state is low probability, the main lottery flag (internal winning combination) is set to “strong cherry”. ”, The number of specialized additional games for one or more games is always determined. Also, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, in the special game number addition lottery using the special game number addition lottery table when the lottery state is highly accurate, the main lottery flag (internal winning combination) is “ When it is “strong chance” or “strong cherry”, the number of special games for one or more games is always determined.

<Configuration of storage area provided in main RAM>
Next, the configuration of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 95 will be described with reference to FIGS. Although not described here (not shown), the main RAM 95 is also provided with storage areas for various control data, various counters, and the like that are used in various game control operations in a variety of balls that will be described later.

[Display combination storage area, internal winning combination storage area and carryover combination storage area]
First, the structure of the display combination storing area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the display combination storage area includes display combination storage areas 1 to 8 each represented by 1-byte data.

  In each of the display combination storage areas 1 to 8, when “1” is stored in a predetermined bit, it indicates that the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined bit is displayed on the active line. On the other hand, when all the bits are “0”, it indicates that the symbol combination related to winning is not displayed on the active line.

  The main RAM 95 is provided with an internal winning combination storing area. The internal winning combination storing area is configured similarly to the display winning combination storing area shown in FIG. In the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 8, when “1” stands for a plurality of bits, display of symbol combinations corresponding to the respective bits is permitted. When all the bits are “0”, the content of the internal winning combination is “out of”.

  The main RAM 95 is provided with a carryover combination storage area. The carryover combination storage area is configured in the same manner as the display combination storage area 1 shown in FIG. However, bit 7 of the storage area is unused.

  As a result of the internal lottery, for example, when an internal winning combination corresponding to the symbol combination (display combination) of the name “C_BB1A” is determined as the internal winning combination, the internal winning combination is determined as a carryover combination in the carryover combination storage area. In the area (bit 2 area). The carryover combination stored in the carryover combination storage area is displayed until the corresponding symbol combination (for example, the symbol combination “red 7”-“red 7”-“red 7”) of the name “C_BB1A” is displayed on the active line. Retained without being cleared. While the carryover combination is stored in the carryover combination storage area, the carryover combination is stored in the internal winning combination storage area in addition to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery.

[Game state flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The game state flag storage area is composed of game state flag storage areas 1 and 2 each represented by 1-byte data. In this embodiment, a unique RT state type, bonus internal / medium state type, or bonus gaming state type, that is, a main gaming state type, is assigned to each bit of the gaming state flag storage areas 1 and 2. .

  In the game state flag storage area 1 or 2, when “1” is stored (standing) in a predetermined bit, an RT operation, a bonus game operation, or a bonus internal medium game corresponding to the predetermined bit is stored. Indicates that operation is taking place. For example, when “1” is stored in bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area 1, a game in the RT0 state is being performed, and “1” is stored in bit 4 of the gaming state flag storage area 1 Sometimes, it indicates that a game is being played in the BB1 internal state or the BB2 internal state. Also, for example, when “1” is stored in bit 6 of the gaming state flag storage area 1, a game of BB1 or BB2 is being performed, and “1” is stored in bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area 2 When it is being played, it indicates that a game is being performed in the MB state at RT0.

[Out-of-game flag storage area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the structure of the appearance ball state flag storage area will be described. The ball appearance state flag storage area stores a ball appearance state flag consisting of 1 byte. In the outgoing ball state flag storage area, a corresponding outgoing ball state is assigned to each bit.

  For example, when the appearance state is the normal state, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the appearance state flag storage area. Further, for example, when the appearance state is the CZ state, “1” is stored in bit 2 of the appearance state flag storage area, and when the appearance state is the ART state, the appearance state flag “1” is stored in bit 4 of the storage area. Further, for example, when the appearance state is a specialization state, “1” is stored in both bit 4 and bit 6 of the appearance state flag storage area.

[Operation stop button storage area]
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The operation stop button storage area stores an operation stop button flag consisting of 1 byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operation state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

  For example, if the left stop button 19L is a stop button that has been pressed this time, that is, an operation stop button, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Also, for example, if the left stop button 19L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, that is, an effective stop button, “1” is stored in bit 4. Based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area, the main CPU 93 identifies the stop button that has been pressed this time and the stop button that has not yet been pressed.

[Push order storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The pressing order storage area stores a pressing order flag consisting of 1 byte. In the pressing order flag, a type of stop button pressing order (stroke order) is assigned to each bit. For example, when the pressing order of the stop button is “left middle right”, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Design code storage area]
Next, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol code storage area stores, for each active line, the symbol code (symbol code storage region 1) of the symbol of the reel that was most recently stopped and the displayable symbols (symbol code storage regions 2 to 9). The In addition, the symbol code corresponding to the display combination is stored in the symbol code storage area (symbol code storage area 2 to 9) in which a displayable combination is stored after all reels are stopped.

  In this embodiment, when the stop control position is determined, the winning operation flag data corresponding to the symbol (code) of the stop control position is read from the symbol corresponding winning operation flag data table (see FIG. 49), and the winning operation flag is read. The data is ANDed with the data already stored in the symbol code storage area. Then, the ANDed data is stored in the symbol code storage area shown in FIG.

[Instruction flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the instruction (navigation) flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the instruction flag storage area is composed of instruction flag storage areas 1 and 2 each represented by 1-byte data. Each bit is assigned a batting order navigation type or a BB notification navigation type (instruction flag number). The instruction flag number described in FIG. 105 corresponds to the instruction monitor number described in FIG.

  In each of the instruction flag storage areas 1 and 2, when “1” is stored in a predetermined bit, the target combination (pressing combination or BB combination) of batting order navigation or BB notification navigation corresponding to the predetermined bit is stored. Indicates winning. On the other hand, when all the bits are “0”, it indicates that the push order combination and the BB combination are not won.

  For example, in the ART state, when any of the names “F_left bell 1” to “F_left bell 4” wins internally, that is, the pushing order in which the correct hit order of the stop button is “left middle right” is the internal winning In this case, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the instruction flag storage area 1. In this case, under the control of the main control circuit 91, information (instruction monitor number 1) regarding the correct order of the stop button is notified by the instruction display unit (not shown) provided in the information display 24 described above. At the same time, batting order navigation (left middle right navigation) using the liquid crystal display device 11 is also performed under the control of the sub-control circuit 101.

<Sub gaming state managed by the sub control circuit>
In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 performs various effects corresponding to the main lottery flag (out status) managed on the main side, based on various command data transmitted from the main control circuit 91. Therefore, also on the sub-control circuit 101 side (sub-side), in order to control various effects, a sub-management flag (sub-game state) corresponding to the main lottery flag (out-run state) is provided.

  Here, FIG. 106 shows a correspondence table between the main lottery flags and the sub management flags. In FIG. 106, for the sake of convenience of explanation, the game appearance state and the sub game state are also shown.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, the sub management flags are referred to as “normal sub flag”, “CZ introduction sub flag”, “CZ sub flag”, “ART preparing sub flag”, and “ART sub flag”. A sub management flag is provided. Further, in this embodiment, the sub game state managed by the normal sub flag, the CZ introduction sub flag, the CZ sub flag, the ART preparing sub flag, and the ART sub flag are respectively “normal state”, “CZ introduction state”, “CZ”. They are referred to as “medium state”, “ART ready state” and “ART state”. Here, the sub game states corresponding to the “ART state”, “ART fall waiting state” and “addition specialization state” on the main side are collectively referred to as “ART state”, and sub game states other than “ART state” Are associated one-to-one with the corresponding ball-out state on the main side.

  Further, although not shown in FIG. 106, on the sub side, the state during operation of each BB, the state when each BB is won, and the state inside each BB are managed as sub game states. Therefore, on the sub side, various sub management flags (for example, BB sub flag, NBB sub flag, SBB sub flag, BB internal sub flag, story BB flag, etc.) for controlling the BB game are provided. Note that these various sub game states and various sub management flags will be described as appropriate in the processing description of the flowcharts described later.

  In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, various effect functions that are uniquely executed in the sub-control circuit 101, such as an additional notification effect and a special effect, which will be described later, are provided. Therefore, on the sub side, a sub management flag (for example, a game number release flag, a special effect sub flag, etc., which will be described later) for controlling these various effects is also provided. Note that these various sub management flags will be described as appropriate in the process description of the flowcharts described later.

<Various production functions implemented on the sub-side>
In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, in each sub gaming state described above, the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) performs various effects based on the received command data. These various effects include not only effects performed in conjunction with a game in a play-out state managed on the main side, but also effects not linked to a game in a play-out state. Here, contents of various characteristic effects performed on the sub-control circuit 101 side (sub-side) will be described.

[Characteristic performance performed under normal conditions]
(1) Production at the time of setting change or power recovery after 2 hours of power interruption In the pachislot 1 of this embodiment, the condition (RAM clear condition) at the time of setting change or power recovery after 2 hours of power interruption is satisfied. In this case, various data related to the game before the setting change or before the power interruption is cleared, and the game in the normal state of the initial period (first period) is started. At this time, in the case of power recovery after 2 hours after power failure, based on the backup data, various game parameters in the state before power failure (rank of attack system, defense system and reward system card, stage type, etc.) Is set. On the other hand, when the setting is changed, various game parameters are reset to initial values. At this time, in this embodiment, the initial rank values of the attack system, the defense system, and the reward system card are determined by lottery, but the initial card with the card rank “0” has the highest probability in any card. It is set (see FIG. 73).

  And in the game in the normal state of the first cycle (the first cycle) after power change after setting change or power interruption 2 hours, if the card rank is raised by winning the card promotion lottery on the main side, specific conditions As long as is not established, the display effect of the upgraded card is not performed. Specifically, only when a special lottery (card display lottery in FIG. 262 described later) using a card promotion display effect lottery table shown in FIG. Do. In other words, in the normal state of the first cycle after the setting change or after the power return after 2 hours of power interruption, even if the card rank is increased, the display effect of the initial card is continued unless a special lottery is won.

  Furthermore, in the game in the normal state of the first cycle (first cycle) after the setting change or after power-off after 2 hours of power interruption, the number of remaining cycle games displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 is displayed as an actual value. Instead, it is displayed with the character “?” (Hereinafter referred to as “?” Display). In addition, the display mode of the remaining cycle game number in the initial cycle after the setting change or the power recovery after 2 hours after the power interruption is not limited to this mode, and any mode as long as the player cannot recognize the remaining cycle game number The embodiment can be adopted.

  Further, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, when setting is changed, there is a possibility of internally shifting to a high stage (special stage) (see FIG. 89F). However, even if the setting is changed to the special stage internally at the time of setting change, the effect of displaying the normal stage (any one of the stages A to C) on the liquid crystal display device 11 is performed on the effect.

  As described above, in the normal state of the first cycle after the setting change or after the power is restored after 2 hours of power interruption, the occurrence of effects is suppressed. Further, in the normal state of the first cycle after the setting change or after the power is restored after 2 hours of power interruption, the same effect is performed in the display effect of the card, the stage and the number of remaining display games. Therefore, in this case, for example, a determination that the stage display effect is different from the previous day, the display content of the card is different from the previous day, the setting change such as the number of remaining periodic games is different from the previous day, etc. Material can be kept from being given to the player.

  For these reasons, it is possible to make it impossible to determine the presence / absence of a setting change from the contents of the effect by providing the effect function when the setting is changed or when the power is restored after 2 hours of power interruption. Further, even when the setting is changed to a higher stage, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that fact.

(2) Production after demonstration production (production when demo is canceled)
In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, basically, when the medal settlement is completed in the unit game in the normal state, the effect state is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 11 as a demonstration screen (hereinafter referred to as “demo screen”). Shifts to an effect (demonstration effect). For example, “BB in operation”, “ART sub-flag is on”, “Game with ART sub-flag set to off”, “Game whose sub-period counter value has changed from“ 1 ”to“ 0 ”” When conditions such as “when CZ is introduced”, “during CZ”, “when 1 is defined in an effect parameter item“ DB ”to be described later”, “middle MB”, etc. are satisfied, demo transition is prohibited. .

  When the BET operation is detected after the transition to the demonstration effect, the demonstration screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 is switched to the normal game screen. However, at this time, in this embodiment, in order not to know the contents (rank) of each card displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, each card is turned over and displayed. At this time, the number of remaining periodic games displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 is displayed as “?”.

  The display mode of each card and the number of remaining periodic games (production at the time of demo release) is continued after the BET until the player's start operation on the start lever 23 is detected (until the game is started). When the player's start operation on the start lever 23 is detected, the display mode of each card and the remaining cycle game number is the normal mode (the front side of each card is displayed, and the remaining cycle game number is displayed as a number. Return to the mode.

  In the period from the end of the demonstration production to the start of the game, when the demonstration release presentation is performed as described above, information about the game cannot be confirmed unless at least one game is started. Therefore, for example, in a gaming machine (vacant machine) in a state in which no player is present and a player can newly execute a game, information related to the game is prevented from being unplugged by a non-player. (It is possible to prevent a non-player from obtaining information in an empty platform).

  In the present embodiment, an example in which a demonstration effect is started when a medal settlement is completed in a unit game in a normal state (an example in which the elapsed time in the non-BET state is “0” after the unit game ends) will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a non-BET state has elapsed for 3 minutes (3 minutes from automatic insertion at the time of replay winning) or after the game has ended, the non-BET state is 3 minutes (automatic at replay winning). For example, the menu screen is canceled after 3 minutes). The menu screen is released when the menu screen is closed or when no operation is performed for 3 minutes while the menu screen is displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the demonstration release effect, an aspect in which each card is turned over and displayed is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the player cannot recognize the rank of each card, Any aspect can be employed. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the mode of displaying the remaining period game number “?” In the demonstration release effect is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the player cannot recognize the remaining period game number. Any mode can be adopted as long as it exists.

[Characteristic effects implemented in ART state]
(1) ART extra announcement production In this embodiment, the extra special state managed on the main side is a special zone in which the addition of the number of ART games is always performed. However, in the present embodiment, even if the addition of the ART game number is determined in the special addition state on the main side, the determination result (the number of ART addition games) is basically determined on the sub side. There is no presentation (display) as it is in the game (timing).

  Therefore, on the sub-side, the number of remaining ART games displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 (hereinafter referred to as “display ART game number”) and the number of ART games remaining on the main side (hereinafter referred to as “displayed ART games”). , “The number of internal ART games”) (hereinafter referred to as “the number of differential games”). Then, on the sub-side, based on the difference game number, an effect (hereinafter, referred to as “ART addition notification effect”) in which the liquid crystal display device 11 notifies part or all of the difference game number as the notification game number is performed. .

  That is, in this embodiment, the content of the ART addition notification effect is determined based on the number of difference games without directly referring to the number of ART addition games obtained on the main side. Therefore, in the extra announcement effect, as a result, for example, there is an effect in which the number of added ART games determined on the main side is divided and notified over a plurality of games (for example, the addition of 30 games is decided on the main side). In the case of 10 games, the effect of performing an additional announcement effect of 10 games three times) or the effect of collectively reporting the total number of ART added games determined by multiple lotteries on the main side (for example, 10 on the main side) If there is a decision to add a game three times, an additional announcement effect of 30 games is performed once).

  The number of display ART games is counted by a display ART counter provided on the sub side. The number of internal ART games is counted by an internal ART counter provided on the sub side. The internal ART counter is a specific example of the first remaining game counting means according to the present invention, and the display ART counter is a specific example of the second remaining game counting means.

  In the internal ART counter, a value of an ART game number counter (counter for counting the number of remaining ART games) provided on the main side is set for each game. Therefore, each time an addition of the number of ART games is determined in the special addition state on the main side, the determination result (the number of added ART games) is added to the value of the internal ART counter. On the other hand, the number of notification games is added to the value of the display ART counter at the time of execution of the additional notification effect of ART. In this embodiment, the number of difference games is calculated (generated) by subtracting the value of the display ART counter from the value of the internal ART counter. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of display ART games and the internal ART game are calculated. Any method can be adopted as long as it can calculate the difference from the number. For example, during the ART, the current difference game number can be calculated by subtracting the total number of games announced on the sub side from the total number of ART addition games added on the main side. Further, for example, various lottery tables may be referred to by referring to a value obtained by subtracting the value of the internal ART counter from the value of the display ART counter, that is, the number of negative difference games.

  The number of additional games (number of notification games) to be notified in the additional notification effect of ART is determined according to the number of difference games. Specifically, the number of announcement games is determined by lottery based on various game situations including the number of difference games (number of displayed ART games, type of ART stage, on / off state game situation of a character flag, internal winning combination, etc.) It is determined (see various announcement game number lottery tables shown in FIGS. 160 to 193 described later). If the number of notification games obtained as a result of lottery by this notification game number lottery is larger than 0 games, execution of the additional notification effect is determined. The extra announcement effect may be performed in a game for which execution of the extra announcement effect is determined, or may be executed after digesting several precursor effect games (a variety of precursor scenarios described later).

  As described above, in this embodiment, an additional technique for adding the number of ART games performed on the main side is provided by providing an additional notification effect performed based on the number of difference games separately from the addition mode of the number of ART games on the main side. Even if it is a simple method (one-shot lottery, game addition, etc.), it can be made to feel that it is performing a complicated lottery. Therefore, in this embodiment, for example, the playability of adding the number of ART games is produced in an interesting manner with a simpler configuration without increasing the data of the control means or increasing the processing load. be able to.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of ART notification games to be notified in the additional notification effect is determined by referring not only to the difference game number but also to the display ART game number (display ART counter value). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the above effects.

  The number of difference games can be appropriately adjusted according to the number of displayed ART games. Further, the extra announcement effect (the number of notification games) can be adjusted according to the value that the player cannot confirm, such as the number of difference games, and the value that the player can confirm, the number of display ART games. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to design the production content so as to obtain a higher production effect that matches the player's psychological situation.

  For example, when the number of displayed ART games (the value of the displayed ART counter) is a halfway value (a situation in which the number of ART games remains relatively), it is difficult to determine the number of notification games (“0” is determined). If it is set so that it is easy to be performed, it is possible to increase the number of difference games and to easily generate an effect that increases expectation with respect to an additional effect such as a special effect described later. If such an effect is generated when the number of displayed ART games is reduced, an effect with a high expectation is generated in a situation where the player feels impatient, and a high effect can be obtained. it can.

  Although not provided in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, as the sub gaming state, for example, from the expected value of the ART additional game number that can be added by the main lottery (average number of additional games that can be acquired per game) Further, a state may be provided in which the expected value of the number of notification games that can be notified in the additional notification effect (the average number of notification games that can be acquired per game) becomes low. In such a sub game state, since the number of difference games tends to increase, the number of notification games that can be notified by the additional notification effect also becomes a larger value, and the expectation of the addition can be further increased.

(2) Specialized effect In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, a sub-game state (hereinafter referred to as a “specialized effect state”) in which the content of the effect is specialized for the added announcement effect is provided over a predetermined game period. It has been. Therefore, the effect performed in the special effect state (hereinafter referred to as “special effect”) is an effect with high expectation for the player from the viewpoint of adding the number of ART games. The special effect state is a specific example of the special effect state according to the present invention.

  The presence / absence of the transition to the special performance state is the state during normal operation of the ART (BB non-operation, BB non-winning, non-BB inside, ART state during non-specific production: hereinafter also referred to as “ART normal state”) Is determined by lottery (art type-specific lottery described later). In the present embodiment, as shown in an ART special type lottery table described later (see FIGS. 145 to 150, which will be described later), the number of remaining specialized games managed in the main side in the added special state is counted. When the value of the special game number counter to be “6” or more (the number of ART addition games scheduled to be added internally is 60 games or more), there is a probability that the sub game state will shift to the special effect state. Designed to be high. Furthermore, when the value of the specialized game number counter is “6” or more and the difference game number is “40” or more, the sub game state is always shifted to the specialized effect state. Yes.

  In the present embodiment, eight types of special effects referred to as “specialized zone A” to “specialized zone H” are prepared as the types of special effects. Among these special zones, in the special effects in the special zone G, when the number of difference games is larger than 100 games, there is a possibility that the number of three-digit notification games is added and displayed in the notification effect. Note that the game period in the special effect state (the value of the special counter described later) is determined according to the value of the special game number counter managed on the main side and the type of the special effect (discussed later in FIG. 157). And FIG. 158).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a special effect is performed according to the number of ART games (the number of difference games) scheduled to be added internally. When such a special effect (special effect state) is provided, an effect similar to the effect obtained by the above-described extra announcement effect is obtained, and the difference between the number of internal ART games and the number of displayed ART games (difference game) It is possible to prevent the number) from becoming too large, and to prevent the production content from becoming unnatural.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the main game starts from the first game in the ART state, and a special game is performed to determine the initial number of ART games. A special effect is performed from the first game of the state.

  The type of special effects performed from the first game in the ART state is based on the drive type (normal drive or special drive: see FIG. 13) defined in the skill effect of the reward card acquired until the introduction of CZ. It is determined. For example, when the drive type specified in the skill effect of the reward card is a normal drive, special effects in any of the special zones A to C are performed, and when the drive type is a special drive, Specialized effects in the specialized zone D are performed. Specifically, when the rank of the reward card is rank “1”, “4” or “7”, the special effect of the special zone B is performed, and the rank of the reward card is rank “2” or When it is “5”, the special effect of the special zone A is performed, and when the reward card rank is “3” or “6”, the special effect of the special zone C is performed. Is called. Further, when the rank of the reward card is rank “8”, “9” or “10”, the special effect in the special zone D is performed. When the rank of the reward card is rank “0” in which the drive type is not defined in the skill effect, the special effect in the special zone C is performed.

  In the present embodiment, after the third stop of the final game in the ART preparation state (after transition to RT3), the effect for introducing the ART and the effect for entering the special effect are performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, an extra announcement effect is generated by a special effect from the first game in the ART state. Note that the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an effect for introducing an ART and an effect for entering a special effect are performed in the first game in the ART state, and an additional notification effect is generated from the second game. It may be configured. In this case, a difference game number is generated from the start of the ART state.

(3) Special card display effects In this embodiment, in the normal ART state, display effects (effects by UI) of attack-type cards, defense-type cards, and reward-type cards are performed by sub-side control. A special card display (acquisition) effect different from that card is also performed. The special card display effect is a specific example of a specific display effect according to the present invention.

  The presence or absence of special card display effects is determined according to the number of differential games. Specifically, in the ART normal state, a special card acquisition lottery is performed based on the number of difference games, and when the lottery is won, one special card is acquired, and the acquired special card is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. 11 is executed. Note that the probability that a special card display effect will be performed (the probability that a special card will be acquired) increases as the difference game increases.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a determination (lottery) process for determining whether or not to shift to the special performance state is performed with reference to whether or not a special card is displayed in addition to the number of difference games. In the situation where two special cards are displayed and the difference game number is “100” or more, the probability that the sub game state shifts to the special effect state in the special zone H is high. Become.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the presence / absence of the special effect can be controlled based on the display effect of the special card. Therefore, when such a special card display effect is provided, it is possible to prevent the difference between the number of internal ART games and the number of displayed ART games (the number of differential games) from becoming too large, and the number of internal ART games. The difference between the number of displayed ART games and the number of displayed ART games (difference game number) can be effectively suggested by the display effect of the special card.

  The special zone H is a special effect that shifts only when two special cards are displayed. In addition, in the situation where two special cards are displayed, when the transition to the special effect state is determined, an effect of displaying the third special card is performed for the effect, and then the special effect A transition effect (rush effect) to the state is performed. In the lottery on the main side during ART, an internal winning combination related to “Bell” will not win a special game in the added state, but in the lottery on the sub side, an internal winning related to “Bell (batting bell)” A special effect in the special zone H can be won by the combination (see FIG. 144 described later). Therefore, in the present embodiment, even a role that cannot be expected for a specialized game internally can be a role that can be expected in the production, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

(4) ART Stage Display Effects In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of stage modes (ART stages A to C) are provided for effects in the normal ART state. The selection of the ART stage type (the transition of the ART stage) is determined according to the number of difference games. When the ART stage is selected (when the ART stage transition is determined), an ART stage display effect corresponding to the selection result is performed. The ART stages A to C are a specific example of the effect mode according to the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, in the notification game determination process displayed in the extra announcement effect, the type of the ART stage is referred to in addition to the number of difference games. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suggest the size of the difference (number of difference games) between the number of internal ART games and the number of displayed ART games by the display effect of the ART stage.

(5) Character song output effect and 3-digit extra notification effect in the special zone G In this embodiment, the number of difference games is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games (350 games in this embodiment) in the normal ART state. In addition, the character song is produced with a predetermined probability. In the present embodiment, when the number of notification games is determined by lottery, the output / non-output state of the character song (the on / off state of a later-described character song flag) is referred to. That is, the output / non-output state of the character song is one of the parameters for determining the number of notification games. A character song is a specific example of specific sound according to the present invention.

  The information on the ON / OFF state of the character flag (output / non-output state of the character song) is basically information for facilitating the subsequent special effects (the character song has the subsequent specialization). It is a thing that expects production). However, when a bonus (NBB) is won, if the character song continues to be played (continue to be output) during the bonus, the time during which the character song is played becomes longer, and the rare value may be lost. Therefore, it is also possible to adopt a technique in which music dedicated to the bonus is played during the bonus and the output of the character song is resumed after the bonus ends. However, with this method, it may be recognized that a plurality of character song generation conditions (the number of difference games is 350 games or more) are satisfied. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the output of the character song is terminated when the bonus operation is started, and an effect of notifying a large number of notification games (a value using most of the number of difference games) at the end of the bonus is a special effect. Do it instead.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the normal ART state, when a character song output effect is being performed (the number of difference games is 350 games or more) and a rare role is won, a special feature is always required. The special effect of the control zone G is executed. In this case, in the special effect in the special zone G, there is a possibility that an extra announcement effect of 3 digits (300 games in this embodiment) is selected.

  The special effects of the special zone G are produced over a maximum of four games. If the third game in the special zone G wins the announcement game number lottery, An extra announcement effect of 3 digits (300 games) is generated.

  By providing the above-mentioned character song output effect and the three-digit extra announcement effect in the special zone G, the player's expectation can be enhanced with respect to the extra effect in the special zone G, and the interest of the game is improved. Can be made. In addition, when the above-described character song output effect and the three-digit extra notification effect in the specialized zone G are provided, the amount of deviation (difference game number) between the number of internal ART games and the number of displayed ART games is set to these effects. Can be effectively suggested. Furthermore, by providing a three-digit extra announcement effect in the specialized zone G, it is possible to prevent the deviation (number of difference games) between the number of internal ART games and the number of displayed ART games from becoming too large. The three-digit extra announcement effect in the specialization zone G is a specific example of a specific extra effect according to the present invention.

(6) Story BB Production In this embodiment, when NBB is won during the ART state, a story lottery generation lottery is performed. In the story BB effect, a story-like effect is executed in the game period from the start to the end of the BB. By providing such an effect, the player's interest in the effect during the BB period can be enhanced.

<Correspondence table between main lottery flags and sub lottery flags>
In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, various lotteries are performed for determining the contents of effects to be executed on the sub side. In the various lottery tables used for the lottery process, as described later, the lottery value is set for each flag called a “sub lottery flag” set according to the type of the main lottery flag, not the main lottery flag included in the start command. It is prescribed. Therefore, when performing lottery processing with reference to these lottery tables, first, the main lottery flag is converted into a sub lottery flag, and then lottery processing is performed based on the sub lottery flag generated by the conversion. Is called.

  In the present embodiment, two types of flags called “sub lottery flag A” and “sub lottery flag B” are provided as sub lottery flags. Here, FIG. 107 shows a correspondence table of the main lottery flag, the sub lottery flag A, and the sub lottery flag B.

  In the conversion process from the main lottery flag to the sub lottery flag in the present embodiment, a plurality of main lottery flags belonging to the same type are combined into one sub lottery flag. In the conversion process of the main lottery flag to the sub lottery flag A, as shown in FIG. 107, 18 types of main lottery flags (flag numbers “0” to “17”) are converted into 15 types of sub lottery flags (flag number “ 0 "to" 14 "). On the other hand, in the conversion process of the main lottery flag to the sub lottery flag B, 18 types of main lottery flags (flag numbers “0” to “17”) are converted into 16 types of sub lottery flags (flag numbers “0” to “15”). ": Flag data).

  Here, in order to simplify the description, only a case where a plurality of types of main lottery flags are converted into one sub lottery flag will be described.

  In the conversion process of the main lottery flag to the sub lottery flag A, for example, the main lottery flag “F_normal lip” (flag number “1”) to “F_RT3 transition” (flag number “3”) is all sub lottery. It is converted to flag A “Rip” (flag number “1”). The main lottery flag “F_common bell 1” (flag number “8”) and “F_common bell 2” (flag number “9”) are both sub lottery flags A “lip” (flag number “1”). Is converted to

  In the process of converting the main lottery flag to the sub lottery flag B, as shown in FIG. 107, for example, the main lottery flag “F_normal lip” (flag number “1”) to “F_RT3 transition” (flag number “ 3 ”) is converted into sub lottery flag B“ Rip ”(flag number“ 1 ”), but main lottery flags“ F_common bell 1 ”(flag number“ 8 ”) and“ F_common bell 2 ”. (Flag number “9”) is converted into sub lottery flag B “common bell” (flag number “3”) and “common bell 2” (flag number “4”), respectively.

<Configuration of data table stored on ROM cartridge substrate>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 will be described with reference to FIGS. Although not shown in the various lottery tables described below, the random number denominator of each lottery table is all “32768” (the random value to be acquired is any one of 0 to 32767).

[Configuration of various production lottery tables and production tables]
First, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, an example of an effect lottery table used when selecting (determining) an effect to be executed on the sub side will be described.

(1) Normal production lottery table FIG. 108 shows an example of a normal production lottery table. 108. In the normal effect lottery table shown in FIG. 108, the stage type is stage A and the stage background type is “stage” in the normal state (BB inactive, BB non-winning, non-BB inside, non-card rank up). It is an effect lottery table that is referred to when it is “daytime” and the lottery state is inaccurate.

  The display effect indicating stage A (hereinafter referred to as “stage A display”) is an effect of displaying a background (location) such as a grassland or a town associated with stage A, for example. In the display effect indicating stage B (hereinafter referred to as “stage B display”), the background (location) such as grassland or town associated with stage B is displayed, and the display effect indicating stage C (hereinafter referred to as “stage B display”). In “stage C display”), the background (location) such as grassland or town associated with stage C is displayed.

  “Stage A display”, “Stage B display” and “Stage C display” are executed in principle when stages A to C are set as internal modes, respectively. That is, the content of the stage display effect and the internal mode have a relationship that basically corresponds. However, in the present embodiment, in the normal state of the initial cycle after the setting change, for example, the correspondence between “stage A display” and the internal mode is not achieved (when the internal mode is other than stage A). There is also.

  In addition, in the display effects of each stage, “daytime”, “evening”, and “night” modes (stage backgrounds) are provided for the same background (location). Then, the background of the set stage type display image is a day-like image. In the present embodiment, these stage backgrounds indicate the level of the winning probability, and when arranged in descending order of the winning probability, the order is “stage night”, “stage evening”, and “stage day”.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the lottery mode in the normal state is notified by a combination of a background image of a place or the like and a background image of day and night. In addition, this invention is not limited to this, You may employ | adopt a character instead of a background. Further, for example, the lottery mode may be suggested by a combination of the background and the character or a combination of the character and the character.

  Here, in order to simplify the description, in the normal state (BB not activated, BB not won, inside BB, inside non-card rank up), the stage type is stage A, and the stage background type A normal stage lottery table in the case where is “stage lunch” and the lottery state is low is shown as an example of a normal stage lottery table. However, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, a normal medium effect lottery table is provided as appropriate for other various game situations in the normal state. In each of the normal effect lottery tables in these other game situations, the value of the specified lottery value varies depending on the game situation, but the configuration of the lottery table is the same as that shown in FIG.

  The normal effect lottery table is referred to when selecting (determining) the effect pattern number based on the game situation and the sub lottery flag (internal winning combination) at the start of the unit game in the normal state. In the normal lottery lottery table, for each sub lottery flag B, the correspondence relationship between various types of production pattern numbers (“No.” in FIG. 108) that can be selected and lottery values set for the respective production pattern numbers. Stipulate. The effect pattern number is associated with an effect data table (described later) for executing the effect contents corresponding to the effect pattern number. In the normal medium effect lottery table, 331 types of effect contents (effect pattern numbers 0 to 330) are defined.

  For example, in the effect lottery process using the normal medium effect lottery table shown in FIG. 108, when the sub lottery flag B (internal winning combination) is “LIP”, the effect pattern number “2287/32768 has a probability of 2287/32768”. “0” is selected, and the production pattern number “2” is selected with a probability of 10923/32768.

(2) Structure of Effect Data Table FIGS. 109 and 110 show the structure of the effect data table associated with each effect pattern number defined in the normal effect lottery table of FIG.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 109 and 110, the effect data table includes an effect pattern number and a set of a plurality of types of effect parameter items associated therewith. As a plurality of types of effect parameter items, “GrID”, “GrNo”, “inc”, “table”, “MOE”, “CH_GrID”, “CH_GrNo”, “WIN”, “PRE”, “GTY”, “GTY” Fourteen types of effect parameter items such as “UI”, “LED”, “ST”, and “DB” are defined.

  FIG. 111 shows a table summarizing the contents of each effect parameter item. Here, in order to simplify the description, characteristic presentation parameter items “GrID”, “GrNo”, “inc”, “table”, “MOE”, “CH_GrID”, “CH_GrNo”, “UI”, “LED”, “ST”, and “DB” will be described, and descriptions of other effect parameter items will be omitted.

  The effect parameter item “GrID” is a data number indicating the group code of the effect. The effect parameter item “GrNo” is the effect pattern number in each effect group code. That is, the effect parameter item “GrID” is large classification data of effect data, and the effect parameter item “GrNo” is small classification data of effect data.

  Here, FIGS. 112A and 112B show an example of the correspondence between the effect parameter item “GrID” and the effect parameter item “GrNo”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112A, 128 types of group codes (effect groups 1 to 128) are provided as effect group codes, and the effect parameter item “GrID” is set to 1: 1 for each group code. It is associated.

  For example, for the effect group 37 whose effect parameter item “GrID” is “37”, as shown in FIG. 112B, 186 types of effect patterns (effect patterns 1 to 186) are provided, and each effect pattern The production parameter item “GrNo” is associated with the one-to-one correspondence. Therefore, for example, in the effect data table, when “37” is specified for the effect parameter item “GrID” and “12” is specified for the effect parameter item “GrNo”, the effect pattern 12 of the effect group 37 is displayed. Is selected (designated).

  The effect parameter items “inc” and “table” are parameters for specifying another effect data table when the effect is not specified in the effect parameter items “GrID” and “GrNo”.

  In this way, not all the effects that can be determined in the effect data table are defined in one table, but if a configuration that designates another table as necessary is adopted, even if the total number of effects that can be determined is large The production can be subdivided according to the contents, etc., and the design development becomes easy. In addition, by making it possible to specify another effect data table in the effect data table, the size (capacity) of the effect data table can be prevented from becoming an enormous size. Furthermore, direct production data can be specified directly for simple productions with few patterns, and another production data table can be designated for complicated productions with many patterns. Can be easily attached.

  The production parameter item “MOE” is a parameter for designating whether or not to execute an additional (interrupt) production for the designated production. In the present embodiment, the effect parameter item “MOE” is used as a parameter indicating whether or not to perform lottery (cut-in lottery described later) for determining whether or not to perform an additional (interrupt) effect called a cut-in effect. To do. When “1” is defined in the production parameter item “MOE”, a cut-in lottery described later is performed. The cut-in effect is an example of an additional effect according to the present invention. In the present embodiment, the example in which the effect parameter item “MOE” is used as a parameter indicating whether or not to perform lottery for determining whether or not to execute the cut-in effect has been described. Without being limited thereto, the effect parameter item “MOE” may be used as a parameter for directly designating whether or not to execute the cut-in effect.

  In addition, for example, it may be configured to specify both the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect lottery by the effect parameter item “MOE”. In this case, there are three types of values defined in the effect parameter item “MOE”. For example, when specifying the execution of the cut-in effect lottery, the effect parameter item “MOE” is defined as “1” and the cut-in effect is executed. When specifying “2” for the production parameter item “MOE”, and specifying “0” for the production parameter item “MOE” when specifying the execution of the cut-in production and the lottery of the cut-in production lottery. To do.

  Further, for example, a configuration in which execution of a cut-in effect or lottery execution of whether or not to execute a cut-in effect is specified by an effect parameter item “MOE” (that is, execution of a cut-in effect by an effect parameter item “MOE”) is specified. (None and a configuration in which no lottery for a cut-in effect is designated) may be used. In this case, there are two types of values defined by the effect parameter item “MOE”.

  When the above-described effect parameter item “MOE” is defined in the effect data table, it is possible to easily manage the presence or absence of an effect that can be additionally generated only during a specific effect, such as a cut-in effect. Furthermore, in this case, it is possible to appropriately change only the presence / absence of an effect that can additionally occur without changing the designated effect data or the like.

  Here, in the cut-in effect, the video of the additional (interrupt) effect is mainly displayed on the video corresponding to the effect specified in the effect data table. At this time, the video of the additional effect may be displayed so as to be superimposed on the entire video of the designated effect (the entire display screen of the liquid crystal display device 11), or the video of the additional effect may be partially displayed on the video of the designated effect. May be displayed in an overlapping manner. In the latter case, the video of the designated effect is displayed in the portion of the other area where the video of the additional effect is not superimposed and displayed.

  The timing for generating the cut-in effect (addition (interrupt) effect) can be set as appropriate according to the content of the specified effect, but the content of the effect may not be recognized due to the occurrence of the cut-in effect. An unfavorable timing (a timing at which the content of the production is lost) is not preferable. Therefore, it is preferable to set the timing at which the cut-in effect (addition (interruption) effect) is generated to a timing at which a video change occurs, for example, at the time of lever operation or stop operation.

  The effect parameter item “UI” is a parameter for designating whether or not to display a UI (user interface). Note that the display function of “UI” in this specification displays a game situation notification image composed of a plurality of types of information images indicating the current game situation (game progress situation) on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 11. It is a function to do. In addition, the types and patterns of various information images constituting the game situation notification image change according to the game state (playing ball state).

  In the present embodiment, there are four types of UI, “normal UI (large)”, “normal UI (small)”, “battle UI”, and “ART_UI”.

  “Normal UI (Large)” and “Normal UI (Small)” are the games in the normal state, and information such as the number of remaining games, card designs, credits, payouts, etc. is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 It is a UI displayed as information indicating (game progress status). The “normal UI (large)” is a UI in which the size of the displayed information image (information image such as the number of remaining games and card patterns) indicating the current game status is increased. “Normal UI (small)” "Is a UI that reduces the size of the displayed information image (information image such as the number of remaining games and card patterns) indicating the current game status. In the present embodiment, the size of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 11 is constant regardless of the size of the UI (game situation notification image). Therefore, if the size of the UI (game situation notification image) increases, the size of the effect area other than the UI on the display screen decreases, and if the size of the UI (game situation notification image) decreases, other than the UI on the display screen. The size of the production area is increased. That is, the size of the effect area other than the UI at the “normal UI (large)” is smaller than the size of the effect area other than the UI at the “normal UI (small)”.

  The “Battle UI” is a UI that displays information such as icons of the main character and enemy characters as information indicating the current game status on the liquid crystal display device 11 in the game in the CZ introduction state and in the CZ state. “ART_UI” is a game in an ART state, and is a UI for displaying information such as the number of remaining ART games, the number of credits, the number of payouts, etc. as information indicating the state of the current game on the liquid crystal display device 11.

  When “1” is defined in the production parameter item “UI”, “normal UI (large)” is selected, and when “2” is defined in the production parameter item “UI”. , “Normal UI (Small)” is selected. Further, when “3” is defined in the production parameter item “UI”, “Battle UI” is selected, and when “4” is defined in the production parameter item “UI”, “ART_UI” is selected. Is selected. If the value “5” or “6” is defined in the production parameter item “UI”, “no UI display” is selected. In this case, the above-described various UIs are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Is not displayed.

  In the effect data table, by defining the effect parameter item “UI” as described above, the effect contents can be determined by a combination of the effect data and the presence / absence of the UI. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconsistency with (information indicating the current game situation). In this case, it becomes easy to reflect the intention of the designer, and design development becomes easy. In addition, when the UI is not displayed, it is possible to produce a large screen using the UI portion.

  In the present embodiment, an example has been described in which whether or not to display a UI (game situation notification image) is specified by the effect parameter item “UI”, and the size of the “normal UI” is also specified. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only the presence / absence of display of a UI (game situation notification image) may be specified by the effect parameter item “UI”, or only the size of the currently displayed UI (game situation notification image) may be specified. You may make it the structure to carry out. In addition, for example, only the type of UI (game situation notification image) (in this embodiment, “normal UI”, “battle UI”, or “ART_UI”) is designated by the effect parameter item “UI”. May be.

  The effect parameter item “LED” is a parameter indicating whether or not the LED effect lottery is executed. When “1” is defined in the effect parameter item “LED”, execution of the LED effect lottery is selected. In this embodiment, the example in which the effect parameter item “LED” is used as a parameter indicating whether or not to perform lottery for determining whether or not to execute the LED effect has been described. However, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the effect parameter item “LED” may be used as a parameter for directly specifying the presence or absence of the LED effect execution.

  In addition, for example, it may be configured to specify both the presence / absence of the LED effect and the presence / absence of the LED effect lottery by the effect parameter item “LED”. In this case, there are three types of values specified in the effect parameter item “LED”. For example, when specifying the LED effect lottery, the effect parameter item “LED” is specified as “1” and the LED effect execution is specified. When it is specified, “2” is defined for the effect parameter item “LED”, and “0” is defined for the effect parameter item “LED” when the execution of the LED effect and the LED effect lottery are not specified.

  Further, for example, a configuration in which execution of the LED effect or lottery execution of whether or not to execute the LED effect is specified by the effect parameter item “LED” (that is, no LED effect is executed by the effect parameter item “LED” and LED A configuration in which no lottery for production is designated is also possible. In this case, there are two types of values defined by the production parameter item “LED”.

  In the present embodiment, an LED display effect corresponding to the video (predetermined according to the video) is usually performed. However, in the present embodiment, separately, when an LED effect lottery is performed, an LED display effect corresponding to the lottery is performed. By providing such a function, the LED display effect according to the result of the LED effect lottery is controlled independently of the LED display effect according to the video or the like only when necessary (to produce). be able to. In this case, it is possible to easily design an effect that combines an effect by video and an effect by LED. Further, it is possible to reduce the control load when it is not necessary to perform the LED display effect according to the LED effect lottery.

  The effect parameter item “ST” is a parameter indicating whether or not a stage transition lottery (stage background transition lottery or ART stage transition lottery described later) is executed. When any one of “1” to “3” is defined in the production parameter item “ST”, execution of the stage shift lottery corresponding to the ST value is selected. In the stage transition effect (stage change effect), the stage (background) video is switched, but at this time, the stage (background) is usually directly (rapidly) on the stage (background) of the transition destination. ) Instead of changing, the image on the stage (background) changes (shifts) with a single picture or an image called eye catch in between. Further, the production parameter item “DB” is a parameter indicating whether or not demo transition is prohibited. When “1” is defined in the production parameter item “DB”, prohibition of demo transition is selected.

  In this way, by specifying the presence / absence of execution of stage transition (change) or demo transition in the production data table, which can cause the production to be interrupted, whether or not the production is interrupted by stage transition (change) or demo transition etc. Even if the performance is not actually executed and confirmed, it can be managed appropriately. In this case, the confirmation work after the design becomes unnecessary, and the design development becomes easy.

  Moreover, the following effects are also acquired by providing the production data table of the structure mentioned above. When the production parameter items “GrID”, “GrNo” or the production parameter items “inc”, “table”, the production designated as additional effects such as cut-in production, stage change production, etc. are simultaneously generated. However, there is a problem that the impression of each production becomes thin and the production effect cannot be obtained. However, as in this embodiment, by designating the data and tables for each effect in one effect data table, it is easy to manage effects that can be generated simultaneously and effects that cannot be generated simultaneously, and design development is easy. In addition, the occurrence of the above-described problem can be suppressed.

  Here, in order to simplify the explanation, a configuration example of an effect data table associated with each effect pattern number defined in the normal effect lottery table of FIG. 108 is shown, but other effect lotteries described later are shown. The structure of the effect data table associated with the effect pattern number defined in the table is the same as the structure shown in FIGS. 109 and 110.

(3) Normal NBB medium effect lottery table FIGS. 113 and 114 show an example of a normal medium NBB medium effect lottery table. In the normal NBB effect lottery table (No. 1) shown in FIG. 113, in the game situation in which the NBB (BB1 or BB2) is operating in the normal state (the game situation in which the normal sub flag and the BB sub flag are on), It is an effect lottery table that is referred to when the enemy character type set in the current cycle is other than the enemy character F and the number of digested games is within 1 to 15 games from the start of the BB operation. In addition, in the normal NBB medium effect lottery table (No. 2) shown in FIG. 114, the enemy character type set in the current cycle is the enemy character in the game situation in which the NBB (BB1 or BB2) is operating in the normal state. It is an effect lottery table that is referred to when it is other than F and the number of digested games is 16 games or more from the start of the BB operation.

  Here, in order to simplify the description, the enemy character type set in the current cycle is other than the enemy character F when the game situation is the normal state and the NBB (BB1 or BB2) is operating. The normal NBB medium effect lottery table is shown as an example of the normal medium NBB medium effect lottery table. However, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the enemy character F is the other character state set in the current cycle (for example, the enemy character type F) in the situation where the NBB (BB1 or BB2) is operating in the normal state. In some cases, a normal NBB medium production lottery table is provided as appropriate. In each of the normal NBB medium effect lottery tables in these other game situations, the value of the lottery value specified varies depending on the game situation, but the lottery table has the configuration shown in FIGS. 113 and 114. It will be the same.

  In the normal NBB effect lottery table, at the start of a unit game in a state where the NBB (BB1 or BB2) is operating in a normal state, the contents of the effect (described later) are based on the game situation and the sub lottery flag (internal winning combination). This is referred to when selecting (determining) the production pattern number). In the normal NBB effect lottery table, for each sub lottery flag A, various selectable effect pattern numbers (“No.” in FIGS. 113 and 114) and lottery values set for each effect pattern number are displayed. Stipulates the correspondence with In the normal NBB medium effect lottery table, 43 types of effect contents (effect pattern numbers 0 to 42) are defined.

  For example, in the effect lottery process using the normal NBB medium effect lottery table shown in FIG. 113, when the sub lottery flag A (internal winning combination) is “common bell”, the effect is performed with a probability of 29312/32768. The pattern number “0” is selected, the production pattern number “7” is selected with a probability of 1280/32768, the production pattern number “8” is selected with a probability of 128/32768, and the production pattern number with a probability of 2048/32768 “25” is selected.

(4) ART lottery table during ART FIG. 115 shows an example of an art lottery table during ART. 115, the ART lottery table during ART is in the normal ART state (BB inactive, BB non-winning, non-BB inside, non-specialized production), the stage type is stage A, and the lottery state is inaccurate. There is an effect lottery table that is referenced when the RT state is the RT3 state.

  Here, in order to simplify the description, the gaming state is ART state (when BB is not operating, BB is not winning, inside BB, during non-specializing effect), the stage type is stage A, and the lottery state Is an art lottery table during ART when the RT state is the RT3 state as an example of an art lottery table during ART. However, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, an ART lottery table is provided as appropriate for various other game situations in the ART state. In each lottery table during the ART in these other gaming situations, the value of the lottery value specified varies depending on the gaming situation, but the configuration of the lottery table is the same as that shown in FIG.

  The effect lottery table during ART is referred to when selecting (determining) the content of the effect (effect pattern number) based on the game situation and the sub lottery flag (internal winning combination) at the start of the unit game in the ART state. The effect lottery table during ART shows, for each sub lottery flag A, the correspondence between various effect pattern numbers (“No.” in FIG. 115) that can be selected and lottery values set for each effect pattern number. Stipulate. In addition, in the effect lottery table during ART, 139 types of effect contents (effect pattern numbers 0 to 138) are defined.

  For example, in the effect lottery process using the ART lottery table shown in FIG. 115, when the sub lottery flag A (internal winning combination) is “common bell”, the production pattern number has a probability of 13108/32768. “2” is selected.

(5) ART during BB effect lottery table FIGS. 116 and 117 show an example of the ART during BB effect lottery table. 116. The art lottery table during BB shown in FIG. 116 (part 1) is an ART game on the main side in the gaming situation where the BB is operating in the ART state (the gaming situation where the ART sub-flag and the BB sub-flag are on). It is an effect lottery table that is referred to when there is no additional number. 117. The art lottery table during art BB shown in FIG. 117 (part 2) is referenced when there is an additional number of ART games of 1 to 99 games on the main side in the gaming situation where the BB is operating in the ART state. It is an effect lottery table.

  In addition, here, in order to simplify the description, in the situation where the BB is operating in the ART state, the number of ART games on the main side is not added or the number of ART games of 1 to 99 games is added. The ART lottery effect lottery table during ART in the case of being present is shown as an example of the ART lottery during BB effect lottery table. However, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, for various other gaming situations (for example, when there is an additional number of ART games of 100 games or more on the main side) in a situation where the BB is operating in the ART state. Also, an art lottery table during BB during ART is provided as appropriate. In the lottery table during each ART during BB in these other game situations, the value of the lottery value specified varies depending on the game situation, but the structure of the lottery table is as shown in FIGS. 116 and 117. It will be the same.

  The effect lottery table during BB during ART is the content of the effect (the effect pattern number described later) based on the game situation and the sub lottery flag (internal winning combination) at the start of the unit game in the state where the BB is operating in the ART state. Referenced when selecting (determining). The art lottery table during BB in ART is, for each sub lottery flag A, various selectable production pattern numbers (“No.” in FIGS. 116 and 117) and lottery values set for each production pattern number. Stipulates the correspondence with In addition, in the during-art BB effect lottery table, 31 types of effect contents (effect pattern numbers 0 to 30) are defined.

  For example, in the effect lottery process using the during-art BB effect lottery table shown in FIG. 116, the sub lottery flag A (internal winning combination) is “weak Chang”, “weak choi”, or “strong choi”. The effect pattern number “13” is always selected, and the effect pattern number “0” is always selected for the other sub-lottery flags A (internal winning combination).

(6) Specialized effect lottery table FIGS. 118 and 119 show examples of the specialized effect lottery table. 118 is a specialized counter in the gaming situation in which the specialized presentation is operating in the ART state (the gaming situation in which the ART sub flag and the specialized presentation sub flag are on). This is an effect lottery table that is referred to when the value of is greater than “0”, the specialized zone type is the specialized zone A, and no additional announcement effect is provided for the number of ART games. In addition, the special effect lottery table (No. 2) shown in FIG. 119 shows that the special counter value is larger than “0” and the special zone type is in the gaming situation where the special effect is operating in the ART state. It is an effect lottery table which is a special zone A and which is referred to when an additional notification effect of 10 to 19 ART games is performed.

  In addition, here, in order to simplify the explanation, in the situation where the game situation is the ART state and the special effect is in operation, no additional notice effect is performed, or an additional notice effect of 10 to 19 ART games. A special effect lottery table in the case of performing is shown as an example of the special effect lottery table. However, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, in various other game situations (for example, when performing an extra announcement effect for the number of ART games other than 10 to 19) in a situation where the special effect is operating in the ART state. In contrast, a specializing effect lottery table is provided as appropriate. In each special lottery table for specialization in these other game situations, the value of the lottery value specified varies depending on the game situation, but the configuration of the lottery table is the same as that shown in FIGS. 118 and 119. become.

  The special effect lottery table is based on the game situation and the sub lottery flag (internal winning combination) at the start of the unit game in the state where the special effect is active in the ART state (effect pattern number described later) Referenced when selecting (determining). The special lottery table for specialization includes, for each sub lottery flag A, various selectable production pattern numbers ("No." in FIGS. 118 and 119), and lottery values set for each production pattern number. Specify the correspondence of. In addition, in the special stage effect lottery table, 145 types of effect contents (effect pattern numbers 0 to 144) are defined.

  For example, in the effect lottery process using the specialized effect lottery table shown in FIG. 118, the effect pattern number “0” is always selected regardless of the type of the sub lottery flag A (internal winning combination). Also, for example, in the effect lottery process using the special effect lottery table shown in FIG. 118, the sub lottery flag A (internal winning combination) is “losing”, “lip”, “batting order bell”, “common bell”, In the case of “MB1”, “MB2” or “MB combination”, the production pattern number “1” is always selected, and the production pattern number “2” is always selected in the other sub lottery flag A (internal winning combination). Is done.

[ART lottery game announcement announcement lottery table]
Next, in the above-described game in the ART state, various added game number notification effect lottery tables (addition effect determining means) used for selecting (determining) the contents of the effect when executing the additional notification effect of the number of ART games. A specific example of the extension effect determining means will be described. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, an additional game number notification effect lottery table is provided for each game situation in which an additional notification effect can occur.

  120 to 124 show an example of the extra game number announcement effect lottery table during ART. 120. In the ART addition game number announcement effect lottery table (No. 1) shown in FIG. 120, when the number of ART addition games to be notified in the addition announcement effect is 10 to 19 games (10 to 19 game addition notifications in the notification game number lottery). It is an effect lottery table referred to when the number of games is determined). 121, the extra game number announcement effect lottery table (No. 2) shown in FIG. 121 is when the number of ART extra games to be announced in the extra announcement effect is 20 to 29 games (the extra announcement game number lottery is 20 to 29 games extra announcement). It is an effect lottery table referred to when the number of games is determined). 122. In the ART addition game number announcement lottery table (No. 3) shown in FIG. 122, when the number of ART addition games to be notified by the addition announcement production is 30 to 49 games (30 to 49 games addition notification by lottery of announcement games). It is an effect lottery table referred to when the number of games is determined). 123 is an extra game number announcement effect lottery table (No. 4) shown in FIG. 123, when the number of ART extra games to be notified in the extra announcement effect is 50 to 99 games (50 to 99 game extra announcements in the announcement game number lottery). It is an effect lottery table referred to when the number of games is determined). Further, in the ART addition game number announcement lottery table (No. 5) shown in FIG. 124, when the number of ART addition games to be notified by the addition announcement production is 100 games or more (100 games or more addition notification by lottery of announcement games). It is an effect lottery table referred to when the number of games is determined).

  In the ART, the added game number announcement effect lottery table is based on the number of ART added games to be notified and the sub lottery flag (internal winning combination) at the start of the unit game for executing the ART addition announcement effect in the ART state. Referenced when selecting (determining) (effect pattern number). The added game number announcement effect lottery table during ART is set for each sub lottery flag A with respect to various effect pattern numbers (“No.” in FIGS. 120 to 124) that can be selected and each effect pattern number. Define the correspondence with lottery values. It should be noted that 93 types of effect contents (effect pattern numbers 0 to 92) are defined in the added number-of-games notification effect lottery table during ART.

[Special card acquisition effect lottery table]
125 and 126 show an example of the special card acquisition announcement effect lottery table. The special card acquisition announcement lottery table (No. 1) shown in FIG. 125 is an effect lottery table referred to when the first or second special card is acquired. The special card acquisition announcement lottery table (No. 2) shown in FIG. 126 is an effect lottery table that is referred to when the third special card is acquired.

  The special card acquisition announcement production lottery table selects (determines) the production content (production pattern number) based on the number of special cards obtained and the sub lottery flag (internal winning combination) when a special card is played in the ART state. Referenced when doing. In the special card acquisition announcement lottery table, for each sub lottery flag A, various selectable effect pattern numbers (“No.” in FIGS. 125 and 126) and lottery set for each effect pattern number are selected. Specifies the correspondence with values. In the special card acquisition announcement effect lottery table, 139 types of effect contents (effect pattern numbers 0 to 138) are defined.

  In the present embodiment, since special card acquisition lottery is not performed in the situation where two special cards are acquired, in the situation where two special cards are acquired, the special effect type lottery during special ART is selected. In the event of winning, it is assumed that a third special card has been obtained. In this case, an effect to be executed is specified with reference to the special card acquisition notification effect lottery table (No. 2) shown in FIG. 126, and indicates that the third special card has been acquired on the effect. Production of contents is performed. At this time, the process of adding 1 to the value of a special counter (to be described later) for counting the number of acquired special cards is not performed.

[Stage background transition lottery table]
Next, the stage background transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 127A and 127B. In the present embodiment, in the normal state, for example, when the ST value defined in the effect data table selected in the normal effect table shown in FIG. 108 is “1” or more, the stage background transition lottery is performed. Is called. The stage background transition lottery table shown in FIGS. 127A and 127B is a lottery table referred to in the stage background transition lottery.

  127A is a stage background transition lottery table (part 1) referred to in the stage background transition lottery performed when the ST value is “1”. FIG. 127B has an ST value of “2”. It is a stage background transfer lottery table (part 2) referred to in a stage background transfer lottery performed in some cases.

  The stage background transition lottery table includes a lottery result (no transition, destination stage background type) for each combination of the current stage background (stage day, evening or night) and the main lottery state (low or high accuracy). ) And a lottery value set for each lottery result. That is, in the stage background transfer lottery using the stage background transfer lottery table, not only the presence / absence of transfer but also the type of the stage background of the transfer destination is determined.

  As shown in FIGS. 127A and 127B, when the ST value is “2”, the stage background is always set to the stage by the stage background transition lottery regardless of the combination of the current stage background and the main lottery state. Transition to night (if the current stage background is stage night, the stage background is maintained).

[ART stage lottery table]
Next, the ART stage stage lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130. In the present embodiment, in the ART state, for example, when the ST value defined in the effect data table selected in the effect table during ART shown in FIG. 115 is “3”, stage transition lottery is performed. The stage transition lottery table during ART shown in FIGS. 128 to 130 is a lottery table referred to in the stage transition lottery.

  128A to 128C are ART stage stage lottery tables (1 to 3) referred to when the value of the display ART counter is “99” or less. FIGS. 129A to 129C are the display ART counter values. FIG. 130A to 130C are the ART stage stage lottery tables (4 to 6) referred to when the value is “100” or more, and FIGS. 130A to 130C are the ART stage that is referred to when the character flag is turned on. It is a transfer lottery table (Nos. 7 to 9). When the character flag is on, the ART stage stage lottery table (Nos. 7 to 9) shown in FIGS. 130A to 130C is preferentially referred to regardless of the value of the display ART counter.

  The ART stage stage lottery table defines the correspondence between lottery results (no transition, transition destination ART stage type) and lottery values set for each lottery result for each gaming situation. That is, in the stage transfer lottery using the stage transfer lottery table during ART, not only the presence / absence of transfer but also the type of the ART stage of the transfer destination is determined.

  As shown in FIGS. 128 to 130, the game situation defined in the stage transition lottery table during ART is the difference between the main lottery state and the ART (the value of the internal ART counter-the value of the display ART counter). ) (For example, “mode low accuracy: internal-display difference is 29 or less”, etc.), a game situation called “in stage C: maintained state”, and “in stage C: waiting for fall” It is a game situation. Note that “in stage C: maintained state” is a state where the cumulative number of notification games since the ART stage shifted to ART stage C is less than 30 games. "" Means that the cumulative number of notification games since the ART stage has shifted to the ART stage C is 30 games or more. In addition, the number of notification games after the ART stage has shifted to the ART stage C includes the number of notification games that have been determined or announced in the game in the added special state or the game in the BB state executed during the ART stage C. It is.

  As shown in FIGS. 128 to 130, when the character flag is in an off state, it is possible to shift to various ART stages in most gaming situations. However, if the character song flag is in the on state, the transition to the ART stage is not performed in a game situation other than “in stage C: waiting for fall”, and in the game situation “in stage C: waiting for fall”, 1 / The ART stage shifts (falls) to the ART stage B with a probability of 2.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 128 to 130, when the ART stage is the ART stage C, the display is performed regardless of the main lottery state (game state) and the number of ART difference games. The destination ART stage is determined based on the value of the ART counter or the ON / OFF state of the character flag. Further, in the ART stage C, when the cumulative number of notification games after the transition to the ART stage C is less than 30 games, the state of the ART stage C is maintained. When such a stage (effect mode) is provided on the sub-side, it is possible to make the player feel as if there is a stage (effect mode) that is easy to win for adding the number of ART games. That is, regardless of the game situation on the main side, it is possible to produce a pseudo-high probability state on the sub side. In this embodiment, the configuration example has been described in which the ART stage of the transfer destination can be determined only when the ART stage is the ART stage C, regardless of the main game situation, but the present invention is not limited to this. First, even when the ART stage is the ART stage A or B, a configuration may be provided so that the migration destination ART stage can be determined regardless of the game situation on the main side.

  In addition, in the stage transition lottery table shown in FIGS. 128 to 130, the configuration example in which “no transition” can be determined as the lottery result has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the game situation As a lottery result, a configuration in which stage transition is always determined (“no transition” is not always determined) may be provided.

[Cut-in lottery table]
Next, the cut-in lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 and 132. FIG. In the present embodiment, for example, the MOE value defined by the effect data table selected by the effect lottery using the normal effect lottery table shown in FIG. 108 or the ART effect lottery table shown in FIG. 115 is “1” or more. If it is, a lottery for cut-in is performed according to the game situation. The cut-in lottery tables shown in FIGS. 131 and 132 are lottery tables that are referred to in the lottery where the cut-in occurs.

  131A is a cut-in lottery table (No. 1) referred to when the BB is not won in the normal state, and FIG. 131B is a cut-in lottery referenced when the BB is won in the normal state. It is a table (part 2). FIG. 132A is a cut-in lottery table (part 3) that is referred to when a game number precursor scenario lottery described later in the ART state is won. FIG. 132B is a special precursor scenario lottery described later in the ART state. It is a cut-in lottery table (part 4) that is referred to when winning.

  The cut-in lottery table defines, for each sub lottery flag B, the correspondence between the lottery result (no cut-in occurs, cut-in A to H) and the lottery value set for each lottery result. That is, in the cut-in generation lottery using the cut-in lottery table, not only the presence / absence of a cut-in effect but also the type of cut-in effect to be generated is determined. In the present embodiment, eight types of cut-in effects (cut-in A to H) are provided.

  The game situation in which the cut-in occurrence lottery is performed is not limited to the above-described four types of game situations, but other game situations (for example, when winning a BB in the ART preparation state, or winning other precursor scenarios) Etc.) may also be performed when the MOE value is “1” or more. In the present embodiment, a cut-in lottery table is also provided as appropriate for cut-in occurrence lotteries in other game situations. In each cut-in lottery table in these other game situations, the value of the specified lottery value varies depending on the game situation, but the configuration of the lottery table is the same as the configuration shown in FIGS. 131 and 132. .

[LED parameter lottery table]
Next, an example of the LED parameter lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, for example, the LED value specified in the effect data table selected by the effect lottery using the normal effect lottery table shown in FIG. 108 or the ART effect lottery table shown in FIG. 115 is “1” or more. If it is, LED parameter lottery is performed according to the game situation. The LED parameter lottery table shown in FIG. 133 is a lottery table referred to in the LED parameter lottery performed in the BB winning game. In the LED parameter lottery, it is determined whether or not to perform a lighting effect (a fierce hot lighting effect) of a right side lamp (not shown) of the housing portion of the pachislot 1. The right side lamp is a specific example of the light lighting means according to the present invention, and the intense hot lighting effect is a specific example of the specific lighting effect according to the present invention.

  The LED parameter lottery table defines, for each sub lottery flag A, the correspondence between lottery results (no effects, various lighting effects) and lottery values set for each lottery result. That is, in the LED parameter lottery using the LED parameter lottery table, not only the presence / absence of the lighting effect of the right side lamp but also the type of lighting effect of the right side lamp to be generated is determined. Moreover, in this embodiment, six types of LED lighting effects (super hot lighting effects) are provided.

  The game situation in which the LED parameter lottery is performed is not limited to the BB winning game, but also in other gaming situations (for example, when a battle is won (when an ART win is confirmed) or when a card is acquired (when a card is upgraded)) This can be done when the LED value is “1” or more. In this embodiment, an LED parameter lottery table is provided as appropriate in LED parameter lottery in other game situations. In each LED parameter lottery table in these other gaming situations, the value of the prescribed lottery value changes according to the gaming situation, but the configuration of the lottery table is the same as that shown in FIG.

[Charason flag lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the character song flag lottery table will be described. In the present embodiment, in the ART state, the game status is selected as “no effect” in the effect data selection process, the value of the display ART counter is 20 games or more, the ART stage is ART stage A or B, and When the character song flag is in the off state, the character song flag lottery is performed. The character song flag lottery table shown in FIG. 134 is a lottery table referred to in the character song flag lottery.

  The character-son flag lottery table shows the lottery result (when the number of difference games of the ART (the value of the internal ART counter−the value of the display ART counter) is “0” to “349” and “350” or more, respectively. The correspondence relationship between the non-winning, the characterson flag ON (winning)) and the lottery value set for each lottery result is defined.

  As shown in FIG. 134, in the character song flag lottery table, when the difference game number of ART is “0” to “349”, non-winning is always selected, so the performance using the character song flag lottery table is performed. The lottery process is performed when the number of ART difference games is substantially “350” or more. In the effect lottery process using the character song flag lottery table shown in FIG. 134, when the number of difference games of ART is “350” or more, the character flag is set to the on state with a probability of 1638/32768, and the character The song will be output.

[Normal stage display effect lottery table]
Next, the normal stage display effect lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the normal stage (stages A to C) that is set when the setting is changed, when power is restored after two hours have elapsed after power interruption, or when the special stage is shifted from the normal state to the CZ introduction state. A lottery for determining the type of display effect is performed. The normal stage display effect lottery table shown in FIG. 135 is a lottery table referred to in this lottery.

  The normal stage display effect lottery table shows lottery results (stages) in each game situation when the setting is changed or when the power is restored after two hours have passed since the power interruption and when the special stage is shifted from the normal state to the CZ introduction state. Any one of A display, stage B display, and stage C display) and a lottery value set for each lottery result are defined.

  In the lottery process using the normal stage display effect lottery table shown in FIG. 135, the stage A display or stage B display effect is determined with a probability of 13107/32768 regardless of the above-described gaming situation, and 6554/32768. The stage C display effect is determined by the probability.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the “stage A display”, “stage B display”, and “stage C display”, in principle, stages A to C are set as internal modes, respectively. Will be executed if. That is, the content of the stage display effect and the internal mode have a relationship that basically corresponds. However, in the present embodiment, in the normal state of the initial cycle after the setting change, for example, the correspondence between “stage A display” and the internal mode is not achieved (when the internal mode is other than stage A). There is also.

[Card promotion display effect lottery table]
Next, the card promotion display effect lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, when the card is acquired in the normal state of the first cycle after the setting change or power recovery after 2 hours of power interruption (when the card is upgraded), the card display indicating whether or not to display the acquired card A lottery is performed. The card promotion display effect lottery table shown in FIG. 136 is a lottery table referred to in the card display lottery.

  The card promotion display effect lottery table defines, for each sub lottery flag A, the correspondence between lottery results (win / non-win) and lottery values set for each lottery result.

  In the card display lottery using the card promotion display effect lottery table shown in FIG. 136, when the sub lottery flag A is “losing”, “medium cho”, “MB1” and “MB2”, the card display is performed. The lottery is always non-winning, and even if the card rank is increased, the card after the rank increase is not displayed. On the other hand, when the sub lottery flag A is “Watermelon”, “Strong Chan”, “Strong Cho”, or “MB_Strong Cho”, the card display lottery is always a win, and the cards after the rank increase are displayed. If the sub lottery flag A is any other flag, the card display lottery is won with a probability of 1/2, and the cards after the rank increase are displayed.

  In the present embodiment, values that can be promoted to all ranks are not set as rank increase numbers in one rank promotion. For example, as shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, only one of 1, 2, 3, 5 and 9) is provided. Each card rank set when the setting is changed is also a predetermined value (any one of 0, 1, and 3 in this embodiment) as shown in FIG. 73, for example. That is, in the game in the normal state in the first cycle after the setting change, the rank promotion mode is a mode determined to some extent. Therefore, there is no lottery using the card promotion display effect lottery table of FIG. 136, and the display effect of the card after the rank increase is always performed at the time of rank promotion in the game in the normal state of the first cycle after the initialization process is performed. For example, when the rank of the displayed card after the rank-up is a rank (number of rank-ups) that does not occur at the time of setting change, whether or not the setting has been changed (power supply after 2 hours after power interruption) (When returning) may be determined by the player. At this time, the player can narrow down the rank before promotion. However, as in the present embodiment, when a configuration in which the card display effect after the rank increase is adopted only when the lottery using the display effect lottery table shown in FIG. 136 is won, the setting is changed. It is difficult to determine whether or not (when power is restored after 2 hours after power interruption), and it is difficult to narrow down the rank before promotion from the rank of the displayed card.

[ART special card acquisition lottery table]
Next, the ART special card acquisition lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 and 138. In the present embodiment, special card acquisition lottery is performed at the start of a unit game in the ART state. The special card acquisition lottery table during ART shown in FIGS. 137 and 138 is a lottery table referred to in the special card acquisition lottery.

  In the ART special card acquisition lottery table (No. 1) shown in FIG. 137A, the number of acquired special cards is 0, and the number of ART differential games (the value of the internal ART counter−the value of the display ART counter) is 0. It is a lottery table that is referred to when there are ~ 9 games. The special card acquisition lottery table during art (No. 2) shown in FIG. 137B is a lottery table that is referred to when the special card acquisition number is 0 and the number of ART difference games is 10 to 49 games. is there. The special card acquisition lottery table during ART (No. 3) shown in FIG. 137C is a lottery table that is referred to when the special card acquisition number is 0 and the number of ART difference games is 50 to 99 games. is there. The special card acquisition lottery table (No. 4) shown in FIG. 137D is a lottery table that is referred to when the number of acquired special cards is zero and the number of ART difference games is 100 or more. . The special card acquisition lottery table (No. 5) shown in FIG. 138A is a lottery table referred to when the number of acquired special cards is one and the number of ART difference games is 0 to 9 games. is there. The special card acquisition lottery table (No. 6) shown in FIG. 138B is a lottery table referred to when the number of acquired special cards is one and the number of ART difference games is 10 to 49 games. is there. The special card acquisition lottery table during art (No. 7) shown in FIG. 138C is a lottery table referred to when the number of acquired special cards is one and the number of ART difference games is 50 to 99 games. is there. The special card acquisition lottery table (No. 8) shown in FIG. 138D is a lottery table that is referred to when the number of acquired special cards is one and the number of ART difference games is 100 or more. It is.

  The special card acquisition lottery table during ART defines, for each sub lottery flag A, the correspondence between the lottery result (winning (one card acquisition) / non-winning) and the lottery value set for each lottery result.

  As shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, in the present embodiment, only when the sub lottery flag A is “batting order bell”, a special card acquisition lottery can be won and one special card can be obtained. The probability of winning the special card acquisition lottery increases as the number of ART difference games increases.

  Specifically, for example, when the number of acquired special cards is 0 and the sub lottery flag A is “batting order bell”, if the number of ART difference games is 0 to 9 games, The winning probability of the acquisition lottery is 81/32768 (about 0.25%), and if the number of difference games of the ART is 10 to 49 games, the winning probability of the special card acquisition lottery is 128/32768 (about 0.4%). ) Also, if the number of ART difference games is 50 to 99 games, the winning probability of special card acquisition lottery is 2280/32768 (about 7%), and if the number of ART difference games is 100 games or more, special cards The winning probability of the acquisition lottery is 128/32768 (about 16%).

  That is, in the present embodiment, in the main lottery during ART, the special game in the added state is not won by the internal winning combination related to “Bell”, but in the sub lottery, a special card is displayed. The production can be won by an internal winning combination related to “bell (batting order bell)”. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even a role that cannot be expected for a specialized game internally can be a role that can be expected in the production, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[ART specialization type lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 139 to FIG. 156, the ART specialized type lottery table will be described. In the present embodiment, in the unit game in the ART state, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a special effect is to be performed. The ART specialized lottery table shown in FIGS. 139 to 156 is a lottery table referred to by the lottery.

  Note that the ART specialized lottery table shown in FIG. 139A is a lottery table that is referred to when the value of the special counter is “0” or “1” and the sub lottery flag A is “watermelon”. It is. Note that the value of the special counter corresponds to the number of acquired special cards. The ART specialized lottery table shown in FIG. 139B is a lottery table that is referred to when the value of the special counter is “0” or “1” and the sub lottery flag A is “weak”. is there. The ART specialized lottery table shown in FIG. 139C is a lottery table that is referred to when the value of the special counter is “0” or “1” and the sub lottery flag A is “strong”. is there.

  140A is a lottery table that is referred to when the value of the special counter is “0” or “1” and the sub lottery flag A is “weak”. is there. 140B is a lottery table that is referred to when the value of the special counter is “0” or “1” and the sub lottery flag A is “strong”. is there. 140C is a lottery table that is referred to when the value of the special counter is “0” or “1” and the sub lottery flag A is “MB_weak check”. It is.

  141A is a lottery table that is referred to when the value of the special counter is “0” or “1” and the sub lottery flag A is “MB_strong check”. It is. 141B is a lottery table that is referred to when the value of the special counter is “0” or “1” and the sub lottery flag A is “other small combination”. It is. The “other small roles” here correspond to “common bells” and “MB roles”. 141C is a lottery table that is referred to when the value of the special counter is “0” or “1” and the sub lottery flag A is “batting order bell”. is there.

  142A is a lottery table that is referred to when the value of the special counter is “2” and the sub lottery flag A is “watermelon”. 142B is a lottery table that is referred to when the value of the special counter is “2” and the sub lottery flag A is “weak”. 142C is a lottery table that is referred to when the value of the special counter is “2” and the sub lottery flag A is “strong”.

  143A is a lottery table that is referred to when the value of the special counter is “2” and the sub lottery flag A is “weak”. 143B is a lottery table that is referred to when the value of the special counter is “2” and the sub lottery flag A is “strong”. The specialized type lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 143C is a lottery table that is referred to when the value of the special counter is “2” and the sub lottery flag A is “MB_weak check”.

  144A is a lottery table that is referred to when the value of the special counter is “2” and the sub lottery flag A is “MB_strong check”. 144B is a lottery table that is referred to when the value of the special counter is “2” and the sub lottery flag A is “other small combination”. 144C is a lottery table that is referred to when the value of the special counter is “2” and the sub lottery flag A is “batting order bell”.

  Further, in the ART special type lottery table shown in FIG. 145A, the value of the special game number counter on the main side is “6” to “9”, and the sub lottery flag A is “watermelon”. It is a lottery table referred to. 145B indicates that the value of the special game number counter on the main side is “6” to “9” and the sub lottery flag A is “weak”. It is a lottery table referred to. 145C shows a special type lottery table during ART when the value of the special game number counter on the main side is “6” to “9” and the sub lottery flag A is “strong”. It is a lottery table referred to.

  The specialized type lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 146A is when the value of the special game number counter on the main side is “6” to “9” and the sub lottery flag A is “weak”. It is a lottery table referred to. The specialized type lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 146B is when the value of the special game number counter on the main side is “6” to “9” and the sub lottery flag A is “strong”. It is a lottery table referred to. In the ART-specific specialized type lottery table shown in FIG. 146C, the value of the specialized game number counter on the main side is “6” to “9”, and the sub lottery flag A is “MB_weak check”. It is a lottery table referred to.

  In the ART special type lottery table shown in FIG. 147A, when the value of the special game number counter on the main side is “6” to “9” and the sub lottery flag A is “MB_strong check” It is a lottery table referred to. In the ART-specific specialized type lottery table shown in FIG. 147B, the value of the special game number counter on the main side is “5” to “9”, and the sub lottery flag A is “other small combination”. It is a lottery table referred to. The specialized type lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 147C is when the value of the special game number counter on the main side is “5” to “9” and the sub lottery flag A is “batting order bell”. It is a lottery table referred to.

  148A is referred to when the value of the special game number counter on the main side is “10” or more and the sub lottery flag A is “watermelon”. This is a lottery table. The specialized type lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 148B is referred to when the value of the special game number counter on the main side is “10” or more and the sub lottery flag A is “weak”. It is a lottery table. The specialized type lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 148C is referred to when the value of the special game number counter on the main side is “10” or more and the sub lottery flag A is “strong”. It is a lottery table.

  The specialized type lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 149A is referred to when the value of the special game number counter on the main side is “10” or more and the sub lottery flag A is “weak”. It is a lottery table. The specialized type lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 149B is referred to when the value of the specialized game number counter on the main side is “10” or more and the sub lottery flag A is “strong”. It is a lottery table. The specialized type lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 149C is referred to when the value of the specialized game number counter on the main side is “10” or more and the sub lottery flag A is “MB_weak check”. This is a lottery table.

  150A is referred to when the value of the special game number counter on the main side is “10” or more and the sub lottery flag A is “MB_strong”. This is a lottery table. 150B is referred to when the value of the special game number counter on the main side is “10” or more and the sub lottery flag A is “other small combination”. This is a lottery table. 150C is referred to when the value of the specialized game number counter on the main side is “10” or more and the sub lottery flag A is “batting order bell”. It is a lottery table.

  151A is a lottery table that is referred to when the ART stage C is in the state and the sub lottery flag A is “watermelon”. 151B is a lottery table that is referred to when the ART lot C is in the ART stage C and the sub lottery flag A is “weak”. 151C is a lottery table that is referred to when the ART lot C is in the ART stage C and the sub lottery flag A is “strong”.

  The specialized type lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 152A is a lottery table that is referred to when the ART stage C is in the state and the sub lottery flag A is “weak”. 152B is a lottery table that is referred to when the ART lot C is in the ART stage C and the sub lottery flag A is “strong”. 152C is a lottery table that is referred to when the ART lot C is in the ART stage C and the sub lottery flag A is “MB_weak check”.

  The specialized type lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 153A is a lottery table that is referred to when the ART stage C is in the state and the sub lottery flag A is “MB_strong check”. The specialized type lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 153B is a lottery table that is referred to when the ART stage C is in the state and the sub lottery flag A is “other small role”. The specialized type lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 153C is a lottery table which is referred to when the ART stage C is in the state and the sub lottery flag A is “batting order bell”.

  154A is a lottery table that is referred to when the character flag is on and the sub lottery flag A is “watermelon”. The specialized type lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 154B is a lottery table that is referred to when the character flag is on and the sub lottery flag A is “weak”. The specialized type lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 154C is a lottery table that is referred to when the character flag is on and the sub lottery flag A is “strong”.

  The ART specialized lottery table shown in FIG. 155A is a lottery table that is referred to when the character flag is on and the sub lottery flag A is “weak”. The ART specialized lottery table shown in FIG. 155B is a lottery table that is referred to when the character flag is on and the sub lottery flag A is “strong”. The ART specialized lottery table shown in FIG. 155C is a lottery table that is referred to when the character flag is on and the sub lottery flag A is “MB_weak check”.

  The specialized specialized lottery table shown in FIG. 156A is a lottery table that is referred to when the character flag is on and the sub lottery flag A is “MB_strong”. The ART specialized lottery table shown in FIG. 156B is a lottery table that is referred to when the character flag is on and the sub lottery flag A is “other small role”. The specialized specialized lottery table shown in FIG. 156C is a lottery table which is referred to when the character flag is on and the sub lottery flag A is “batting order bell”.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the ART specialized classification lottery table is provided for each of the following game situations (1) to (6).
(1) The situation when the value of the special counter is “0” or “1” (FIGS. 139 to 141)
(2) The situation when the value of the special counter is “2” (FIGS. 142 to 144)
(3) A situation in which the value of the specialized game number counter on the main side is “6” to “9” (FIGS. 145 to 147)
(4) A situation where the value of the specialized game number counter on the main side is “10” or more (FIGS. 148 to 150)
(5) Situation in state during ART stage C (FIGS. 151 to 153)
(6) The situation where the character flag is on (FIGS. 154 to 156)

  In addition, priority is provided in the reference order of the ART specialized type lottery table provided in the game situations (1) to (6), and from the highest one, the order of the game situations (6) to (1). Become. Therefore, when a plurality of types of game situations overlap, the ART specialized type lottery table with the highest priority game situation is referred to.

  In the ART special type lottery table, the lottery result (no special entry (non-winning), special zone type (special zones A to H)) and each lottery result are shown for each type of ART difference game number. The correspondence relationship with the lottery value set for each is defined. That is, in the lottery using the specialized type lottery table during ART, not only the presence / absence of execution of special effects (rushing into a specialized zone) but also the type of specialized zone to be entered is determined. In the present embodiment, the types of ART difference games defined in the ART specialization type lottery table are 0 games, 1 to 39 games, 40 to 99 games, 100 to 139 games, and 140 to 189. Eight types of games, 190-239 games, 240-339 games, and 340 games or more are provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 139 to 156, in the situation where the value of the special counter is “2” (the above game situation (2)), the specialized zone is only provided when the number of ART difference games is 100 games or more. It is configured to win H. At this time, the probability that the special zone H is won is also increased. That is, the situation where the value of the special counter is “2” and the number of difference games of ART is 100 games or more is a dedicated gaming situation for entering the specialized zone H.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 139 to 156, the specialized type lottery table during ART in a situation where the value of the specialized game number counter on the main side is “6” or more (the above game situations (3) and (4)) In this embodiment, it is clear that the lottery value setting mode specified in the above is compared with the lottery value setting mode specified in the ART specialized type lottery table in other situations. In a situation where the value of the specialized game number counter is “6” or more, the situation is such that it is easier to win a specialized effect than in other situations. Also, in the situation where the value of the specialized game number counter on the main side is “6” or more (the above game situations (3) and (4)), if the number of difference games of ART is 40 games or more, be sure to , It is configured to win special effects (enter into a special zone). At this time, any one of the special zones E to G is easily selected.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 139 to 156, in the situation where the character flag is on (the above game situation (6)), the sub lottery flag A is a flag corresponding to the rare role, and the ART difference game When the number is 40 games or more, it is configured to always win the special zone G (enter into the special zone G). That is, the situation where the character flag is on, the sub lottery flag A is a flag corresponding to a rare role, and the number of ART difference games is 40 games or more is dedicated to entering the specialized zone G It becomes the game situation.

  In the lottery using the ART special type lottery table shown in FIGS. 139 to 156, the example of referring to the value of the special game number counter on the main side as one of the game situation parameters has been described. The present invention is not limited to this, and it is not necessary to refer to the value of the specialized game number counter on the main side. That is, whether or not a special effect state has occurred may be determined regardless of the value of the special game number counter on the main side. In this case, the main parameter for determining whether or not the special performance state is generated is substantially the number of difference games.

[Specialized counter lottery table]
Next, the specialized counter lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158. In this embodiment, when entering the special effect state in the ART state, a special counter lottery for determining the game period of the special effect (initial value of the special counter) is performed. The specialized counter lottery tables shown in FIGS. 157 and 158 are lottery tables that are referred to by the specialized counter lottery.

  The specialized counter lottery table (No. 1) shown in FIG. 157A is a lottery table that is referred to when the specialized zone A enters. The specialized counter lottery table (No. 2) shown in FIG. 157B is a lottery table that is referred to when the specialized zone B enters. The specialized counter lottery table (No. 3) shown in FIG. 157C is a lottery table that is referred to when the specialized zone C enters. The specialized counter lottery table (No. 4) shown in FIG. 157D is a lottery table referred to when the specialized zone D enters.

  The specialized counter lottery table (No. 5) shown in FIG. 158A is a lottery table referred to when the specialized zone E enters. The specialized counter lottery table (No. 6) shown in FIG. 158B is a lottery table referred to when the specialized zone F enters. The specialized counter lottery table (No. 7) shown in FIG. 158C is a lottery table referred to when the specialized zone G enters. The specialized counter lottery table (No. 8) shown in FIG. 158D is a lottery table referred to when the specialized zone H enters. A specialized counter lottery table (No. 9) shown in FIG. 158E is a lottery table that is referred to when entering the specialized zone D after the end of the SBB.

  The special counter lottery table has a special game number type (lottery result: 1 game, 3 games, 5 games, 7 games, 10 games) for each value type of the special game number counter on the main side. Or 20 games) and a lottery value set for each lottery result. The types of values of the special game number counter on the main side referred to when selecting the special counter lottery table are “0” to “4”, “5” to “9”, and “10” to Four types of “19” and “20 or more” are provided. In the present embodiment, the game period of the special effect in the special zone G is a maximum of four games, so that “3” is always determined as the initial value of the special counter by the special counter lottery. (See FIG. 158C).

[NBB end screen lottery table during ART]
Next, the NBB end screen lottery table during ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 159A to 159C. In the present embodiment, when the NBB (BB1 or BB2) that is operating in the ART state is terminated, a selection lottery of the NBB termination screen displayed by the liquid crystal display device 11 is performed. The NBB end screen lottery table during ART shown in FIGS. 159A to 159C is a lottery table referred to in the selected lottery of the NBB end screen. At this time, the type of the NBB end screen is determined based on the accumulated number (acquired number) of medals acquired from the start of the ART to the end of the NBB and the set value.

  The NBB end screen lottery table (No. 1) shown in FIG. 159A is a lottery table that is referred to when the number of medals is 0 to 999. The NBB end screen lottery table (part 2) shown in FIG. 159B is a lottery table that is referred to when the number of acquired medals is 1000 to 2999. The NBB end screen lottery table (No. 3) shown in FIG. 159C is a lottery table referred to when the number of medals is 3000 or more.

  In the ART NBB end screen lottery table, for each type of the number of acquired medals, the correspondence between the type of NBB end screen (lottery result: end screens A to R) and the lottery value set for each lottery result Is specified. In the present embodiment, 18 types of end screens A to R are provided as the types of end screens to be selected.

  In addition, in the end screen of NBB, in addition to the screen (picture) of the predetermined display mode corresponding to the type of the end screen (lottery results: end screens A to R), the game includes at least the cumulative number of medals (the number acquired). Information (game history) is displayed. Therefore, the player can estimate the setting based on the display mode (picture) of the end screen and the number of acquired medals displayed on the end screen.

[Notification game number lottery table]
Next, in the game in the above-described ART state, various notification game number lottery tables used when determining the number of notification games to be notified by adding the number of ART games will be described. In the present embodiment, a notification game number lottery table is provided separately according to the game situation.

(1) Notification game number lottery table during ART FIGS. 160 to 168 show the notification game number lottery tables during ART. 160 to 168, each ART notification lottery table shown in FIGS. 160 to 168 indicates that the value of the display ART counter is “6” in the ART state, when the BB is not operating (including when winning or ending), when the special effect is not operating. It is a lottery table that is referred to in the notification game number lottery that is executed when the number is greater than or equal to. Further, in the present embodiment, as shown below, in the ART state, the game situation is further subdivided, and an ART in-game notification lottery table is provided for each game situation separately.

  In the ART notification game number lottery table (No. 1) shown in FIG. 160A, the value of the display ART counter is “99” or less, the ART stage is ART stage A or B, and the difference game number is “0”. It is a lottery table that is referred to when it is “9”. In the ART-notified game number lottery table (No. 2) shown in FIG. 160B, the value of the display ART counter is “100” or more, the ART stage is ART stage A or B, and the difference game number is “0”. It is a lottery table that is referred to when it is “9”. In the ART notification game number lottery table (No. 3) shown in FIG. 160C, the character flag is on, the ART stage is ART stage A or B, and the number of differential games is “0” to “9”. It is a lottery table referred to in some cases.

  In the ART-notified game number lottery table (No. 4) shown in FIG. 161A, the value of the display ART counter is “99” or less, the ART stage is ART stage A or B, and the number of difference games is “10”. It is a lottery table that is referred to in the case of “19”. In the ART-notified game number lottery table (No. 5) shown in FIG. 161B, the value of the display ART counter is “100” or more, the ART stage is ART stage A or B, and the difference game number is “10”. It is a lottery table that is referred to in the case of “19”. In the ART-notified game number lottery table (No. 6) shown in FIG. 161C, the character flag is on, the ART stage is ART stage A or B, and the number of differential games is “10” to “19”. It is a lottery table referred to in some cases.

  In the ART notification game number random determination table (No. 7) shown in FIG. 162A, the value of the display ART counter is “99” or less, the ART stage is the ART stage A or B, and the difference game number is “20”. It is a lottery table that is referred to in the case of “29”. In the ART notification game number random determination table (No. 8) shown in FIG. 162B, the value of the display ART counter is “100” or more, the ART stage is the ART stage A or B, and the difference game number is “20”. It is a lottery table that is referred to in the case of “29”. In the ART game notification lottery table (No. 9) shown in FIG. 162C, the character flag is on, the ART stage is ART stage A or B, and the number of differential games is “20” to “29”. It is a lottery table referred to in some cases.

  In the ART notification game number random determination table (No. 10) shown in FIG. 163A, the value of the display ART counter is “99” or less, the ART stage is ART stage A or B, and the number of difference games is “30”. It is a lottery table that is referred to in the case of “49”. In the ART notification game number random determination table (No. 11) shown in FIG. 163B, the value of the display ART counter is “100” or more, the ART stage is the ART stage A or B, and the difference game number is “30”. It is a lottery table that is referred to in the case of “49”. In the ART game notification lottery table (No. 12) shown in FIG. 163C, the character flag is on, the ART stage is ART stage A or B, and the number of difference games is “30” to “49”. It is a lottery table referred to in some cases.

  In the ART notification game number random determination table (No. 13) shown in FIG. 164A, the value of the display ART counter is “99” or less, the ART stage is ART stage A or B, and the difference game number is “50”. It is a lottery table that is referred to in the case of “99”. In the ART notification game number random determination table (No. 14) shown in FIG. 164B, the value of the display ART counter is “100” or more, the ART stage is the ART stage A or B, and the difference game number is “50”. It is a lottery table that is referred to in the case of “99”. In the ART notification game number lottery table (No. 15) shown in FIG. 164C, the character flag is on, the ART stage is ART stage A or B, and the number of difference games is “50” to “99”. It is a lottery table referred to in some cases.

  In the ART game notification lottery table (No. 16) shown in FIG. 165A, the value of the display ART counter is “99” or less, the ART stage is ART stage A or B, and the difference game number is “100”. It is a lottery table that is referred to in the case of “149”. In the ART game notification lottery table (No. 17) shown in FIG. 165B, the value of the display ART counter is “100” or more, the ART stage is ART stage A or B, and the difference game number is “100”. It is a lottery table that is referred to in the case of “149”. In the ART game notification lottery table (No. 18) shown in FIG. 165C, the character flag is on, the ART stage is ART stage A or B, and the number of differential games is “100” to “149”. It is a lottery table referred to in some cases.

  In the ART game notification number lottery table (No. 19) shown in FIG. 166A, the value of the display ART counter is “99” or less, the ART stage is ART stage A or B, and the difference game number is “150”. It is a lottery table that is referred to in the case of “199”. In the ART notification game number random determination table (No. 20) shown in FIG. 166B, the value of the display ART counter is “100” or more, the ART stage is the ART stage A or B, and the difference game number is “150”. It is a lottery table that is referred to in the case of “199”. In the ART notification lot number table (No. 21) shown in FIG. 166C, the character flag is on, the ART stage is ART stage A or B, and the difference game number is “150” to “199”. It is a lottery table referred to in some cases.

  In the ART notification game number random determination table (No. 22) shown in FIG. 167A, the value of the display ART counter is “99” or less, the ART stage is ART stage A or B, and the difference game number is “200”. It is a lottery table that is referred to when “˜299”. In the ART notification game number random determination table (No. 23) shown in FIG. 167B, the value of the display ART counter is “100” or more, the ART stage is the ART stage A or B, and the difference game number is “200”. It is a lottery table that is referred to when “˜299”. In the ART game notification number lottery table (No. 24) shown in FIG. 167C, the character flag is on, the ART stage is ART stage A or B, and the number of differential games is “200” to “299”. It is a lottery table referred to in some cases.

  In the ART notification game number random determination table (No. 25) shown in FIG. 168A, the value of the display ART counter is “99” or less, the ART stage is ART stage A or B, and the difference game number is “ It is a lottery table that is referred to when it is 300 "or more. In the ART notification game number random determination table (No. 26) shown in FIG. 168B, the value of the display ART counter is “100” or more, the ART stage is the ART stage A or B, and the difference game number is “300”. It is a lottery table that is referred to in the above case. 168C shows the number-of-notification-game number lottery table (No. 27) when the character flag is on, the ART stage is ART stage A or B, and the difference game number is “300” or more. It is a lottery table referred to.

  The number-of-notification-game-number lottery table in the ART shows the types of notification games that can be selected for each type of sub-lottery flag B (lottery result: 0 games (non-winning), 10 games, 20 games, 30 games, 50 games, 100 games, 300 games, “special”) and lottery values set for each lottery result are defined. The number of notification games is determined within the range of the current difference game number (a value less than the difference game number), and the lottery result “special” defined in the ART game notification lottery table indicates the current difference game. The number is determined as the number of notification games.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 160 to 168, when the character flag is in the on state, regardless of other elements (parameters) of the game situation (however, except for the end of ART described later) The result of the notification game number lottery using the ART game notification lottery table is always non-winning. Therefore, when the character song flag is in the on state, the difference game number does not decrease until the special effect to be performed thereafter, so that a larger number of notification games is easily determined in the special effect. As a result, the number of notification games that can be notified in the additional notification effect also becomes a larger value, so that when the character song flag is in the on state, the expectation of the additional can be further increased.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the lottery for the notification game executed when the value of the display ART counter is “6” or more, “special” is determined as the lottery result according to the game situation (current difference) (The number of games is determined as the number of notification games) (FIGS. 165A, 166A, 167A, and 168A), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration in which “special” is not necessarily determined as a lottery result in the ART state except for a specific condition such as the end of the ART production to be described later (for example, the lottery result “special” is not specified in the notification game number lottery table). Configuration etc.) may be adopted. That is, for example, except when a specific condition such as the end of an ART effect is established, an additional notification effect is used so that the number of difference games is not directly notified (suggested), and only when the specific condition is satisfied, an additional notification effect is provided. The difference game number may be directly notified (suggested).

  In this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 163A, when the value of the display ART counter is “99” or less, 10 or 30 games are determined as the number of notification games. At this time, the probability that 10 games are selected as the number of notification games is lower than the probability that 30 games are selected as the number of notification games. Further, in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 163B, when the value of the display ART counter is “100” or more, 10 or 30 games are determined as the number of notification games. However, in this case, the probability that 10 games are selected as the number of notification games is higher than the probability that 30 games are selected as the number of notification games. That is, in this embodiment, the expected number of notification games obtained when the value of the display ART counter is “100” or more is the number of notification games obtained when the value of the display ART counter is “99” or less. Is smaller than the expected value.

(2) ART Ending Notification Game Number Rottery Table FIGS. 169 to 173 show the ART end justification game number lottery tables. 169 to 173, each ART end-of-term announcement game number lottery table has an ART state where the value of the display ART counter is “when the BB is inactive (including the time of winning and at the end), when the special effect is inactive,” 5 ”is a lottery table that is referred to in the number-of-notification game lottery executed. Further, in the present embodiment, as shown below, in the game just before the end of ART (the value of the display ART counter is “5” or less), the game situation is further subdivided, and the ART end is immediately divided for each game situation. An announcement game number lottery table is provided.

  The end-of-art notification game number lottery table (No. 1) shown in FIG. 169A is a lottery table referred to when the character flag is off and the number of differential games is “0” to “9”. . The end-of-art notification game number lottery table (No. 2) shown in FIG. 169B is a lottery table that is referred to when the character song flag is on and the number of difference games is “0” to “9”. . The end-of-art notification game number lottery table (No. 3) shown in FIG. 169C is a lottery table that is referred to when the character flag is off and the number of differential games is “10” to “19”. . The end-of-art notification game number lottery table (part 4) shown in FIG. 169D is a lottery table that is referred to when the character flag is on and the difference game numbers are “10” to “19”. .

  The end-of-art notification game number lottery table (No. 5) shown in FIG. 170A is a lottery table that is referred to when the character flag is off and the difference game numbers are “20” to “29”. . The end-of-art notification game number lottery table (No. 6) shown in FIG. 170B is a lottery table that is referred to when the character song flag is on and the difference game numbers are “20” to “29”. . The end-of-art notification game lottery table (No. 7) shown in FIG. 170C is a lottery table that is referred to when the character flag is off and the number of differential games is “30” to “49”. . The end-of-art notification game lottery table (No. 8) shown in FIG. 170D is a lottery table that is referred to when the character song flag is in the on state and the difference game numbers are “30” to “49”. .

  The end-of-art notification game number lottery table (No. 9) shown in FIG. 171A is a lottery table that is referred to when the character flag is off and the number of differential games is “50” to “99”. . The end-of-art notification game number lottery table (No. 10) shown in FIG. 171B is a lottery table that is referred to when the character song flag is on and the number of difference games is “50” to “99”. . The end-of-art notification game number lottery table (No. 11) shown in FIG. 171C is a lottery table that is referred to when the character flag is off and the difference game numbers are “100” to “149”. . The end-of-art notification game number lottery table (No. 12) shown in FIG. 171D is a lottery table that is referred to when the character song flag is on and the difference game numbers are “100” to “149”. .

  The end-of-art notification game number lottery table (No. 13) shown in FIG. 172A is a lottery table that is referred to when the character flag is off and the number of differential games is “150” to “199”. . The end-of-art notification game number lottery table (No. 14) shown in FIG. 172B is a lottery table that is referred to when the character song flag is on and the difference game numbers are “150” to “199”. . The end-of-art notification game number lottery table (No. 15) shown in FIG. 172C is a lottery table that is referred to when the character flag is off and the number of differential games is “200” to “299”. . The end-of-art notification game number lottery table (No. 16) shown in FIG. 172D is a lottery table that is referred to when the character song flag is on and the difference game numbers are “200” to “299”. .

  Also, the ART end-arrival game number lottery table (No. 17) shown in FIG. 173A is a lottery table that is referred to when the character flag is off and the difference game number is “300” or more. The end-of-art notification game number lottery table (No. 18) shown in FIG. 173B is a lottery table that is referred to when the character flag is on and the difference game number is “300” or more.

  In the game state lottery table just before the end of ART, in each game situation described above, for each type of sub lottery flag B, the types of selectable notification games (lottery results: 0 games (non-winning), 10 games, 20 games) , 30 games, 50 games, 100 games, 300 games, “special”) and lottery values set for each lottery result.

  In addition, when the value of the display ART counter becomes “0” (when the display of the number of remaining games is “0” on the display screen), the total number of remaining difference games is notified by an additional announcement effect. In some cases, an unnatural situation may occur in the flow of the game, which may impair the interest of the game. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the value of the display ART counter is “5” or less (immediately before the end of ART), the above-described end-of-art notification game number lottery table is set so that an additional notification effect is likely to occur. The number of announcement games is lottery using.

(3) NBB winning game number lottery table during ART FIG. 174 to FIG. 182 show the NBB winning game number lottery table during ART. 174 to 182 is a lottery table that is referred to in the notification game number lottery executed when NBB (BB1 or BB2) is won in the ART state. In the present embodiment, as shown below, in the game at the time of winning the NBB during ART, the game situation is further subdivided, and an NBB winning at-time announcement game number lottery table is separately provided for each game situation.

  In the ART NBB winning game number lottery table (No. 1) shown in FIG. 174A, the value of the display ART counter is “99” or less and the difference game number is “0” to “9”. It is a lottery table referred to. In the ART NBB winning game number lottery table (No. 2) shown in FIG. 174B, the value of the display ART counter is “100” or more and the difference game number is “0” to “9”. It is a lottery table referred to. The NBB winning game number lottery table (No. 3) shown in FIG. 174C is a lottery table referred to when the character flag is on and the number of differential games is “0” to “9”. It is.

  In the ART NBB winning game number lottery table (No. 4) shown in FIG. 175A, the value of the display ART counter is “99” or less and the difference game number is “10” to “19”. It is a lottery table referred to. In the ART NBB winning game number lottery table (No. 5) shown in FIG. 175B, the value of the display ART counter is “100” or more and the number of difference games is “10” to “19”. It is a lottery table referred to. The NBB winning-time announcement game number lottery table (No. 6) shown in FIG. 175C is a lottery table referred to when the character flag is on and the difference game numbers are “10” to “19”. It is.

  The NBB winning game number lottery table (No. 7) shown in FIG. 176A shows that the value of the display ART counter is “99” or less and the number of difference games is “20” to “29”. It is a lottery table referred to. In the ART NBB winning game number lottery table (No. 8) shown in FIG. 176B, the value of the display ART counter is “100” or more and the difference game number is “20” to “29”. It is a lottery table referred to. The NBB winning game number lottery table (No. 9) shown in FIG. 176C is a lottery table that is referred to when the character flag is on and the number of differential games is “20” to “29”. It is.

  In the ART NBB winning game number lottery table (No. 10) shown in FIG. 177A, the value of the display ART counter is “99” or less and the difference game number is “30” to “49”. It is a lottery table referred to. In the ART NBB winning game number lottery table (No. 11) shown in FIG. 177B, the value of the display ART counter is “100” or more and the number of difference games is “30” to “49”. It is a lottery table referred to. The NBB winning game number lottery table (No. 12) shown in FIG. 177C is a lottery table referred to when the character flag is on and the number of differential games is “30” to “49”. It is.

  In the ART NBB winning game number lottery table (No. 13) shown in FIG. 178A, the value of the display ART counter is “99” or less and the number of difference games is “50” to “99”. It is a lottery table referred to. In the ART NBB winning game number lottery table (No. 14) shown in FIG. 178B, the value of the display ART counter is “100” or more and the number of differential games is “50” to “99”. It is a lottery table referred to. The NBB winning game number lottery table (No. 15) shown in FIG. 178C is a lottery table referred to when the character flag is on and the number of differential games is “50” to “99”. It is.

  In the ART NBB winning game number lottery table (No. 16) shown in FIG. 179A, the value of the display ART counter is “99” or less and the difference game number is “100” to “149”. It is a lottery table referred to. In the ART NBB winning game number lottery table (No. 17) shown in FIG. 179B, the value of the display ART counter is “100” or more and the difference game number is “100” to “149”. It is a lottery table referred to. The NBB winning game number lottery table (No. 18) shown in FIG. 179C is a lottery table that is referred to when the character flag is on and the difference game numbers are “100” to “149”. It is.

  180A shows the NBB winning game number lottery table (No. 19) shown in FIG. 180A when the value of the display ART counter is “99” or less and the difference game number is “159” to “199”. It is a lottery table referred to. 180B of the NBB winning game notification lottery table (No. 20) shown in FIG. 180B is when the value of the display ART counter is “100” or more and the number of difference games is “159” to “199”. It is a lottery table referred to. 180C of the NBB winning game number lottery table (No. 21) shown in FIG. 180C is referred to when the character flag is on and the difference game number is “159” to “199”. It is.

  The NBB winning game number lottery table (No. 22) shown in FIG. 181A is when the value of the display ART counter is “99” or less and the difference game number is “200” to “299”. It is a lottery table referred to. The NBB winning game number lottery table (No. 23) shown in FIG. 181B is when the value of the display ART counter is “100” or more and the number of difference games is “200” to “299”. It is a lottery table referred to. The NBB winning game number lottery table (No. 24) shown in FIG. 181C is referred to when the character flag is on and the difference game number is “200” to “299”. It is.

  Further, the NBB winning game number lottery table (No. 25) shown in FIG. 182A is referred to when the value of the display ART counter is “99” or less and the difference game number is “300” or more. It is a lottery table. The NBB winning-time notification game number lottery table (No. 26) shown in FIG. 182B is referred to when the value of the display ART counter is “100” or more and the difference game number is “300” or more. It is a lottery table. The NBB-winning announcement game number lottery table (No. 27) shown in FIG. 182C is a lottery table referred to when the character flag is on and the difference game number is “300” or more.

  The NBB winning game number lottery table during ART shows the types of selectable notification games (lottery results: 0 games (non-winning), 10 games) for each type of sub lottery flag A in each game situation described above. 20 games, 30 games, 50 games, 100 games, 300 games) and lottery values set for each lottery result are defined.

(4) NBB end notification game number lottery table during ART FIGS. 183 to 186 show the NBB end notification game number lottery table during ART. 183 to 186 are the lottery tables that are referred to in the notification game number lottery executed at the end of NBB (BB1 or BB2) in the ART state. Further, in the present embodiment, as shown below, in the game at the end of the NBB during ART, the game situation is further subdivided, and an NBB end-of-art notification game number lottery table is provided separately for each game situation.

  The NBB end notification game number lottery table (part 1) shown in FIG. 183A is a lottery table that is referred to when the sub lottery flag A is “common bell” and “others”. . Here, the “other” situation refers to a situation other than when the story BB is won. The NBB end-notification game number lottery table (No. 2) shown in FIG. 183B is a lottery table that is referred to when the sub lottery flag A is “weak” and “other”. . The NBB end notification game number lottery table (part 3) shown in FIG. 184A is a lottery table that is referred to when the sub lottery flag A is “strong” and the situation is “other”. . The NBB end notification game number lottery table (No. 4) shown in FIG. 184B is a lottery table that is referred to when the character flag is on and the status is “other”.

  The NBB end notification game number lottery table (No. 5) shown in FIG. 185A is a lottery table that is referred to when the sub lottery flag A is “common bell” and the story BB is winning. The NBB end notification game number lottery table (No. 6) shown in FIG. 185B is a lottery table which is referred to when the sub lottery flag A is “weak” and the story BB is won. The NBB end-notification game number lottery table (No. 7) shown in FIG. 186A is a lottery table that is referred to when the sub lottery flag A is a “strong check” win and a story BB win. is there. The NBB end notification game number lottery table (No. 8) shown in FIG. 186B is a lottery table that is referred to when the character flag is on and the story BB is won.

  The NBB end-notification game number lottery table during ART shows the types of selectable notification games (lottery results: 0 games (non-winning) to 300 games) for each type of ART difference game number in each game situation described above. ) And a lottery value set for each lottery result.

  In the present embodiment, the type of ART difference game number specified in the NBB end-notification game number lottery table during ART is 0-9 games, 10-19 games, 20-29 games, 30-49. Nine types of games, 50 to 99 games, 100 to 149 games, 150 to 199 games, 200 to 299 games, and 300 games or more are provided. Also, in the NBB end notification game number lottery table during ART, the number of selectable notification games is the number of games at intervals of 10 games (0, 10, 20, 30, 40,..., 300 as 0 to 300 games). ) Is prescribed.

(5) Specialized zone A to C notification game number lottery table FIGS. 187 to 192 show the special zone A to C notification game number random determination table. Each special zone A to C notification game number lottery table shown in FIGS. 187 to 192 is a lottery table referred to in the notification game number lottery executed in the game in the special zones A to C. Further, in the present embodiment, as shown below, in the game in the special zones A to C, the game situation is further subdivided, and the number of notification games in the special zones A to C is determined separately for each game situation. Set up a table.

  The specialized game number lottery table (part 1) in the special zones A to C shown in FIG. 187A is a lottery referred to when the BB is not won and the difference game number is “0” to “9”. It is a table. A special game zone lottery table (No. 2) in the special zones A to C shown in FIG. 187B is a lottery referred to when the BB is not won and the number of differential games is “10” to “19”. It is a table. The special game zone lottery table (No. 3) in the specialized zones A to C shown in FIG. 187C is a lottery referred to when the BB is not won and the difference game count is “20” to “29”. It is a table.

  A special game zone lottery table (No. 4) in the special zones A to C shown in FIG. 188A is a lottery referred to when the BB is not won and the difference game number is “30” to “49”. It is a table. The special game number lottery table (No. 5) in the special zones A to C shown in FIG. 188B is a lottery referred to when the BB is not won and the difference game number is “50” to “99”. It is a table. The special game number lottery table (No. 6) in the special zones A to C shown in FIG. 188C is a lottery referred to when the BB is not won and the difference game number is “100” to “149”. It is a table.

  A special game zone lottery table (No. 7) in the special zones A to C shown in FIG. 189A is a lottery referred to when the BB is not won and the number of differential games is “150” to “199”. It is a table. The special game zone number lottery table (No. 8) shown in FIG. 189B is a lottery table that is referred to when the BB is not won and the difference game number is “200” to “299”. It is a table. The special game zone number lottery table (No. 9) shown in FIG. 189C is a lottery table that is referred to when the BB is not won and the difference game number is “300” or more. .

  190A is a lottery table (No. 10) in the special zones A to C, which is referred to when the BB is won and the difference game number is “0” to “9”. It is. 190B is a lottery table (No. 11) in the special zones A to C that is referred to when the BB is won and the number of differential games is “10” to “19”. It is. 190C is a lottery table (No. 12) in the special zones A to C, which is referred to when the BB is won and the difference game numbers are “20” to “29”. It is.

  The specialized game number lottery table (No. 13) in the special zones A to C shown in FIG. 191A is a lottery table that is referred to when the BB is won and the difference game number is “30” to “49”. It is. 191B is a lottery table (14) for the notification games in the special zones A to C, which is referred to when the BB is won and the difference game number is “50” to “99”. It is. The special announcement zone number lottery table (No. 15) in the special zones A to C shown in FIG. 191C is a lottery table that is referred to when the BB is won and the difference game number is “100” to “149”. It is.

  A special game zone lottery table (No. 16) in the special zones A to C shown in FIG. 192A is a lottery table that is referred to when the BB is won and the number of differential games is “150” to “199”. It is. The special game zone lottery table (No. 17) in the special zones A to C shown in FIG. 192B is a lottery table that is referred to when the BB is won and the difference game count is “200” to “299”. It is. A special game number lottery table (No. 18) in the special zones A to C shown in FIG. 192C is a lottery table that is referred to when the BB is won and the difference game number is “300” or more.

  In the special zones A to C, the number-of-notification-game number lottery table indicates the types of notification games that can be selected for each type of sub lottery flag A (lottery result: 0 games (non-winning), 10 Game, 20 games, 30 games, 50 games, 100 games, 300 games) and a lottery value set for each lottery result.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a lottery table is provided when the number of differential games is “0” to “9”, and the lottery value is set so that the lottery result is always non-winning in the lottery table. Is set. However, in the pachi-slot 1 of this embodiment, as a general rule, the number of notification games is determined within the range of the number of difference games (a value less than the number of difference games), and the contents of specialized effects are also executed within the range of the number of differences games. It is configured to be. Therefore, the announcement game number random determination table (see FIGS. 187A and 190A) that can be referred to even when the difference game number is “0” is not actually used.

  Also, in the lottery for the notification games in the special zones A to C, as shown in FIGS. 187 to 192, when the sub lottery flag A is other than “medium chee” (the difference game number is “0” to “9”). The number of notification games of 10 games or more is always determined. On the other hand, when the sub lottery flag A is “medium check”, the lottery result is always non-winning. However, in the present embodiment, when the sub lottery flag A is “medium check”, the SBB (BB3) always has a winning combination (the winning numbers “23” in FIG. 29 and FIG. 30) Refer to “76”). That is, in each of the special zones A to C, every game and some privilege (additional announcement effect, BB role overlap win) are surely given. In addition, this invention is not limited to this, The structure which does not provide a "medium check" is employ | adopted, and it may be set as the structure which produces every game and an extra announcement effect in the special zones A-C.

(6) Special Zone G 3 Game Announcement Game Number Drawing Table FIG. 193 shows a special zone G 3 game announcement game number lottery table. The special game number lottery table for the third game in the special zone G shown in FIG. 193 is a lottery table referred to in the special game number lottery executed in the game of the third game from the start of the special zone G effect.

  The number-of-games lottery table (part 1) for the three games in the specialized zone G shown in FIG. 193A is a lottery table referred to when the BB is not won. A special game G lottery table lottery table (No. 2) in the specialized zone G shown in FIG. 193B is a lottery table that is referred to when the BB is won. In addition, the 3rd game announcement game number random determination table (part 3) in the specialized zone G shown in FIG. 193C is a random determination table that is referred to when the character flag is on.

  The number-of-notification-game number lottery table in the special zone G shows the number of selectable notification games for each type of ART difference game number (lottery result: 0 games (non-winning), +100 games, +200 games, +300 game) and a lottery value set for each lottery result is defined.

  In the present embodiment, as the type of ART difference game number stipulated in the special game G lottery table for the third game in the special zone G, the value of ART difference game number-2 is 0 to 100 games. Four types of 101-200 games, 201-310 games, and 311 games or more are provided.

[Configuration of game number precursor scenario lottery table and game number precursor scenario map]
(1) Game number precursor scenario lottery table FIG. 194 shows an example of a game number precursor scenario lottery table. In the present embodiment, in the normal ART state (when the BB is not operating and when the special effect is not operating), when the value of the display ART counter is “7” or less, or when the stage C is in the state, A lottery (number of games) for deciding the content (game number precursor scenario map) of the signage effect of the extra announcement effect when winning the medium announcement game number lottery (when execution of the extra announcement effect of ART is decided) A precursor scenario lottery) is performed. The game number precursor scenario lottery table shown in FIG. 194 is an example of a lottery table referred to in this game number precursor scenario lottery.

  The game number precursor scenario lottery table shown in FIG. 194 is a lottery table that is referred to in the game number precursor scenario lottery executed when the value of the notification game number counter is “10” to “19”. The notification game number counter is a counter in which the number of notification games is set, and is provided in the sub RAM 103.

  The game number precursor scenario lottery table is set for each type of sub lottery flag B, for each type of game number precursor scenario map (lottery result: MAP number “0” to “28”) and each lottery result. The correspondence relationship with the lottery value is specified. In the game number precursor scenario lottery using the game number precursor scenario lottery table shown in FIG. 194, the game number precursor scenario of the MAP number “1” is always determined regardless of the type of the sub lottery flag B.

  Further, here, for the sake of simplification of explanation, a game number precursor scenario lottery table in the case where the game situation counter values are “10” to “19” is shown as an example. However, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the game number precursor scenario lottery is also appropriately applied to other various game situations (for example, when the value of the notification game number counter is a value other than “10” to “19”). A table is provided. In the game number precursor scenario lottery table in these other game situations, the value of the prescribed lottery value varies depending on the game situation, but the configuration of the lottery table is the same as that shown in FIG.

(2) Game Number Prediction Scenario Map In FIG. 195, the game number precursor scenario map of the MAP numbers “0” to “28” (29 types) defined in the game number precursor scenario lottery table (from the precursor effect to the announcement notification is generated) Shows the flow of production until.

  For example, when the game number precursor scenario of MAP number “4” is selected by the game number precursor scenario lottery, a series of effects are performed over a period of four games. Specifically, first, in the unit game (first game) where the lottery for the number of notification games in ART is won (execution of the extra announcement production is decided), the chance suggestion production (“chance (book)” in FIG. 195) ) Is performed. Next, in the unit game of the second game and the third game, a prelude effect (“precursor (G)” in FIG. 195) is performed. Then, in the unit game of the fourth game, an additional notification effect (“Notification (G)” in FIG. 195) of the number of ART games is performed. Note that the control from the warning effect based on the game number warning scenario to the occurrence of the additional notification effect is managed by a warning counter described later.

[Configuration of ART Ending Precursor Scenario Lottery Table and ART Ending Precursor Scenario Map]
(1) ART Ending Precursor Scenario Rottery Table FIG. 196 shows an example of the ART ending precursor scenario lottery table. In the present embodiment, in the normal ART state, when the number of lottery games for the end of ART is won (when execution of the extra announcement effect is determined), the contents of the indication effect of the extra announcement effect (ART end) A lottery for determining a precursor scenario map (ART end precursor scenario lottery) is performed. The ART end sign scenario lottery table shown in FIG. 196 is an example of a lottery table referred to in the ART end sign scenario lottery.

  The ART end sign scenario lottery table shown in FIG. 196 is a lottery table referred to in the ART end sign scenario lottery executed when the value of the notification game number counter is “10” to “19”.

  In the ART end precursor scenario lottery table, for each type of display ART counter value (“0” to “5”), a selectable ART end precursor scenario map type (lottery result: MAP number “0” to “5”). ) And a lottery value set for each lottery result. In the ART end precursor scenario lottery using the ART end precursor scenario lottery table shown in FIG. 196, the ART end precursor scenario with the MAP number “1” is always determined regardless of the value of the display ART counter.

  In addition, here, for the sake of simplification of explanation, an ART end sign scenario lottery table is shown as an example in the case where the value of the notification game number counter is “10” to “19”. However, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the ART end precursor sign scenario lottery is also appropriately applied to other various game situations (for example, when the value of the notification game number counter is a value other than “10” to “19”). A table is provided. In each ART end indication sign lottery table in these other game situations, the value of the prescribed lottery value varies depending on the game situation, but the configuration of the lottery table is the same as that shown in FIG.

(2) ART End Predictor Scenario Map FIG. 197 shows an ART end predictor scenario map of MAP numbers “0” to “5” (six types) defined in the ART end precursor scenario lottery table. As described above, in the ART end precursor scenario lottery according to the present embodiment, the ART end precursor scenario having the MAP number “1” is always determined. Therefore, in the ART end precursor scenario map shown in FIG. Only the ART termination precursor scenario numbered “1” is defined.

  In the ART end warning scenario map with the MAP number “1”, an ART addition notification effect (“Notification (G)” in FIG. 197) is defined in the first game. In other words, when the winning game number lottery is won, the ART extra presentation effect is performed in the winning game.

[Configuration of specialized precursor scenario lottery table and specialized precursor scenario map]
(1) Specialized precursor scenario lottery table FIGS. 198 and 199 show an example of a specialized precursor scenario lottery table. In the present embodiment, when the special notification game number lottery is won in the state of specialization production (when execution of the additional announcement production of ART is decided), the content of the sign production of the extra announcement production ( A lottery (specialized precursor scenario lottery) for determining a precursor scenario map) is performed. The specialized precursor scenario lottery tables shown in FIGS. 198 and 199 are examples of the lottery table referred to in the specialized precursor scenario lottery.

  The special sign scenario lottery table shown in FIG. 198 is a lottery referenced in the special sign scenario lottery executed when the special effect state of the special zone A and the game number release flag are in the off state. It is a table. Also, the special sign scenario lottery table shown in FIG. 199 is the special effect state that is executed in the special zone A and the value of the notification game number counter is “10” to “19”. It is a lottery table referred to in the pre-signature scenario lottery.

  The special sign scenario lottery table includes, for each type of value of the special game number counter on the main side, a selectable ART end sign scenario map type (lottery result: MAP number “0” to “107”), The correspondence relationship with the lottery value set for the lottery result is defined. In this embodiment, the types of values of the special game number counter on the main side defined in the special sign scenario lottery table are “0” to “5”, “6” to “7”, “ Six types of “8” to “9”, “10”, “11” to “12”, and “13” or more are provided.

  In addition, here, in order to simplify the explanation, the game situation is the special effect state of the special zone A and the game number release flag is in the off state, and the special situation of the special zone A An example of a specialized sign scenario lottery table in the case of a production state and a notification game number counter value of “10” to “19” will be described. However, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, a specialized precursor scenario is also appropriately applied to various other game situations (for example, when the value of the notification game number counter is a value other than “10” to “19”). A lottery table is provided. In each specialized sign scenario lottery table in these other game situations, the value of the lottery value specified varies depending on the game situation, but the configuration of the lottery table is the same as the configuration shown in FIGS. 198 and 199. become.

(2) Specialized precursor scenario map FIG. 200 shows a specialized precursory scenario map of MAP numbers “0” to “107” (108 types) defined in the specialized precursor scenario lottery table.

  For example, when a special sign scenario of MAP number “5” is selected by the special sign scenario lottery, a series of effects are performed over a period of five games. Specifically, first, in the unit game (first game) in which the number of notification games in the special zones A to C is won (the execution of the additional notification effect is decided), the chance suggestion effect (“ Chance (book) "). Next, in the unit game of the second game to the fourth game, a precursor effect (“precursor (G)” in FIG. 200) is performed. Then, in the unit game of the fifth game, an ART additional announcement effect (“Notification (G)” in FIG. 200) is performed. Note that the control from the precursor effect to the extra announcement effect based on this specialized precursor scenario is also managed by a precursor counter described later.

[Navi lottery table]
201 and 202 show an example of a navigation lottery table. In the present embodiment, in the unit game in the ART state, when the start command transmitted from the main side does not include any information of the instruction monitor numbers “1” to “9”, “!” Navigation is performed. A lottery (navigation lottery) is performed to determine whether or not. The navigation lottery tables shown in FIGS. 201 and 202 are lottery tables referred to in the navigation lottery. In the “!” Navigation, numbers (“1”, “2”, “3”) indicating the pressing order in normal batting order navigation are displayed, and the area immediately above each reel in the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 11. In addition, a “!” Symbol is displayed instead of a number.

  The navigation lottery table (No. 1) shown in FIG. 201A is a lottery table that is referred to in the navigation lottery executed when the notification game number lottery during ART is not won. The navigation lottery table (No. 2) shown in FIG. 201B is a lottery table that is referred to in the navigation lottery executed when the ART game notification game number lottery is won. The navigation lottery table (No. 3) shown in FIG. 201C is a lottery table that is referred to in the navigation lottery executed when the special type lottery during ART is not won. The navigation lottery table (No. 4) shown in FIG. 201D is a lottery table that is referred to in the navigation lottery executed when the ART sub-flag is on and the BB is won. The navigation lottery table (No. 5) shown in FIG. 201E is a lottery table that is referred to in the navigation lottery executed when the effect state is a warning.

  The navigation lottery table (No. 6) shown in FIG. 202A is a lottery table that is referred to in the navigation lottery executed in the unit game (see FIG. 195) that becomes the “Development 1G” or “Development 2G” in the precursor scenario. is there. A navigation lottery table (No. 7) shown in FIG. 202B is a lottery table referred to in the navigation lottery executed when the special effect is in operation. The navigation lottery table (No. 8) shown in FIG. 202C is a lottery table that is referred to in the navigation lottery executed when the ART sub-flag is on and the BB is operating. A navigation lottery table (No. 9) shown in FIG. 202D is a lottery table that is referred to in the navigation lottery executed when the main-side payout state is the ART preparation state.

  The navigation lottery table shows the correspondence between lottery results (no navigation (non-winning) / “!” Navigation (winning)) and lottery values set for each lottery result for each type of sub lottery flag A. Stipulate.

<Description of main control circuit operation>
Next, contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 to 252.

[Main operation processing of pachislot by control of main CPU]
First, the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after power-on) of the pachislot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 203 (hereinafter referred to as main flow).

  First, when power is turned on to the pachi-slot 1, the main CPU 93 performs initialization processing at the time of power-on (S1). In this process, various initialization processes when changing settings, a process for determining whether backup has been performed normally, and the like are performed. The details of the initialization process when the power is turned on will be described later with reference to FIG. 204 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 95 is cleared. Note that the designated storage area here is a storage area that needs to be erased for each unit game (one game) such as an internal winning combination storage area or a display combination storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S3). In this processing, a medal sensor (not shown), input of the start switch 79, etc. are checked. The details of the medal acceptance / start check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a process of acquiring a random value for internal winning combination lottery (S4). In this process, the main CPU 93 extracts a random number value (0 to 65535) for internal winning combination lottery and stores the extracted random value in a random value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 95.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs an effect random number acquisition process (S5). In this process, for example, the main CPU 93 acquires various effect random numbers used in various lottery processes related to the presence or absence of the operation of the AT (ART) function and the operation content. Specifically, the main CPU 93 obtains a random value for lottery processing related to ART (AT) (effect lottery value: 0 to 127) and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs an internal winning combination lottery process (S6). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random number value for internal winning combination lottery extracted in S4. Details of the internal winning combination lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 208 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a lottery process when the lever is on (S7). In this process, various lottery processes relating to the presence / absence of the ART (AT) function and the operation contents are performed based on the random numbers for various effects extracted in S5 and the internal winning combination determined in S6. The details of the lever-on lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs an instruction monitor set process (S8). In this process, the main CPU 93 performs a process of setting an instruction monitor number (numerical value indicating a navigation type) to be displayed (notified) on an instruction display unit (not shown) based on, for example, a gaming state, an internal winning combination, and the like. The details of the instruction monitor set process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop initial setting process (S9). Details of the reel stop initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 236 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs start command generation and storage processing (S10). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates start command data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by communication data transmission processing in interrupt processing described later with reference to FIG. The start command data includes, for example, various lottery results such as whether or not the ART (AT) function is activated in addition to parameters such as the main game state, the outgoing ball game state, and the main lottery flag (internal winning combination). Information is included.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel rotation start process (S11). In this process, the main CPU 93 performs a game weight digest process, a request to start rotation of all reels, and the like.

  In the wait digestion process in S11, the main CPU 93 passes the predetermined wait time if a predetermined wait time (eg, 4.1 seconds) has not elapsed since the start of the previous game (unit game). Wait processing until. Next, the main CPU 93 performs normal acceleration processing for the three reels.

  Specifically, after a predetermined wait time is consumed, the main CPU 93 requests the start of rotation of all reels. When the start of rotation of all reels is requested, three stepping motors (not shown) are driven by an interrupt process (see FIG. 252 described later) executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). Controlled, rotation of the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C and right reel 3R is started. At this time, each reel is subjected to acceleration control until the rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and then controlled so as to maintain the constant speed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a drawing priority order storage process (S12). In this process, the main CPU 93 acquires the pull-in priority data and stores it in the pull-in priority data storage area. The details of the pull-in priority storage process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop control process (S13). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing when the left stop button 19L, the middle stop button 19C, and the right stop button 19R are pressed and the internal winning combination. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 240 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a winning search process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 93 displays the symbol combinations displayed on the effective line (winning determination line) after all of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R are stopped, and the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 16 to 19). And match. Then, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the display combination is displayed on the active line, and stores the determination result in the display combination storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs lottery processing after the third stop (S15). In this process, the main CPU 93 performs various lottery processes for various parameters required after the next game in accordance with the appearance state, the game situation, and the like. The details of the third post-stop lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs medal payout processing (S16). In this process, the hopper device 51 is driven and the number of credits is updated based on the number of payouts of the display combination determined in S14, and medals are paid out. At this time, in the present embodiment, the number of medals to be paid out differs depending on the display combination, but as shown in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 16 to 19), the maximum number of medals to be paid out (payout upper limit) is 9 Become.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs an RT state control process (S17). In this process, the main CPU 93 performs RT state transition control based on the display combination determined in S14. Details of the RT state control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 245 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a ball appearance state control process (S18). In this process, the main CPU 93 performs the transition control of the payout state as necessary. Note that details of the payout ball state control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 246 and 247 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs display command generation / storage processing (S19). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates display command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The display command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by communication data transmission processing in interrupt processing described later with reference to FIG. By this process, the sub control circuit 101 can recognize the symbol combination displayed along the effective line, and can determine the execution timing of various effects.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs payout end command generation / storage processing (S20). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates payout end command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The payout end command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by a communication data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. The payout end command includes a parameter for specifying that the medal payout process has ended.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end check process (S21). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to various counters (not shown) for managing the end timing of the bonus (BB or MB) game provided in the main RAM 95 and determines whether or not to end the operation of the bonus game. Check. The details of the bonus end check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus operation check process (S22). In this process, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not to start the bonus (BB or MB) game and whether or not to replay. Details of the bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 250 described later. When the bonus operation check process ends, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S2, and repeats the processes after S2.

[Initialization at power-on]
Next, with reference to FIG. 204, the initialization process at power-on performed in S1 in the main flow (see FIG. 203) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the setting key type switch 56 is in an ON state (S31).

  In S31, when the main CPU 93 determines that the setting key switch 56 is not in the on state (when S31 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs a power interruption recovery process (S32). Details of the power interruption recovery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 205 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the power interruption has occurred for 2 hours or more (S33).

  In S33, when the main CPU 93 determines that the power interruption has occurred for two hours or more (when S33 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S35 described later. On the other hand, in S33, when the main CPU 93 determines that the power interruption has not occurred for two hours or more (in the case where S33 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the initialization process at the time of power-on and performs the process. The process proceeds to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 203).

  Here, returning to the process of S31 again, in S31, when the main CPU 93 determines that the setting key switch 56 is in the ON state (when S31 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the setting change process. (S34). Details of the setting change processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 206 described later.

  After the process of S34 or when S33 is YES, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization command generation and storage process (S35). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of an initialization command (setting change command) to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The initialization command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by communication data transmission processing in interrupt processing described later with reference to FIG. Note that the initialization command data includes, for example, information such as a set value, an RT state, and various parameters determined when the setting is changed. After the process of S35, the main CPU 93 ends the initialization process when the power is turned on, and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 203).

  In the present embodiment, as described above, an example is described in which whether the power interruption has occurred for 2 hours or more is monitored on the main side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the power interruption is 2 hours. The sub side may monitor whether or not the above has occurred.

[Power failure recovery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 205, the power interruption recovery process performed in S32 during the initialization process (see FIG. 204) upon power-on will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether the backup is normal (S41). In this determination process, the main CPU 93 determines whether the backup is normal by performing error detection using the checksum value.

  When the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is normal in S41 (when S41 is YES), the main CPU 93 restores the set value to the state before the power interruption based on the backup data (S42). After the process of S42, the main CPU 93 ends the power interruption recovery process, and moves the process to S33 of the initialization process (see FIG. 204) when the power is turned on.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S41 that the backup is not normal (when S41 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs power-on error processing (S43). In this process, the main CPU 93 notifies that the backup is not normal by an error display or the like.

[Setting change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 206, the setting change process performed in S34 during the initialization process (see FIG. 204) upon power-on will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 performs a main gaming state set process (S51). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets the RT0 state to the main game state. Next, the main CPU 93 sets the normal flag to the on state (S52). By this processing, the normal state is set to the ball appearance state managed on the main side.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets “1” (initial value) to the cycle number counter (S53). The cycle number counter is a counter for counting the number of normal game cycles executed after the end of ART or after power is restored, and is provided in the main RAM 95. In addition, the value of the period counter is periodically updated in the range of 1 to 5, and is updated (added by +1) when ART non-winning (battle defeat) is confirmed in the game in the CZ state. At this time, when the value of the updated cycle number counter exceeds “5”, the value of the cycle number counter is returned to “1” (initial value) (reset). Also, when the ART winning is determined in the game in the CZ state, the value of the cycle number counter is returned to “1” (initial value) (reset).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a normal game initial cycle game number lottery process (when the setting is changed) (S54). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the initial change game number lottery table shown in FIG. 72, and determines the initial cycle game number based on the set values (settings 1 to 6). Next, the main CPU 93 sets the lottery result of S54 (the number of initial periodic games) in the periodic game number counter (S55). The cyclic game number counter is a counter for counting the number of remaining cyclic games of the normal game in the current cycle, and is provided in the main RAM 95.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs an initial period game number addition value acquisition process (S56). In this process, the main CPU 93 acquires any one of the random number values “0” to “7”, and uses the acquired random number value as the added value of the number of first-period games. Next, the main CPU 93 adds the addition value of the initial period game number acquired in the process of S56 to the value of the period game number counter (S57). With this process, the game period (the number of initial period games) in the normal state of the initial period started after the setting change is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a card rank lottery process (when setting is changed) (S58). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the setting change card rank lottery tables (Nos. 1 to 3) shown in FIGS. 73A to 73C, and based on the setting values (Settings 1 to 6), the attack system card and the defense system card And each card rank ("0", "1", or "3") of a reward system card is determined. By this process, the initial rank is determined for each of the attack card, defense card, and reward card of the normal game started after the setting change. Next, the main CPU 93 sets the card rank (lottery result) of each card determined in the lottery process of S58 (S59).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs stage lottery processing in the first cycle (initial cycle) (S60). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the stage lottery table (No. 6: after setting change) shown in FIG. 89F and based on the set value (settings 1 to 6), the stage (stage A) in the normal state , B, C or special stage). Next, the main CPU 93 sets the lottery result of S60 on the stage of the first cycle (S61).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs stage lottery processing in the second cycle (next cycle) (S62). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the stage lottery table (No. 6: after setting change) shown in FIG. 89F, and based on the setting value (settings 1 to 6), the stage (stage A) in the second state in the normal state. , B, C or special stage). Next, the main CPU 93 sets the lottery result of S62 on the stage of the second cycle (S63).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs enemy character lottery processing in the first cycle (first cycle) (S64). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the enemy character lottery table (No. 6: after setting change) shown in FIG. 91C, and based on the set value (settings 1 to 6), in the game in the CZ state in the first cycle. The type of enemy character (any of the enemy characters A to F) to be played against the main character is determined. Next, the main CPU 93 sets the lottery result of S64 to the enemy character in the first cycle (S65).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs enemy character lottery processing in the second cycle (next cycle) (S66). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the enemy character lottery table (No. 6: after setting change) shown in FIG. 91C and based on the set value (settings 1 to 6), in the game in the CZ state in the second cycle. The type of enemy character (any of the enemy characters A to F) to be played against the main character is determined. Next, the main CPU 93 sets the lottery result of S66 to the enemy character in the second cycle (S67).

  Then, after the processing of S67, the main CPU 93 ends the setting change processing, and moves the processing to S35 of initialization processing (see FIG. 204) upon power-on.

[Medal reception / start check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 207, the medal acceptance / start check process performed in S3 in the main flow (see FIG. 203) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is an automatic insertion request (S71). The presence / absence of the automatic insertion request is determined by determining whether or not the automatic insertion counter is “0”. That is, the main CPU 93 determines that there is no automatic input request when the automatic input counter is “0”, and determines that there is an automatic input request when the automatic input counter is “1” or more.

  The automatic insertion counter is data for identifying whether or not a display combination related to replay has been established in the previous game. When the display combination related to replay is established, the medals for the number of games inserted in the previous game are automatically inserted into the automatic insertion counter.

  When the main CPU 93 determines in S71 that there is an automatic loading request (when S71 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs an automatic loading process (S72). In this process, the value of the automatic insertion counter is copied to the insertion number counter, and then the value of the automatic insertion counter is cleared. Thereafter, the main CPU 93 performs a process of S79 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S71 that there is no automatic insertion request (when S71 is NO), the main CPU 93 permits medal acceptance (S73). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is driven, and medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 20 are accepted. The received medals are counted and guided to the hopper device 51.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum value of the number of inserted medals according to the gaming state (S74). Specifically, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum value of the number of inserted medals to “3”.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the medal acceptance is permitted (S75). When the main CPU 93 determines that the medal acceptance is not permitted in S75 (when S75 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs a process of S79 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S75 that the main CPU 93 is permitted to accept medals (when S75 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a medal insertion check process (S76). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a medal has been inserted, and adds “1” to the inserted number counter when a medal is inserted.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs medal insertion command generation storage processing (S77). In this processing, the main CPU 93 generates medal insertion command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the communication data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. The medal insertion command includes a parameter for specifying the number of inserted coins.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the inserted number is a game start possible number (S78). When the main CPU 93 determines in S78 that the inserted number is not the game start possible number (when S78 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S75 and repeats the processes after S75. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S78 that the inserted number is the game start possible number (when S78 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S79 described later. In the present embodiment, the number of games that can be started is “3”.

  After S72, if S75 is NO or S78 is YES, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the start switch 79 is on (S79). In S79, when the main CPU 93 determines that the start switch 79 is not on (when S79 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S75 and repeats the processes after S75.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S79 that the start switch 79 is on (when S79 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S80). With this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is not driven, and the inserted medal is discharged from the medal payout port 32. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the medal acceptance / start check process, and moves the process to S4 of the main flow (see FIG. 203).

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 208, the internal lottery process performed in S6 in the main flow (see FIG. 203) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 sets an internal lottery table corresponding to the main game state (S91). That is, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 100) to grasp the current main game state, and based on the internal lottery table determination table (see FIG. 22), the type and number of lotteries of the internal lottery table. To decide. The number of lotteries indicates the number of times of lottery value subtraction and determination of whether or not a digit has occurred for each winning number defined by the internal lottery table.

  Next, the main CPU 93 obtains a random value stored in the random value storage area (S92). Then, the main CPU 93 sets “1” as the initial value of the winning number.

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires a lottery value corresponding to the winning number with reference to the internal lottery table, and subtracts the lottery value from the random number value (S93).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the calculation result in S93 is less than 0 (negative value) (S94).

  In S94, when the main CPU 93 determines that the calculation result is not less than 0 (when S94 is NO), the main CPU 93 updates the random number value and the winning number (S95). Specifically, the main CPU 93 makes the value of the operation result a random value and adds 1 to the winning number.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not all winning numbers have been checked (S96). When the main CPU 93 determines in S96 that all the winning numbers have not been checked (when S96 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S93 and repeats the processes after S93.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S96 that the main CPU 93 has checked all the winning numbers (when S96 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets “0” as the data pointer (S97). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets “0” to each of the small role / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer.

  Here, returning to the processing of S94 again, in S94, when the main CPU 93 determines that the calculation result is less than 0 (negative value) (in the case of S94 being YES), the main CPU 93 Depending on the number, a small role / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer are acquired (S98).

  Then, after the processing of S97 or S98, the main CPU 93 refers to the symbol combination determination table (see FIGS. 43 to 48), and acquires the internal winning combination based on the small combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer. (S99).

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the internal winning combination storing area (S100).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” (S101). In S101, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is not “00000000” (when S101 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S104 described later.

  On the other hand, in S101, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” (when S101 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines the symbol combination determination table (FIG. 43 to FIG. 43). Referring to FIG. 48), an internal winning combination is acquired based on the bonus data pointer (S102).

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the carryover combination storing area (S103).

  After the process of S103 or when S101 is NO, the main CPU 93 updates the internal winning combination storing area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carryover combination storing area (S104).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB is operating (S105). When the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is not operating in S105 (when S105 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process and moves the process to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 203).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is operating in S105 (when S105 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets all the bits corresponding to the small winning combination in the internal winning combination storing area to the ON state. (S106). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process and moves the process to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 203).

[Lottery lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 209, the lever-on lottery process performed in S7 in the main flow (see FIG. 203) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 performs main lottery flag generation processing (S111). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets the main lottery flag corresponding to the internal winning combination to the on state, and sets the other main lottery flags to the off state. For example, when the internal winning combination related to the abbreviation “F_Bell 1” wins, the main CPU 93 sets only the main lottery flag “F_batting order bell” to the ON state (see FIGS. 58 and 59).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the appearance state is the normal state with reference to the appearance state flag storage area (see FIG. 101) (S112).

  In S112, when the main CPU 93 determines that the payout state is the normal state (when S112 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs normal processing (S113). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed in the game in the normal state. Details of the normal middle processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 210 described later. Then, after the process of S113, the main CPU 93 ends the lever-on lottery process, and moves the process to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 203).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S112 that the payout state is not the normal state (when S112 is NO), the main CPU 93 refers to the payout state flag storage area (see FIG. 101). It is determined whether the ball state is a state at the time of CZ introduction (S114).

  In S114, when the main CPU 93 determines that the payout state is the CZ introduction state (when S114 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs CZ introduction processing (S115). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed in the game when CZ is introduced. The details of the CZ introduction process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S115, the main CPU 93 ends the lever-on lottery process and moves the process to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 203).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S114 that the payout state is not the CZ introduction state (when S114 is NO), the main CPU 93 refers to the payout state flag storage area (see FIG. 101). Then, it is determined whether or not the outgoing ball state is the CZ state (S116).

  In S116, when the main CPU 93 determines that the payout state is the CZ state (in the case where S116 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the CZ process (S117). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed in the game in the CZ state. Details of the CZ processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 217 described later. Then, after the process of S117, the main CPU 93 ends the lever-on lottery process, and moves the process to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 203).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S116 that the payout state is not the CZ state (when S116 is NO), the main CPU 93 refers to the payout state flag storage area (see FIG. 101). It is determined whether or not the appearance state is an ART preparation state (S118).

  In S118, when the main CPU 93 determines that the payout state is an ART preparation state (when S118 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs an ART preparation process (S119). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed in the game in the ART preparation state. Details of the ART preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the process of S119, the main CPU 93 ends the lever-on lottery process, and moves the process to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 203).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S118 that the appearance state is not the ART preparation state (when S118 is NO), the main CPU 93 refers to the appearance state flag storage area (see FIG. 101). Then, it is determined whether or not the appearance state is a specialization state (S120).

  In S120, when the main CPU 93 determines that the ball-out state is the added special state (when S120 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs an extra special process (S121). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed in the special game in the added state. The details of the specialization processing during addition will be described later with reference to FIG. 224 described later. Then, after the process of S121, the main CPU 93 ends the lever-on lottery process, and moves the process to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 203).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S120 that the outgoing ball state is not the added special state (when S120 is NO), the main CPU 93 refers to the outgoing ball state flag storage area (see FIG. 101). Then, it is determined whether or not the appearance state is the ART state (S122).

  In S122, when the main CPU 93 determines that the appearance state is the ART state (when S122 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the ART processing (S123). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed in the game in the ART state. The details of the ART processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the process of S123, the main CPU 93 ends the lever-on lottery process, and moves the process to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 203).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the appearance state is not the ART state in S122 (in the case where S122 is NO), the main CPU 93 refers to the appearance state flag storage area (see FIG. 101) and exits. It is determined whether or not the ball state is an ART fall waiting state (S124).

  In S124, when the main CPU 93 determines that the payout state is the ART fall waiting state (when S124 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs an ART fall waiting process (S125). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed in a game waiting for an ART fall. Details of the ART fall waiting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the process of S125, the main CPU 93 ends the lever-on lottery process, and moves the process to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 203).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S124 that the payout state is not the ART fall waiting state (when S124 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the lottery process at the time of turning on the lever, and the process proceeds to the main flow (FIG. 203). (Refer to S8).

[Normal processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 210, the normal medium process performed in S113 during the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 209) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an NBB (BB1 or BB2) winning game (S131). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an NBB winning game based on the internal winning combination.

  In S131, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is an NBB winning game (when S131 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a normal NBB winning lottery process (S132). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed when the NBB is won in the normal state. Details of the normal NBB winning lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 211 described later. Then, after the processing of S132, the main CPU 93 ends the normal medium processing and also ends the lever-on lottery processing (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S131 that the current game is not an NBB winning game (NO in S131), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is a game in the NBB state (S133). ). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is a game in the NBB state with reference to the game state flag storage area.

  In S133, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is an NBB game (when S133 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a normal NBB lottery process (S134). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed in the game of the NBB state in the normal state. Details of the normal NBB lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 212 described later. Then, after the processing of S134, the main CPU 93 ends the normal medium processing and also ends the lever-on lottery processing (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S133 that the current game is not a game in the NBB state (when S133 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is a game in the SBB (BB3) state. A determination is made (S135). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area to determine whether or not the current game is an SBB game.

  In S135, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is an SBB game (S135 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a BB lottery process (S136). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed in the game in the SBB state in the normal state. Details of the BB lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the process of S136, the main CPU 93 ends the normal medium process and also ends the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S135 that the current game is not an SBB game (when S135 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an MB winning game (S137). ). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an MB winning game based on the internal winning combination.

  In S137, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is an MB winning game (when S137 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a general medium lottery process (S138). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed in the MB winning game in the normal state. Details of the general medium lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 214 described later. Then, after the processing of S138, the main CPU 93 ends the normal medium processing and also ends the lever-on lottery processing (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S137 that the current game is not an MB winning game (NO in S137), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an MB game (S139). ). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area to determine whether or not the current game is an MB state game.

  In S139, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is an MB game (when S139 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a general medium lottery process (S140). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed in the game in the MB state in the normal state. In the general medium lottery process performed in the process of S140, the same lottery process as the general medium lottery process of S138 performed when it is determined that the current game is an MB winning game is performed. Details of the general medium lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 214 described later. Then, after the processing of S140, the main CPU 93 ends the normal medium processing and also ends the lever-on lottery processing (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S139 that the current game is not an MB game (when S139 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is a game in the BB internal state. (S141). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area to determine whether or not the current game is a game in the BB internal state.

  In S141, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is not a game in the BB internal state (when S141 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs a general medium lottery process (S142). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed in the game in the inside state of the NO BB in the normal state. In the general medium lottery process performed in the process of S142, it is determined that the general medium lottery process of S138 performed when the current game is determined to be an MB winning game, and the current game is an MB state game. The lottery process similar to the general medium lottery process of S140 performed at the time is performed. Details of the general medium lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 214 described later. Then, after the processing of S142, the main CPU 93 ends the normal medium processing and also ends the lever-on lottery processing (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, in S141, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is a game in the BB internal state (when S141 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the normal mid-process and the lever-on lottery process ( The process also ends (see FIG. 209).

[Normal lottery process when winning NBB]
Next, with reference to FIG. 211, the normal NBB winning lottery process performed in S132 during the normal normal process (see FIG. 210) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 performs a card promotion lottery process (S151). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the card promotion lottery table (see FIGS. 64 and 65), and determines the game status (stage type, lottery state), set value (settings 1 to 6), main lottery flag (internal winning combination) ) To determine whether the card rank is promoted (winning / non-winning).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a card promotion attribute lottery process (S152). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the card promotion attribute lottery table (see FIGS. 67A to 67D), and promotes the card rank based on the game status (stage type) and the set value (settings 1 to 6) ( Attack system, defense system or reward system).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a card promotion number lottery process (S153). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the card promotion number lottery table (see FIG. 68 and FIG. 69), promotes the form (normal promotion or non-stay promotion), the set value (settings 1 to 6), and the main lottery flag (internal Based on the winning combination), the card rank increase number (1, 2, 3, 5 or 9) is determined.

  When the attribute of the card to be upgraded determined in S152 is the same as the attribute of the current stage (for example, in the case where the attack card is ranked up in stage A), the main CPU 93 determines that the attribute of the card to be upgraded is FIG. Referring to the card promotion number lottery table (No. 1: normal promotion) shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the attribute of the card to be upgraded determined in S152 is different from the attribute of the current stage (for example, when the defense system card is ranked up in stage A), the main CPU 93 is shown in FIG. The card rank increase number is determined with reference to the card promotion number lottery table (part 2: non-stay promotion).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a card rank update process (S154). In this process, the main CPU 93 causes the card rank to reflect the lottery result of the card rank promotion lottery performed in S151 to S153.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs enemy character promotion lottery processing (S155). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the NBB winning enemy character promotion lottery table (see FIG. 92) and determines whether or not the enemy character promotion lottery is won based on the set value (settings 1 to 6).

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the lottery result of S155 to the enemy character (S156). If the currently set enemy character is one of the enemy characters A to E and the winning result of S155 is won, the main CPU 93 sets the enemy character F as the enemy character. When the currently set enemy character is the enemy character F and the winning result of S155 is won, the main CPU 93 sets the enemy character G that is determined to be ART winning as the enemy character. On the other hand, if the lottery result in S155 is non-winning, the main CPU 93 does not perform enemy character update processing.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs lottery state transition lottery processing (S157). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the lottery state transition lottery table (see FIGS. 70A and 70B), and based on the current lottery state, the set value (settings 1 to 6) and the main lottery flag (internal winning combination), Determine low or high accuracy lottery status. Next, the main CPU 93 sets the lottery result (high or low accuracy) of S157 as a lottery state (S158).

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets “2” to the value of the instruction generation counter (S159). The instruction generation counter is a counter provided to determine the timing for executing the BB role notification (red 7 navigation, blue navigation or BAR navigation) using an instruction display unit (not shown) when the BB is won. . The value of the instruction generation counter is decremented by 1 every time one game is consumed after winning the BB, and the instruction display unit notifies the BB role when the value of the instruction generation counter becomes “0”. Therefore, as in this embodiment, when the NBB (BB1 or BB2) is won and the value of the instruction generation counter is set to “2” in the normal state, two games are digested after winning the BB. Then, the notification of the BB combination (red 7 navigation or blue 7 navigation) by the instruction display unit is executed.

  After the process of S159, the main CPU 93 ends the normal NBB winning lottery process and also ends the normal medium process (see FIG. 210).

[Normal NBB lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 212, the normal medium NBB lottery process performed in S134 during the normal medium process (see FIG. 210) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 performs a card promotion lottery process (S161). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the card promotion lottery table (see FIG. 66) and determines whether or not the card rank is promoted (winning) based on the set value (settings 1 to 6) and the main lottery flag (internal winning combination). / Non-winning).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a card promotion attribute lottery process (S162). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the card promotion attribute lottery table (see FIG. 67E), and attributes (attack system, defense system, or reward system) for promoting the card rank based on the set values (settings 1 to 6). To decide.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a card promotion number lottery process (S163). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the card promotion number lottery table (see FIG. 68 and FIG. 69), promotes the form (normal promotion or non-stay promotion), the set value (settings 1 to 6), and the main lottery flag (internal Based on the winning combination), the card rank increase number (1, 2, 3, 5 or 9) is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a card rank update process (S164). In this process, the main CPU 93 causes the card rank to reflect the lottery result of the card rank promotion lottery performed in S161 to S163. After the process of S164, the main CPU 93 ends the normal NBB lottery process and also ends the normal medium process (see FIG. 210).

[BB lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 213, the BB lottery process performed in S136 during the normal medium process (see FIG. 210) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 adds lots of ART games during the special BB and performs lottery processing (S171). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the special BB ART game number addition lottery table (see FIGS. 84 and 85), and based on the set value (settings 1 to 6) and the main lottery flag (internal winning combination), The number of added games (0G, + 10G, + 20G, + 30G, + 50G, + 100G, + 200G, or + 300G) is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 93 adds the lottery result (ART added game number) of S171 to the ART game number counter (S172). The ART game number counter is a counter for counting the number of remaining ART games, and is provided in the main RAM 95. Then, after the processing of S172, the main CPU 93 ends the lottery processing during BB and also ends the normal middle processing (see FIG. 210).

[General lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 214, the general medium lottery process performed in S138 (MB winning game), S140 (in MB) or S142 (inside of BB) during the normal medium process (see FIG. 210) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 performs a card promotion lottery process (S181). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the card promotion lottery table (see FIGS. 64 and 65), and determines the game status (stage type, lottery state), set value (settings 1 to 6), main lottery flag (internal winning combination) ) To determine whether the card rank is promoted (winning / non-winning).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a card promotion attribute lottery process (S182). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the card promotion attribute lottery table (see FIGS. 67A to 67D), and promotes the card rank based on the game status (stage type) and the set value (settings 1 to 6) ( Attack system, defense system or reward system).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a card promotion number lottery process (S183). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the card promotion number lottery table (see FIG. 68 and FIG. 69), promotes the form (normal promotion or non-stay promotion), the set value (settings 1 to 6), and the main lottery flag (internal Based on the winning combination), the card rank increase number (1, 2, 3, 5 or 9) is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a card rank update process (S184). In this process, the main CPU 93 reflects the lottery result of the card rank promotion lottery performed in S181 to S183 on the card rank.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs lottery state transition lottery processing (S185). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the lottery state transition lottery table (see FIGS. 70A and 70B), and based on the current lottery state, the set value (settings 1 to 6) and the main lottery flag (internal winning combination), Determine low or high accuracy lottery status. Next, the main CPU 93 sets the lottery result (high or low accuracy) in S185 as a lottery state (S186).

  Next, the main CPU 93 decrements the value of the cyclic game number counter by 1 (S187). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the cyclic game number counter is “0” (S188).

  In S188, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the cyclic game number counter is not “0” (NO in S188), the main CPU 93 ends the general medium lottery process and the normal medium process (FIG. 210). See also). On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the cyclic game number counter is “0” in S188 (when S188 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB is operating (S188). S189).

  When the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is not operating in S189 (when S189 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the general medium lottery process and the normal medium process (see FIG. 210).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S189 that the MB is operating (when S189 is YES), the main CPU 93 adds “1” to the value of the cyclic game number counter (S190). Then, after the process of S190, the main CPU 93 ends the general medium lottery process and also ends the normal medium process (see FIG. 210).

[CZ introduction process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 215, the CZ introduction process performed in S115 during the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 209) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an NBB (BB1 or BB2) winning game (S201). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an NBB (BB1 or BB2) winning game based on the internal winning combination.

  In S201, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is an NBB winning game (when S201 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs CZ introduction lottery processing (S202). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed when the NBB is won in the CZ introduction state. Details of the CZ introduction lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 216 described later. After the process of S202, the main CPU 93 ends the CZ introduction process and also ends the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is not an NBB winning game in S201 (when S201 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an NBB game (S203). ). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is a game in the NBB state with reference to the game state flag storage area.

  In S203, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is an NBB game (when S203 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the BB lottery process described with reference to FIG. 213 (S204). After the process of S204, the main CPU 93 ends the CZ introduction process, and also ends the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S203 that the current game is not an NBB game (when S203 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an SBB (BB3) game. A determination is made (S205). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area to determine whether or not the current game is an SBB game.

  In S205, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is a game in the SBB state (when S205 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the BB lottery process described with reference to FIG. 213 (S206). After the process of S206, the main CPU 93 ends the CZ introduction process and also ends the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S205 that the current game is not an SBB game (when S205 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an MB winning game (S207). ). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an MB winning game based on the internal winning combination.

  In S207, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is an MB winning game (when S207 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs CZ introduction lottery processing (S208). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed at the time of MB winning in the CZ introduction state. Note that in the CZ introduction lottery process performed in the process of S208, the same lottery process as the CZ introduction lottery process in S202 is performed when it is determined that the current game is an NBB winning game. Details of the CZ introduction lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 216 described later. Then, after the process of S208, the main CPU 93 ends the CZ introduction process and also ends the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S207 that the current game is not an MB winning game (NO in S207), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is a game in the BB internal state. (S209). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area to determine whether or not the current game is a game in the BB internal state.

  In S209, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is not a game in the BB internal state (when S209 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs CZ introduction lottery processing (S210). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed in the game in the inside state of No BB in the state when the CZ is introduced. In the CZ introduction lottery process performed in the process of S210, the CZ introduction lottery process of S202 performed when it is determined that the current game is an NBB winning game, and the current game is an MB winning game. A lottery process similar to the lottery process at the time of CZ introduction of S208 performed when the determination is made is performed. Details of the CZ introduction lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 216 described later. Then, after the process of S210, the main CPU 93 ends the CZ introduction process and also ends the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, in S209, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is a game in the BB internal state (when S209 is YES), the main CPU 93 terminates the CZ introduction process and the lever-on lottery process (See FIG. 209) also ends.

[Clotting process when CZ is introduced]
Next, referring to FIG. 216, CZ introduction lottery processing performed in S202 (at the time of NBB winning), S208 (at the time of MB winning) or S210 (inside of BB inside) in the processing at the time of CZ introduction (see FIG. 215). explain.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the cycle number counter is greater than “1” (S211).

  In S211, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the cycle number counter is not larger than “1” (when S211 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S216 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S211 that the value of the cycle counter is greater than “1” (when S221 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether the ranks of all cards are “0”. Is determined (S212).

  In S212, when the main CPU 93 determines that the ranks of all the cards are not “0” (when S212 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S216 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the ranks of all the cards are “0” in S212 (when S212 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs battle victory rewriting lottery processing (S213). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the common lottery table (see FIG. 62E) with a winning probability of 55%, and determines the winning / non-winning battle winning rewriting lottery based on the set value (settings 1 to 6).

  In the present embodiment, an example of performing battle victory rewriting lottery when the card rank of all cards is “0” at the time of CZ introduction other than the first cycle (after changing the setting and immediately after the end of ART). Although described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the battle victory rewriting lottery may be performed even when the card rank of all the cards is “9” or “10” when the CZ is introduced.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the lottery of S213 has been won (S214). When the main CPU 93 determines in S214 that the lottery in S213 has not been won (when S214 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs a process of S216 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S214 that the main CPU 93 has won the lottery process in S213 (when S214 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the victory rewrite flag to the on state (S215). As a result of this processing, even if an ART non-winning decision (battle defeat) occurs in a game in the CZ state, the result of the ART non-winning decision (battle defeat) at the end of the CZ state is changed to the result of the ART win-winning decision (battle victory). Rewritten.

  After the processing of S215, or when S211, S212, or S214 is NO, the main CPU 93 sets initial life values (see FIG. 14) of the main character and the enemy character of the current cycle (S216). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a CZ prescribed game number shortening lottery process (S217). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the CZ prescribed game number shortening lottery table (see FIGS. 74 to 78), the card rank, the set value (settings 1 to 6) and the main lottery flag of the reward system card at the time of CZ introduction. Based on (internal winning combination), the number of shortened games (0 games, 5 games, 10 games, 20 games, 30 games or 50 games) of the CZ prescribed game number is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 93 subtracts the lottery result (number of shortened games) of S217 from the initial value “70” of the number of CZ prescribed games, and sets the subtracted value as the number of CZ prescribed games (S218). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an NBB winning game (S219).

  In S219, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is not an NBB winning game (when S219 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the CZ introduction lottery process and the CZ introduction process (see FIG. 215). Also ends.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S219 that the current game is an NBB winning game (when S219 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the value of the instruction generation counter to “1” (S220). In other words, in the present embodiment, when the NBB (BB1 or BB2) is won in the state when the CZ is introduced, when one game is digested after winning the BB, the notification of the BB role by the instruction display unit (red 7 navigation or Blue 7 navigation) is executed. Then, after the process of S220, the main CPU 93 ends the lottery process at the time of CZ introduction and also ends the process at the time of CZ introduction (see FIG. 215).

[CZ medium processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 217, the process during CZ performed in S117 during the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 209) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an NBB game (S231). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is a game in the NBB state with reference to the game state flag storage area.

  In S231, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is an NBB game (when S231 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the BB lottery process described with reference to FIG. 213 (S232). After the process of S232, the main CPU 93 ends the CZ-in process and the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S231 that the current game is not a game in the NBB state (when S231 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is a game in the SBB (BB3) state. A determination is made (S233). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area and determines whether or not the current game is a game in the SB state.

  In S233, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is a game in the SBB state (when S233 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the BB lottery process described with reference to FIG. 213 (S234). Then, after the process of S234, the main CPU 93 ends the CZ-in process and the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S233 that the current game is not an SBB game (NO in S233), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an MB winning game (S235). ). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an MB winning game based on the internal winning combination.

  In S235, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is an MB winning game (when S235 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs lottery processing during CZ (S236). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed at the time of MB winning in the CZ state. Details of the lottery processing during CZ will be described later with reference to FIG. 218 described later. Then, after the process of S236, the main CPU 93 ends the CZ-in process and the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S235 that the current game is not an MB winning game (when S235 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an MB game (S237). ). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area to determine whether or not the current game is an MB state game.

  In S237, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is a game in the MB state (when S237 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs lottery processing during MB in CZ (S238). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed during MB operation in the CZ state. Details of the lottery processing during MB in CZ will be described later with reference to FIG. 220 described later. After the process of S238, the main CPU 93 ends the CZ-in process and the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S237 that the current game is not an MB game (when S237 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is a game in the BB internal state. (S239). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area to determine whether or not the current game is a game in the BB internal state.

  In S239, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is not a game in the BB internal state (when S239 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs CZ lottery processing (S240). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed in the game in the inside state of No BB in the CZ state. In the lottery process during CZ performed in the process of S240, the lottery process similar to the lottery process during CZ of S236 performed when it is determined that the current game is an MB winning game is performed. Details of the lottery processing during CZ will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the process of S240, the main CPU 93 ends the CZ-in process and also ends the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, in S239, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is a game in the BB internal state (when S239 is YES), the main CPU 93 terminates the CZ in-progress process and the lever-on lottery process ( Also, see FIG. 209).

[CZ lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 218, the lottery processing during CZ performed in S236 (when MB is won) or S240 (inside of BB) during the processing during CZ (see FIG. 217) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 performs battle attack / defense lottery processing (S251). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines the subtraction value of the life value of the enemy character and the increase / decrease value of the life value of the hero character. The details of the battle attack and defense lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a card skill activation lottery process (S252). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the common lottery table of winning probabilities corresponding to the probability of skill effect activation defined by the skill effect of each card, and determines each card based on the set value (settings 1 to 6). Determines whether the skill effect is activated or not. For example, when the card rank of the attacking card is “2”, the skill effect is activated with a probability of 50% (see FIG. 11), so the main CPU 93 has the common lottery with the winning probability of 50% shown in FIG. 62D. With reference to the table, the presence / absence (winning / non-winning) of the skill effect of the attacking card is determined based on the set values (settings 1 to 6).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a lottery result reflection process of the battle attack / lottery lottery process and the card skill activation lottery process (S253). In this process, for example, based on the results of battle attack and defense lottery processing and card skill activation lottery processing (subtract value or addition value of the hero character's life value, subtraction value of the enemy character's life value, etc.), the life value of the hero character Update (subtraction, addition or maintenance) processing or enemy character life value update (subtraction or maintenance) processing is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a battle victory is confirmed based on the result of the reflection process in S253 (S254). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the life value of the enemy character has become “0” or less. In this embodiment, even if the life value of the hero character and the life value of the enemy character are simultaneously “0” or less, in the determination process of S254, the life value of the enemy character is referred to and the hero character is referred to. The life value of the hero character is not referred to in S256 described later. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the life value of the hero character and the life value of the enemy character are simultaneously “0” or less, the result of the determination process in S254 is a battle victory (ART winning).

  When the main CPU 93 determines in S254 that the battle victory has been confirmed (when S254 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the victory confirmation flag (ART winning confirmation flag) to the on state (S255). With this process, the game in the ART preparation state is started from the next game. Then, after the process of S255, the main CPU 93 ends the lottery process during CZ and also ends the process during CZ (see FIG. 217).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S254 that the battle victory is not confirmed (when S254 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the battle defeat is confirmed (S256). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the life value of the hero character is “0” or less.

  When the main CPU 93 determines in S256 that the battle defeat has been confirmed (when S256 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the defeat determination flag (ART non-winning determination flag) to the on state (S257). Then, after the process of S257, the main CPU 93 ends the lottery process during CZ and also ends the process during CZ (see FIG. 217).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S256 that the battle defeat has not been finalized (when S256 is NO), the main CPU 93 decrements the CZ prescribed game number by 1 (S258). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of CZ prescribed games is “0” (S259).

  In S259, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of CZ prescribed games is not “0” (when S259 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the lottery process during CZ and the process during CZ (see FIG. 217). Also ends.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S259 that the CZ prescribed game number is “0” (when S259 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the victory determination flag (ART winning determination flag) to the on state. (S260). With this process, the game in the ART preparation state is started from the next game. Then, after the process of S260, the main CPU 93 ends the lottery process during CZ and also ends the process during CZ (see FIG. 217).

[Battle attack and defense lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 219, the battle offense and defense lottery processing performed in S251 during the CZ lottery processing (see FIG. 218) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the main lottery flag is “replay” (S261).

  In S261, when the main CPU 93 determines that the main lottery flag is “replay” (S261 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a third battle attack / lottery lottery process (S262). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the third battle attack / lottery lottery table (see FIG. 82) and, based on the set value (settings 1 to 6), selects “no attack / defense” or “hero character_life + 100”. Determine as. Then, after the process of S262, the main CPU 93 ends the battle attack and defense lottery process, and moves the process to S252 of the lottery process during CZ (see FIG. 218).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the main lottery flag is not “replay” in S261 (when S261 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the main lottery flag is “out of” (S261). S263).

  In S263, when the main CPU 93 determines that the main lottery flag is “off” (when S263 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the second battle attack / lottery lottery process (S264). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the second battle offense and defense lottery table (see FIGS. 81A to 81F), and sets the type of enemy character (enemy characters A to F) and the set value (settings 1 to 6). Based on this, “no offense and defense” or “hero character_life-100” is determined as the lottery result. Then, after the process of S264, the main CPU 93 ends the battle attack and defense lottery process, and moves the process to S252 of the lottery process during CZ (see FIG. 218).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S263 that the main lottery flag is not “out of” (S263 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the first battle attack / lottery lottery process (S265). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the first battle attack / lottery lottery table (see FIGS. 79 and 80), and determines “no attack / defense” based on the main lottery flag (internal winning combination) and the set value (settings 1 to 6). ”,“ Hero character_life-100 ”,“ hero character_life−200 ”,“ hero character_life−300 ”,“ hero character_life−500 ”,“ hero character_life−700 ”,“ hero character ” _Life-1000 "or" Confirm victory "is determined as the lottery result. Then, after the process of S265, the main CPU 93 ends the battle attack / lottery lottery process, and moves the process to S252 of the lottery process during CZ (see FIG. 218).

[CZ MB MB lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 220, the MB lottery process during CZ performed in S238 (middle MB) during the process during CZ (see FIG. 217) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 performs MB point acquisition lottery processing (S271). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the CZ medium MB point lottery table (see FIG. 83), and based on the main lottery flag (internal winning combination) and set values (settings 1 to 6), 0 points, 1 point 2 points, 3 points or 5 points are determined as the lottery result.

  Next, the main CPU 93 adds the lottery result (acquired points) in S271 to the value of the MB point counter (S272). The MB point counter is a counter for counting the total points acquired in the MB point acquisition lottery process in the CZ state and during the MB operation period, and is provided in the main RAM 95.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an MB final game (S273). In this process, when the medal is paid out in the game, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the total number of medals paid out during the MB period exceeds 45 (the bonus end number counter in the current game is “0”). If the total number of medals paid out during the MB period in the game exceeds 45, it is determined that the current game is the final game of the MB.

  In S273, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is not the final game of the MB (when S273 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the lottery process during CZ and also performs the process during CZ (see FIG. 217). finish.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S273 that the current game is the final game of the MB (when S273 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a damage point calculation process (S274). In this process, the main CPU 93 adds “100” to the total number of points acquired during the MB period (the value of the MB point counter), and calculates the added value as a damage point to be given to the enemy character.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs an update process for the life value of the enemy character (S275). Specifically, the main CPU 93 subtracts the damage point calculated in S274 from the life value of the enemy character. Then, after the process of S275, the main CPU 93 ends the lottery process during CZ and also ends the process during CZ (see FIG. 217).

[Processing during ART preparation]
Next, with reference to FIG. 221, the ART preparation process performed in S119 during the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 209) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an NBB (NBB1 or NBB2) winning game (S281). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an NBB winning game based on the internal winning combination.

  In S281, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is an NBB winning game (when S281 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs an NBB winning lottery process during ART preparation (S282). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed when the NBB is won in the ART preparation state. Details of the NBB winning lottery process during ART preparation will be described later with reference to FIG. 222 described later. Then, after the processing of S282, the main CPU 93 ends the ART preparation process and also ends the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S281 that the current game is not an NBB winning game (NO in S281), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is a game in the NBB state (S283). ). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is a game in the NBB state with reference to the game state flag storage area.

  In S283, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is an NBB game (when S283 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the BB lottery process described with reference to FIG. 213 (S284). Then, after the process of S284, the main CPU 93 ends the ART preparation process and also ends the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S283 that the current game is not an NBB game (when S283 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an SBB (NBB3) winning game. (S285). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an SBB winning game based on the internal winning combination.

  In S285, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is an SBB winning game (when S285 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a lottery process during ART preparation (S286). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed when the SBB is won in the ART preparation state. The details of the lottery process during ART preparation will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S286, the main CPU 93 ends the ART preparation process and also ends the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S285 that the current game is not the SBB winning game (when S285 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is a game in the SBB (BB3) state. (S287). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area to determine whether or not the current game is an SBB game.

  In S287, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is an SBB game (S287 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the BB lottery process described with reference to FIG. 213 (S288). Then, after the process of S288, the main CPU 93 ends the ART preparation process and also ends the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S287 that the current game is not an SBB game (when S287 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an MB winning game (S289). ). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an MB winning game based on the internal winning combination.

  In S289, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is an MB winning game (when S289 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a lottery process during ART preparation (S290). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed at the time of MB winning in the ART preparation state. In the lottery process during ART preparation performed in the process of S290, the lottery process similar to the lottery process during ART preparation in S286 performed when it is determined that the current game is the SBB winning game is performed. Details of the lottery process during ART preparation will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the process of S290, the main CPU 93 ends the ART preparation process and also ends the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is not an MB winning game in S289 (when S289 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an MB game (S291). ). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area to determine whether or not the current game is an MB state game.

  When the main CPU 93 determines in S291 that the current game is a game in the MB state (when S291 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs lottery processing during ART preparation (S292). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed during the MB operation in the ART preparation state. In the ART-prepared lottery process performed in the process of S292, the ART-prepared lottery process of S286 performed when it is determined that the current game is an SBB winning game, and the current game is an MB winning game. The lottery process similar to the lottery process during ART preparation in S290 performed when the determination is made is performed. Details of the lottery process during ART preparation will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S292, the main CPU 93 ends the ART preparation process and also ends the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S291 that the current game is not an MB game (when S291 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is a game in the BB internal state. (S293). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area to determine whether or not the current game is a game in the BB internal state.

  In S293, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is not a game in the BB internal state (when S293 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs a lottery process during ART preparation (S294). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed in the game in the inside state of No BB in the ART preparation state. In the lottery processing during ART preparation performed in the processing of S294, it is determined that the current game is an MB winning game in S286, when the current game is determined to be an SBB winning game. The lottery process during the ART preparation in S290 performed at the same time and the lottery process similar to the lottery process during the ART preparation in S292 performed when it is determined that the current game is an MB game. Details of the lottery process during ART preparation will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S294, the main CPU 93 ends the ART preparation process and also ends the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, in S293, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is a game in the BB internal state (when S293 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the ART preparation process and also performs the lever-on lottery process. (See FIG. 209) also ends.

[A lottery process for winning NBB during ART preparation]
Next, with reference to FIG. 222, the NBB winning lottery process during ART preparation performed in S282 during the ART preparation process (see FIG. 221) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 performs lottery processing with the NBB winning ART game number added (S301). In this processing, the main CPU 93 refers to the NBB winning ART game number lottery table (see FIG. 88A) and, based on the set values (settings 1 to 6), adds an ART additional game number (0G, + 10G, + 20G, + 30G, + 50G, + 100G, + 200G or + 300G).

  Next, the main CPU 93 adds the lottery result (ART added game number) of S301 to the value of the ART game number counter (S302).

  Next, the main CPU 93 adds lots of specialized games and performs lottery processing (S303). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the lottery table added with the number of specialized games (see FIGS. 93 to 98), and based on the lottery state, the main lottery flag (internal winning combination), and the set value (settings 1 to 6). In addition, the winning / non-winning of the special game number extra lottery is determined, and at the time of winning, the additional type of the extra special state (combination of the extra special game number and the special final game loop rate) is also determined.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs the lottery result reflection process of the lottery process by adding the number of specialized games (S304). In this process, the main CPU 93 adds the acquired number of special added games to the value of the special game number counter and performs a process of updating the special final game loop rate. At this time, if the value of the special game number counter exceeds the upper limit value (“255” in this embodiment), the main CPU 93 sets the value of the special game number counter to “255”. The specialized game number counter is a counter for counting the number of remaining specialized games in the added specialized state, and is provided in the main RAM 95. At this time, if the value of the special game number counter exceeds the upper limit value (“255” in this embodiment), the main CPU 93 sets the value of the special game number counter to “255”.

  In addition, in the process of updating the specialized final game loop rate, the main CPU 93 determines that the specialized final game loop rate obtained by adding the number of specialized games in S303 is larger than the currently set specialized final game loop rate. For example, a process of overwriting the latter specialized final game loop rate with the former specialized final game loop rate is performed. On the other hand, if the former specialized final game loop rate is less than or equal to the latter specialized final game loop rate, or if the special drive flag is on, the specialized final game loop rate is not updated. . If the lottery result of the special game number addition lottery process is non-winning, the special game number counter and the special final game loop rate are not updated in the process of S304.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets “1” to the value of the instruction generation counter (S305). In other words, in this embodiment, when the NBB (BB1 or BB2) is won in the ART preparation state, when one game is digested after the BB is won, the instruction display unit notifies the BB role (red 7 navigation or Blue 7 navigation) is executed. Then, after the process of S305, the main CPU 93 ends the NBB winning lottery process during ART preparation, and also ends the ART preparation process (see FIG. 221).

[Lottery processing during ART preparation]
Next, referring to FIG. 223, the processing is performed in S286 (at the time of SBB winning), S290 (at the time of MB winning), S292 (in the MB) or S294 (inside of BB) during the ART preparation process (see FIG. 221). The lottery process during ART preparation will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 adds lots of specialized games and performs lottery processing (S311). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the lottery table added with the number of specialized games (see FIGS. 93 to 98), and based on the lottery state, the main lottery flag (internal winning combination), and the set value (settings 1 to 6). In addition, the winning / non-winning of the special game number extra lottery is determined, and at the time of winning, the additional type of the extra special state (combination of the extra special game number and the special final game loop rate) is also determined.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs the lottery result reflection process of the lottery process by adding the number of specialized games (S312). In this process, the main CPU 93 adds the acquired number of special added games to the value of the special game number counter and performs a process of updating the special final game loop rate. At this time, if the value of the special game number counter exceeds the upper limit value (“255” in this embodiment), the main CPU 93 sets the value of the special game number counter to “255”.

  Also, in the update process of the specialized final game loop rate, the main CPU 93 determines that the specialized final game loop rate obtained by adding the number of specialized games in S311 is larger than the currently set specialized final game loop rate. For example, a process of overwriting the latter specialized final game loop rate with the former specialized final game loop rate is performed. On the other hand, if the former specialized final game loop rate is less than or equal to the latter specialized final game loop rate, or if the special drive flag is on, the specialized final game loop rate is not updated. . In addition, when the lottery result of the special game number addition lottery process is non-winning, the special game number counter and the special final game loop rate update process are not performed in the process of S312.

  If the current game is an SBB winning game, in the process of S312, the main CPU 93 adds “10” to the value of the special game number counter regardless of the special game number addition lottery of S311; Set 80% to the specialized final game loop rate and set the special drive flag to the on state.

  Then, after the process of S312, the main CPU 93 ends the lottery process during ART preparation and also ends the ART preparation process (see FIG. 221).

[Special processing during addition]
Next, with reference to FIG. 224, the process of specializing in addition performed in S121 during the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 209) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an NBB (NBB1 or NBB2) winning game (S321). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an NBB winning game based on the internal winning combination.

  In S321, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is an NBB winning game (when S321 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs an NBB winning lottery process during specialization (S322). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes that are performed when the NBB is won in the added special state. The details of the NBB winning lottery process during specialization will be described later with reference to FIG. 225 described later. Then, after the process of S322, the main CPU 93 ends the specialization process during addition, and also ends the lottery process during lever-on (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S321 that the current game is not an NBB winning game (when S321 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is a game in the NBB state (S323). ). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is a game in the NBB state with reference to the game state flag storage area.

  In S323, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is a game in the NBB state (when S323 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the BB lottery process described with reference to FIG. 213 (S324). Then, after the process of S324, the main CPU 93 ends the special processing during addition and ends the lottery process during lever-on (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S323 that the current game is not an NBB game (when S323 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an SBB (NBB3) winning game. (S325). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an SBB winning game based on the internal winning combination.

  In S325, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is an SBB winning game (when S325 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs an SBB winning lottery process during specialization (S326). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes that are performed when the SBB is won in the specialization state. The details of the SBB winning lottery process during specialization will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S326, the main CPU 93 ends the special processing during addition, and also ends the lever-on lottery processing (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S325 that the current game is not an SBB winning game (when S325 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is a game in the SBB (BB3) state. (S327). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area to determine whether or not the current game is an SBB game.

  In S327, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is a game in the SBB state (when S327 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the BB lottery process described in FIG. 213 (S328). Then, after the processing of S328, the main CPU 93 ends the special processing during addition and ends the lottery processing at lever-on (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S327 that the current game is not an SBB game (when S327 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an MB winning game (S329). ). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an MB winning game based on the internal winning combination.

  In S329, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is an MB winning game (when S329 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs extra special lottery processing (S330). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed at the time of MB winning in the added special state. The details of the extra special lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S330, the main CPU 93 ends the special processing during addition and ends the lottery processing at the time of lever-on (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S329 that the current game is not an MB winning game (NO in S329), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an MB game (S331). ). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area to determine whether or not the current game is an MB state game.

  In S331, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is a game in the MB state (when S331 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs an extra special lottery process (S332). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed during the MB operation in the added special state. Note that in the extra special lottery process performed in the process of S332, the same lottery process as the special bonus lottery process in S330 performed when it is determined that the current game is an MB winning game is performed. The details of the lottery process during specialization will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S332, the main CPU 93 ends the special processing during addition, and also ends the lever-on lottery processing (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S331 that the current game is not an MB game (when S331 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is a game in the BB internal state. (S333). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area to determine whether or not the current game is a game in the BB internal state.

  In S333, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is not a game in the BB internal state (when S333 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs an extra special lottery process (S334). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed in the game in the inside state of No BB in the added special state. It should be noted that in the extra special lottery process performed in the process of S334, the extra special lottery process in S330 performed when it is determined that the current game is an MB winning game, and the game in which the current game is in the MB state The same lottery process as the specializing lottery process in S332, which is performed when it is determined that it is determined, is performed. The details of the lottery process during specialization will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S334, the main CPU 93 ends the special processing during addition and ends the lottery processing at the time of lever-on (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S333 that the current game is a game in the BB internal state (when S333 is YES), the main CPU 93 terminates the specialization process and adds a lottery when the lever is on. The process (see FIG. 209) is also terminated.

[Special lottery processing during NBB winning during specialization]
Next, with reference to FIG. 225, the NBB winning lottery process during the extra specialization performed in S322 during the extra specialization process (see FIG. 224) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 performs lottery processing by adding the number of NBB winning ART games (S341). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the NBB winning-time ART game number lottery table (see FIG. 88B), and based on the set values (settings 1 to 6), adds the number of ART additional games (0G, + 10G, + 20G, + 30G, + 50G, + 100G, + 200G or + 300G).

  Next, the main CPU 93 adds the lottery result (ART added game number) of S341 to the value of the ART game number counter (S342).

  Next, the main CPU 93 adds the number of specialized ART games and performs lottery processing (S343). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the specialized ART game number lottery table (see FIGS. 86 and 87), and based on the main lottery flag (internal winning combination) and the set values (settings 1 to 6), The number of added games (0G, + 10G, + 20G, + 30G, + 50G, + 100G, + 200G, or + 300G) is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 93 adds the lottery result (ART added game number) of S343 to the value of the ART game number counter (S344).

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets “3” as the value of the instruction generation counter (S345). In other words, in this embodiment, when the NBB (BB1 or BB2) is won in the added special state, when the three games are digested after winning the BB, the notification of the BB role by the instruction display unit (red 7 navigation or Blue 7 navigation) is executed. Then, after the process of S345, the main CPU 93 ends the specialization NBB winning lottery process during the specialization, and also finishes the specialization process during the specialization (see FIG. 224).

[Special lottery processing during SBB win during specialization]
Next, with reference to FIG. 226, the SBB winning lottery process during specialization performed in S326 in the specialization process (see FIG. 224) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 adds the number of specialized ART games and performs lottery processing (S351). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the specialized ART game number lottery table (see FIGS. 86 and 87), and based on the main lottery flag (internal winning combination) and the set values (settings 1 to 6), The number of added games (0G, + 10G, + 20G, + 30G, + 50G, + 100G, + 200G, or + 300G) is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 93 adds the lottery result (ART added game number) in S351 to the value of the ART game number counter (S352). Then, after the processing of S352, the main CPU 93 finishes the specialization SBB winning lottery process during the specialization, and also finishes the specialization process during specialization (see FIG. 224).

[Lottery processing during specialization]
Next, referring to FIG. 227, the lottery processing during specialization performed in S330 (when MB is winning), S332 (in MB) or S334 (inside of BB) during the specialization processing (see FIG. 224) Will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 adds the number of specialized ART games and performs lottery processing (S361). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the specialized ART game number lottery table (see FIGS. 86 and 87), and based on the main lottery flag (internal winning combination) and the set values (settings 1 to 6), The number of added games (0G, + 10G, + 20G, + 30G, + 50G, + 100G, + 200G, or + 300G) is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 93 adds the lottery result (the number of games added to the ART) in S361 to the value of the ART game number counter (S362).

  Next, the main CPU 93 decrements the value of the specialized game number counter by 1 (S363). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the specialized game number counter is “0” (S364).

  In S364, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the special game number counter is not “0” (when S364 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the special lottery process during specialization and adds specialization. The intermediate process (see FIG. 224) is also terminated.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the specialized game number counter is “0” in S364 (when S364 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether the MB is operating. (S365). In S365, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is operating (when S365 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a process of S368 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S365 that the main CPU 93 is not operating the MB (when S365 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs specialized final game loop lottery processing (S366). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the common lottery table of winning probabilities corresponding to the currently set specialized final game loop rate, and based on the set value (settings 1 to 6), the game in the added special state Decide whether to continue or not. For example, if the currently set specialized final game loop rate is 75%, the main CPU 93 refers to the common lottery table with a winning probability of 75% shown in FIG. Decide whether to win or not.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the specialized final game loop lottery of S366 has been won (S367). When the main CPU 93 determines in S367 that the special final game loop lottery has not been won (when S367 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the special lottery process during addition specialization and the specialization process during addition specialization (See FIG. 224) also ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S367 that the main CPU 93 has won the specialized final game loop lottery (when S367 is YES), or when S365 is YES, the main CPU 93 sets the special game number counter. “1” is added to the value (S368). By this process, the appearance state of the next game is added and maintained in a specialized state. Then, after the processing of S368, the main CPU 93 ends the extra special lottery process and also ends the special specialization process (see FIG. 224).

[Processing during ART]
Next, with reference to FIG. 228, the ART processing during ART performed in S123 during the lever-on lottery processing (see FIG. 209) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an NBB (NBB1 or NBB2) winning game (S371). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an NBB winning game based on the internal winning combination.

  In S371, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is an NBB winning game (when S371 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs an NBB winning lottery process during ART (S372). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed when the NBB is won in the ART state. Details of the NBB winning lottery process during ART will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S372, the main CPU 93 ends the ART processing, and also ends the lever-on lottery processing (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S371 that the current game is not an NBB winning game (when S371 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is a game in the NBB state (S373). ). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is a game in the NBB state with reference to the game state flag storage area.

  In S373, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is a game in the NBB state (when S373 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the BB lottery process described in FIG. 213 (S374). Then, after the processing of S374, the main CPU 93 ends the ART processing and also ends the lever-on lottery processing (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S373 that the current game is not an NBB game (when S373 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an SBB (NBB3) winning game. (S375). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an SBB winning game based on the internal winning combination.

  In S375, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is an SBB winning game (when S375 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs an SBB winning lottery process (S376). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed when the SBB is won in the ART state. The details of the SBB winning lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 230 described later. Then, after the processing of S376, the main CPU 93 ends the processing during ART and also ends the lever-on lottery processing (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S375 that the current game is not the SBB winning game (when S375 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is a game in the SBB (BB3) state. (S377). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area to determine whether or not the current game is an SBB game.

  In S377, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is a game in the SBB state (when S377 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the BB lottery process described with reference to FIG. 213 (S378). Then, after the processing of S378, the main CPU 93 ends the ART processing, and also ends the lever-on lottery processing (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S377 that the current game is not an SBB game (NO in S377), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an MB winning game (S379). ). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an MB winning game based on the internal winning combination.

  When the main CPU 93 determines in S379 that the current game is an MB winning game (when S379 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a lottery process during ART (S380). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed at the time of MB winning in the ART state. Details of the lottery process during ART will be described later with reference to FIG. 231 described later. Then, after the processing of S380, the main CPU 93 ends the ART processing, and also ends the lever-on lottery processing (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S379 that the current game is not an MB winning game (when S379 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an MB game (S381). ). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area to determine whether or not the current game is an MB state game.

  In S381, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is a game in the MB state (when S381 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a lottery process during ART (S382). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed during the MB operation in the ART state. In the lottery process during ART performed in the process of S382, the lottery process similar to the lottery process during ART performed in S380 when it is determined that the current game is an MB winning game is performed. The details of the lottery process during ART will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S382, the main CPU 93 ends the ART processing, and also ends the lever-on lottery processing (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S381 that the current game is not a game in the MB state (when S381 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is a game in the BB internal state. (S383). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area to determine whether or not the current game is a game in the BB internal state.

  In S383, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is not a game in the BB internal state (when S383 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs a lottery process during ART (S384). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed in the game in the inside state of No BB in the ART state. In the lottery process during ART performed in the process of S384, the lottery process during ART performed when it is determined that the current game is an MB winning game, and the current game is a game in the MB state. A lottery process similar to the lottery process during ART in S382 performed when the determination is made is performed. The details of the lottery process during ART will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S384, the main CPU 93 ends the ART processing, and also ends the lever-on lottery processing (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, in S383, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is a game in the BB internal state (when S383 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the ART processing and draws the lever-on lottery processing ( Also, see FIG. 209).

[A lottery process for winning NBB during ART]
Next, with reference to FIG. 229, the ART NBB winning lottery process performed in S372 during the ART process (see FIG. 228) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 performs lottery processing by adding the number of NBB winning ART games (S391). In this processing, the main CPU 93 refers to the NBB winning ART game number lottery table (see FIG. 88A) and, based on the set values (settings 1 to 6), adds an ART additional game number (0G, + 10G, + 20G, + 30G, + 50G, + 100G, + 200G or + 300G).

  Next, the main CPU 93 adds the lottery result (the number of added ART games) in S391 to the value of the ART game number counter (S392).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs lottery processing on the number of specialized games (S393). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the lottery table added with the number of specialized games (see FIGS. 93 to 98), and based on the lottery state, the main lottery flag (internal winning combination), and the set value (settings 1 to 6). In addition, the winning / non-winning of the special game number extra lottery is determined, and at the time of winning, the additional type of the extra special state (combination of the extra special game number and the special final game loop rate) is also determined.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs the lottery result reflection process of the lottery process by adding the number of specialized games (S394). In this process, the main CPU 93 adds the acquired number of special added games to the value of the special game number counter and performs a process of updating the special final game loop rate. At this time, if the value of the special game number counter exceeds the upper limit value (“255” in this embodiment), the main CPU 93 sets the value of the special game number counter to “255”.

  In addition, in the specialized final game loop rate update process, the main CPU 93 determines that the specialized final game loop rate obtained by adding the number of specialized games in S393 is larger than the currently set specialized final game loop rate. For example, a process of overwriting the latter specialized final game loop rate with the former specialized final game loop rate is performed. On the other hand, if the former specialized final game loop rate is less than or equal to the latter specialized final game loop rate, or if the special drive flag is on, the specialized final game loop rate is not updated. . If the lottery result of the special game number addition lottery process is non-winning, the special game number counter and the special final game loop rate are not updated in the process of S394.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets “3” as the value of the instruction generation counter (S395). In other words, in the present embodiment, when the NBB (BB1 or BB2) is won in the ART state, after the BB is won and the three games are digested, the instruction display unit notifies the BB role (red 7 navigation or blue 7). Navigation) is executed. Then, after the process of S395, the main CPU 93 ends the NBB winning lottery process during ART and also ends the ART process (see FIG. 228).

[SBB winning lottery process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 230, the SBB winning lottery process performed in S376 during the ART process (see FIG. 228) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 adds lots of specialized games and performs lottery processing (S401). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the lottery table added with the number of specialized games (see FIGS. 93 to 98), and based on the lottery state, the main lottery flag (internal winning combination), and the set value (settings 1 to 6). In addition, the winning / non-winning of the special game number extra lottery is determined, and at the time of winning, the additional type of the extra special state (combination of the extra special game number and the special final game loop rate) is also determined.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a lottery result reflection process of the lottery process by adding the number of specialized games (S402). In this process, the main CPU 93 adds the acquired number of special added games to the value of the special game number counter and performs a process of updating the special final game loop rate. At this time, if the value of the special game number counter exceeds the upper limit value (“255” in this embodiment), the main CPU 93 sets the value of the special game number counter to “255”. In this embodiment, when the current game is an SBB winning game, “10” is added to the value of the special game number counter, the special final game loop rate is set to 80%, and the special drive flag Is set to the on state. When the lottery result of the special game number addition lottery process is non-winning, the special game number counter and the special final game loop rate update process are not performed in the process of S402.

  After the process of S402, the main CPU 93 ends the SBB winning lottery process and also ends the ART processing (see FIG. 228).

[Drawing process during ART]
Next, with reference to FIG. 231, the lottery processing during ART performed in S380 (when MB is won), S382 (in MB) or S384 (inside of BB) during the ART processing (see FIG. 228) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 performs lottery processing with the number of specialized games added (S411). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the lottery table added with the number of specialized games (see FIGS. 93 to 98), and based on the lottery state, the main lottery flag (internal winning combination), and the set value (settings 1 to 6). In addition, the winning / non-winning of the special game number extra lottery is determined, and at the time of winning, the additional type of the extra special state (combination of the extra special game number and the special final game loop rate) is also determined.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the lottery is won by adding the number of specialized games in S411 (S412). In S412, when the main CPU 93 determines that the special game number is not added and the lottery is not won (when S412 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs a process of S415 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S412, that the main CPU 93 wins the lottery with the number of specialized games (when S412 is YES), the main CPU 93 displays the lottery result as a specialized game number counter and a specialized final game loop. It is reflected in the rate (S413). In this process, the main CPU 93 adds the special game number addition value (additional game number) obtained by lottery to the value of the special game number counter. At this time, if the value of the special game number counter exceeds the upper limit value (“255” in this embodiment), the main CPU 93 sets the value of the special game number counter to “255”.

  In this process, the main CPU 93 compares the specialized final game loop rate obtained by lottery with the specialized final game loop rate that is currently set, and the specialized final game loop rate with the larger value. Is set as the updated specialized final game loop rate. At this time, when the specialized drive flag is set to the on state, the main CPU 93 does not perform the process of updating (overwriting) the specialized final game loop rate.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the additional specialization flag to the on state (S414). With this process, a game in a specialized state is started from the next game.

  After the process of S414 or when S412 is NO, the main CPU 93 performs a lottery state transition lottery process (S415). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the lottery state transition lottery table (see FIGS. 71A and 71B), and based on the current lottery state, the set value (settings 1 to 6) and the main lottery flag (internal winning combination), Determine low or high accuracy lottery status. Next, the main CPU 93 sets the lottery result (high or low accuracy) in S415 as a lottery state (S416).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is a game at the time of MB winning, during MB operation, or at the time of special entry (S417). In S417, when the main CPU 93 determines that the determination condition of S417 is satisfied (when S417 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the lottery process during ART and also performs the ART process (see FIG. 228). finish.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S417 that the determination condition of S417 is not satisfied (when S417 is NO), the main CPU 93 decrements the value of the ART game number counter by 1 (S418). Then, after the processing of S418, the main CPU 93 ends the lottery processing during ART and also ends the processing during ART (see FIG. 228).

[ART fall waiting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 232, the ART fall waiting process performed in S125 during the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 209) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an NBB (NBB1 or NBB2) winning game (S421). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an NBB winning game based on the internal winning combination.

  In S421, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is an NBB winning game (when S421 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs NBB winning lottery processing while waiting for an ART fall (S422). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed when the NBB is won in the ART fall waiting state. The details of the NBB winning lottery process waiting for an ART fall will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S422, the main CPU 93 ends the ART fall waiting process and also ends the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S421 that the current game is not an NBB winning game (when S421 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an NBB game (S423). ). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is a game in the NBB state with reference to the game state flag storage area.

  In S423, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is an NBB game (when S423 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the BB lottery process described with reference to FIG. 213 (S424). Then, after the process of S424, the main CPU 93 ends the ART fall waiting process and also ends the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S423 that the current game is not an NBB game (when S423 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an SBB (NBB3) winning game. (S425). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an SBB winning game based on the internal winning combination.

  In S425, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is an SBB winning game (when S425 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the SBB winning lottery process described with reference to FIG. 230 (S426). Then, after the process of S426, the main CPU 93 ends the ART fall waiting process and also ends the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S425 that the current game is not an SBB winning game (NO in S425), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is a game in the SBB (BB3) state. (S427). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area to determine whether or not the current game is an SBB game.

  In S427, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is a game in the SBB state (when S427 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the BB lottery process described with reference to FIG. 213 (S428). Then, after the process of S428, the main CPU 93 ends the ART fall waiting process and also ends the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S427 that the current game is not an SBB game (when S427 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an MB winning game (S429). ). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an MB winning game based on the internal winning combination.

  In S429, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is an MB winning game (when S429 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs an ART fall waiting lottery process (S430). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed at the time of MB winning in the ART fall waiting state. Note that details of the lottery process during ART fall waiting will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the process of S430, the main CPU 93 ends the ART fall waiting process and also ends the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S429 that the current game is not an MB winning game (when S429 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is an MB game (S431). ). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area to determine whether or not the current game is an MB state game.

  In S431, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is a game in the MB state (when S431 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs an ART fall waiting lottery process (S432). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed during the MB operation in the ART fall waiting state. In the ART fall waiting lottery process performed in the process of S432, the lottery process similar to the ART fall waiting lottery process of S430 performed when it is determined that the current game is an MB winning game is performed. The details of the lottery process during the ART fall waiting will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the process of S432, the main CPU 93 ends the ART fall waiting process and also ends the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S431 that the current game is not a game in the MB state (when S431 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is a game in the BB internal state. (S433). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area to determine whether or not the current game is a game in the BB internal state.

  When the main CPU 93 determines in S433 that the current game is not a game in the BB internal state (when S433 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs an ART fall waiting lottery process (S434). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed in the game in the inside state of No BB in the ART fall waiting state. In the ART falling waiting lottery process performed in the process of S434, the ART falling waiting lottery process of S430 performed when it is determined that the current game is an MB winning game, and the current game is in the MB state. The lottery process similar to the ART fall waiting lottery process of S432, which is performed when it is determined as a game, is performed. The details of the lottery process during the ART fall waiting will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S434, the main CPU 93 ends the ART fall waiting process and also ends the lever-on lottery process (see FIG. 209).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S433 that the current game is a game in the BB internal state (when S433 is YES), the main CPU 93 terminates the ART fall waiting process and draws the lever on lottery. The process (see FIG. 209) is also terminated.

[A lottery process for winning NBB waiting for ART fall]
Next, with reference to FIG. 233, the NBB winning lottery processing during ART fall waiting NBB performed in S422 during the ART fall fall waiting processing (see FIG. 232) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 adds lots of specialized games and performs lottery processing (S441). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the lottery table added with the number of specialized games (see FIGS. 93 to 98), and based on the lottery state, the main lottery flag (internal winning combination), and the set value (settings 1 to 6). In addition, the winning / non-winning of the special game number extra lottery is determined, and at the time of winning, the additional type of the extra special state (combination of the extra special game number and the special final game loop rate) is also determined.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs the process of reflecting the lottery result of the lottery process by adding the number of specialized games (S442). In this process, the main CPU 93 adds the acquired number of special added games to the value of the special game number counter and performs a process of updating the special final game loop rate. At this time, if the value of the special game number counter exceeds the upper limit value (“255” in this embodiment), the main CPU 93 sets the value of the special game number counter to “255”.

  Further, in the special final game loop rate update process, the main CPU 93 determines that the special final game loop rate obtained in the lottery lottery in S441 is larger than the special final game loop rate currently set. For example, a process of overwriting the latter specialized final game loop rate with the former specialized final game loop rate is performed. On the other hand, if the former specialized final game loop rate is less than or equal to the latter specialized final game loop rate, or if the special drive flag is on, the specialized final game loop rate is not updated. . If the lottery result of the special game number addition lottery process is non-winning, the special game number counter and the special final game loop rate update process are not performed in the process of S442.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs lottery state transition lottery processing (S443). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the lottery state transition lottery table (see FIGS. 71A and 71B), and based on the current lottery state, the set value (settings 1 to 6) and the main lottery flag (internal winning combination), Determine low or high accuracy lottery status. Next, the main CPU 93 sets the lottery result (high or low accuracy) in S443 as a lottery state (S444).

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets “1” to the value of the instruction generation counter (S445). That is, in this embodiment, when winning the NBB (BB1 or BB2) in the ART fall waiting state, after winning the BB, When one game is digested, notification of the BB role (red 7 navigation or blue 7 navigation) is executed by the instruction display unit. Then, after the processing of S445, the main CPU 93 ends the NBB winning lottery process waiting for ART fall, and also ends the ART fall waiting process (see FIG. 232).

[ART lottery waiting for fall]
Next, referring to FIG. 234, the ART lottery waiting lottery processing performed in S430 (MB winning), S432 (MB inside) or S434 (inside of BB inside) during the ART fall waiting processing (see FIG. 232). Will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 adds lots of specialized games and performs lottery processing (S451). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the lottery table added with the number of specialized games (see FIGS. 93 to 98), and based on the lottery state, the main lottery flag (internal winning combination), and the set value (settings 1 to 6). In addition, the winning / non-winning of the special game number extra lottery is determined, and at the time of winning, the additional type of the extra special state (combination of the extra special game number and the special final game loop rate) is also determined.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reflection process of the lottery result (the number of special added games) of the special game number adding lottery process (S452). In this process, the main CPU 93 adds the acquired number of special added games to the value of the special game number counter and performs a process of updating the special final game loop rate. At this time, if the value of the special game number counter exceeds the upper limit value (“255” in this embodiment), the main CPU 93 sets the value of the special game number counter to “255”.

  Further, in the special final game loop rate update process, the main CPU 93 determines that the special final game loop rate obtained in the lottery lottery in S451 is larger than the currently set special final game loop rate. For example, a process of overwriting the latter specialized final game loop rate with the former specialized final game loop rate is performed. On the other hand, if the former specialized final game loop rate is less than or equal to the latter specialized final game loop rate, or if the special drive flag is on, the specialized final game loop rate is not updated. . If the lottery result of the special game number addition lottery process is non-winning, the special game number counter and the special final game loop rate are not updated in the process of S452.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs lottery state transition lottery processing (S453). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the lottery state transition lottery table (see FIGS. 71A and 71B), and based on the current lottery state, the set value (settings 1 to 6) and the main lottery flag (internal winning combination), Determine low or high accuracy lottery status. Next, the main CPU 93 sets the lottery result (high or low accuracy) in S453 as a lottery state (S454). Then, after the processing of S454, the main CPU 93 ends the ART fall-waiting lottery process and also ends the ART fall-waiting process (see FIG. 232).

[Instruction monitor set processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 235, the instruction monitor set process performed in S8 in the main flow (see FIG. 203) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the main game state is between BB flags (BB internal state) (S461). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area and determines whether or not the main game state is between BB flags (BB internal state).

  In S461, when the main CPU 93 determines that the main gaming state is not between the BB flags (when S461 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs a process of S465 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S461 that the main gaming state is between the BB flags (when S461 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the instruction generation counter is “0”. Determination is made (S462).

  In S462, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the instruction generation counter is “0” (when S462 is YES), the main CPU 93 notifies the carrying-over BB role (red 7 navigation, blue 7 navigation). Alternatively, the display set process of the instruction monitor number (“7”, “8” or “9”) corresponding to BAR navigation) is performed (S463). Through this process, the instruction display unit notifies the BB combination. Then, after the process of S463, the main CPU 93 performs a process of S465 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S462 that the value of the instruction generation counter is not “0” (when S462 is NO), the main CPU 93 decrements the value of the instruction generation counter by 1 (S464).

  After the processing of S464 or S463, or when S461 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the occurrence of the batting order navigation (S465). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is time for hitting order navigation based on the appearance state, the internal winning combination, and the like. For example, in the ART state, when the internal winning combination (for example, abbreviation “F_left bell 1”, “F_middle bell 1”, “F_right bell 1”, etc.) related to the batting order bell wins, the main CPU 93 It is determined that the batting order navigation occurs.

  In S465, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not the time of occurrence of the batting order navigation (when S465 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the instruction monitor set process and moves the process to S9 of the main flow (see FIG. 203). .

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S465 that the batting order navigation is occurring (when S465 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines the instruction monitor numbers (“1” to “6” corresponding to the internal winning combination type). The display set process is performed (S466). With this processing, the instruction display unit notifies the stop button hitting order (reel stop operation order). Then, after the process of S466, the main CPU 93 ends the instruction monitor set process, and moves the process to S9 of the main flow (see FIG. 203).

[Reel stop initial setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 236, the reel stop initial setting process performed in S9 in the main flow (see FIG. 203) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the main game state is the BB state (any one of the BB1 to BB3 states) (S471).

  In S471, when the main CPU 93 determines that the main game state is the BB state (when S471 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a process of S473 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S471 that the main game state is not the BB state (when S471 is NO), the main CPU 93 sets the value of the small role / replay data pointer as the rotation stop number. (S472).

  After the processing of S472 or when S471 is YES, the main CPU 93 refers to a reel stop initial setting table (not shown) and based on the acquired number of times of turning stop, various information corresponding to the turning stop number Is acquired (S473). In this process, the number of the stop table of the reels used during the first stop to the third stop and information necessary for the control change process (when the reels are stopped in a specific order and stopped at a specific position) Information for selecting the stop table again is acquired.

  In the reel stop initial setting table, the correspondence between the number for stopping the rotation and various information such as a drawing priority table selection data and a drawing priority table number described later is defined. The stop table is a table that directly or indirectly defines information on the number of sliding pieces with respect to the pressed position of the stop button. In this stop table, the number of sliding pieces is used so that the reels stop at the stop position intended by the designer so as not to cause any disadvantage to the player and to prevent erroneous winnings by using the prescribed information. Is stipulated.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the rotating identifier “0FFH (11111111B)” in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 104) (S474).

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores “3” in the stop button non-operating counter provided in the main RAM 95 (S475). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop initial setting process, and moves the process to S10 of the main flow (see FIG. 203). The stop button non-operating counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons whose stop operation has not been detected.

[Retrieve priority storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 237, description will be given of the pull-in priority storage process performed in S12 in the main flow (see FIG. 203).

  First, the main CPU 93 stores the value of the stop button non-operating counter in the main RAM 95 as the number of searches (S481). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a search target reel determination process (S482). In this process, for example, the main CPU 93 selects a predetermined reel from the rotating reels, and determines the selected reel as a search target reel.

  For example, in the process of S482, when all (three) reels are rotated, the left reel 3L is first determined as the search target reel. Thereafter, various processes up to S491 described later are performed on the left reel 3L. When the process returns to S482 again, the middle reel 3C is determined as a search target reel. Then, various processes up to S491 described later are performed on the middle reel 3C, and when returning to S482 again, the right reel 3R is next determined as a search target reel.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority table selection process (S483). In this process, the pull-in priority table is selected based on the internal winning combination (data pointer) and the operation stop button. The details of the pull-in priority table selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets “0” as the position data of the search symbol and sets “20” as the number of symbol checks (S484). Then, the main CPU 93 performs symbol code storage processing (S485). In this process, the symbol code corresponding to the position data of the current search symbol located on the effective line of the search target reel is stored in the symbol code storage area. At this time, symbol codes for the number of valid lines are stored. Details of the symbol code storing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 239 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 updates the display combination storage area (see FIG. 99) based on the symbol code acquired in S485 and the data in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 104) (S486). At this time, regardless of whether or not an internal winning combination is won, a combination of symbols that can be displayed (a displayable combination) is stored in the display combination storing area based on the stopped symbol.

  In this embodiment, the symbol code storage area information (symbol code and displayable role corresponding thereto) is updated for each reel to be stopped. At this time, the displayable combination may be obtained from data prepared in advance that defines the correspondence between the stopped reel symbol and the corresponding displayable combination, or the stopped reel symbol. And the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 16 to 19) may be obtained by collating them. When the former method is used, the correspondence relationship between the symbol and the displayable combination changes for each reel.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority data acquisition process (S487). In this process, the main CPU 93 draws in priority for the combination whose bit is “1” in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 99) and whose bit is “1” in the internal winning combination storage area. With reference to a ranking table (not shown), pull-in priority data is acquired.

  The pull-in priority table is a table that defines the correspondence between the pull-in priority data for each storage area type and the predetermined priority in each pull-in priority table number. The pull-in priority order table is used for searching whether there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces obtained based on the stop table. The priority order is data that defines the order of priority stop display (drawn) among the types of symbol combinations related to winning. Normally, the priority order is set in the order of replay, small role and bonus from the highest.

  If the symbol position is an erroneous winning prize when stopped, “use prohibited (000H)” is acquired as the pull-in priority data in S487. Further, if the symbol position is not internally won but does not result in a wrong winning even if it is stopped, “can be stopped (001H)” is acquired as the drawing priority data in S487.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired drawing priority data in a drawing priority data storage area (not shown) corresponding to the search target reel (S488). At this time, the pull-in priority data is stored in the pull-in priority data storage area so that each priority value corresponds to a bit in the storage area.

  The pull-in priority data storage area is provided with a priority data storage area for each reel type. Each drawing priority data storage area stores drawing priority data determined in accordance with each symbol position “0” to “19” of the corresponding reel. In the present embodiment, by referring to this pull-in priority data storage area, it is searched whether there is a more appropriate number of sliding symbols in addition to the number of sliding symbols determined based on the stop table.

  The contents of the priority order pull-in data stored in the pull-in priority order data storage area differ depending on the type of the pull-in priority order table number in the pull-in priority order table referenced when determining the pull-in priority order data. The pull-in priority data indicates that the higher the value, the higher the priority.

  By referring to the drawing priority data, it is possible to relatively evaluate the priority among the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. That is, the symbol for which the largest value is determined as the pull-in priority data becomes the symbol with the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the pull-in priority data indicates the rank between the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. When there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the pull-in priority data, one symbol is determined according to the priority order defined by the priority order table.

  Next, the main CPU 93 adds “1” to the position data of the search symbol, and subtracts “1” from the number of symbol checks (S489). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is “0” (S490).

  In S490, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of symbol checks is not “0” (when S490 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S485 and repeats the processes after S485. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S490 that the symbol check count is “0” (S490 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the search has been performed for the search count (S491).

  In S491, when it is determined that the main CPU 93 has not searched the number of times of search (when S491 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S482 and repeats the processes after S482. On the other hand, when it is determined in S491 that the main CPU 93 has searched for the number of times of search (if S491 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the pull-in priority storage process, and the process is S13 of the main flow (see FIG. 203). Move to.

[Pull-in priority table selection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 238, a description will be given of the pull-in priority table selection process performed in S483 in the flowchart of the pull-in priority storing process (see FIG. 237).

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the pull-in priority table selection data is set (S501).

  When the main CPU 93 determines in S501 that the pull-in priority table selection data has been set (when S501 is YES), the main CPU 93 stores the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 103) and the operation stop button storage area. With reference to (see FIG. 102), the drawing priority table number corresponding to the drawing priority table selection data is set from the drawing priority table selection table (not shown) (S502). After the process of S502, the main CPU 93 ends the pull-in priority table selection process, and moves the process to S484 in the pull-in priority storage process (see FIG. 237).

  The pull-in priority table selection table defines the correspondence between the pull-in priority selection number and the stop button pressing order, and the pull-in priority table number in each combination. The pull-in priority table number is data for acquiring information related to the priority order of display combinations defined in the pull-in priority table (not shown).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pull-in priority table selection data is not set in S501 (when S501 is NO), the main CPU 93 displays the pull-in priority table corresponding to the pull-in priority table number. Set (S503). After the processing of S503, the main CPU 93 ends the pull-in priority order table selection process, and moves the process to S484 in the pull-in priority order storing process (see FIG. 237).

[Design code storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 239, the symbol code storing process performed in S485 in the flowchart of the drawing priority order storing process (see FIG. 237) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 sets valid line data (S511). In the present embodiment, the effective line is provided with one line (cross-up line) as described above. Next, the main CPU 93 sets check symbol position data for the search target reel based on the search symbol position and the effective line data (S512). For example, when the search target reel is the left reel 3L, since it is desired to acquire information on the lower stage of the search target reel, the check symbol position data indicating the lower stage is set.

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires a symbol code of the symbol position data for checking (S513). Then, after storing the acquired symbol code in the symbol code storage area, the main CPU 93 ends the symbol code storage processing, and moves the processing to S486 in the pull-in priority storage processing (see FIG. 237).

[Reel stop control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the reel stop control process performed in S13 in the main flow (see FIG. 203) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S521). In S521, when the main CPU 93 determines that a valid stop button has not been pressed (when S521 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the processing of S521, and a valid stop button is pressed. Wait until.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S521 that a valid stop button has been pressed (in the case where S521 is YES), the main CPU 93 stores the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 103) and the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 102) is updated (S522). Next, the main CPU 93 subtracts “1” from the value of the stop button non-operating counter (S523).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines a search target reel from the operation stop button (S524). Then, the main CPU 93 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 95 based on the symbol counter (S525).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a sliding piece number determination process (S526). In this process, the main CPU 93 acquires the number of pieces of sliding piece determination based on the type of stop button at the time of the first stop, various stop tables, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a priority pull-in control process (S527). In this process, the drawing priority order data is compared according to each symbol position in the range from the stop start position to the maximum number of sliding pieces “4” (“1” for one or more reels in MB), and the most appropriate The number of sliding pieces is determined. Details of the priority pull-in control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs reel stop command generation / storage processing (S528). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The reel stop command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by communication data transmission processing in interrupt processing described later with reference to FIG. The reel stop command transmitted in this process includes information such as the type of reel to be stopped, the number of sliding pieces, and the ON / OFF edge of the stop switch.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines a planned stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding piece determination data acquired in S526, and stores the determined planned stop position in the main RAM 95 (S529). In this process, the main CPU 93 adds the number of sliding frames to the stop start position, and sets the result as the planned stop position.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the planned stop position determined in S529 as a search symbol position (S530). Next, the main CPU 93 performs the symbol code acquisition process described with reference to FIG. 239 (S531). After that, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 104) using the acquired symbol code (S532).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a control change process (S533). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is “0” (S534). In S534, when the main CPU 93 determines that the inoperative counter is not “0” (when S534 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the pull-in priority storage process described with reference to FIG. 237 (S535). ). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S521 and repeats the processes after S521.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the inoperative counter is “0” in S534 (when S534 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop control process, and the process proceeds to the main flow (FIG. 203). (Refer to S14).

[Priority pull-in control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 241, the priority pull-in control process performed in S527 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 240) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 sets a pull-in priority data storage area corresponding to the operation stop button (S541). Next, the main CPU 93 acquires data of the stop start position (S542).

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets a priority order table corresponding to the sliding piece number determination data (S543).

  Note that the priority order table includes the sliding piece number determination data obtained based on the stop table and a range of numerical values predetermined as the number of sliding pieces (“0” to “4” when the maximum number of sliding pieces is four). )) In order of priority (hereinafter referred to as "priority order"). That is, in the priority order table, the order of the number of sliding frames to be preferentially applied is determined for each piece of sliding frame number determination data. In this embodiment, each numerical value is searched (checked) sequentially from the lower priority order “5” of the priority order table, and the number corresponding to the priority order “1” is preferentially applied as the number of sliding frames. So that In the processing of S543, for example, when the number of sliding pieces determination data is “4”, the priority order data defined in the address in the priority order table corresponding to the number of sliding pieces determination data “4” is stored. Set.

  After the processing of S543, the main CPU 93 sets the initial value of the priority order and the number of checks (S544). Specifically, the main CPU 93 sets “1” as the initial value of the priority order. Further, when the MB is not operating, the main CPU 93 sets “5” as the number of checks. By this processing, the priority order is checked (searched) five times within the range of 0 frame to 4 frames. When the maximum number of sliding frames is set to “1” during MB operation, the main CPU 93 sets “2” as the number of checks. By this processing, the priority order is checked (searched) twice in the range of 0 frame to 1 frame. Next, the main CPU 93 sets the sliding piece number determination data as the number of sliding pieces (S545).

  Next, the main CPU 93 extracts a stop search position based on the stop start position and the priority order (S546). Next, the main CPU 93 acquires pull-in priority order data of the stop search position (S547).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the pull-in priority data acquired in S547 is greater than or equal to the value of the pull-in priority data acquired previously (S548). In S548, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pull-in priority data acquired in S547 is not equal to or higher than the pull-in priority data acquired previously (when S548 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S550 described later. .

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S548 that the pull-in priority data acquired in S547 is greater than or equal to the pull-in priority data acquired previously (when S548 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines the number of sliding frames. Update (S549).

  After the processing of S549 or when S548 is NO, the main CPU 93 decrements the priority order value and the number of checks by 1 (S550).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of checks is “0” (S551). When the main CPU 93 determines that the number of checks is not “0” in S551 (when S551 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S546 and repeats the processes after S546.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of checks is “0” in S551 (when S551 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the finally updated number of sliding symbols (S552). After the process of S552, the main CPU 93 ends the priority pull-in control process, and moves the process to S528 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 240).

[Lottery after third stop]
Next, with reference to FIG. 242, the third post-stop lottery process performed in S15 in the main flow (see FIG. 203) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the payout state is a CZ state (S561). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the appearance state flag storage area (see FIG. 101) to determine whether or not the appearance state is a CZ state.

  In S561, when the main CPU 93 determines that the payout state is the CZ state (when S561 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the main gaming state is the NO BB internal state. (S562). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 100) and determines whether or not the main gaming state is the inside state of No BB.

  In S562, when the main CPU 93 determines that the main gaming state is not in the BB internal state (when S562 is NO), the main CPU 93 terminates the lottery process after the third stop, and the process proceeds to the main flow (FIG. 203).

  On the other hand, in S562, when the main CPU 93 determines that the main gaming state is the inside state of NO BB (when S562 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs lottery processing after the third stop during CZ (S563). . In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed after the third stop in the CZ state. Details of the lottery process after the third stop during CZ will be described later with reference to FIG. 243 described later. Then, after the process of S563, the main CPU 93 ends the third lottery process after the third stop, and moves the process to S16 of the main flow (see FIG. 203).

  Here, returning to the processing of S561 again, in S561, when the main CPU 93 determines that the outgoing ball state is not in the CZ state (when S561 is NO), the main CPU 93 waits for the ART to fall. It is determined whether or not it is in a state (S564). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the ball appearance state flag storage area (see FIG. 101) to determine whether or not the ball appearance state is an ART fall waiting state.

  In S564, when the main CPU 93 determines that the payout state is not the ART fall waiting state (when S564 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the lottery process after the third stop, and the process proceeds to the main flow (FIG. 203). (Refer to S16).

  On the other hand, in S564, when the main CPU 93 determines that the payout state is the ART fall waiting state (when S564 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the main gaming state is the BB internal state. Is discriminated (S565).

  In S565, when the main CPU 93 determines that the main gaming state is not in the BB internal state (when S565 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the lottery process after the third stop, and the process proceeds to the main flow (FIG. 203).

  On the other hand, in S565, when the main CPU 93 determines that the main gaming state is the inside state of NO BB (when S565 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs lottery processing after the third stop while waiting for an ART fall ( S566). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes various lottery processes performed after the third stop in the ART fall waiting state. The details of the lottery process after the third stop while waiting for an ART fall will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S566, the main CPU 93 ends the lottery process after the third stop, and moves the process to S16 of the main flow (see FIG. 203).

[Lottery after third stop during CZ]
Next, with reference to FIG. 243, the third post-stop lottery process during CZ performed in S563 in the flowchart of the third post-stop lottery process (see FIG. 242) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not ART non-winning (battle defeat) is confirmed (S571). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the defeat determination flag (ART non-winning determination flag) is turned on in the current game.

  In S571, when the main CPU 93 determines that the ART non-winning determination is not made (when S571 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the lottery process after the third stop during CZ and the lottery process after the third stop (FIG. (See 242).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the ART non-winning is determined in S571 (when S571 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the stage lottery process in the normal state of the next cycle (S572). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the stage lottery table (see FIGS. 89A to 89F), and based on the current game situation and the set values (settings 1 to 6), the stage in the normal state (stage A) ~ C or special stage). Next, the main CPU 93 sets the lottery result (any one of the stages A to C and the special stage) in the stage of the next cycle (S573).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs an enemy character lottery process for determining an enemy character to play against the main character in the game in the CZ state in the next cycle (S574). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the enemy character lottery table (see FIGS. 90 and 91), and based on the current cycle number counter value and setting values (settings 1 to 6), the type of enemy character in the next cycle. (Enemy characters A to F) are determined. For example, when the value of the current cycle number counter is “1”, the main CPU 93 refers to the enemy character lottery table for the third cycle shown in FIG. 90C, and the enemy of the third cycle (second cycle). The character type (enemy characters A to F) is determined. For example, when the value of the current cycle number counter is “5”, the main CPU 93 refers to the enemy character lottery table for the second cycle shown in FIG. The enemy character type (enemy characters A to F) is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the lottery result (any of the enemy characters A to F) to the enemy character in the next cycle (S575). Then, after the process of S575, the main CPU 93 ends the third post-stop lottery process during CZ and also ends the third post-stop lottery process (see FIG. 242).

[Lottery processing after third stop while waiting for ART fall]
Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the third post-stop lottery process during the ART fall waiting performed in S566 in the third post-stop lottery process flowchart (see FIG. 242) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the RT state has shifted from the RT3 state to the RT1 state (S581). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the appearance state has fallen from the ART state to the normal state in the current game.

  In S581, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT state has not shifted from the RT3 state to the RT1 state (when S581 is NO), the main CPU 93 terminates the lottery process after the third stop while waiting for the ART to fall. At the same time, the lottery process after the third stop (see FIG. 242) is also terminated.

  On the other hand, in S581, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT state has shifted from the RT3 state to the RT1 state (when S581 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs stage lottery processing in the normal state of the first cycle ( S582). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the stage lottery table shown in FIG. 89E and determines the stage (stage A to C or special stage) in the first cycle based on the set value (settings 1 to 6). To do. Next, the main CPU 93 sets the lottery result (any one of the stages A to C and the special stage) in the stage of the first cycle (S583).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs stage lottery processing in the normal state in the second cycle (S584). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the stage lottery table shown in FIG. 89E and determines the stage (stage A to C or special stage) in the normal state of the second cycle based on the set value (settings 1 to 6). To do. Next, the main CPU 93 sets the lottery result (one of the stages A to C and the special stage) on the stage of the second cycle (S585).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs an enemy character lottery process for determining an enemy character to play against the main character in the game in the CZ state in the first cycle (S586). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the enemy character lottery table for the first cycle shown in FIG. 90A and based on the set value (settings 1 to 6), the type of enemy character (enemy characters A to F) in the first cycle. To decide. Next, the main CPU 93 sets the lottery result (any of the enemy characters A to F) to the enemy character in the first cycle (S587).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs an enemy character lottery process for determining an enemy character to play against the main character in the game in the CZ state in the second cycle (S588). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the enemy character lottery table for the second cycle shown in FIG. 90B and based on the set value (settings 1 to 6), the type of enemy character (enemy characters A to F) in the second cycle. To decide. Next, the main CPU 93 sets the lottery result (any of the enemy characters A to F) to the enemy character in the second cycle (S589). Then, after the process of S589, the main CPU 93 ends the lottery process after the third stop while waiting for the ART to fall, and also ends the lottery process after the third stop (see FIG. 242).

[RT state control processing]
Next, the RT state control process performed in S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 203) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 21) and checks the RT state transition conditions (the RT state end condition and the activation condition) that can be established in the current (source) RT state (S591). ).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a transition condition for the RT state is satisfied (S592). When the main CPU 93 determines in S592 that the transition condition for the RT state is not satisfied (when S592 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT state control process, and the process proceeds to the main flow (see FIG. 203). ) To S18.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S592 that the transition condition for the RT state is satisfied (in the case where S592 is YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 21) to determine the transition condition. Based on the above, the transition state RT state flag is set to a predetermined bit in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 100), and the gaming state flag storage area is updated (S593). After the process of S593, the main CPU 93 ends the RT state control process, and moves the process to S18 of the main flow (see FIG. 203).

[Out of ball control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 246 and FIG. 247, the played ball state control process performed in S18 in the main flow (see FIG. 203) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the appearance state is a normal state (S601). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the ball appearance state flag storage area (see FIG. 101) to determine whether or not the ball appearance state is the normal state.

  In S601, when the main CPU 93 determines that the payout state is not the normal state (when S601 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S606 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the payout state is the normal state in S601 (when S601 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the cyclic game number counter is “0”. A determination is made (S602).

  In S602, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the cyclic game number counter is not “0” (when S602 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the appearance state control process, and the process proceeds to the main flow (FIG. 203). On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S602 that the value of the cyclic game number counter is “0” (when S602 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the bonus is being operated ( S603). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 100) to determine whether or not the bonus is being operated.

  In S603, when the main CPU 93 determines that the bonus is not operating (when S603 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs a process of S605 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S603 that the main CPU 93 is operating the bonus (when S603 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game is a game at the end of the bonus (S604). . In this process, when the medals are paid out in the game, the main CPU 93 calculates a predetermined number of medals to be paid out during the bonus period (305 for BB, 45 for MB). It is determined whether or not it exceeds (whether or not the bonus end number counter is less than “0” in the current game).

  In S604, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current game is not the game at the end of the bonus (when S604 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the ball status control process, and the process proceeds to the main flow (see FIG. 203). ) To S19.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S604 that the current game is a game at the end of the bonus (when S604 is NO), or when S603 is NO, the main CPU 93 turns off the normal flag. And the CZ introduction flag is set to the on state (S605). As a result of this process, the ball-out state shifts from the normal state to the CZ introduction state, and the game in the CZ introduction state is performed in the next game. Then, after the processing of S605, the main CPU 93 ends the appearance state control processing, and moves the processing to S19 of the main flow (see FIG. 203).

  Here, returning to the process of S601 again, if S601 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ball-out state is the state at the time of CZ introduction (S606). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the ball appearance state flag storage area (see FIG. 101) to determine whether or not the ball appearance state is a CZ introduction time state.

  When the main CPU 93 determines in S606 that the payout state is the CZ introduction state (when S606 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the CZ introduction flag to the off state and turns on the CZ flag. The state is set (S607). As a result of this processing, the game appearance state shifts from the CZ introduction state to the CZ in-progress state, and the game in the CZ in-progress state starts from the next game. Then, after the processing of S607, the main CPU 93 ends the appearance state control processing, and moves the processing to S19 of the main flow (see FIG. 203).

  On the other hand, in S606, when the main CPU 93 determines that the payout state is not the CZ introduction state (when S606 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the payout state is the CZ in-progress state. (S608). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the appearance state flag storage area (see FIG. 101) to determine whether or not the appearance state is a CZ state.

  In S608, when the main CPU 93 determines that the payout state is the CZ in-progress state (when S608 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a CZ end payout state control process (S609). Note that the details of the CZ end appearance control process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S609, the main CPU 93 ends the appearance state control processing, and moves the processing to S19 of the main flow (see FIG. 203).

  On the other hand, in S608, when the main CPU 93 determines that the appearance state is not the CZ state (when S608 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the appearance state is the ART preparation state. (S610). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the appearance state flag storage area (see FIG. 101) to determine whether or not the appearance state is an ART preparation state.

  In S610, when the main CPU 93 determines that the payout state is the ART preparation state (when S610 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the RT state has shifted to the RT3 state (S611). ). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 100) to determine whether or not the RT state has shifted to the RT3 state.

  In S611, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT state has not shifted to the RT3 state (in the case where S611 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the ball appearance state control process, and the process proceeds to the main flow (FIG. 203). S19 of reference).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in step S611 that the RT state has shifted to the RT3 state (YES in step S611), the main CPU 93 sets the ART preparation flag to the OFF state, adds the ART flag and the addition. The specialization flag is set to the on state (S612). As a result of this processing, the appearance state shifts from the ART preparation state to the specialization state, the game in the ART state is started from the next game, and the game in the specialization state at the start of the ART is started. In addition, in the game in the added special state at the start of the ART, the initial number of ART games in the ART game period is determined. The game period (specialization period) and the loop rate (continuation rate) in the added special state are the rank of the reward system card acquired in the normal game period and the special period implemented during the ART preparation period. It is determined according to the result of lottery. Then, after the processing of S612, the main CPU 93 ends the appearance state control processing, and moves the processing to S19 of the main flow (see FIG. 203).

  Here, returning to the processing of S610 again, in S610, when the main CPU 93 determines that the outgoing ball state is not the ART ready state (when S610 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines that the outgoing ball state is the ART state. It is discriminate | determined whether it is (S613). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the appearance state flag storage area (see FIG. 101) to determine whether or not the appearance state is the ART state.

  In S613, when the main CPU 93 determines that the appearance state is not the ART state (when S613 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs a process of S621 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S613 that the appearance state is the ART state (when S613 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the appearance state is an added special state. (S614). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the ball appearance state flag storage area (see FIG. 101) and determines whether or not the ball appearance state is an added special state.

  In S614, when the main CPU 93 determines that the payout state is not the added special state (when S614 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S617 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S614 that the payout state is the added special state (when S614 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether the value of the special game number counter is “0”. It is determined whether or not (S615).

  In S615, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the specialized game number counter is not “0” (when S615 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the ball appearance state control process, and the process proceeds to the main flow ( The process proceeds to S19 in FIG. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S615 that the value of the specialized game number counter is “0” (in the case where S615 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the additional specialization flag to an off state ( S616). As a result of this process, the game period of the specialization state for the addition ends, and the game appearance state shifts from the specialization state for the addition to the ART state.

  After the processing of S616 or when S614 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number counter is “0” (S617).

  In S617, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is not “0” (when S617 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the appearance state control process, and the process proceeds to the main flow (FIG. 203). On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is “0” in S617 (when S617 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the bonus is being operated ( S618).

  In S618, when the main CPU 93 determines that the bonus operation is not being performed (when S618 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs a process of S620 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S618 that the main CPU 93 is operating the bonus (when S618 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the bonus is over (S619).

  In S619, when the main CPU 93 determines that the bonus is not ended (when S619 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the payout state control process and shifts the process to S19 of the main flow (see FIG. 203). .

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S619 that the bonus is ended (when S619 is YES), or when S618 is NO, the main CPU 93 sets the ART flag to the OFF state. The ART fall waiting flag is set to the on state (S620). As a result of this processing, the game appearance state shifts from the ART state to the ART fall waiting state, and the game in the ART fall waiting state is started from the next game. Then, after the processing of S620, the main CPU 93 ends the appearance state control processing, and moves the processing to S19 of the main flow (see FIG. 203).

  Here, returning to the processing of S613 again, if S613 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the RT state has shifted to the RT1 state (S621).

  In S621, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT state has not shifted to the RT1 state (when S621 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the ball appearance state control process, and the process proceeds to the main flow (FIG. 203). S19 of reference).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S621 that the RT state has shifted to the RT1 state (when S621 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the ART fall-waiting flag to the off state and sets the normal flag to the on state. Set (S622). As a result of this process, the ball-out state shifts from the ART fall waiting state to the normal state, and the game in the normal state in the first cycle is started from the next game.

  Next, the main CPU 93 initializes the rank of each card (S623). Specifically, the main CPU 93 sets each rank of the attack card, the defense card, and the reward card to “0” (rareness “R”). The present invention is not limited to this, and the initial value of each card rank is determined as a predetermined rank by lottery from a plurality of types of ranks (for example, “0”, “1”, “2”, etc.). It may be. Then, after the processing of S623, the main CPU 93 ends the ball appearance state control processing, and moves the processing to S19 of the main flow (see FIG. 203).

[CZ exiting ball state control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 248, the CZ end time appearance state control process performed in S <b> 609 in the flow chart of the appearance state control process (see FIGS. 246 and 247) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART winning is determined (S631). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART winning is determined based on the ON / OFF state of the victory determination flag, and determines that the ART winning is determined when the victory determination flag is ON. To do.

  When the main CPU 93 determines in step S631 that the ART win has been confirmed (in the case where S631 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the CZ flag to the OFF state and sets the ART preparation flag to the ON state ( S632). As a result of this process, the payout state shifts from the CZ state to the ART preparation state, and the game in the ART preparation state is started from the next game.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the value of the specialized game number counter and the specialized final game loop rate based on the card rank of the reward system card acquired until the introduction of CZ (S633). For example, when the card rank of the reward system card acquired before the introduction of CZ is “3”, the value of the specialized game number counter is set to “7”, and the specialized final game loop rate is 50. % Is set.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the value of the cycle number counter to “1” (S634). And after the process of S634, main CPU93 complete | finishes a ball appearance state control process at the time of CZ completion | finish, and also complete | finishes a ball appearance state control process (refer FIG. 246 and FIG. 247).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S631 that the ART winning is not confirmed (in the case where S631 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART non-winning is confirmed (S635). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART non-winning is determined based on the on / off state of the defeat determination flag. If the defeat determination flag is on, the main CPU 93 determines the ART non-winning. Is determined.

  In S635, when the main CPU 93 determines that the ART non-winning is not confirmed (in the case where S635 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the exiting ball state control process at the end of the CZ and the exiting ball state control process. (See FIGS. 246 and 247) also ends.

  On the other hand, in S635, when the main CPU 93 determines that the ART non-winning has been confirmed (in the case where S635 is YES), the main CPU 93 turns off the CZ flag in the outgoing ball status flag storage area (see FIG. 101). The normal flag is set to the on state (S636). As a result of this process, the payout state shifts from the CZ state to the normal state, and the game in the normal state of the next cycle is started in the next game.

  Next, the main CPU 93 adds “1” to the value of the cycle number counter (S637). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the cycle number counter has become larger than “5” (S638).

  In S638, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the cycle number counter is not larger than “5” (when S638 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S640 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S638 that the value of the cycle number counter is larger than “5” (when S638 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the value of the cycle number counter to “1” ( S639).

  After the process of S639 or when S638 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the victory rewrite flag is in an on state (S640).

  In S640, when the main CPU 93 determines that the victory rewrite flag is not in the on state (when S640 is NO), the main CPU 93 initializes the rank of each card (S641). Specifically, the main CPU 93 sets each rank of the attack card, the defense card, and the reward card to “0” (rareness “R”). The present invention is not limited to this, and the initial value of each card rank is determined as a predetermined rank by lottery from a plurality of types of ranks (for example, “0”, “1”, “2”, etc.). It may be. Then, after the processing of S641, the main CPU 93 ends the exiting ball state control process at the end of the CZ, and also ends the exiting ball state control process (see FIGS. 246 and 247).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S640 that the victory rewrite flag is in the on state (when S640 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the normal flag to the off state and sets the ART ready flag to the on state. (S642). By this processing, the ART non-winning determination is rewritten to the ART winning determination. As a result, the appearance state shifts to the ART ready state, and the game in the ART ready state is started from the next game.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the value of the specialized game number counter and the specialized final game loop rate based on the card rank of the reward system card acquired until the introduction of CZ (S643). Next, the main CPU 93 sets the value of the cycle number counter to “1” (S644). And after the process of S644, main CPU93 complete | finishes the appearance state control process at the time of CZ completion | finish, and also complete | finishes the appearance state control process (refer FIG. 246 and FIG. 247).

[Bonus end check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 249, the bonus end check process performed in S21 in the main flow (see FIG. 203) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 refers to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 101) to determine whether or not the bonus (BB or MB) is in operation (S651). In S651, when the main CPU 93 determines that the bonus is not in operation (NO in S651), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process and moves the process to S22 of the main flow (see FIG. 203). .

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S651 that the bonus is operating (in the case where S651 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0”. (S652).

  In S652, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than “0” (when S652 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S661 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S652 that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (when S652 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end command generation / storage process (S653). . In this process, the main CPU 93 generates bonus end command data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The bonus end command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by a communication data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. The bonus end command includes information indicating that the bonus game has ended.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the BB end time (S654). In S654, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not the BB end time (when S654 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S659 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S654 that the main CPU 93 is at the end of the BB (when S654 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the outgoing ball state is the CZ mid state (S655).

  In S655, when the main CPU 93 determines that the payout state is not the CZ state (when S655 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S657 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S655 that the payout state is the CZ in-progress state (when S655 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the CZ in-progress flag to the OFF state and sets the ART ready flag. The on state is set (S656). That is, when the BB wins in the CZ state, after the BB is digested, the payout state shifts from the CZ state to the ART preparation state (if the BB wins in the CZ state, the ART transition is Determine).

  After the processing of S656 or when S655 is NO, the main CPU 93 sets the lock time for BB end (5000.59 ms) corresponding to the game lock to be performed at the end of BB in the lock timer (S657). This process starts the game lock at the end of the BB. The lock timer subtraction process (count process) is performed in a timer update process during an interrupt process in FIG. 252 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the BB end time lock time has elapsed (S658).

  When the main CPU 93 determines in S658 that the BB end lock time has not elapsed (when S658 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S658 and the BB end lock time elapses. Wait until.

  On the other hand, in S658, when the main CPU 93 determines that the lock time for BB end has elapsed (when S658 is YES), or when S654 is NO, the main CPU 93 performs bonus end processing. (S659). In this process, the main CPU 93 clears the bonus end number counter and sets the gaming state flag corresponding to the bonus (BB or MB) in operation to the off state. If the value of the BB bonus end number counter is less than “0”, it means that the number of medals paid out during the BB state has exceeded a predetermined number (305), and the MB bonus end number counter When the value is less than “0”, it means that the payout of medals exceeds a specific number (45) during the MB state.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs initialization processing at the end of the bonus (S660). After the process of S660, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process, and moves the process to S22 of the main flow (see FIG. 203).

  Here, returning to the processing of S652 again, if S652 is NO, the main CPU 93 updates the values of the winning number counter and the possible game number counter (S661). The value of the winning count counter is decremented by “1” when a small role (a medal is paid out) is displayed, and the value of the possible number of games counter is 1 game (unit game) regardless of the stop pattern. Then “1” is subtracted.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter or the value of the possible game number counter is “0” (S662). When the main CPU 93 determines in S662 that the value of the winning number counter or the value of the possible game number counter is not “0” (when S662 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process. The process proceeds to S22 in the main flow (see FIG. 203).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S662 that the value of the winning number counter or the value of the possible game number counter is “0” (when S662 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether the RB or CB is Processing at the end is performed (S663). Specifically, processing such as setting the RB state flag or the CB state flag to the off state, and clearing the values of the winning possible number counter and the possible gaming number counter are performed. Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process, and moves the process to S22 of the main flow (see FIG. 203).

[Bonus activation check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 250, the bonus operation check process performed in S22 in the main flow (see FIG. 203) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a bonus (BB or MB) is in operation (S671). In S671, when the main CPU 93 determines that the bonus is not operating (when S671 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S674 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S671 that the bonus is operating (in the case where S671 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether RB or CB is operating (S672). In S672, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RB or CB is in operation (in the case where S672 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process, and the process proceeds to the main flow (see FIG. 203). Move to S2.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S672 that the RB or CB is not in operation (when S672 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether the RB or CB is based on the bonus operation time table (see FIG. 20). Processing during operation is performed (S673). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the bonus operation time table (see FIG. 20) and appropriately sets values corresponding to the bonus type in the winning number counter and the possible game number counter. Then, after the process of S673, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 203).

  Here, returning to the processing of S671 again, if S671 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the bonus game is won (S674). In the present embodiment, when the symbol combination (see FIG. 16) related to the BB combination or the MB combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, the bonus game is won. In S674, when the main CPU 93 determines that the bonus game is not won (when S674 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs a process of S679 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the bonus game is won in S674 (when S674 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines the winning bonus game based on the bonus operation time table (see FIG. 20). A corresponding bonus activation process is performed (S675). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the bonus operating time table (see FIG. 20), sets “1” to the corresponding bit in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 100), and sets the bonus end number counter. The numerical value is set to a predetermined value (“305” when winning the BB, “45” when winning the MB). Further, in this process, the RB operation process described in S673 is also performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 clears the value of the carryover combination storage area (S676). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus start command generation / storage process (S677). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates bonus start command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The bonus start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by a communication data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. The bonus start command includes information indicating that the bonus game has started.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a BB start time lock process (S678). Details of the BB start time lock process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the process of S678, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process, and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 203).

  Here, returning to the processing of S674 again, if S674 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the winning combination related to replaying is a win (S679). In S679, when the main CPU 93 determines that the role related to replay is not winning (when S679 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process, and the process of the main flow (see FIG. 203). Move to S2.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S679 that the combination relating to replaying is a win (when S679 is YES), the main CPU 93 requests automatic insertion of medals (S680). That is, the main CPU 93 copies the insertion number counter to the automatic insertion number counter. Then, after the process of S680, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 203).

[BB start lock process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 251, the BB start time lock process performed in S678 in the bonus operation check process flowchart (see FIG. 250) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the NBB (BB1 or BB2) is started (S691). In S691, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not the NBB start time (when S691 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S694 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S691 that it is the NBB start time (when S691 is YES determination), the main CPU 93 determines the NBB start lock time (5501.09 ms) corresponding to the game lock performed at the time of NBB winning. ) Is set in the lock timer (S692). By this process, the game lock at the time of NBB winning is started. The lock timer subtraction process (count process) is performed in a timer update process during an interrupt process in FIG. 252 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the NBB start time lock time has elapsed (S693). In S693, when the main CPU 93 determines that the NBB start lock time has not elapsed (when S693 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the processing of S693, and the value of the lock timer is set to “0”. Wait until

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S693 that the NBB start-time lock time has elapsed (when S693 is YES), or when S691 is NO, the main CPU 93 is at the start of SBB (BB3). It is determined whether or not (S694). In S694, when the main CPU 93 determines that the SBB is not started (S694 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the BB start lock process and also ends the bonus operation check process (see FIG. 250). .

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S694 that the SBB is starting (when S694 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the SBB start lock time (770.86 ms) corresponding to the game lock performed at the time of SBB winning. ) Is set in the lock timer (S695). By this process, the game lock at the time of SBB winning is started. The lock timer subtraction process (count process) is performed in a timer update process during an interrupt process in FIG. 252 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the SBB start-time lock time has elapsed (S696). In S696, when the main CPU 93 determines that the lock time for starting the SBB has not elapsed (when S696 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S696 and the value of the lock timer is set to “0”. Wait until

  On the other hand, in S696, when the main CPU 93 determines that the SBB start time lock time has elapsed (when S696 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the BB start time lock process and also performs a bonus operation check process ( The process also ends (see FIG. 250).

[Interrupt processing under the control of the main CPU (1.1172 msec)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 252, an interrupt process periodically executed at an interval of 1.1172 msec under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 saves the register (S701). Next, the main CPU 93 performs an input port check process (S702). In this process, signals input from various switches such as a stop switch on the stop switch substrate 80 are checked.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs timer update processing (S703). In this process, the main CPU 93 performs a process of subtracting the value of the lock timer for each interrupt process, for example.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel control process (S704). In this process, the main CPU 93 starts the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when the rotation start of all the main reels is requested, and then the main reels rotate at a constant speed. The three stepping motors are driven and controlled. When the number of sliding symbols is determined, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding main reel by the number of sliding symbols. Then, the main CPU 93 waits until the updated symbol counter matches the value corresponding to the planned stop position (the symbol at the planned stop position reaches the area on the effective line of the reel display window 4). The corresponding stepping motor is driven and controlled so that the rotation of the main reel is decelerated and stopped. In the present embodiment, in the process of S704, when not only the normal acceleration process, constant speed process and stop process of the main reel but also the game lock is set, the main CPU 93 sets the game lock type. A corresponding lock effect (reel effect) control process is also performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs communication data transmission processing (S705). In this processing, various commands are mainly transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101 as appropriate. In the present embodiment, in the interrupt process with a cycle of 1.1172 ms, when no command related to a gaming operation is set, a no-operation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub-control circuit 101.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a lamp and 7-segment driving process (S706). In this process, the main CPU 93 controls the information display 24 to display the number of payouts and the number of credits. Further, in this process, when the information display unit included in the information display 24 displays the information related to the navigation, the main CPU 93 drives and controls the instruction display unit to display the information related to the navigation (the instruction monitor number). To do. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a register restoration process (S707). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the interrupt process.

<Description of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, the contents of various processes (tasks) executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main board communication task]
First, a main board communication task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs a reception check on the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91 (S801). Next, when receiving a command, the sub CPU 102 extracts the type of the received command (S802).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the command type is normal (S803). In the present embodiment, the command type is associated with one of a plurality of types of codes, and when the game is operating normally, the type of the command is one of the plurality of types of codes. Therefore, in the processing of S803, if the received command type code is one of a plurality of types of codes, the sub CPU 102 determines that the command type is normal. On the other hand, if the command type code is other than a plurality of types of codes, the sub CPU 102 determines that some abnormality (including an illegal act) has occurred during the game, and determines that the command type is not a normal command type.

  In S803, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the command type is not a normal command (when S803 is NO), the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S801 and repeats the processes after S801.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S803 that the sub CPU 102 is a normal command type (YES in S803), the sub CPU 102 stores a message in the message queue based on the received command (S804). . The message queue is a mechanism for exchanging information between processes. After the process of S804, the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S801 and repeats the processes after S801.

[Direction registration task]
Next, with reference to FIG. 254, an effect registration task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 extracts a message from the message queue (S811). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is a message in the message queue (S812). In S812, when the sub CPU 102 determines that there is no message in the message queue (when S812 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S815 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S812 that there is a message in the message queue (when S812 is YES), the sub CPU 102 copies the game information from the message (S813). In this process, for example, various data such as information relating to the internal winning combination (main lottery flag), the type of reel that has stopped rotating, the display combination, and the game state flag specified by the parameters are provided in the sub RAM 103. (Not shown).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs an effect content determination process (S814). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the contents of the effect, registers the effect data, and the like according to the type of the received command. Details of the effect content determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 255 and 256 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 registers animation data (S815). Next, the sub CPU 102 registers sound data (S816). Next, the sub CPU 102 registers lamp data (S817). In addition, these registration processes are performed based on the effect data registered in the effect content determination process of S814. Then, after the processing of S817, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S811, and repeats the processing after S811.

[Production content decision processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 255 and FIG. 256, the effect content determination process performed in S814 in the flowchart of the effect registration task (see FIG. 254) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the initialization command is received (S821).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S821 that the initialization command is received (S821 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs initialization command reception processing (S822). In this process, the sub CPU 102 mainly performs lottery processing of various effect parameters necessary for effect control performed in the game in the normal state started after the setting change. The details of the initialization command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the process of S822, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S815 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 254).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S821 that the initialization command is not received (S821 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the medal insertion command is received (S823).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S823 that the medal insertion command is being received (when S823 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a medal insertion command reception process (S824). In this process, the sub CPU 102 mainly performs effect data set (registration) processing when the demonstration display is canceled. Details of the medal insertion command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S824, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S815 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 254).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S823 that the sub CPU 102 is not receiving a medal insertion command (NO in S823), the sub CPU 102 determines whether it is receiving a start command (S825).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S825 that the start command is being received (S825 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a start command receiving process (S826). In this process, the sub CPU 102 extracts various random numbers for effects, determines an effect pattern number by lottery based on information (main lottery flag) relating to the internal winning combination, and the effect data corresponding to the effect pattern number. Set (register). Here, the production pattern number is data for designating the production content to be executed this time. The production data is data that designates animation data, sound data, and lamp data. Therefore, when the effect data is registered, the corresponding animation data and the like are determined, and effects such as display of video are executed. The details of the start command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the process of S826, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S815 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 254).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S825 that the sub CPU 102 is not receiving a start command (S825 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether it is receiving a reel stop command (S827).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S827 that it is time to receive a reel stop command (when S827 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs processing for receiving a reel stop command (S828). In this process, the sub CPU 102, based on information such as the type of the stop reel (operation stop button), the stop start position, the number of sliding pieces, the effect number, etc. included in the reel stop command, produces the effect data at the time of reel stop. Determine (register). After the process of S828, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S815 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 254).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S827 that it is not at the time of receiving the reel stop command (when S827 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is at the time of receiving the display command (S829).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S829 that the display command is being received (S829 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a display command receiving process (S830). In this processing, mainly, sub game state transition control processing and sub management flag update processing are performed. Details of the display command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S830, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S815 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 254).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S829 that the display command is not received (NO in S829), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the payout end command is received (S831).

  In S831, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is time to receive a payout end command (when S831 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs payout end command reception processing (S832). In this process, the sub CPU 102 performs a transition control process to a demonstration effect. Details of the payout end command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S832, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process and moves the process to S815 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 254).

  On the other hand, when determining in S831 that the sub CPU 102 is not receiving a payout end command (NO in S831), the sub CPU 102 determines whether it is receiving a bonus start command (S833).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S833 that the bonus start command is being received (when S833 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on various control related flags corresponding to the bonus (BB or MB) to be started. The state is set (S834). In this process, the sub CPU 102 selects a predetermined sub management flag from among various sub management flags indicating bonus types such as, for example, a sub-flag during BB, an NBB sub-flag, an SBB sub-flag, a story BB flag, and an MB sub-flag according to the bonus type to be started. Set the flag to ON. After the process of S834, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S815 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 254).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S833 that the bonus start command is not received (when S833 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the bonus end command is received (S835).

  In S835, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not at the time of receiving the bonus end command (when S835 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and the process is S815 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 254). Move to.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S835 that the sub CPU 102 is receiving a bonus end command (YES in S835), the sub CPU 102 turns off various related subflags for controlling the bonus (BB or MB) to be ended. (S836). In this process, for example, the sub CPU 102 selects a predetermined flag from various sub management flags indicating bonus types such as a sub-flag in BB, an NBB sub flag, an SBB sub flag, a story BB flag, and an MB sub flag according to the bonus type to be ended. Set to the off state. After the process of S836, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S815 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 254).

[Process when receiving initialization command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 257, the initialization command reception process performed in S822 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 255 and 256) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 clears various effect parameters before power interruption (S841). Next, the sub CPU 102 clears various modes (S842). Next, the sub CPU 102 clears various counters (S843).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets a setting change occurrence flag to an on state (S844). The setting change occurrence flag is a flag indicating that the current sub game state is the game period in the normal state in the first cycle after the setting change or after the power is restored after 2 hours of power interruption. Maintained in a state. The setting change occurrence flag is provided in the sub RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the normal sub flag to the on state (S845). With this process, the normal game is started from the current game. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “40” (initial value) to the sub cycle counter (S846). The sub cycle counter is a counter for counting (managing) the number of remaining cycle games in the normal state on the sub side, and is provided in the sub RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a normal stage display effect lottery process displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 in the normal game period (S847). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the effect of “stage A display”, “stage B display” or “stage C display” with reference to the normal stage display effect lottery table (see FIG. 135). Then, after the processing of S847, the sub CPU 102 ends the initialization command reception processing and ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 255 and 256).

[Process when receiving medal insertion command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 258, the medal insertion command reception process performed in S824 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 255 and 256) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S851). The demonstration display flag is a flag indicating whether or not an effect (demonstration display effect) for displaying the demonstration screen on the liquid crystal display device 11 is currently being executed, and is provided in the sub RAM 103. The demonstration display flag is set to the on state when the execution condition of the demonstration display effect (the condition for transition to the demonstration screen) is satisfied at the end of the medal payout processing operation, and then the medal insertion operation of the next game is detected. The on state is maintained for a period until it is performed.

  In S851, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the demonstration display flag is not on (when S851 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the medal insertion command reception process and the effect content determination process (see FIG. 255 and FIG. 255). The process also ends (see FIG. 256).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S851 that the demonstration display flag is on (when S851 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the demonstration display flag to the off state and sets the demonstration cancellation effect flag. The on state is set (S852). The demonstration release effect flag is a flag indicating whether or not the demonstration release effect is being executed, and is provided in the sub-RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets (registers) the effect data of the demonstration release effect (S853). By this process, the execution of the demonstration release effect (the effect of displaying the card upside down and displaying the number of remaining periodic games “?”) Is started. Then, after the processing of S853, the sub CPU 102 ends the medal insertion command reception processing, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 255 and 256).

[Start command reception processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 259, the start command reception process performed in S826 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 255 and 256) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the demonstration release effect is being executed (S861).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S861 that the demonstration release effect is not being executed (when S861 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S863 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S861 that the demonstration cancellation effect is being executed (S861 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the demonstration cancellation effect flag to the off state (S862). With this process, the demonstration release effect ends, and the normal stage effect starts.

  After the process of S862 or when S861 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs a sub lottery flag generation process (S863). In this process, the sub CPU 102 generates the corresponding sub lottery flag A and sub lottery flag B based on the main lottery flag included in the start command (see FIG. 107).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the sub management flag to determine whether or not the sub gaming state is the normal state (S864).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S864 that the sub game state is the normal state (when S864 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a normal game start process (S865). In this process, the sub CPU 102 mainly registers effect data corresponding to the effect pattern executed at the start of the game in the normal state (at the start of the unit game). The details of the normal middle game start process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 260 and 261 described later. Then, after the process of S865, the sub CPU 102 ends the start command reception process and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 255 and 256).

  On the other hand, in S864, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is not the normal state (when S864 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is the CZ introduction state ( S866).

  In S866, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is the CZ introduction state (when S866 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a CZ introduction game start process (S867). In this process, the sub CPU 102 mainly registers effect data corresponding to the effect pattern executed at the start of the game in the CZ introduction state. After the process of S867, the sub CPU 102 ends the start command reception process and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 255 and 256).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S866 that the sub gaming state is not the CZ introduction state (when S866 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is in the CZ state. (S868).

  In S868, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is the CZ state (when S868 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a CZ gaming start process (S869). In this process, the sub CPU 102 mainly registers the effect data corresponding to the effect pattern executed at the start of the game in the CZ state. Then, after the process of S869, the sub CPU 102 ends the start command reception process and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 255 and 256).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S868 that the sub gaming state is not in the CZ state (when S868 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is in the ART preparation state. (S870).

  In S870, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is the ART ready state (when S870 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an ART preparing game start process (S871). In this process, the sub CPU 102 mainly registers effect data corresponding to the effect pattern executed at the start of the game in the ART preparation state. Then, after the process of S871, the sub CPU 102 ends the start command reception process and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 255 and 256).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S870 that the sub gaming state is not the ART ready state (when S870 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is the ART state ( S872).

  In S872, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is not the ART state (in the case where S872 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the start command reception process and the effect content determination process (FIG. 255 and FIG. 255). 256) also ends.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is the ART state in S872 (when S872 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a game start process during the ART (S873). In this process, the sub CPU 102 mainly registers effect data corresponding to the effect pattern executed at the start of the ART state game. The details of the processing at the start of the game during ART will be described later with reference to FIGS. 263 and 264 described later. Then, after the process of S873, the sub CPU 102 ends the start command reception process and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 255 and 256).

[Normal game start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 260 and FIG. 261, the normal middle game start time process performed in S865 in the flowchart of the start command reception time process (see FIG. 259) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is a BB winning game (S881). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is a BB winning game with reference to a parameter related to the presence / absence of BB winning included in the star command.

  In S881, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current game is a BB winning game (when S881 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a normal BB winning effect process (S882). In this process, for example, the sub CPU 102 refers to a normal BB winning effect lottery table (not shown), and performs an effect executed at the start of the BB winning game in the normal state based on the sub lottery flag (internal winning combination). The effect pattern number is determined, and the effect data table corresponding to the effect pattern number is designated. Although not shown, the configuration of the effect data table specified in this process is the same as the configuration of the effect data table described with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110. Then, after the process of S882, the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S892 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S881 that the current game is not a BB winning game (when S881 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub game state is a BB internal state ( S883).

  In S883, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is the BB internal state (when S883 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a normal BB internal effect process (S884). In this process, for example, the sub CPU 102 refers to a normal BB internal medium effect lottery table (not shown), and based on the sub lottery flag (internal winning combination), the game situation, etc., at the start of the game in the BB internal medium state An effect pattern number of an effect to be executed is determined, and an effect data table corresponding to the effect pattern number is designated. Although not shown, the configuration of the effect data table specified in this process is the same as the configuration of the effect data table described with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110. Then, after the processing of S884, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S892 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S883 that the sub gaming state is not the BB internal state (when S883 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is the BB state ( S885).

  In S885, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is the BB state (when S885 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a normal BB medium effect process (S885). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to, for example, a normal lottery BB lottery table (see, for example, FIGS. 113 and 114), and is in a normal state based on a sub lottery flag (internal winning combination), a game situation, and the like. An effect pattern number of an effect to be executed at the start of the game during BB operation is determined, and an effect data table corresponding to the effect pattern number is designated. Although not shown, the configuration of the effect data table specified in this process is the same as the configuration of the effect data table described with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110. Then, after the process of S885, the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S892 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S885 that the sub game state is not the BB state (when S885 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is a game at the time of card rank up. (S887). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is a game at the time of card rank increase by referring to a parameter related to presence / absence of card rank increase included in the star command.

  In S887, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current game is a game at the time of card rank up (when S887 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an effect process at the time of card rank up (S888). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to, for example, a normal lottery card rank up effect lottery table (not shown), and the card rank up is determined based on the sub lottery flag (internal winning combination), the game situation, and the like. The effect pattern number of the effect executed at the start of the game in the normal state is determined, and the effect data table corresponding to the effect pattern number is designated. Although not shown, the configuration of the effect data table specified in this process is the same as the configuration of the effect data table described with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110. By this processing, among the three cards displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the display mode (card pattern or the like) of the card whose card rank is determined to be displayed is the display of the card (acquired card) after the rank increase. Updated to mode.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value of the sub cycle counter (S889). In the present embodiment, in the normal state, when the game in BB or in BB is executed when BB is won, the sub period counter is not subtracted. Then, after the processing of S889, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S892 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S897 that the current game is not a game at the time of card rank up (when S897 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a normal effect process (S890). In this process, for example, the sub CPU 102 refers to a normal lottery effect lottery table (for example, see FIG. 108), and based on the sub lottery flag (internal winning combination), the game situation, etc. , The effect pattern number of the effect to be executed at the start of the game in the BB and the normal state other than when the card rank is up is determined, and the effect data table corresponding to the effect pattern number is designated. Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value of the sub cycle counter (S891).

  After the process of S882, S884, S886, S889 or S891, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the effect table can be directly specified by the effect data table set by the process of S882, S884, S886, S888 or S890. (S892). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to the effect data table set by the process of S882, S884, S886, S888 or S890, and the effect parameter items “GrID” and “GrNo” associated with the effect pattern number. It is discriminated whether or not an effect is designated in step (b). If an effect is specified in the effect parameter items “GrID” and “GrNo”, the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect table can be specified directly.

  In S892, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect table can be directly designated (when S892 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S894 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S892 that the effect table cannot be directly specified (when S892 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the effect pattern number defined in the set effect data table. With reference to the values of the associated production parameter items “inc” and “table”, another production data table corresponding to the values is registered (set) (S893).

  After the process of S893 or when S892 is YES, the sub CPU 102 refers to the effect data table that is set, and the effect parameter item “ST” associated with the effect pattern number has a value of “1” or more. Is determined (S894).

  In S894, when the sub CPU 102 determines that a value equal to or greater than “1” is not defined in the effect parameter item “ST” (when S894 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S897 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S894 that the effect parameter item “ST” has a value of “1” or more (when S894 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the stage background transition lottery process. Perform (S895). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the stage background transition lottery table (see FIGS. 127A and 127B), and determines the stage based on the value of “ST”, the current stage background type, and the lottery state (low or high accuracy). The presence / absence (winning / non-winning) of the background is determined, and the stage background type (daytime, evening or night) of the transfer destination is determined. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the stage background data corresponding to the lottery result (the stage background of the transfer destination) in S895 (S896).

  After the process of S896 or when S894 is NO, the sub CPU 102 refers to the set effect data table and “1” is defined in the effect parameter item “MOE” associated with the effect pattern number. It is determined whether or not (S897).

  In S897, when the sub CPU 102 determines that “1” is not defined in the effect parameter item “MOE” (when S897 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S902 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that “1” is defined in the effect parameter item “MOE” in S897 (when S897 is YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the cut-in lottery execution condition (lottery condition). ) Is determined (S898).

  In this embodiment, the execution conditions for the cut-in lottery are determined. Specifically, for example, “in normal state and when BB is not winning”, “in normal state and when BB is winning”, “in ART state and when game number sign scenario lottery is winning”, “in ART state In addition, “when the special sign scenario lottery is won”, “the game state on the main side is in the ART preparation state and when the BB is won”, and the like are the cut-in lottery execution conditions. In this embodiment, even if “1” is defined in the production parameter item “MOE”, the cut-in lottery is not performed unless the execution condition for the cut-in lottery is satisfied.

  In S898, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the execution condition for the cut-in lottery is not satisfied (in the case where S898 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S902 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S898 that the cut-in lottery execution condition is satisfied (when S898 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a cut-in lottery process (S899). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the cut-in lottery table (see FIGS. 131A and 131B), and cuts based on the game situation (execution condition of the corresponding cut-in lottery) and the sub lottery flag B (internal winning combination). The presence / absence of occurrence of in-effect (win / no-win) is determined, and the type of cut-in effects (cut-in A to H) is determined.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a cut-in lottery has been won (S900). In S900, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the cut-in lottery is not won (when S900 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S902 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S900 that the sub CPU 102 has won the cut-in lottery (when S900 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the cut-in effect data corresponding to the lottery result (the type of cut-in effect) in S899. Is set (S901). Such additional effect data is set in a layer different from other effect data such as stage effect effect data, for example.

  After the processing of S901 or when S897, S898, or S900 is NO, the sub CPU 102 refers to the effect data table that has been set, and sets “1” to the effect parameter item “LED” associated with the effect pattern number. It is determined whether or not a value equal to or greater than "is defined (S902).

  In step S902, when the sub CPU 102 determines that a value equal to or greater than “1” is not defined for the effect parameter item “LED” (when S902 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs processing in step S907 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S902 that the effect parameter item “LED” has a value of “1” or more (when S902 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the LED parameter lottery execution condition. It is determined whether (lottery condition) is satisfied (S903).

  In this embodiment, the LED parameter lottery execution condition is determined. Specifically, for example, “BB win game”, “card acquisition lottery win”, “battle win”, etc. are the LED parameter lottery execution conditions. In this embodiment, even if a value equal to or greater than “1” is defined in the production parameter item “LED”, the LED parameter lottery is not performed unless the LED parameter lottery execution condition is satisfied.

  In step S903, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the LED parameter lottery execution condition is not satisfied (in the case where S903 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs processing in step S907 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S903 that the LED parameter lottery execution condition is satisfied (S903 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs LED parameter lottery processing (S904). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the LED parameter lottery table (for example, see FIG. 133), and determines the LED based on the gaming situation (the execution condition of the corresponding LED parameter lottery) and the sub lottery flag A (internal winning combination). The presence / absence (winning / non-winning) of the lighting effect (extremely hot lighting effect) is determined, and the type of the LED lighting effect is determined.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the LED parameter lottery has been won (S905). In S905, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the LED parameter lottery has not been won (when S905 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S907 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S905 that the sub CPU 102 has won the LED parameter lottery (when S905 is YES), the sub CPU 102 obtains the LED effect data corresponding to the lottery result (the type of LED lighting effect) in S907. Set (S906).

  After the processing of S906, or when S902, S903, or S905 is NO, the sub CPU 102 refers to the set effect data table and sets “0” to the effect parameter item “UI” associated with the effect pattern number. It is determined whether or not a larger value is defined (S907).

  In S907, when the sub CPU 102 determines that a value greater than “0” is not defined in the effect parameter item “UI” (when S907 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S909 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S907 that the effect parameter item “UI” has a value greater than “0” (when S907 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect parameter item “UI”. UI display effect data corresponding to this value is set (S908). Note that such UI display effect data is set in a layer different from other effect data such as effect data for stage effects and the cut-in effect data described above.

  After the processing of S908 or when S907 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the setting change occurrence flag is on (S909). In S909, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the setting change occurrence flag is not in the on state (when S909 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the normal game start process and also receives a start command process (FIG. 259) also ends.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S909 that the setting change occurrence flag is on (in the case where S909 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a game process at the time of setting change (S910). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets effect data to be executed in the normal state of the first cycle after the setting change or after returning from the power interruption for 2 hours or more. Note that the details of the setting change game start process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S910, the sub CPU 102 ends the normal game start process and also ends the start command reception process (see FIG. 259).

[Processing at game start when setting is changed]
Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the game process at the start of setting change performed at S910 in the flowchart (see FIGS. 260 and 261) of the normal game start process will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is a game at the time of card rank up (S921). In S921, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current game is not a game at the time of card rank up (when S921 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S926 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S921 that the current game is a game when the card rank is up (when S921 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a card display lottery process (S922). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the card promotion display effect lottery table (see FIG. 136), and based on the sub lottery flag A (internal winning combination), the presence / absence of occurrence of the acquired card display effect (win / win) Non-winning). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the card display lottery is won (S923).

  In S923, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the card display lottery has been won (when S923 is YES), the sub CPU 102 maintains the effect data at the time of card rank set set in S888 (S924). That is, if the card rank is raised and the card display lottery is won even in the normal state of the first cycle after the setting change or the power recovery after 2 hours of power interruption, the card display effect after the rank up is performed. Is called. Then, after the processing of S924, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S926 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S923 that the sub CPU 102 has not won the card display lottery (NO in S923), the sub CPU 102 sets the effect data before the card rank increase (S925). In other words, in the normal state of the first cycle after the setting change or power recovery after 2 hours of power interruption, even if the card rank is up, if the card display lottery is not won, the card display effect after the rank up is performed. I will not. Therefore, in the normal state of the first cycle after power change after setting change or power interruption 2 hours or more, “0” is selected as the initial rank of the card, and the card is displayed even if the card rank is raised after that. If the lottery is not won, the liquid crystal display device 11 continues the card display effect of the card rank “0”.

  After the processing of S924 or S925, or when S921 is NO, the sub CPU 102 sets effect data for displaying the number of remaining periodic games “?” (S926). Then, after the processing of S926, the sub CPU 102 ends the game start processing at the time of setting change and also ends the normal game start processing (see FIGS. 260 and 261).

[Processing at game start during ART]
Next, with reference to FIG. 263 and FIG. 264, a description will be given of the ART start game processing performed in S873 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 259).

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not an ART announcement effect has been performed in the previous game (S931). In this process, for example, when the previous game satisfies the following conditions (1) to (5), the sub CPU 102 determines that an extra announcement effect has been performed in the previous game.
(1) Game in which “Notification (G)” production was selected in the precursor scenario (2) “Development 1G” game that is the next game of the game in which “Notification (Departure 1_G)” presentation was selected in the precursor scenario (3) The game of “Development 2G” of the game after the game where the “notification (start 2_G)” production was selected in the precursor scenario (4) The game number release flag was set to the on state during the special production Game (5) Game with game number release flag set to ON during BB Note that the game number release flag is a determination flag indicating whether or not to execute an additional notification effect in the game or a later game. , Provided in the sub-RAM 103.

  In S931, when the sub CPU 102 determines that no extra announcement effect has been performed in the previous game (when S931 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S935 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S931 that an extra announcement effect has been performed in the previous game (YES in S931), the sub CPU 102 adds the number of notification games to the value of the display ART counter (S932). ). The display ART counter is a counter for counting the number of remaining ART games displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 and is provided in the sub RAM 103. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the game number release flag to an off state (S933). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “0” (0 clear) to the value of the notification game number counter (S934).

  After the processing of S934 or when S931 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is a specialized effect state (S935). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is a game in the special effect based on the on / off state of the special effect sub flag. The special effect sub flag is one of the sub management flags, and is set to the on state when the sub game state is the special effect state. Although not shown, in this embodiment, a separate special effect sub-flag (special effect A sub-flag to special effect H sub-flag) is provided for each type of special zone.

  In S935, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is the special effect state (in the case where S935 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the special effect effect game start process (S936). In this process, the sub CPU 102 mainly registers effect data corresponding to the effect pattern executed at the start of the game during the special effect. Note that the details of the processing at the time of starting the game during special effects will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S936, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S943 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S935 that the sub game state is not the specialized effect state (when S935 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub game state is the BB state ( S937).

  In S937, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is the BB state (when S937 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a game start process during the BB (S938). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets an effect pattern number of an effect to be executed at the start of the game during the BB executed in the middle of the ART period game period. Details of the BB in-game start process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S938, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S943 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is not the BB state in S937 (when S937 is NO), the sub CPU 102 decrements the value of the display ART counter by 1 (S939). In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the value of the display ART counter does not necessarily match the value of the ART game number counter included in the start command, that is, the number of remaining ART games actually remaining. The value of the display ART counter is equal to or smaller than the value of the ART game number counter. Note that the value of the ART game number counter managed on the main side is set in the internal ART counter on the sub side.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is a BB winning game (S940).

  In S940, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current game is a BB winning game (when S940 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a BB winning game start process (S941). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the effect pattern number of the effect to be executed at the start of the game in which the BB is won in the ART state. Details of the BB winning game start process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 268 and 269 described later. Then, after the processing of S941, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S943 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S940 that the current game is not a BB winning game (when S940 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs an ART normal game start process (S942). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets an effect pattern number of an effect to be executed at the start of the ART normal state game. Details of the ART normal game start process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 270 to 272 described later.

  After the process of S936, S938, S941 or S942, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the effect table can be directly designated by the effect pattern number set by the process of S936, S938, S941 or S942 (S943). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to the effect data table set by the processing of S936, S938, S941 or S942, and produces effects in the effect parameter items “GrID” and “GrNo” associated with the effect pattern numbers. Whether or not is specified is determined. When the effect is specified in the effect parameter items “GrID” and “GrNo”, the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect table can be specified directly.

  In S943, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect table can be directly designated (when S943 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S945 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S943 that the effect table cannot be directly specified (when S943 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the effect pattern number defined in the set effect data table. Based on the values of the associated effect parameter items “inc” and “table”, another effect data table corresponding to the values is registered (set) (S944).

  After the processing of S944, or when S943 is YES, the sub CPU 102 refers to the set effect data table, and whether the effect parameter item “ST” associated with the effect pattern number is “3”. It is determined whether or not (S945).

  In S945, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect parameter item “ST” is not “3” (when S945 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S948 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect parameter item “ST” is “3” in S945 (YES in S945), the sub CPU 102 performs ART stage transition lottery processing (S946). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART stage stage lottery table (see FIGS. 128 to 130), and determines the game status (display ART counter value, on / off state of the character flag), lottery state (low or (High accuracy) and the number of difference games (internal ART counter value-display ART counter value), whether or not to shift the ART stage (win / no win) is determined, and the destination ART stage type (ART stage) A to C) are determined. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets stage display data corresponding to the lottery result (transfer destination ART stage) in S946 (S947).

  After the process of S947 or when S945 is NO, the sub CPU 102 refers to the set effect data table, and “1” is defined in the effect parameter item “MOE” associated with the effect pattern number. It is determined whether or not (S948).

  In S948, when the sub CPU 102 determines that “1” is not defined in the effect parameter item “MOE” (when S948 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S953 described later. On the other hand, in S948, when the sub CPU 102 determines that “1” is defined in the effect parameter item “MOE” (when S948 is YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the cut-in lottery execution condition (lottery condition). ) Is established (S949).

  In S949, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the cut-in lottery execution condition is not satisfied (in the case where S949 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S953 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S949 that the cut-in lottery execution condition is satisfied (when S949 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a cut-in lottery process (S950). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the cut-in lottery table (see FIGS. 132A and 132B), and cuts based on the game situation (execution condition of the corresponding cut-in lottery) and the sub lottery flag B (internal winning combination). The presence / absence of occurrence of in-effect (win / no-win) is determined, and the type of cut-in effects (cut-in A to H) is determined.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a cut-in lottery has been won (S951). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S951 that the cut-in lottery has not been won (when S951 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S953 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S951 that the sub CPU 102 has won the cut-in lottery (when S951 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the cut-in effect data corresponding to the lottery result (the type of cut-in effect) in S950. Is set (S952).

  After the process of S952, or when S948, S949, or S951 is NO, the sub CPU 102 refers to the set effect data table and sets “1” to the effect parameter item “LED” associated with the effect pattern number. It is determined whether or not a value equal to or greater than "is defined (S953).

  In step S953, when the sub CPU 102 determines that a value equal to or greater than “1” is not defined for the effect parameter item “LED” (in the case where S953 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs processing in step S958 described below. On the other hand, in S953, when the sub CPU 102 determines that a value equal to or greater than “1” is defined in the effect parameter item “LED” (when S953 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the LED parameter lottery execution condition. It is determined whether (lottery condition) is satisfied (S954).

  In step S954, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the LED parameter lottery execution condition is not satisfied (in the case where S954 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs processing in step S958 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S954 that the LED parameter lottery execution condition is satisfied (when S954 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs LED parameter lottery processing (S955). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the LED parameter lottery table (see FIG. 133), and turns on the LED lighting based on the game situation (the relevant LED parameter lottery execution condition) and the sub lottery flag A (internal winning combination). The presence / absence (winning / non-winning) of the (super hot lighting effect) is determined, and the type of the LED lighting effect is determined.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the LED parameter lottery has been won (S956). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S956 that the LED parameter lottery has not been won (when S956 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S958 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S956 that the sub CPU 102 has won the LED parameter lottery (when S956 is YES), the sub CPU 102 obtains the LED effect data corresponding to the lottery result (the type of LED lighting effect) in S955. Set (S957).

  After the process of S957, or when S953, S954, or S956 is NO, the sub CPU 102 refers to the set effect data table and sets “0” to the effect parameter item “UI” associated with the effect pattern number. It is determined whether or not a larger value is specified (S958).

  In S958, when the sub CPU 102 determines that a value greater than “0” is not defined in the effect parameter item “UI” (when S958 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the start of the game during ART. At the same time, the start command reception process (see FIG. 259) is also terminated. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S958 that the effect parameter item “UI” has a value greater than “0” (when S958 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect parameter item “UI”. UI display effect data corresponding to this value is set (S959). Then, after the process of S959, the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the start of the game during ART and also ends the process at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 259).

[Processing at start of game during special production]
Next, with reference to FIG. 265, the processing for starting the game during special effects performed in S936 in the flowchart of the processing for starting the game during ART (see FIGS. 263 and 264) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the specialization counter is “1” or more (S961). The special counter is a counter for counting the number of remaining games of special effects, and is provided in the sub RAM 103.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S961 that the value of the specialization counter is not “1” or more (when S961 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S963 described later. On the other hand, in S961, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the special counter is “1” or more (when S961 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts “1” from the value of the special counter ( S962).

  After the process of S962, or when S961 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a special effect in a special zone other than the special zone G is being performed (S963). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the type of the special effect sub-flag in the on state (special effect A sub-flag to special effect H sub-flag), and is the special zone other than the special zone G being produced? Determine whether or not.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S963 that the special effects other than the special zone G are not in the special effect (when S963 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S969 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S963 that the sub CPU 102 is in the special effect of the special zone other than the special zone G (when S963 is YES), the sub CPU 102 draws the number of notification games in the special effect. Processing is performed (S964). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 refers to the special zone medium-number notification game lottery table (see, for example, FIGS. 187 to 192), special zone type (other than the special zone G), and game status (presence / absence of BB winning). , The number of difference games) and the sub lottery flag A (internal winning combination), the presence / absence (winning / non-winning) of the additional announcement effect of ART is determined, and the type of the number of notification games (10G, 20G, 30G) , 50G, 100G or 300G).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the lottery for the number of notification games during special effects is won (S965). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S965 that the special-effects-in-progress game number lottery has not been won (when S965 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S968 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S965 that the sub CPU 102 has won the special effect in-game notification lottery (when S965 is YES), the sub CPU 102 displays the lottery result (the number of additional notification games) in the notification game counter. (S966). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the game number release flag to the on state (S967).

  After the process of S967, or when S965 is NO, the sub CPU 102 sets a specialized effect data table corresponding to the effect status such as the type of the specialized effect and the presence / absence of the extra announcement effect (S968). For example, when the number of additional notification games is set in the notification game number counter and the game number release flag is set to the on state, an effect data table for executing the additional notification effect is selected and set in this process. In other cases, an effect data table for non-execution notification effect execution is selected and set. Then, after the processing of S968, the sub CPU 102 ends the game start processing during special effects, and moves the processing to S943 of the game start processing during ART (see FIGS. 263 and 264).

  Here, returning to the process of S963 again, if S963 is NO (in the case of the special effect in the special zone G), the sub CPU 102 performs the special zone G effect set process (S969). Details of the special zone G effect set process will be described later with reference to FIG. 266 described later. Then, after the process of S969, the sub CPU 102 ends the process during the special effect game start, and moves the process to S943 of the game start process during the ART (see FIGS. 263 and 264).

[Specialized zone G production set processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 266, the special zone G effect setting process performed in S969 in the flowchart (see FIG. 265) of the special effect effect game start time process will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is the fourth game in the specialization effect in the specialization zone G (S971). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the value of the special zone G counter to determine whether or not the current game is the fourth game in the special effect of the special zone G.

  The special zone G counter is a counter that counts the digest game in the special effect of the special zone G. Although not shown, the sub CPU 102 adds “1” to the value of the special zone G counter every time the game is digested in the special effect of the special zone G, and the special zone G finishes the special effect. When executed, the value of the special zone G counter is set to “0” (cleared to 0).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S971 that the current game is the fourth game in the specialization effect of the special zone G (when S971 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the special CPU G 4 An effect data (end effect data) table for game eyes is set (S972). Then, after the process of S972, the sub CPU 102 ends the special zone G effect setting process and also ends the special effect game start process (see FIG. 265).

  On the other hand, in S971, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current game is not the fourth game in the special effect in the special zone G (when S971 is NO), the sub CPU 102 specializes the current game. It is determined whether or not the game is the third game in the zone G special effect (S973). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S973 that the current game is not the third game in the specialization effect of the special zone G (when S973 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S980 described later. .

  On the other hand, in S973, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current game is the third game in the specialization effect of the special zone G (when S973 is YES), the sub CPU 102 notifies the addition of three digits. An effect lottery process is performed (S974). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the game number lottery table (see FIGS. 193A to 193C) for the third game in the specialized zone G, and determines the game situation (whether BB is won, on / off state of the character flag) and the difference. Based on the number of games, the presence or absence (winning / non-winning) of a three-digit extra announcement effect in the third game in the specialized zone G is determined, and the type (100G, 200G or 300G) of the number of notification games (three digits) ).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a three-digit extra announcement effect lottery has been won (S975).

  In S975, when it is determined that the sub CPU 102 has won the 3-digit extra announcement effect lottery (when S975 is YES), the sub CPU 102 indicates the lottery result (the number of notification games of 100, 200, or 300). The counter is set (S976). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the game number release flag to the on state (S977). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets an effect data table for an announcement effect for adding 3 digits (S978). Then, after the processing of S978, the sub CPU 102 ends the special zone G effect setting process and also ends the special effect game start process (see FIG. 265).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S975 that the sub CPU 102 has not won the 3-digit extra announcement effect lottery (when S975 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the effect for the third game non-winning in the special zone G. A data (end effect data) table is set (S979). Then, after the processing of S979, the sub CPU 102 ends the special zone G effect setting process and also ends the special effect game start process (see FIG. 265).

  Here, returning to the processing of S973 again, if S973 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is the second game in the specialization effect of the specialization zone G (S980). ).

  In S980, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current game is the second game in the specialization effect of the special zone G (when S980 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the special CPU G 2 An effect data table for game eyes is set (S981). Then, after the process of S981, the sub CPU 102 ends the special zone G effect setting process and also ends the special effect game start process (see FIG. 265).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S980 that the current game is not the second game in the specialization effect of the special zone G (when S980 is NO), the sub CPU 102 uses the first game for the special zone G. The effect data table is set (S982). After the process of S982, the sub CPU 102 ends the special zone G effect setting process and also ends the special effect game start process (see FIG. 265).

[Processing at the start of game in BB]
Next, with reference to FIG. 267, a description will be given of the BB in-game start process performed in S938 in the flowchart of the ART in-game start process (see FIGS. 263 and 264).

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is a navigation instruction (S991). In this process, it is determined whether or not any information of the instruction monitor numbers “1” to “9” is included in the start command. If the start command includes any information of the instruction monitor numbers “1” to “9”, the sub CPU 102 determines that there is a navigation instruction.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines that there is a navigation instruction in S991 (when S991 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets navigation data corresponding to the acquired instruction monitor number (S992). For example, when the instruction monitor number acquired on the sub side is any one of “1” to “6”, the sub CPU 102 determines the hit order navigation data corresponding to the instruction monitor number (stop button pressing order notification effect data). ) Is set and if any of “7” to “9”, the BB notification navigation data (“Red 7” symbol, “Blue 7” symbol or “BAR” symbol corresponding to the indicated monitor number is valid) (Notification effect data for aligning on the line) is set. Then, after the processing of S992, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S996 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that there is no navigation instruction in S991 (when S991 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a navigation lottery process (S993). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the navigation lottery table (see FIGS. 201 and 202), and determines whether or not “!” Navigation has occurred (win / win) based on the game situation and the sub lottery flag A (internal winning combination). Non-winning). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the navigation lottery has been won (S994).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S994 that the navigation lottery has not been won (when S994 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S996 described below. On the other hand, when it is determined in S994 that the sub CPU 102 has won the navigation lottery (when S994 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets “!” Navigation data (S995).

  After the processing of S992 or S995, or when S994 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is a game in the story BB (S996). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the on / off state of the story BB provided as one of the sub management flags, and determines whether or not the current game is a game in the story BB.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S996 that the current game is a game in the story BB (when S996 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub lottery flag is a flag other than “common bell”. Is discriminated (S997).

  In S997, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub lottery flag is not a flag other than “common bell” (S997 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S1005 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub lottery flag is a flag other than “common bell” in S997 (when S997 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets a warning sound effect (S998). Then, after the processing of S998, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S1005 described later.

  On the other hand, in S996, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current game is not a game in the story BB (when S996 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub lottery flag is other than “chance lip” and “common bell”. It is determined whether or not it is a flag (S999). In S999, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub lottery flag is not a flag other than “chance lip” and “common bell” (when S999 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S1005 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S999 that the sub lottery flag is a flag other than “chance lip” and “common bell” (when S999 is YES), the sub CPU 102 It is determined whether or not the number of ART games that have been played is added to the lottery (S1000). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the lottery is won by adding the number of ART games during the special BB performed on the main side.

  In S1000, when it is determined that the sub CPU 102 wins the ART game number extra lottery (when S1000 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the winning ART extra game number in the notification game number counter. (S1001). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets a game release flag to an on state (S1002). Next, the sub CPU 102 selects and sets ART addition notification effect data based on the number of added ART games (value set in the notification game counter) (S1003). Then, after the processing of S1003, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the start of the game during BB, and moves the processing to S943 of the processing at the start of the game during ART (see FIGS. 263 and 264).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S1000 that the sub CPU 102 has not won the ART game number extra lottery (when S1000 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the BB effect data for the non-addition of the ART game number. Is selected and set (S1004). Then, after the processing of S1004, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the start of the game during BB, and moves the processing to S943 of the processing at the start of the game during ART (see FIGS. 263 and 264).

  Here, returning to the processes of S997, S998, and S999 again, after the process of S998, or when S997 or S999 is NO, the sub CPU 102 provides the effect data at the start of the game during the BB according to the game situation. Is selected and set (S1005). After the process of S1005, the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the start of the game during BB, and moves the process to S943 of the process at the start of the game during ART (see FIGS. 263 and 264).

[Processing at the start of the game when BB wins]
Next, with reference to FIG. 268 and FIG. 269, the BB winning game start process performed in S941 in the flowchart of the ART start game process (see FIG. 263 and FIG. 264) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the SBB (BB3) has been won (S1011).

  In S1011, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not SBB (BB3) winning (when S1011 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S1015 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1011 that the SBB (BB3) has been won (when S1011 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to execute lever freeze (S1012).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines to execute lever freeze in S1012, (S1012 is YES determination), the sub CPU 102 sets lever freeze effect data (S1013). Next, the sub CPU 102 clears various counters and flags (notification game number counter, precursor counter, specialized counter, game release flag, etc.) (S1014). Then, after the process of S1014, the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the start of the game during BB, and moves the process to S943 of the process at the start of the game during ART (see FIGS. 263 and 264).

  On the other hand, in S1012, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the lever freeze is not executed (when S1012 is NO), or when S1011 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether there is a navigation instruction. (S1015).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines that there is a navigation instruction in S1015 (when S1015 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets navigation data corresponding to the acquired instruction monitor number (S1016). Then, after the processing of S1016, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S1020 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that there is no navigation instruction in S1015 (when S1015 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a navigation lottery process (S1017). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the navigation lottery table (see FIGS. 201 and 202), and determines whether or not “!” Navigation has occurred (win / win) based on the game situation and the sub lottery flag A (internal winning combination). Non-winning). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the navigation lottery has been won (S1018).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1018 that the navigation lottery has not been won (when S1018 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S1020 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1018 that the sub CPU 102 has won the navigation lottery (when S1018 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets “!” Navigation data (S1019).

  After the processing of S1016 or S1019, or when S1018 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is a specialized effect state (S1020). In S1020, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not the special effect state (when S1020 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S1024 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1020 that the sub game state is the special effect state (when S1020 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the special effect during game start process described with reference to FIG. Is performed (S1021).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a special zone BB winning process (S1022). In this process, the sub CPU 102 performs an effect rewriting process or an effect selection process based on a specific table based on the type and status of the specialized zone. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the effect data selected in the process of S1022 (S1023). Then, after the processing of S1023, the game processing at the start of the BB game is ended, and the processing is shifted to S943 of the game start processing at the time of ART (see FIGS. 263 and 264).

  Here, returning to the processing of S1020 again, if S1020 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is an NBB (BB1 or BB2) winning game (S1024). In S1024, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current game is not an NBB (BB1 or BB2) win game (when S1024 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S1031 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1024 that the current game is an NBB (BB1 or BB2) winning game (when S1024 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a story BB generation lottery process (S1025). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to a story BB generation lottery table (not shown), and determines whether or not a story BB has occurred (win / win) based on the number of differential games (internal ART counter value−display ART counter value). Non-winning) and the type of story BB (story AC) are determined. When the story BB generation lottery is won, the story BB flag is set to the on state.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the story BB generation lottery has been won (S1026). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the on / off state of the story BB flag to determine whether or not the story BB generation lottery has been won.

  In S1026, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the lottery for the story BB occurrence has been won (when S1026 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S1031 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1026 that the sub CPU 102 has not won the story BB occurrence lottery (when S1026 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs NBB winning announcement game number lottery processing (S1027). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the NBB winning game number lottery table during ART (see FIGS. 174 to 182), and determines the game status (display ART counter value, on / off state of the character flag, difference game number). ) And sub lottery flag A (internal winning combination), the presence / absence (winning / non-winning) of the ART addition notification effect is determined, and the number of notification games (10G, 20G, 30G, 50G, 100G) Or 300G). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the NBB winning announcement game number lottery has been won (S1028).

  In S1028, when it is determined that the sub CPU 102 has not won the NBB winning game number lottery (when S1028 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1031 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S1028 that the sub CPU 102 has won the NBB winning notification game number lottery (when S1028 is YES), the sub CPU 102 stores the lottery result (the number of added notification games) in the notification game number counter. Set (S1029). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the game number release flag to the on state (S1030).

  After S1030, if S1024 or S1028 is NO, or if S1026 is YES, the sub CPU 102 selects and sets an effect data table at the start of the BB winning game according to the game situation (S1031). . Then, after the process of S1031, the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the start of the BB game, and moves the process to S942 of the process at the start of the game during ART (see FIGS. 263 and 264).

[ART normal game start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 270 to FIG. 272, the ART normal game start process performed in S942 in the flowchart of the ART start game process (see FIGS. 263 and 264) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value of the display ART counter (S1041). Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the display ART counter from the value of the internal ART counter to calculate the difference game number (S1042). Although not shown, the value of the ART game number counter included in the start command for each game (the number of remaining remaining ART games) is set as the value of the internal ART counter. Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the display ART counter is “8” or less (S1043).

  In S1043, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the display ART counter is “8” or less (when S1043 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1047 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1043 that the value of the display ART counter is not equal to or less than “8” (when S1043 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a special effect type lottery process (S1044). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART specialization type lottery table (see FIGS. 139 to 156) and determines the game situation (special counter value, main special game number counter value, and ART stage type). ), On the basis of the number of difference games and the sub lottery flag (internal winning combination), the presence / absence of special effects (win / non-win) is determined and the types of special effects (special zones A to H) are determined. decide.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a special effect type lottery has been won (S1045). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1045 that the special effect type lottery has not been won (when S1045 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S1047 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S1045 that the sub CPU 102 has won the special effect type lottery (when S1045 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a special effect win process (S1046). In this process, the sub CPU 102 mainly performs a special sign effect scenario lottery according to the special effect type (one of the special zones A to H) won. That is, the sub CPU 102 determines the content of the sign effect that is performed before entering the special effect. The details of the special effect winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After S1046, when S1043 is YES or S1045 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the precursor counter is greater than “0” (S1047). The sign counter is a counter for counting the number of remaining stay games of the sign effect, and is provided in the sub RAM 103. In addition, the current game is a game in which a pre-stage presentation effect (art number sign scenario) of ART is added, a pre-stage production at the end of ART (ART end-prediction scenario), or a special production pre-stage presentation (specialization precursor scenario) ), Or when the number of scenario games is set in the precursor counter in the special effect winning process of S1046, the value of the precursor counter is greater than “0” at the time of processing of S1047. , S1047 is YES.

  In S1047, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the precursor counter is greater than “0” (when S1047 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S1061 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1047 that the value of the precursor counter is not greater than “0” (when S1047 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the value of the display ART counter is “5” or less. It is determined whether or not (S1048).

  In S1048, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the display ART counter is “5” or less (when S1048 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1055 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1048 that the value of the display ART counter is not equal to or smaller than “5” (when S1048 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a lottery process for the notification game during ART (S1049). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART in-game game lottery table (see FIGS. 160 to 168), and determines the game situation (display ART counter value, on / off state of the character flag, ART stage type, difference) Based on the number of games) and the sub lottery flag B (internal winning combination), the presence / absence (winning / non-winning) of the ART extra announcement effect is determined, and the type of the number of notification games (10G, 20G, 30G, 50G) , 100G, 300G or special). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a lottery game number lottery in ART is won (S1050).

  In S1050, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it has not won the ART game notification number lottery (when S1050 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1061 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S1050 that the sub CPU 102 has won the lottery game for ART notification (when S1050 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result (the number of additional notification games) in the notification game number counter. (S1051). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the game number release flag to the on state (S1052).

  After the process of S1052, the sub CPU 102 performs a game number precursor scenario lottery process (S1053). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to a game number precursor scenario lottery table (see, for example, FIG. 194), and determines the game status (display ART counter value, ART stage type, notification game number counter value) and sub lottery flag. Based on B (internal winning combination), the type of game number precursor scenario map (scenario map numbers “0” to “28”) is determined. By this processing, the contents of the sign effect (artificial game number sign scenario) of the ART announcement notification effect performed in the ART normal state game is determined. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the number of scenario games of the game number precursor scenario won in the precursor counter (S1054). Then, after the processing of S1054, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S1061 described later.

  Here, returning to the process of S1048 again, if S1048 is YES, the sub CPU 102 performs a game number lottery process just before the end during ART (S1055). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the end-of-art notification game number lottery table (see FIGS. 169 to 173), and determines the game situation (display ART counter value, on / off status of the character flag, difference game number) and On the basis of the sub lottery flag B (internal winning combination), the presence / absence (winning / non-winning) of the ART announcement effect is determined, and the number of notification games (10G, 20G, 30G, 50G, 100G, 300G) (Or special). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a lottery notification game number lottery has been won during ART (S1056).

  In S1056, when it is determined that the sub CPU 102 has not won the end-of-term notification game lottery during ART (when S1056 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1061 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S1056 that the sub CPU 102 has won the end-of-term notification game number lottery during ART (when S1056 is YES), the sub CPU 102 displays the lottery result (the number of additional notification games) as a notification game number counter. (S1057). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the game number release flag to the on state (S1058).

  After the process of S1058, the sub CPU 102 performs an ART end precursor scenario lottery process (S1059). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART end precursor scenario lottery table (see FIG. 196), and determines the type of ART end precursor scenario map based on the game situation (value of the notification game counter) and the value of the display ART counter. (Scenario map numbers “0” to “5”) are determined. By this processing, the contents of the sign effect (art sign for the end of the ART end) of the ART additional notice effect that is performed just before the end of the game period in the ART normal state is determined. In the present embodiment, an ART end precursor scenario (number of scenario games = 1) of the scenario map number “1” is always selected by the ART end precursor scenario lottery process (see FIG. 196).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the number of scenario games of the ART termination precursor scenario winning the precursor counter (S1060). Then, after the process of S1060, the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S1061 described later.

  After S1054 or S1060, if S1047 is YES, or if S1050 or S1056 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether there is a navigation instruction (S1061).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines that there is a navigation instruction in S1061 (when S1061 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets navigation data corresponding to the acquired instruction monitor number (S1062). Then, after the processing of S1062, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S1066 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that there is no navigation instruction in S1061 (when S1061 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a navigation lottery process (S1063). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the navigation lottery table (see FIGS. 201 and 202), and determines whether or not “!” Navigation has occurred (win / win) based on the game situation and the sub lottery flag A (internal winning combination). Non-winning). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the navigation lottery has been won (S1064).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1064 that the navigation lottery has not been won (when S1064 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S1066 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1064 that the sub CPU 102 has won the navigation lottery (when S1064 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets “!” Navigation data (S1065).

  After the processing of S1062 or S1065, or when S1064 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the precursor counter is greater than “0” (S1066).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1066 that the value of the precursor counter is greater than “0” (when S1066 is YES), the sub CPU 102 selects the precursor effect data for the extra announcement effect according to the value of the precursor counter. Processing is performed (S1067). Then, after the process of S1067, the sub CPU 102 ends the ART normal game start process, and moves the process to S943 of the ART game start process (see FIGS. 263 and 264).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1066 that the value of the precursor counter is not greater than “0” (when S1066 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the value of the display ART counter is “5” or less. It is determined whether or not (S1068).

  In S1068, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the display ART counter is “5” or less (when S1068 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1072 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1068 that the value of the display ART counter is not less than “5” (when S1068 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a special card acquisition lottery process (S1069). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the special card acquisition lottery table during ART (see FIGS. 137 and 138), and sets the game status (the number of special cards and the number of difference games) and the sub lottery flag A (internal winning combination). Based on this, it is determined whether or not a special card is acquired (winning (acquisition of one card) / non-winning). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a special card acquisition lottery has been won (S1070).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines that the special card acquisition lottery has been won in S1070 (when S1070 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs special card acquisition effect data selection processing (S1071). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the special card acquisition announcement effect lottery table (see FIG. 125), and based on the sub lottery flag A (internal winning combination), the effect of the effect executed at the start of the game when the special card is acquired. A pattern number is determined, and an effect data table corresponding to the effect pattern number is designated. Then, after the processing of S1071, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S1079 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S1070 that the sub CPU 102 has not won the special card acquisition lottery (in the case where S1070 is NO), or in the case where S1068 is YES, the sub CPU 102 performs the effect data selection process during the normal ART. (S1072). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the during-art lottery table (for example, see FIG. 115), and based on the game situation (art stage type, lottery state, RT state) and sub lottery flag A (internal winning combination). The effect pattern number of the effect to be executed at the start of the game in the ART normal state (BB inactive, BB non-winning, non-BB inside, non-specific effect) is determined, and the effect data table corresponding to the effect pattern number Is specified.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the display ART counter is “19” or less (S1073).

  In S1073, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the display ART counter is “19” or less (when S1073 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S1079 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1073 that the value of the display ART counter is not equal to or less than “19” (when S1073 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines “no effect (effect pattern number = 0) in the process of S1072. It is determined whether a result other than “)” has been selected (S1074).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1074 that a result other than “no effect” has been selected (when S1074 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S1079 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1074 that a result other than “no effect” has not been selected (NO in S1074), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the stage C is in progress (S1075). ).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1075 that the stage C is in progress (when S1075 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S1079 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1075 that the sub CPU 102 is not in stage C (NO in S1075), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the character flag is on (S1076). The character song flag is a flag indicating whether or not the character song output effect is executed, and is provided in the sub RAM 103.

  In S1076, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the character song flag is in the on state (when S 1076 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S1079 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in step S1076 that the character song flag is not in the on state (NO in step S1076), the sub CPU 102 performs character song flag lottery processing (S1077). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the character song flag lottery table (see FIG. 134) and determines whether the character song flag is on (winning) / off (non-winning) based on the number of difference games.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the character song flag lottery (S1078). If the character song flag lottery is won, in step S1078, the sub CPU 102 sets the character song flag to the on state, thereby starting the character song output effect.

  After the processing of S1071 or S1078, or when S1073, S1074, S1075, or S1076 is YES, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the display ART counter is “5” or less (S1079).

  In S1079, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the display ART counter is “5” or less (in the case of YES determination in S1079), the sub CPU 102 ends the ART normal game start process, and the process is ART. The process proceeds to S943 in the middle game start process (see FIGS. 263 and 264).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1079 that the value of the display ART counter is not equal to or smaller than “5” (when S1079 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs ART stage stage lottery processing (S1080). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART stage stage lottery table (see FIGS. 128 to 130), and determines the game status (display ART counter value, on / off state of the character flag), lottery state (low or (High accuracy) and the number of difference games (internal ART counter value-display ART counter value), whether or not to shift the ART stage (win / no win) is determined, and the destination ART stage type (ART stage) A to C) are determined.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the stage transition lottery process during ART (S1081). In this process, if the sub CP 102 wins the stage transition lottery during ART in S1080, the display effect data of the stage after the transition is set, and the stage transition lottery during ART in S1080 is non-winning. If it is, the process of maintaining the current stage display effect is performed. Then, after the process of S1081, the sub CPU 102 ends the ART normal game start process, and moves the process to S943 of the ART game start process (see FIGS. 263 and 264).

[Specialized effect type winning process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 273, the special effect type winning process performed in S1046 in the flowchart (see FIGS. 270 to 272) of the ART normal game start process will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the winning special effect type is any of the special zones A to D (S1091).

  In S1091, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the winning special effect type is not one of the special zones A to D (when S1091 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1100 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1091 that the special effect type that has won is one of the special zones A to D (when S1091 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the special effect type that has won. Is one of the specialization zones B to D (S1092).

  In S1092, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the winning special effect type is not one of the special zones B to D (when S1092 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S1094 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1092 that the special effect type won is one of the special zones B to D (when S1092 is YES), the sub CPU 102 wins the special effect won on the main side. It is determined whether or not the number of activated games is “5” (S1093).

  In S1093, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of specialized games won on the main side is “5” (when S1093 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S1100 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1093 that the number of specialized games won on the main side is not “5” (when S1093 is NO), or when S1092 is NO, the sub CPU 102 It is determined whether or not the specialized production type is the specialized zone A (S1094).

  In S1094, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the winning special effect type is not the special zone A (when S1094 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S1096 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1094 that the special effect type won is the special zone A (when S1094 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of special games won on the main side is “ It is determined whether or not it is “10” (S1095).

  In S1095, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of specialized games won on the main side is “10” (when S1095 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S1100 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1095 that the number of specialized games won on the main side is not “10” (when S1095 is NO), or when S1094 is NO, the sub CPU 102 The medium notification game number lottery process is performed (S1096). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART in-game game lottery table (see FIGS. 160 to 168), and determines the game situation (display ART counter value, on / off state of the character flag, ART stage type, difference) Based on the number of games) and the sub lottery flag B (internal winning combination), the presence / absence (winning / non-winning) of the ART extra announcement effect is determined, and the type of the number of notification games (10G, 20G, 30G, 50G) , 100G, 300G or special).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a winning game number lottery process during ART has been won (S1097). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1097 that the lottery process for the number of notification games during ART has not been won (when S1097 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S1100 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S1097 that the sub CPU 102 has won the ART game notification lottery process (when S1097 is YES), the sub CPU 102 displays the lottery result (the number of additional notification games) in the notification game counter. Set (S1098). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the game number release flag to the on state (S1099).

  After S1099, if S1091 or S1097 is NO, or if S1093 or S1095 is YES, the sub CPU 102 performs a specialized sign effect scenario lottery process (S1100). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the special sign scenario lottery table (see, for example, FIGS. 198 and 199), and determines the game situation (specialized zone type, value of the notification game number counter, game number release flag on / off). On the basis of the value of the special game number counter on the main side and the main side, the type of scenario sign scenario map (scenario map numbers “0” to “107”) is determined.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the number of scenario games of the specialized precursor scenario won in the precursor counter (S1101). Then, after the processing of S1101, the sub CPU 102 ends the special effect type winning process, and moves the process to S1047 of the ART normal game start process (see FIGS. 270 to 272).

[Process when receiving display command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 274, the display command reception process performed in S830 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 255 and 256) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is a normal state (S1111).

  In S1111, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is the normal state (when S 1111 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a normal game end process (S1112). In this process, the sub CPU 102 mainly performs a sub management flag update process in accordance with the game situation. Details of the normal middle game end process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S1112, the sub CPU 102 ends the display command reception processing and ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 255 and 256).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1111 that the sub gaming state is not the normal state (when S1111 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is the CZ introduction state ( S1113).

  In S1113, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is the CZ introduction state (when S1113 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the CZ introduction sub flag to the off state and turns on the sub flag during CZ. The state is set (S1114). With this process, the sub gaming state shifts from the CZ introduction state to the CZ in-progress state. Then, after the process of S1114, the sub CPU 102 ends the display command reception process and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 255 and 256).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1113 that the sub gaming state is not the CZ introduction state (when S1113 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is in the CZ state. (S1115).

  In S1115, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is the CZ state (when S1115 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a process at the end of the CZ game (S1116). In this process, the sub CPU 102 mainly performs a sub management flag update process in accordance with the game situation. The details of the process at the end of the CZ game will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the process of S1116, the sub CPU 102 ends the display command reception process and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 255 and 256).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1115 that the sub gaming state is not the CZ state (when S1115 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is the ART preparation state. (S1117).

  In S1117, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is the ART ready state (when S1117 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the ART preparing game end process (S1118). In this process, the sub CPU 102 performs effect data setting processing at the end of the game in the ART preparation state, and also performs sub management flag update processing according to the game situation. Details of the processing at the end of the game during ART preparation will be described later with reference to FIG. 277 described later. Then, after the process of S1118, the sub CPU 102 ends the display command reception process and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 255 and 256).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1117 that the sub gaming state is not the ART ready state (when S1117 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is the ART state ( S1119).

  In S1119, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is not the ART state (when S1119 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the display command reception process and the effect content determination process (FIG. 255 and FIG. 255). 256) also ends.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is the ART state in S1119 (when S1119 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an ART payout number counter update process (S1120). The ART payout number counter is a counter for counting the total number of medals paid out during the currently active ART game period (total number of obtained coins), and is provided in the sub RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs processing at the end of the game during ART (S1121). In this process, the sub CPU 102 performs a presentation data setting process at the end of the ART game, and also performs a sub management flag update process in accordance with the game situation. Details of the processing at the end of the game during ART will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S1121, the sub CPU 102 ends the display command reception processing and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 255 and 256).

[Processing at the end of normal game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 275, the normal game end process performed in S1112 in the flowchart (see FIG. 274) of the display command reception process will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is a bonus (BB or MB) winning game (S1131).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1131 that the current game is a bonus (BB or MB) winning game (when S1131 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the normal game end processing and displays a command. The reception process (see FIG. 274) is also terminated. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1131 that the current game is not a bonus (BB or MB) winning game (when S1131 is NO), the sub CPU 102 is in a bonus (BB or MB) state. It is determined whether or not there is (S1132).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1132 that the sub gaming state is the bonus (BB or MB) state (when S1132 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the normal game end processing and also displays the display command. The reception process (see FIG. 274) is also terminated. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1132 that the sub gaming state is not the bonus (BB or MB) state (when S1132 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is in the BB internal state. Is discriminated (S1133).

  In S1133, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is the BB internal state (when S 1133 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the normal game end process and the display command reception process. (See FIG. 274) also ends. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1133 that the sub gaming state is not the BB internal state (when S1133 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the sub cycle counter is “0”. It is determined (S1134).

  In S1134, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the sub cycle counter is “0” (when S1134 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the normal sub flag to the off state and turns on the sub flag when the CZ is introduced. The state is set (S1135). By this process, the sub gaming state shifts from the normal state to the CZ introduction state. Then, after the processing of S1135, the sub CPU 102 ends the normal game end processing and also ends the display command reception processing (see FIG. 274).

[Processing at the end of CZ game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 276, the process at the time of the end of the game during CZ performed in S1116 in the flowchart of the process at the time of display command reception (see FIG. 274) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is a bonus (BB or MB) winning game (S1141).

  In S1141, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current game is a bonus (BB or MB) winning game (when S1141 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the end of the game in CZ and displays a command. The reception process (see FIG. 274) is also terminated. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1141 that the current game is not a bonus (BB or MB) winning game (when S1141 is NO), the sub CPU 102 is in a bonus (BB or MB) state. It is determined whether or not there is (S1142).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1142 that the sub gaming state is the bonus (BB or MB) state (when S1142 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the end of the CZ gaming and displays a command. The reception process (see FIG. 274) is also terminated. On the other hand, in S1142, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is not the bonus (BB or MB) state (when S 1142 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is the BB internal state. Is determined (S1143).

  In S1143, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is the BB internal state (when S1143 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the CZ game end process and displays command reception process. (See FIG. 274) also ends. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1143 that the sub gaming state is not the BB internal state (when S1143 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the battle victory (ART winning) is confirmed in the current game. Is discriminated (S1144). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a battle victory (ART winning) has been confirmed in the current game based on the information of the main management flag included in the display command data. For example, in the current game, when the information of the main management flag included in the display command data received on the sub side is information indicating that the ART ready flag is on, the sub CPU 102 determines that the battle win (ART It is determined that (winning) is confirmed.

  In S1144, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the battle victory (ART winning) is confirmed in the current game (when S1144 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the CZ sub-flag to the OFF state and sets the ART ready sub-flag. The on state is set (S1145). By this processing, the sub gaming state shifts from the CZ state to the ART preparation state. Then, after the processing of S1145, the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the end of the CZ game and also ends the process at the time of display command reception (see FIG. 274).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1144 that the battle win (ART winning) has not been confirmed in the current game (when S1144 is NO), the sub CPU 102 loses the battle in the current game (ART non-winning). Is determined (S1146). For example, in the current game, when the information of the main management flag included in the display command data received on the sub side is information indicating that the normal flag is on, the sub CPU 102 determines that the battle is defeated (ART non-winning). ) Is determined.

  In S1146, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the battle defeat (ART non-winning) is not fixed in the current game (S1146 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the end of the game in CZ, The display command reception process (see FIG. 274) is also terminated.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1146 that the battle defeat (ART non-winning) has been confirmed in the current game (when S1146 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the sub flag in CZ to an off state, and The sub flag is set to the on state (S1147). By this process, the sub gaming state shifts from the CZ state to the normal state. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “40” (initial value) to the sub cycle counter (S1148). Then, after the processing of S1148, the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the end of the CZ game and also ends the process at the time of display command reception (see FIG. 274).

[Processing at the end of the game during ART preparation]
Next, with reference to FIG. 277, the ART completion game processing at S1118 in the flowchart (see FIG. 274) of the display command reception processing will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is a bonus (BB or MB) winning game (S1151).

  In S1151, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current game is a bonus (BB or MB) winning game (when S1151 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the ART preparation process and ends the display. The command reception process (see FIG. 274) is also terminated. On the other hand, in S1151, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current game is not a bonus (BB or MB) winning game (when S1151 is NO), the sub CPU 102 is in a bonus (BB or MB) state. It is determined whether or not there is (S1152).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1152 that the sub gaming state is the bonus (BB or MB) state (if S1152 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the ART ready game end processing and displays The command reception process (see FIG. 274) is also terminated. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1152 that the sub gaming state is not the bonus (BB or MB) state (when S1152 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is in the BB internal state. Is discriminated (S1153).

  In S1153, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is the BB internal state (when S1153 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the ART preparing game end processing and also receives a display command. The processing (see FIG. 274) is also terminated. On the other hand, in S1153, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is not the BB internal state (when S1153 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the RT state has shifted to the RT3 state ( S1154). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the RT state has shifted to the RT3 state based on information on the RT state included in the display command data. For example, in the current game, when the information related to the RT state included in the display command data received on the sub side is information corresponding to the RT3 state, the sub CPU 102 determines that the RT state has shifted to the RT3 state.

  In S1154, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the RT state has not shifted to the RT3 state (when S1154 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the ART preparation game end processing and receives a display command. The processing (see FIG. 274) is also terminated.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in step S1154 that the RT state has shifted to the RT3 state (YES in step S1154), the sub CPU 102 selects and sets the ART preparation end effect data (S1155). In this process, the sub CPU 102 is set with effect data for notifying information to enter the ART and effect data for notifying information to enter the specialized zone. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the ART preparing sub-flag to an off state, and sets the ART sub-flag and the specialized effect sub-flag to an on state (S1156).

  At the start of the ART period game period, an additional specialized game for determining the initial ART game on the main side is started. Also, at the sub-side, at the start of the ART period game period, the special effect is performed in conjunction with the start of the extra special game, so the special effect sub-flag is also set to the ON state in the processing of S1156. The Therefore, by the processing of S1156, the sub gaming state shifts from the ART preparatory state to the ART state, and the special effect is started from the next game. Then, after the processing of S1156, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the end of the CZ game and ends the processing at the time of display command reception (see FIG. 274).

[Processing at the end of a game during ART]
Next, with reference to FIG. 278, the processing at the end of the game during ART performed in S1121 in the flowchart of the display command reception processing (see FIG. 274) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub flag state is a specialized effect state (S1161). In this process, if the special effect sub flag is in the on state, the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub flag state is the special effect state.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub flag state is the special effect state in S1161 (when S1161 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the special game end process (S1162). Details of the special game end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 279 described later. Then, after the processing of S1162, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the end of the game during ART and also ends the processing at the time of display command reception (see FIG. 274).

  On the other hand, in S1161, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub flag state is not the specialized effect state (when S 1161 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub game state is the BB state (S 1163). ).

  In S1163, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is the BB state (when S1163 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs processing during the end of the BB game during ART (S1164). Details of the processing at the end of the game during BB during ART will be described later with reference to FIGS. 280 and 281 described later. Then, after the processing of S1164, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the end of the ART game, and also ends the display command reception processing (see FIG. 274).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1163 that the sub gaming state is not the BB state (in the case where S1163 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is a BB winning time (S1165).

  In S1165, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is BB winning time (when S1165 is YES determination), the sub CPU 102 performs processing during the end of BB winning game during ART (S1166). Note that the details of the processing at the end of the BB winning game during ART will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S1166, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the end of the game during ART and also ends the processing at the time of display command reception (see FIG. 274).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S1165 that the sub CPU 102 is not in the BB winning state (when S1165 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub gaming state is the BB internal state (S1167).

  In S1167, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is the BB internal state (when S1167 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the ART BB internal game end processing (S1168). Details of the processing at the end of the game during the BB inside ART will be described later with reference to FIG. 283 described later. Then, after the processing of S1168, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the end of the game during ART and also ends the processing at the time of display command reception (see FIG. 274).

  On the other hand, in S1167, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not the BB internal state (when S1167 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the ART normal game end process (S1169). Details of the ART normal game end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 284 described later. Then, after the process of S1169, the sub CPU 102 ends the process during the end of the ART game, and also ends the display command reception process (see FIG. 274).

[Specialized game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 279, the specialized game end time process performed in S1162 in the flowchart of the ART end game end process (see FIG. 278) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is a game at the end of the special effect (S1171).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1171 that the current game is not the game at the end of the special effect (when S1171 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the special game end process and also plays the ART game. The termination process (see FIG. 278) is also terminated. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1171 that the current game is the game at the end of the special effect (when S1171 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the special zone types are the special zones A to E. It is determined whether or not any one of them (S1172).

  In S1172, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the special zone type is not one of the special zones A to E (when S1172 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1176 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S 1172 that the special zone type is any one of the special zones A to E (when S 1172 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the special zone type is the special zone. It is determined whether or not any of A to D (S1173).

  In S1173, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the special zone type is not one of the special zones A to D (when S1173 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1176 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1173 that the special zone type is any of the special zones A to D (when S1173 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds the main side in the current game. It is determined whether or not the continuation (loop) lottery in the final game in the specialized state is won (S1174).

  In S1174, when it is determined that the sub CPU 102 has won the continuation (loop) lottery in the final game in the main special addition state (when S1174 is YES), the sub CPU 102 continues the specialization of addition (loop). ) At the end of the special effects game is performed (S1175). Then, after the process of S1175, the sub CPU 102 ends the special game end process and also ends the ART game end process (see FIG. 278).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S1174 that the sub CPU 102 has not won the continuation (loop) lottery in the final game of the main side added special state (when S1174 is NO), or S1172 or S1173 is NO In this case, the sub CPU 102 sets the special effect sub flag to the off state (S1176). By this processing, the special effect is finished, and the game during ART normal is started or resumed from the next game. Then, after the process of S1176, the sub CPU 102 ends the special game end process and also ends the ART game end process (see FIG. 278).

[Processing at the end of game during BB during ART]
Next, with reference to FIG. 280 and FIG. 281, the processing during the end of the BB game during ART performed in S1164 in the flowchart of the processing during the end of the game during ART (see FIG. 278) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is an additional notification game (whether or not an additional notification effect has been performed for ART) (S1181).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1181 that the current game is not an additional notification game (NO in S1181), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1184 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1181 that the current game is an additional notification game (S1181 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds the number of notification games to the value of the display ART counter (S1182). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “0” (0 clear) to the value of the notification game number counter (S 1183).

  After the processing of S1183 or when S1181 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is a game at the end of NBB (BB1 or BB2) (S1184).

  In S1184, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current game is not the game at the end of NBB (BB1 or BB2) (when S1184 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1197 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1184 that the current game is a game at the end of NBB (BB1 or BB2) (when S1184 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the story is in the story BB. It is determined (S1185).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1185 that the story BB is in progress (when S1185 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S1187 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1185 that the story BB is not in progress (NO in S1185), the sub CPU 102 performs an NBB end screen selection process (S1186). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 refers to the NBB end screen lottery table for ART shown in FIGS. 159A to 159C, and determines the NBB end screen based on the number of medals paid out in the current ART (value of the payout counter during ART). Type (end screens A to R) is determined.

  After the processing of S1186 or when S1185 is NO, the sub CPU 102 sets the effect data of the NBB end screen (S1187).

  Next, the sub CPU performs a NBB end notification game number lottery process (S1188). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the NBB end notification game number lottery table (see FIGS. 183 to 186) during the ART, determines the sub lottery flag (internal winning combination), the presence / absence of the story BB, and the number of difference games ( On the basis of the value of the internal ART counter minus the value of the display ART counter), the presence / absence (winning / non-winning) of the ART addition notification effect is determined, and the type (10G to 300G) of the notification game is determined. Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the NBB end notification game number lottery has been won (S1189).

  In S1189, when it is determined that the sub CPU 102 has not won the NBB end notification game number lottery (when S1189 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB in-art game end process and is in the ART state. The game end process (see FIG. 278) also ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S1189 that the sub CPU 102 has won the NBB end notification game number lottery (when S1189 is YES), the sub CPU 102 indicates the number of winning games (number of notification games) in the notification game number counter. Set (S1190). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the game number release flag to the on state (S1191). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the story BB is in progress (S1192).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1192 that the story BB is not in progress (in the case where S1192 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets effect data that displays the cumulative number of added games announced in the BB (see FIG. S1193). On the other hand, when it is determined in S1192 that the sub CPU 102 is in the story BB (when S1192 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets effect data for displaying the number of notification games set in the notification game number counter. (S1194).

  After the processing of S1193 or S1194, the sub CPU 102 adds the number of notification games to the value of the display ART counter (S1195). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “0” to the value of the notification game number counter (S1196). Then, after the processing of S1196, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during the end of the BB game during ART, and also ends the processing during the end of the ART game (see FIG. 278).

  Here, returning to the process of S1184 again, if S1184 is NO (when not NBB end), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is SBB end (S1197).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1197 that it is not the time when the SBB is ended (when S1197 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during the BB game during ART and ends the game during the ART (FIG. 278). See also). On the other hand, when it is determined in S1197 that the sub CPU 102 is at the end of the SBB (when S1197 is YES), the sub CPU 102 displays effect data for displaying the cumulative number of added games announced in the BB. Set (S1198). Then, after the process of S1198, the sub CPU 102 ends the process during the end of the BB game during ART, and also ends the process during the end of the game during ART (see FIG. 278).

[Processing at the end of the game when winning BB during ART]
Next, with reference to FIG. 282, the processing at the end of the game during BB winning at ART performed in S1166 in the flowchart of the processing at the end of the game during ART (see FIG. 278) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the symbol combinations related to BB are aligned on the active line (whether or not BB has won a prize) (S1201). In this process, the sub CPU 102 acquires a parameter (information) related to the display combination included in the display command, and determines whether or not the symbol combination related to BB is aligned on the effective line.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1201 that the symbol combinations related to BB are aligned on the active line (when S1201 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets display effect data of the BB winning screen (S1202). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “0” to the value of the precursor counter (S1203). In this process, the sub CPU 102 also discards the precursor scenario effect being executed. Then, after the processing of S1203, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the end of the BB winning game during ART and ends the processing at the end of the gaming during ART (see FIG. 278).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1201 that the symbol combinations related to BB are not aligned on the valid line (when S1201 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the BB internal sub flag to the on state (S1204). ). By this process, the sub gaming state shifts to the BB internal state. Then, after the processing of S1204, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the end of the BB winning game during ART and ends the processing at the end of the gaming during ART (see FIG. 278).

[Processing at the end of the game inside the BB during ART]
Next, with reference to FIG. 283, the ART BB internal middle game end processing performed in S1168 in the flowchart of the ART end game end processing (see FIG. 278) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the precursor counter is “0” (S1211). The precursor counter referred to in the processing of S1211 is a counter for counting the number of scenario games of the precursor effect selected when winning the BB combination in the ART state. In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, when the BB combination is won in the ART state, a predetermined precursor effect for notifying the BB is selected, and the number of scenario games of the selected precursor effect is set in the precursor counter. In the BB internal state, if the value of the precursor counter becomes “0” in the selected precursor effect, a BB notification is generated and the game in the BB state is started from the next game.

  In S1211, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the prognostic counter is not “0” (when S1211 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB internal game processing at the end of the ART and plays the game during the ART. The termination process (see FIG. 278) is also terminated.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1211 that the value of the precursor counter is “0” (YES in S1211), the sub CPU 102 sets the BB internal sub flag to an off state (S1212). Then, after the processing of S1212, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during the end of the BB internal game during the ART, and also ends the processing during the end of the game during the ART (see FIG. 278).

[Processing at the end of an ART normal game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 284, the ART normal game end process performed in S1169 in the flowchart of the ART end game end process (see FIG. 278) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the precursor counter is greater than “0” (S1221).

  In S1221, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the precursor counter is greater than “0” (when S1221 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S1227 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1221 that the value of the precursor counter is not greater than “0” (when S1221 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the ART game number counter (main) is “0”. It is determined whether or not (S1222).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is not “0” in S1222 (when S1222 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the ART normal game end process and also plays the ART game. The termination process (see FIG. 278) is also terminated. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is “0” in S1222 (when S1222 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is in a specialized state with the main-side game state added. It is determined whether or not there is (S1223).

  In step S1223, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the main-side payout state is the added special state (in the case of YES determination in step S1223), the sub CPU 102 ends the ART normal game end processing and also performs ART. The middle game end process (see FIG. 278) also ends. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1223 that the main-side payout state is not the added special state (when S1223 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the RT state is the RT3 state. (S1224).

  In S1224, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the RT state is the RT3 state (when S1224 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the ART normal game end process and the ART game end process ( The process also ends (see FIG. 278).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the RT state is not the RT3 state in S1224 (when S1224 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the ART sub-flag to the off state and sets the normal sub-flag to the on state. (S1225). With this process, the sub gaming state shifts from the ART state to the normal state. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “40” as the value of the sub cycle counter (S1226). Then, after the processing of S1226, the sub CPU 102 ends the ART normal game end processing, and also ends the ART normal game end processing (see FIG. 278).

  Here, returning to the processing of S1221 again, if S1221 is YES, the sub CPU 102 decrements the value of the precursor counter by 1 (S1227). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the precursor counter is “0” (S1228).

  In S1228, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the precursor counter is not “0” (when S1228 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1233 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1228 that the value of the precursor counter is “0” (when S1228 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the precursor scenario effect being executed is the precursor scenario effect of the specialized zone. It is determined whether or not (S1229).

  In S1229, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the precursor scenario effect being executed is not the precursor scenario effect of the specialized zone (when S1229 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1233 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S <b> 1229 that the precursor scenario effect being executed is a precursor scenario effect of the specialized zone (when S <b> 1229 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs specialized counter lottery processing ( S1230). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the special counter lottery table (see FIGS. 157 and 158), and based on the special zone type and the value of the special game number counter on the main side, the number of games of special effects. (Initial value of specialized counter: 1G, 3G, 5G, 7G, 10G or 20G) is determined.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result (special counter value) of the special counter lottery in the special counter (S1231). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the special effect sub flag to the on state (S1232). By this process, the sub game state shifts to the special effect state, and the special effect is started from the next game.

  After the processing of S1232, or when S1228 or S1229 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is the execution timing of the extra announcement effect (S1233).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1233 that the current game is not at the timing of executing the extra announcement effect (when S1229 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the ART normal game end process and ends the ART game. The time process (see FIG. 278) is also terminated.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1233 that the current game is the execution timing of the extra announcement effect (when S1229 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an extra announcement effect lottery process (S1234). In this process, for example, when the precursor scenario effect being executed is a game number predictor scenario effect or an ART end predictor scenario effect, the sub CPU 102 adds an ART addition game number notification effect lottery table (see FIGS. 120 to 124). ), The effect pattern number of the additional notification effect to be executed during the ART state is determined based on the sub lottery flag A (internal winning combination) and the number of notification games to be notified, and the effect data corresponding to the effect pattern number Specify a table. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the selected effect data table (S1235).

  After the process of S1235, or when S1223 is NO, the sub CPU 102 ends the ART normal game end time process and also ends the ART normal game end time process (see FIG. 278).

[Processing upon receipt of withdrawal command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 284, the payout end command reception process performed in S832 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 255 and 256) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not demo migration is prohibited (S1241). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the demo transition is prohibited in S1241 (when S1241 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the payout end command reception process and the effect content determination process (FIGS. 255 and 256). See also).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1241 that the demo transition is not prohibited (when S1241 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the demo display flag to the on state (S1242). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a demonstration display effect (S1243). Then, after the processing of S1243, the sub CPU 102 ends the payout end command reception processing and ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 255 and 256).

<Various modifications>
The configuration and operation of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention have been described above including the effects thereof. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various embodiments and modifications are included without departing from the gist of the present invention described in the claims. For example, the following various modifications can be considered.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the game period in the ART state is managed by the number of games has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may manage by. Also, in this case, in the above-described ART addition notification effect, the number of added medals or the number of differences may be notified instead of notifying the number of additional notification games.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment demonstrated the structural example of the gaming machine provided with an ART function, this invention is not limited to this. The various techniques of the present invention described above can be applied to, for example, a gaming machine having only an AT function.

  In the present invention, some or all of various lottery processes and various control processes performed in the sub control circuit 101 in the above embodiment may be performed in the main control circuit 91. Further, for example, some or all of the various lottery processes and various control processes performed in the main control circuit 91 in the above embodiment may be performed in the sub control circuit 101.

  In the above embodiment, a pachislot machine has been described as an example of a gaming machine. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and some of the various techniques of the present invention described above also apply to a gaming machine called “pachinko”. Applicable. For example, the configuration of the effect data table employed in the above embodiment (see FIGS. 109 and 110) can also be applied to pachinko, and the same effect can be obtained.

<Various functions of the main control board and sub-control board>
The embodiment and various modifications of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention have been described above. Here, various functions of the main control board 71 (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board 72 (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention will be described together.

  The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 79 and the stop switch board 80, and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. Therefore, the main control board 71 functions as main control means, internal winning combination determining means, and stop control means.

  The main control board 71 performs a general medium lottery process (see FIG. 214). Therefore, the main control board 71 functions as parameter level increasing means (card promotion lottery process, card promotion attribute lottery process).

  The main control board 71 performs lottery processing during CZ (see FIG. 218) and battle attack / defense lottery processing (FIG. 219). Therefore, the main control board 71 also functions as advantageous game determination means (S251, S252), determination point determination means (S251), and determination point change means (S252).

  The main control board 71 performs a special lottery process (see FIG. 227, etc.). Therefore, the main control board 71 also functions as advantageous game content determination means. The main control board 71 performs stage lottery processing (see FIG. 243 and the like). Therefore, the main control board 71 also functions as game mode selection means. Further, the main control board 71 performs lottery processing (see FIG. 231 and the like) with the number of specialized games added. Therefore, the main control board 71 also functions as specific game period determining means.

  Further, the main control board 71 performs an ART game number addition lottery process and a process for updating the remaining ART game number based on the lottery result (for example, see S391 and S392 in FIG. 229). Therefore, the main control board 71 also functions as an extension update unit. Further, the main control board 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the ART game number counter (the number of remaining ART games) (see, for example, S418 in FIG. 231). Therefore, the main control board 71 also functions as a shortening update unit.

  The sub control board 72 controls the rendering operation based on various command data received from the main control board 71. Therefore, the sub control board 72 functions as sub control means, effect control means, and game information display control means.

  The sub control board 72 performs an effect content determination process (see FIGS. 255 and 256). Therefore, the sub control board 72 also functions as effect data determining means. The sub-control board 72 performs a game start process when changing settings (see FIG. 262). Therefore, the sub-control board 72 also functions as parameter information display determining means (S922).

  The sub-control board 72 performs an ART normal game start process (see FIGS. 270 to 272). Therefore, the sub-control board 72 includes the special effect transition determining means (S1044), the extra game period determining means, the extended game period determining means (S1049), the specific display effect determining means (S1069), the audio output determining means (S1077), and It also functions as effect mode determining means (S1080). The sub-control board 72 performs an ART normal game end start process (see FIG. 284). Therefore, the sub control board 72 also functions as an added effect determining means (S1234).

  Further, the sub control board 72 performs a payout end command reception process (see FIG. 285). Therefore, the sub control board 72 also functions as a demonstration execution unit (S1243).

<Appendix (summary of the present invention)>
[First and second gaming machines]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known that determines whether or not to shift to an advantageous state according to a result determined in a game during a predetermined period every time a predetermined number of games have elapsed. (For example, refer to JP2014-208056A). In this gaming machine, the number of executions of the specific effect in the game during the period is determined by lottery. Then, the gaming state is shifted to the advantageous state in response to the specific effect being executed a predetermined number of times after the end of the period.

  However, since the method for shifting to the advantageous state described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-208056 is a method for determining whether or not to move to the advantageous state according to the number of executions of the specific performance, a relatively simple method. It is. Therefore, conventionally, there has been a demand for the development of a gaming machine capable of further enhancing expectation regarding the transition to the advantageous state.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above first problem, and a first object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can further increase expectation regarding the transition to an advantageous state. That is.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a first gaming machine having the following configuration.

An informing means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11, an instruction display unit) for informing information giving an advantageous state for the player;
Parameter level increasing means for determining whether or not to increase the level of the first parameter (for example, attack-type card, defense-type card) or the level of the second parameter (for example, reward-type card) according to the game situation (For example, card promotion lottery processing, card promotion attribute lottery processing)
Advantageous game determination means (for example, battle attack / lottery lottery and card skill activation lottery) for deciding to give an advantageous game state (for example, ART state) that can be notified by the notification means according to the level of the first parameter When,
Advantageous game content determination means (for example, extra special lottery processing) that makes it possible to determine the content of the game in the advantageous game state according to the level of the second parameter when it is determined to give the advantageous game state ) And a gaming machine.

In the first gaming machine of the present invention, the determination process by the parameter level increasing means is performed over a predetermined game period (for example, 40 games),
The process of determining whether or not to give the advantageous game state by the advantageous game determination means is performed after the game of the predetermined game period is digested,
When it is determined that the advantageous gaming state is not given, the level of the second parameter may be set to the initial level.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine of the present invention, a first determination point (for example, an enemy) for determining whether to give the advantageous gaming state according to the type of the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination. A determination point determination means for determining at least whether or not to reduce a second determination point (for example, a life value of the hero character) for determining non-giving of the advantageous gaming state). For example, battle battle defense lottery processing)
In accordance with the levels of the first parameter and the second parameter, determination point changing means capable of changing the content of the result determined by the determination point determining means or the initial value of the second determination point (for example, Card skill activation lottery processing), and
As a result of the change process by the determination point changing means, when the value of the first determination point is equal to or less than a predetermined value, the provision of the advantageous gaming state is confirmed and the value of the second determination point is predetermined. When the value is less than or equal to the value, the non-granting of the advantageous gaming state may be confirmed.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a second gaming machine having the following configuration.

An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability at the start of the game;
An informing means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11, an instruction display unit) for informing information giving an advantageous state for the player;
Parameter level increasing means (for example, card promotion lottery processing, card promotion attribute lottery processing) for determining whether or not to increase the level of parameters (for example, attack type card, defense type card) according to the game situation;
In accordance with the type of the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination, a first determination point (for example, for determining granting of an advantageous gaming state (for example, ART state) that can be notified by the notification means, for example) Determination point determination means for determining whether or not to update the second determination point (for example, the life value of the hero character) for determining non-givenness of the advantageous gaming state) (For example, battle battle defense lottery processing)
Judgment point changing means (for example, card skill activation lottery processing) capable of changing the content of the result determined by the judgment point determining means or the initial value of the second determination point according to the level of the parameter; ,
The determination point changing means includes
When the level of the parameter is a specific level, the initial value of the second determination point can be changed,
When the level of the parameter is a predetermined level and a specific internal winning combination (for example, “out”) is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the result of determination by the determination point determining means A gaming machine characterized in that the contents can be changed.

In the second gaming machine of the present invention, the determination point determining means is
When the specific internal winning combination (for example, “out”) is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, it is determined whether to update the second determination point in a direction approaching a predetermined threshold. ,
Whether or not to update the first determination point in a direction approaching the predetermined threshold when a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, “Bell” or rare combination) is determined by the internal winning combination determining means And
When a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, “replay”) is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, it is determined whether or not to update the second determination point in a direction away from the predetermined threshold. ,
The determination point changing means determines the parameter when the specific internal winning combination is determined and the determination point determining means determines to update the second determination point in a direction approaching the predetermined threshold. It is possible to decide to update the first determination point in a direction approaching the predetermined threshold or to discard the result determined by the determination point determination means according to the level of ,
As a result of the change process by the determination point changing means, when the value of the first determination point reaches or exceeds the predetermined threshold value, the provision of the advantageous gaming state is confirmed, and the second determination point When the value reaches or exceeds the predetermined threshold value, the non-granting of the advantageous gaming state may be confirmed.

  According to the first and second gaming machines of the present invention configured as described above, a sense of expectation can be further enhanced regarding the transition to the advantageous state.

[3rd to 14th game machines]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine that determines an extension of an AT game during an AT game is known (see, for example, JP 2010-167199 A). In such a gaming machine, the period of the AT game becomes indefinite, so that a sense of expectation for the AT game can be improved.

  However, if an attempt is made to determine the extension of an AT game in an interesting manner, there arises a problem that the setting of the conditions for extension and the probability of determining the extension becomes complicated.

  The present invention has been made to solve the second problem, and the second object of the present invention is to produce an extension of AT games in an interesting manner with a simpler configuration. It is to provide a possible gaming machine.

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a third gaming machine having the following configuration.

An informing means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) for informing information relating to the game;
A first remaining game count that counts the first remaining game period of the notification game state that actually remains in a notification game state (for example, ART state) in which information that is advantageous to the player can be notified by the notification means. Means (eg, an internal ART counter);
In the notification game state, second remaining game counting means (for example, a display ART counter) that counts the second remaining game period in the notification game state that is notified by the notification means and that is equal to or less than the first remaining game period. )When,
An extra game period determining means capable of determining an extra game period of the informed game state, which is informed by the informing means, in accordance with a difference game period between the first remaining game period and the second remaining game period. (For example, a lottery process for the number of notification games during ART)
In accordance with the added game period determined by the added game period determining means, an added effect determining means for determining the contents of the added effect for informing the added game period (for example, an added game number notification effect lottery table during ART); A gaming machine comprising

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a fourth gaming machine having the following configuration.

An informing means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) for informing information relating to the game;
Based on a first condition (for example, every game digestion), an abbreviated updating means for shortening and updating a game period in an informing game state (for example, an ART state) capable of informing information advantageous to the player by the informing means;
Based on a second condition (for example, extra bonus), an extension update means for extending and updating the game period of the notification gaming state;
In the notification game state, the first remaining game period in the notification game state that actually remains, and the second remaining in the notification game state that is notified by the notification means and that is equal to or less than the first remaining game period. An extended game period determining means (for example, a notification game number lottery process during ART), which is notified by the notification means according to a difference game period with a game period, and capable of determining an extended game period of the notification game state;
According to the extended game period determined by the extended game period determining means, extended effect determination means for determining the content of the effect for informing the extended game period (for example, an extra game number announcement effect lottery table during ART); A gaming machine comprising:

Further, in the fourth gaming machine of the present invention, the extended game period determining means is an extended game in the notification game state regardless of an extension of the game period in the notification game state determined by the extension update means. The period can be determined,
The extended game period of the notification game state is determined within the current difference game period,
Only when the specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination, the current differential game period may be determined as the extended game period of the notification gaming state.

  Furthermore, in the fourth gaming machine of the present invention, the extended game period determining means is configured to notify the notification based on a predetermined condition regardless of whether or not the extended game period is updated by the extended update means. The extended game period of the gaming state may be determined.

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a fifth gaming machine having the following configuration.

An informing means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) for informing information relating to the game;
A first remaining game count that counts the first remaining game period of the notification game state that actually remains in a notification game state (for example, ART state) in which information that is advantageous to the player can be notified by the notification means. Means (eg, an internal ART counter);
In the notification game state, second remaining game counting means (for example, a display ART counter) that counts the second remaining game period in the notification game state that is notified by the notification means and that is equal to or less than the first remaining game period. )When,
A game period (for example, a special game) that is performed when a predetermined condition is established in the notification game state and that can extend the first remaining game period for each unit game (for example, a game in an added special state). Specific game period determining means (for example, a special game number addition lottery process) for determining
An extra game period determining means capable of determining an extra game period of the informed game state, which is informed by the informing means, in accordance with a difference game period between the first remaining game period and the second remaining game period. (For example, a lottery process for the number of notification games during ART)
Whether or not the content of the effect shifts to a special effect state (for example, a special effect state) that is a content specializing in the extra effect that informs the extra game period over a specific game period, Special production transition determining means (for example, specialized production type lottery processing) that is determined according to the game period,
When the game period of the specific game determined by the specific game period determining means is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 6 games or more), the transition to the special effect state is determined as compared with other cases. A gaming machine that is easy to be played.

  In the fifth gaming machine of the present invention, when the game period of the specific game determined by the specific game period determining means is not less than the predetermined period, and the difference game period is not less than the specific period. Alternatively, the transition to the special effect state may be determined by the special effect transition determining means.

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a sixth gaming machine having the following configuration.

An informing means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) for informing information relating to the game;
Based on a first condition (for example, every game digestion), an abbreviated updating means for shortening and updating a game period in an informing game state (for example, an ART state) capable of informing information advantageous to the player by the informing means;
Based on a second condition (for example, extra bonus), an extension update means for extending and updating the game period of the notification gaming state;
A specific game that is performed when a predetermined condition is established in the notification game state and that can actually extend the first remaining game period of the notification game state for each unit game (e.g. Specific game period determining means (for example, a special game number addition lottery process) for determining a game period (for example, a value of a special game number counter);
According to the difference game period between the previous first remaining game period and the second remaining game period in the notification game state which is notified by the notification unit and is equal to or less than the first remaining game period, the notification unit An extended game period determining means (for example, a notification game number lottery process during ART) that is capable of determining an extended game period of the notification game state to be notified;
It is determined whether or not the effect content shifts to a special effect state (for example, a special effect state) that is a content specialized for the effect of informing the extended game period over a specific game period. Special production transition determining means (for example, specialized production type lottery processing) to be determined according to the period,
When the game period of the specific game determined by the specific game period determining means is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 6 games or more), the transition to the special effect state is determined as compared with other cases. It becomes easy to be done,
The effect of informing the extended game period is generated by dividing and informing the extension of the game period of the notification game state updated by the extension update means, and updated by the extension update means a plurality of times. The gaming machine is characterized in that it includes an effect of notifying the total extension of the game period in the notification gaming state at once.

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a seventh gaming machine having the following configuration.

An informing means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) for informing information relating to the game;
A first remaining game count that counts the first remaining game period of the notification game state that actually remains in a notification game state (for example, ART state) in which information that is advantageous to the player can be notified by the notification means. Means (eg, an internal ART counter);
In the notification game state, second remaining game counting means (for example, a display ART counter) that counts the second remaining game period in the notification game state that is notified by the notification means and that is equal to or less than the first remaining game period. )When,
An extra game period determining means capable of determining an extra game period of the informed game state, which is informed by the informing means, in accordance with a difference game period between the first remaining game period and the second remaining game period. (For example, a lottery process for the number of notification games during ART)
A specific display effect determining means (for example, a special card acquisition lottery process) for determining whether or not to execute a specific display effect (for example, a special card display effect) according to the difference game period;
Whether or not the content of the effect shifts to a special effect state that is a content specialized for the add-on effect that informs the extra game period over a specific game period, whether or not the specific display effect is executed Special production transition determining means (for example, specialized production type lottery processing) to be decided according to,
When the differential game period becomes long, execution of the specific display effect is easily determined by the specific display effect determining means.

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides an eighth gaming machine having the following configuration.

An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability at the start of the game;
An informing means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) for informing information relating to the game;
Based on a first condition (for example, every game digestion), an abbreviated updating means for shortening and updating a game period in an informing game state (for example, an ART state) capable of informing information advantageous to the player by the informing means;
Based on a second condition (for example, extra bonus), an extension update means for extending and updating the game period of the notification gaming state;
In the notification game state, the first remaining game period in the notification game state that actually remains, and the second remaining in the notification game state that is notified by the notification means and that is equal to or less than the first remaining game period. An extended game period determining means (for example, a notification game number lottery process during ART), which is notified by the notification means according to a difference game period with a game period, and capable of determining an extended game period of the notification game state;
A specific display effect determining means (for example, a special card acquisition lottery process) for determining whether or not to execute a specific display effect (for example, a special card display effect) according to the difference game period;
Depending on whether or not the specific display effect is executed, whether or not the content of the effect shifts to a special effect state that is a content specialized for the effect of informing the extended game period over a specific game period. Special production transition determining means (for example, specialized production type lottery processing),
When the difference game period becomes longer, execution of the specific display effect is easily determined by the specific display effect determining means,
In the notification game state, when a specific internal winning combination (for example, “bell”) is determined by the internal winning combination determination means, the game period in the notification gaming state is extended and updated by the extended update means. There is nothing, and the execution of the specific display effect can be determined by the specific display effect determining means.

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a ninth gaming machine having the following configuration.

An informing means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) for informing information relating to the game;
A first remaining game count that counts the first remaining game period of the notification game state that actually remains in a notification game state (for example, ART state) in which information that is advantageous to the player can be notified by the notification means. Means (eg, an internal ART counter);
In the notification game state, second remaining game counting means (for example, a display ART counter) that counts the second remaining game period in the notification game state that is notified by the notification means and that is equal to or less than the first remaining game period. )When,
In accordance with a difference game period between the first remaining game period and the second remaining game period, a predetermined one of a plurality of effect modes (for example, ART stages A to C) that can be set in the notification game state. Production mode determining means for determining the production mode (for example, stage shifting lottery processing during ART),
An extra game period determining means capable of determining an extra game period of the informed game state that is informed by the informing means according to the difference game period and the type of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means. (For example, a lottery process for the number of announcement games during ART).

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a tenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

An informing means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) for informing information relating to the game;
Based on a first condition (for example, every game digestion), an abbreviated updating means for shortening and updating a game period in an informing game state (for example, an ART state) capable of informing information advantageous to the player by the informing means;
Based on a second condition (for example, extra bonus), an extension update means for extending and updating the game period of the notification gaming state;
Regardless of the state of the game including the state (for example, high probability, low probability, etc.) indicating the ease of determining the extension update by the extension update means in the notification game state, In the notification gaming state, according to a difference gaming period between the first remaining gaming period and the second remaining gaming period of the notification gaming state that is notified by the notification means and is equal to or less than the first remaining gaming period. An effect mode determining means (for example, stage shifting lottery process during ART) capable of determining a predetermined effect mode from a plurality of setable effect modes (for example, ART stages A to C),
Extended game period determining means capable of determining the extended game period of the notification gaming state, which is notified by the notification means, according to the difference game period and the type of effect mode determined by the effect mode determination means. (For example, a lottery process for the number of announcement games during ART).

  In the tenth gaming machine of the present invention, the total period of the extended game period in the notification game state notified by the notification means after the predetermined effect mode (for example, ART stage C) is determined is predetermined. The predetermined production mode may be maintained until the period is reached.

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides an eleventh gaming machine having the following configuration.

An informing means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) for informing information relating to the game;
A first remaining game count that counts the first remaining game period of the notification game state that actually remains in a notification game state (for example, ART state) in which information that is advantageous to the player can be notified by the notification means. Means (eg, an internal ART counter);
In the notification game state, second remaining game counting means (for example, a display ART counter) that counts the second remaining game period in the notification game state that is notified by the notification means and that is equal to or less than the first remaining game period. )When,
An extra game period in the notification game state that is notified by the notification means in accordance with the difference game period between the first remaining game period and the second remaining game period and the second remaining game period. And a game period determining means (for example, a lottery process for the number of notification games during ART).

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a twelfth gaming machine having the following configuration.

An informing means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) for informing information relating to the game;
Based on a first condition (for example, every game digestion), an abbreviated updating means for shortening and updating a game period in an informing game state (for example, an ART state) capable of informing information advantageous to the player by the informing means;
Based on a second condition (for example, extra bonus), an extension update means for extending and updating the game period of the notification gaming state;
In the notification game state, the first remaining game period in the notification game state that actually remains, and the second remaining in the notification game state that is notified by the notification means and that is equal to or less than the first remaining game period. An extended game period determining means (for example, a notification game number lottery process during ART), which is notified by the notification means according to a difference game period with a game period, and capable of determining an extended game period of the notification game state;
In accordance with the extended game period determined by the extended game period determining means and the second remaining game period, extended effect determining means for determining the content of the effect for informing the extended game period (for example, during ART A game machine having an added game number announcement production lottery table).

  In the twelfth gaming machine of the present invention, when the second remaining game period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period, an expected value of the extended game period in the notification game state determined by the extended game period determining unit is The second remaining game period may be shorter than that when the second remaining game period is less than the predetermined period.

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a thirteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

An informing means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) for informing information relating to the game;
Sound output means (for example, a group of speakers) for outputting a specific sound (for example, a character song) according to the contents of the production;
A first remaining game count that counts the first remaining game period of the notification game state that actually remains in a notification game state (for example, ART state) in which information that is advantageous to the player can be notified by the notification means. Means (eg, an internal ART counter);
In the notification game state, second remaining game counting means (for example, a display ART counter) that counts the second remaining game period in the notification game state that is notified by the notification means and that is equal to or less than the first remaining game period. )When,
An extra game period determining means capable of determining an extra game period of the informed game state, which is informed by the informing means, in accordance with a difference game period between the first remaining game period and the second remaining game period. (For example, a lottery process for the number of notification games during ART)
Sound output determining means for determining whether or not to output the specific sound by the sound output means according to the differential game period (for example, a character flag flag lottery process);
Whether or not the production content shifts to a special production state that is a content specializing in the extra production for informing the extra game period over a specific game period, whether the difference game period and the specific voice Special production transition determining means (for example, specialized production type lottery processing) that is determined according to the presence or absence of output,
When the transition to the special effect state is determined by the special effect transition determining means in the situation where the specific sound is being output, in the special effect state after the transition, a specific additional effect (for example, specialization) A gaming machine characterized in that a zone G 3-digit extra announcement effect) is performed.

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a fourteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

An informing means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) for informing information relating to the game;
Sound output means (for example, a group of speakers) for outputting a specific sound (for example, a character song) according to the contents of the production;
Based on a first condition (for example, every game digestion), an abbreviated updating means for shortening and updating a game period in an informing game state (for example, an ART state) capable of informing information advantageous to the player by the informing means;
Based on a second condition (for example, extra bonus), an extension update means for extending and updating the game period of the notification gaming state;
In the notification game state, the first remaining game period in the notification game state that actually remains, and the second remaining in the notification game state that is notified by the notification means and that is equal to or less than the first remaining game period. An extended game period determining means (for example, a notification game number lottery process during ART), which is notified by the notification means according to a difference game period with a game period, and capable of determining an extended game period of the notification game state;
Sound output determining means for determining whether or not to output the specific sound by the sound output means according to the differential game period (for example, a character flag flag lottery process);
Whether or not the production content shifts to a special production state that is a content specialized for the extended production for informing the extended game period over a specific game period, whether the difference game period and the specific voice Special production transition determining means (for example, specialized production type lottery processing) that is determined according to the presence or absence of output,
When the transition to the special effect state is determined by the special effect transition determining means in a situation where the specific sound is being output, the special effect state after the transition has a specific extension effect (for example, specialization) A gaming machine characterized in that a zone G 3-digit extra announcement effect) is performed.

  Further, in the fourteenth gaming machine of the present invention, a plurality of types of the extended effects are provided in the special effect state, and the minimum extended game period notified in the specific extended effect is the other extended effects. You may make it become longer than the said minimum extended game period notified.

  According to the third to fourteenth gaming machines of the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is possible to produce an extension of an advantageous gaming state game (AT game) in an interesting manner with a simpler configuration.

[15th to 20th game machines]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known in which a game effect is determined by lottery based on a winning combination or the like (see, for example, JP-A-2014-184222). In such a gaming machine, by appropriately adjusting the winning probability of the effect, the size of the expectation can be designed for each effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  However, in recent years, the total number of effects in one type of gaming machine has increased dramatically, and the conditions for determining the effects and the winning probability have become more complex. As a result, there is a problem that the time required for the design increases dramatically and the cost of the gaming machine increases.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above third problem, and a third object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that facilitates design and development related to production determination.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a fifteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

Effect data determining means (for example, an effect content determination process) for determining a predetermined effect data table according to the game situation;
Effect execution means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) for executing a predetermined effect based on the predetermined effect data table determined by the effect data determining means,
In the effect data table, a first parameter (for example, effect parameter items “GrID” and “GrNo”) that can specify the effect content, and other effect data table when the effect content is not specified by the first parameter. A second parameter (for example, production parameter items “inc”, “table”) and a third parameter (for example, specifying whether or not addition of an additional production to the designated production content is prohibited or executable) For example, an effect parameter item “MOE”) is defined in association with each other.

In the fifteenth gaming machine of the present invention, the effect data table further includes a fourth parameter (for example, described later) that specifies whether display switching of the stage image is prohibited or executable in the specified effect. Production parameter item “ST”) is defined in association with the first parameter, the second parameter, and the third parameter,
The additional effect may be a cut-in effect that superimposes an additional effect image on the entire surface or a part of the image displayed in the designated effect at a predetermined timing.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a sixteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

Effect data determining means (for example, an effect content determination process) for determining a predetermined effect data table according to the game situation;
Effect execution means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) for executing a predetermined effect based on the predetermined effect data table determined by the effect data determining means,
In the effect data table, the first parameter (for example, the effect parameter items “GrID” and “GrNo”) that can specify the contents of the effect, and the image displayed by the effect executing means according to the non-operation time are demonstrated. A gaming machine characterized in that a second parameter (for example, an effect parameter item “DB”) indicating whether switching to an image is permitted or prohibited is defined in association with each other.

  In the sixteenth gaming machine of the present invention, the effect data table further includes a third parameter (for example, described later) that specifies whether display switching of the stage image is prohibited or executable in the specified effect. The production parameter item “ST”) may be defined in association with the first parameter and the second parameter.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a seventeenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

Effect data determining means (for example, an effect content determination process) for determining a predetermined effect data table according to the game situation;
Image display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) that performs a predetermined image display effect based on the predetermined effect data table determined by the effect data determination means;
Light lighting means (for example, a right side lamp) that performs lighting lighting according to the content of the performance,
In the effect data table, a first parameter (for example, effect parameter items “GrID” and “GrNo”) that can specify the effect content, and a specific lighting effect (for example, an intense lighting effect) using the light lighting means. And a second parameter (for example, an effect parameter item “LED”) that specifies whether to prohibit or execute the game is defined in association with each other.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides an eighteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

Effect data determining means (for example, an effect content determination process described later) for determining a predetermined effect data table according to the game situation;
Image display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 to be described later) that performs a predetermined image display effect based on the predetermined effect data table determined by the effect data determination means;
Light lighting means (for example, a right side lamp described later) that performs light lighting according to the content of the performance,
In the effect data table, the first parameter (for example, effect parameter items “GrID” and “GrNo”, which will be described later) that can specify the effect content, and other effects when the effect content is not specified by the first parameter. A second parameter (for example, production parameter items “inc” and “table” described later) for designating the data table and a specific lighting effect using the light lighting means (for example, an intense lighting operation described later) are prohibited. A third parameter (for example, an effect parameter item “LED” to be described later) for designating a lottery table (for example, an LED parameter lottery table to be described later) that can be executed or can determine the content of the specific lighting effect at the time of execution; A gaming machine characterized in that, are defined in association with each other.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a nineteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

Effect data determining means (for example, an effect content determination process) for determining a predetermined effect data table according to the game situation;
Image display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11) that performs a predetermined image display effect based on the predetermined effect data table determined by the effect data determination means,
The effect data table includes a first parameter (for example, effect parameter items “GrID” and “GrNo”) that can specify the content of the effect, and an information image indicating the current game status on the display screen of the image display means. And a second parameter (for example, an effect parameter item “UI”) for designating whether or not to display the game situation notification image is defined in association with each other.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a twentieth gaming machine having the following configuration.

Effect data determining means (for example, an effect content determination process) for determining a predetermined effect data table according to the game situation;
Image display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11) that performs a predetermined image display effect based on the predetermined effect data table determined by the effect data determination means,
In the effect data table, the first parameter (for example, the effect parameter items “GrID” and “GrNo”) that can specify the content of the effect, and information indicating the current game status displayed on the display screen of the image display means. A second parameter (for example, an effect parameter item “UI”) that specifies the size of the game situation notification image composed of images is defined in association with each other,
When large is designated as the display size of the gaming situation notification image by the second parameter, the size of the effect area other than the gaming situation notification image on the display screen is the display of the gaming situation notification image by the second parameter. A gaming machine that is smaller than the size of the effect area other than the gaming status notification image on the display screen when a small size is designated.

  According to the fifteenth to twentieth gaming machines of the present invention having the above-described configuration, design and development related to production determination are facilitated.

[21st game machine]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in gaming machines, gaming machines having a bonus with the total number of medals paid out as an end condition are known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-184222). In such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the profit obtained by the bonus from varying due to the skill of the player or the bias of the internal lottery.

  In recent years, in order to further suppress the variation in profits obtained from bonuses, a configuration has been adopted in which the number of small roles that can be won during the bonus is reduced and the number of medals paid out per unit game (one game) is made constant. Yes. However, if the number of small roles that can be displayed during the bonus decreases, there is a problem that the game in the bonus becomes monotonous.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above fourth problem, and a fourth object of the present invention is to prevent a game in a bonus from becoming monotonous while suppressing variation in profits obtained by a bonus. It is providing the game machine which can be made.

  In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides a twenty-first gaming machine having the following configuration.

A loading operation detecting means (for example, a medal sensor) for detecting a gaming medium loading operation;
Start operation detecting means (for example, a start switch 79) for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the input operation by the input operation detecting means;
Internal winning combination determining means (for example, internal lottery processing) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means;
Fluctuation display means (for example, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R), which is constituted by a plurality of display rows and variably displays symbols necessary for the game based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means,
Stop operation detecting means (for example, stop switch board 80) for detecting stop operation by the player;
Stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing) for stopping the change display of the symbol based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means,
A special internal winning combination (for example, BB combination) is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the symbol combination relating to the special internal winning combination is displayed in a stopped manner on the determination lines set over the plurality of display columns. If it is, a game in a special gaming state (for example, BB state) advantageous to the player is started,
In the normal gaming state different from the special gaming state,
The internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means includes a plurality of kinds of small combinations related to the payout of the game medium, and the plurality of types of small combinations include a specific symbol (for example, cherry). A first specific combination in which the game medium is paid out when one specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the determination line;
In the special game state,
The internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means includes a plurality of types of small combinations relating to the payout of the game medium, and the plurality of types of small combinations include a second specific combination including the specific symbol. A second specific combination in which the game medium is paid out when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the determination line;
The number of payouts of the game medium related to the second specific combination is the same as the number of payouts of the game medium related to other small combinations that can be determined in the special gaming state, and the number related to the first specific combination A gaming machine characterized in that it differs from the number of game media payouts.

  In the twenty-first gaming machine of the present invention, when the second specific symbol combination including the specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the determination line, the first specific symbol including the specific symbol is displayed. The symbol combination (for example, triple cherry) may be stopped and displayed on a line different from the determination line.

Furthermore, in the twenty-first gaming machine of the present invention, the gaming period in the special gaming state ends when the total number of the gaming media paid out in the gaming period exceeds a predetermined number,
In the special gaming state, the small winning combination is always determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the determined small winning combination may have the same number of payouts of the game medium regardless of the type.

  According to the twenty-first gaming machine of the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is possible to prevent the game in the special gaming state from becoming monotonous while suppressing the variation in profits obtained in the game (bonus) in the special gaming state. it can.

[22nd game machine]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known that determines whether or not to shift to an advantageous state according to a result determined in a game during a predetermined period every time a predetermined number of games have elapsed. (For example, refer to JP2014-208056A). In this gaming machine, the number of executions of the specific effect in the game during the period is determined by lottery. Then, the gaming state is shifted to the advantageous state in response to the specific effect being executed a predetermined number of times after the end of the period.

  However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-208056, when the RAM is cleared due to a setting change or the like, the information regarding the period up to that point is deleted, so the information is initialized. The game starts from the state. In this case, it becomes clear that the setting change or the like has been executed (the player can recognize it), and there is a problem that it is not suitable for sales at a game store.

  The present invention was made to solve the fifth problem, and a fifth object of the present invention is to prevent the fact that the RAM has been cleared due to a setting change or the like. Is to provide a unique gaming machine.

  In order to solve the fifth problem, the present invention provides a twenty-second gaming machine having the following configuration.

A notification means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) for displaying information relating to the game on the display screen;
Parameter level increasing means (for example, card promotion lottery processing, card promotion attribute lottery processing) for determining whether or not to increase the level of a parameter (for example, an attack system card, a defense system card, a reward system card) according to the game situation )When,
Game information display control means (for example, sub CPU 102) for displaying information on the parameter level on the display screen of the notification means;
In the first game executed after the information relating to the game is initialized, when the parameter level increasing means determines that the parameter level is to be increased, the information means regarding the parameter level after the level has been increased. Parameter information display determining means (for example, card display lottery processing) for determining whether or not to display on the display screen,
In the first game executed after the initialization,
The game information display control means, if the parameter information display determination means has not decided to display information on the level of the parameter after the level increase, information on the parameter level before the level increase A gaming machine characterized by being displayed on a display screen of a notification means.

In the twenty-second gaming machine of the present invention, a game mode selection means for selecting a predetermined mode from a plurality of modes (for example, stages A to C and special stages) that can be set in a predetermined game period. (For example, stage lottery processing)
In the game of the predetermined game period,
The parameter level increasing means determines whether to increase the parameter level according to the gaming situation,
The game information display control means displays information on the parameter level, information on the mode, and information on the remaining game period of the game in the predetermined game period on the display screen of the notification means,
In the initialization process when a setting parameter (for example, setting 1 to setting 6) provided for adjusting the probability of granting a privilege to a player is changed, information on the level of the parameter, information on the mode, and Information on the remaining game period of the game in the predetermined game period is set to a corresponding initial value,
In the initialization process at the time of power recovery after the occurrence of power interruption for a predetermined time or longer, the information on the parameter level, the information on the mode, and the information on the remaining game period of the game in the predetermined game period are respectively Is set to the corresponding information
In the game of the predetermined game period that is executed first after the information related to the game is initialized by changing the setting parameter or returning power after occurrence of power interruption for the predetermined time or more,
The parameter information display determination means determines whether or not to display information on the parameter level after the level increase on the display screen of the notification means when the parameter level increase means determines the parameter level increase. Decide
The game information display control means includes
If it is not determined by the parameter information display determining means to display information on the parameter level after the level increase, information on the parameter level before the level increase is displayed on the display screen of the notification means. ,
As information on the mode, information on the lowest level mode among the plurality of modes is displayed on the display screen of the notification means, and
Information relating to the remaining game period of the game in the predetermined game period may be displayed on the display screen of the notification means in a manner that the player cannot recognize.

  According to the twenty-second gaming machine of the present invention configured as described above, it can be prevented that the RAM is cleared due to a setting change or the like.

[23rd game machine]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known that determines whether or not to shift to an advantageous state according to a result determined in a game during a predetermined period every time a predetermined number of games have elapsed. (See, for example, 2014-208056). In this gaming machine, the number of executions of the specific effect in the game during the period is determined by lottery. Then, the gaming state is shifted to the advantageous state in response to the specific effect being executed a predetermined number of times after the end of the period.

  Conventionally, in the gaming machines as described above, the progress of the game during the cycle period (the number of digested games), the results determined by the game during the cycle period, etc., are always notified by an effect device such as a liquid crystal display device. The game is promoted until the cycle period elapses. However, games are not always played in gaming machines, and there is a gaming machine (vacant machine) in a state where no player is present and the player can play a game. When such a vacant stage production device is confirmed, information regarding the cycle is revealed to the player, and the information is used as a material for determining whether or not to play a game. There was a problem that it was not suitable for sales at an amusement store.

  The present invention has been made to solve the sixth problem described above, and a sixth object of the present invention is to prevent information relating to a game from being unplugged by a non-player in an empty platform. It is to provide a possible gaming machine.

  In order to solve the sixth problem, the present invention provides a twenty-third gaming machine having the following configuration.

A loading operation detecting means (for example, a medal sensor) for detecting a gaming medium loading operation;
Start operation detecting means (for example, a start switch 79) for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the input operation by the input operation detecting means;
An informing means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) for informing information relating to the game;
Game information display control means (for example, sub CPU 102) for displaying information on the game situation on the display screen of the notification means;
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the image displayed on the display screen of the notification unit is switched to a demonstration image, and the display operation of the demonstration image is canceled when the input operation is detected by the input operation detecting unit. And a demo execution means (for example, processing upon receipt of a payout end command),
From the time when the display operation of the demonstration image is canceled until the start operation is detected by the start operation detecting unit, the game information display control unit is configured to display information related to the game status and information related to the game status. The game machine is characterized in that the content of the game is displayed in an unrecognizable manner.

Further, in the twenty-third gaming machine of the present invention, the level of the first parameter (for example, the attack system card, the defense system card) or the second level is determined according to the game situation in the game during the predetermined game period. Parameter level increasing means (for example, card promotion lottery processing, card promotion attribute lottery processing) for determining whether to increase the level of a parameter (for example, reward system card);
Advantageous game determination means (for example, battle) that determines the provision of advantageous game state (for example, ART state) that can be notified by the notification means of information that gives a state advantageous to the player according to the level of the first parameter Offense and defense lottery and card skill activation lottery),
Advantageous game content determination means (for example, extra special lottery processing) that makes it possible to determine the content of the game in the advantageous game state according to the level of the second parameter when it is determined to give the advantageous game state ) And
The game information display control means uses the information relating to each level of the first parameter and the second parameter and information relating to the remaining game period of the game in the predetermined game period as information relating to the game situation. Displayed on the display screen,
The game information display control means relates to each level of the first parameter and the second parameter from when the display operation of the demonstration image is canceled until the start operation is detected by the start operation detection means. The information is displayed in such a manner that the player cannot recognize each level of the first parameter and the second parameter, and the information regarding the remaining game period in the game of the predetermined game period is displayed by the player. May be displayed in an unrecognizable manner.

  According to the twenty-third gaming machine of the present invention configured as described above, it is possible to prevent information relating to a game from being unplugged by a non-player in a vacant stand.

[24th game machine]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines that perform AT control on a sub-control board are known (see, for example, JP 2010-167199 A). In such a gaming machine, the control load on the main control board can be reduced.

  In recent years, the necessity of reducing the control load has been reduced due to the improvement of functions of the CPU and the like. Furthermore, since goto acts and the like are increasing year by year, development of gaming machines in which the main control board controls the AT that directly affects the ball-out performance (privilege grant performance) is being promoted. However, if AT is performed on the main control board, the determination result may be discriminated by the AT on the main control board before giving the player expectation due to the effects related to the provision of benefits. In this case, there is a problem that the production becomes meaningless.

  The present invention was made to solve the seventh problem described above, and the seventh object of the present invention is to produce an effect that gives the player expectations while controlling the AT on the main control board side. It is providing the game machine which can perform.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, the present invention provides a twenty-fourth gaming machine having the following configuration.

A loading operation detecting means (for example, a medal sensor) for detecting a gaming medium loading operation;
Start operation detecting means (for example, a start switch 79) for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the input operation by the input operation detecting means;
Internal winning combination determining means (for example, internal lottery processing) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means;
Fluctuation display means (for example, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R), which is constituted by a plurality of display rows and variably displays symbols necessary for the game based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means,
Stop operation detecting means (for example, stop switch board 80) for detecting stop operation by the player;
Stop control means (for example, reel stop control process) for stopping the change display of the symbol based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determining means and detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means;
An informing means (for example, an instruction display unit) for informing information advantageous to the player;
Notification game determination means (for example, battle attack / lottery lottery and card skill activation lottery) that makes it possible to determine the transition to a notification game state (for example, ART state) in which notification by the notification means can be executed;
Main control means (for example, main control circuit 91) that includes at least the notification game determination means and transmits information (for example, various commands);
Sub-control means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) that receives information transmitted from the main control means and performs control based on the received information,
After a special internal winning combination (for example, BB combination) is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the symbol combination related to the special internal winning combination is stopped on the determination line set over the plurality of display columns. In the inter-flag state until it is displayed, a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, batting order bell) in which the probability that a privilege is obtained according to the stop order of the display sequence in a gaming state other than the inter-flag state changes, Regardless of the order of stoppage of the display column, it will be a predetermined internal winning combination that will always get benefits,
When the predetermined internal winning combination is determined in the game period that is in the informing game state and not in the inter-flag state, the informing means informs information related to the stop order of the display sequence,
When the predetermined internal winning combination is determined in the game period that is the notification game state and the state between the flags, the notification means can notify the information about the stop sequence of the display sequence,
The notification of information related to the stop order of the display row by the notification means is controlled by the main control means.

In the twenty-fourth gaming machine of the present invention, in the inter-flag state, the notification means also notifies the determination of the special internal winning combination,
The notification of the determination of the special internal winning combination by the notification means may be performed after a game of a predetermined number of unit games is executed after the special internal winning combination is determined.

  Furthermore, in the twenty-fourth gaming machine of the present invention, in the inter-flag state game generated after the special internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means in the game in the notification gaming state, When the predetermined internal winning combination is determined by the winning combination determining means, information regarding the stop order of the display sequence associated with the predetermined internal winning combination in the notification gaming state other than the inter-flag state, You may make it alert | report by the said alerting | reporting means.

  According to the twenty-fourth gaming machine of the present invention configured as described above, it is possible to perform an effect that gives the player expectation while controlling the notification gaming state (AT) on the main control board side.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachislot (game machine), 2 ... Exterior body, 2a ... Cabinet, 2b ... Front door, 3L ... Left reel, 3C ... Middle reel, 3R ... Right reel, 4 ... Reel display window, 11 ... Liquid crystal display device, 19L ... Left stop button, 19C ... Middle stop button, 19R ... Right stop button, 21 ... MAX bet button, 23 ... Start lever, 24 ... Information display, 71 ... Main control board, 72 ... Sub control board, 86 ... Rom cartridge Substrate, 91 ... main control circuit, 93 ... main CPU, 94 ... main ROM, 95 ... main RAM, 101 ... sub control circuit, 102 ... sub CPU, 103 ... sub RAM

Claims (3)

An informing means for informing information relating to a game;
A first remaining game counting means for counting a first remaining game period in the notification gaming state that actually remains in a notification gaming state in which information advantageous to the player can be notified by the notification means;
A second remaining game counting means for counting a second remaining game period in the notification gaming state that is notified by the notification means and is equal to or less than the first remaining gaming period in the notification gaming state;
Effect mode determination for determining a predetermined effect mode from among a plurality of effect modes that can be set in the notification game state according to a difference game period between the first remaining game period and the second remaining game period Means,
An extra game period determining means capable of determining an extra game period of the informed game state that is informed by the informing means according to the difference game period and the type of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means. And a gaming machine. An informing means for informing information relating to a game;
Based on the first condition, shortened update means for shortening and updating the game period of the notification gaming state capable of notifying information advantageous to the player by the notification means,
Based on a second condition, extended update means for extending and updating the game period of the notification gaming state,
In the notification game state, the first remaining game period of the notification game state that actually remains regardless of the state of the game including the state indicating the ease of extension update determined by the extension update means, and the notification Among a plurality of types of effect modes that can be set in the notification game state according to the difference game period between the notification game state and the second remaining game period that is notified by the means and is equal to or less than the first remaining game period. Production mode determining means capable of determining a predetermined production mode from,
Extended game period determining means capable of determining the extended game period of the notification gaming state, which is notified by the notification means, according to the difference game period and the type of effect mode determined by the effect mode determination means. And a gaming machine. The predetermined effect mode is maintained until the total period of the extended game period of the notification game state notified by the notification means is equal to or greater than a predetermined period after the predetermined effect mode is determined. The gaming machine according to claim 2.

Images